South Boston, VA Police General Orders

SOUTH BOSTON POLICE DEPARTMENT
GENERAL ORDERS MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADMINISTRATION
101.ADM – Organization of Manual
102.ADM – Oath of Office
103.ADM – Code of Ethics
104.ADM – Mission Statement / Goals and Objectives
105.ADM – Limits to Authority
106.ADM – Search and Seizure
107.ADM – Arrests With and Without Warrants and Alternatives to Arrest
108.ADM – Interviews and Interrogations
109.ADM – Non-Bias Based Policing
110.ADM – Rights of Foreign Nationals
111.ADM – Political Activities
112.ADM – Use of Force
113.ADM – Organization of the Department
114.ADM – Job Functions and Assign Authority
115.ADM – Maintaining Records of Calls for Service
116.ADM – Maintenance and Release of Criminal History Records
117.ADM – Planning and Research
118.ADM – Crime Analysis
119.ADM – Mutual Aid
120.ADM – Relationships With Other Agencies
121.ADM – VCIN NCIC Utilization
122.ADM – Department Communications Function
123.ADM – Equipment, Capital Assets, and Fiscal Management
124.ADM – Complaints Against Police Personnel
125.ADM – Inspections
126.ADM – Community Relations and Crime Prevention
127.ADM – Evidence Handling, Storage, and Crime Scene Processing
128.ADM – Media Relations and Public Information
129.ADM – Virginia Freedom of Information Act Requests
130.ADM – Line of Duty Deaths or Serious Injury
131.ADM – Victim Witness Services
132.ADM – Traffic Checking Details
133.ADM – Pawn Shops and Precious Metals Dealers
134.ADM – Employee Drug Screening
135.ADM – Telephone Use
Additional Documentation – SBPD Property and Evidence Manual
SBPD General Orders Table of Contents 1

OPERATIONS
201.OPR – Electronic Systems and Equipment
202.OPR – Operation of Police Vehicles
203.OPR – Traffic Enforcement
204.OPR – Processing Vehicle Accident Scenes
205.OPR – Traffic Control and Directing
206.OPR – Escorts
207.OPR – DUI Enforcement Procedures
208.OPR – Assisting Stranded Motorists and People
209.OPR – Towed, Seized, and Impounded Vehicles / Vehicle Inventory
210.OPR – Video and Audio Recording Equipment
211.OPR – Prisoner and Detained Person(s) Transport
212.OPR – Traffic Speed Enforcement
213.OPR – Use of Interview / Interrogation Room
214.OPR – School Resource Officer Program
215.OPR – Preliminary and Follow-up Investigations
216.OPR – Case Screening
217.OPR – Use of Informants
218.OPR – Organized Crime and Vice Complaints
219.OPR – Asset Forfeiture Procedures
220.OPR – Juvenile Matters
221.OPR – Animal Control Calls
222.OPR – Uniform Regulations and Standards
223.OPR – Bomb Threats
224.OPR – Hostage Barricade Situations
225.OPR – Alarms and Robbery Incidents
226.OPR – Missing Person Search and Rescue Procedures
227.OPR – Patrol Response to Active Shooters in Public Schools and Buildings
228.OPR – Hazardous Materials Incidents
229.OPR – Eyewitness Identification
230.OPR – Police Response to Persons with Mental Illness
231.OPR – Mobile Data Terminal Use
232.OPR – Vehicle Equipment and Inspections
233.OPR – Canine Operations
234.OPR – Special Purpose Vehicles
235.OPR – 235.OPR Automated License Plate Readers
PERSONNEL
301.PER – Hiring Process
302.PER – Salary and Overtime Program
303.PER – Vacation and Leave Program
304.PER – Employee Discipline
305.PER – Benefits Package
306.PER – Recruit and Field Training

307.PER – Career Development (Promotion Process and Training)
308.PER – Performance Evaluations
309.PER – Sexual Harassment and Discrimination
310.PER – Grooming and Physical Fitness
311.PER – Communicable Diseases
312.PER – Off-Duty Employment
313.PER – Social Media

GENERAL ORDER Effective Date
NUMBER: March 30, 2023
101.ADM Amends/Supersedes
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: ORGANIZATION OF MANUAL
I. POLICY:
Both professional law enforcement administration and the management of liability require a manual which
governs the activities of a police department. A manual of policies, rules, regulations and procedures, guide a
day-to-day legal and ethical functioning of a police department. To that end, the South Boston Police
Department's activities shall be reflected in this manual.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this manual is to establish current policies, procedures, rules, and guidelines for members of
this department. Additionally, it identifies procedures for publication, distribution, review, and revision of the
General Orders contained in the manual.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. GENERAL ORDERS:
1. General Orders communicate a department-wide organizational structure, delegations of authority,

guiding principles, rules, policies, and procedures.
2. Each general order contains the departmental policy of the subject that it is titled as well as the purpose
for the policy and a procedure, which often is made up of rules and regulations. (Note: See III, B of
this general order)
3. Only the Chief of Police has the authority to issue or approve a general order, however, the order may
be written, revised, or modified by his designee. The written, revised, or modified general order must
be signed by the Chief of Police before being published.
4. Violation of any given general order may result in administrative discipline.
5. Because they contain many procedural statements, General Orders may permit a window of discretion.
While violations of General Orders may result in administrative action, the department recognizes that
personnel may depart from procedures only if the circumstances warrant. Personnel must justify their
actions accordingly.
6. General orders are indexed by number and general subject.
7. All general orders shall be:
a. Maintained together, in a current status, in a manual known as the "General Orders Manual;"
b. Reviewed annually, on or before their review date;
c. Kept in written and/or electronic form for immediate and field access;
1
101.ADM
d. On file in the department’s computer, with only viewing privileges to all employees;
e. Written, updated, purged or revised, when needed, under the direction of or direct order of the
Chief of Police;
f. Signed by the Chief of Police.
B. GENERAL ORDER COMPOSITION:
1. A Policy is a statement of the department's philosophy on a given issue. Policy consists of principles
and values, goals and objectives, which guide the performance of department employees. Further,
policy is based upon ethics, experience, the law, and the interests and desires of the community.
a. Each general order will begin with an agency policy statement.
b. Only the Chief of Police determines policy.
2. The Purpose explains what the procedure does or why the general order is needed.
3. A procedure defines a method of performing an operation or a manner of proceeding on a course of

action. It differs from policy in that it directs action in a particular situation to perform a specific task
within the guidelines of policy. A procedure many times contains rules or regulations.
a. A rule is a specific prohibition or requirement governing the behavior of employees.
(1) Rules permit little if any deviation there from.
(2) Violations of rules normally result in administrative discipline.
(3) Only the Chief of Police devises rules.
b. A regulation, which may contain one or more rules, is an administrative order governing
organizational matters, e.g., leave policy, off-duty employment, and promotions.
(1) Similar to rules, regulations permit little if any deviation there from. Violations of regulations
normally result in administrative discipline.
(2) Only the Chief of Police devises regulations.
C. OTHER FORMS OF DIRECTION: (Not Included in the Policy and Procedure Manual)
1. A written directive - This constitutes a directive affecting specific behavior for a specific event or
period of time, and is usually self-canceling. Only the Chief of Police has the authority to issue or
approve a written directive, however, the written directive may be written or modified by his designee.
2. A verbal directive - This is a written directive in verbal form and is also known as a verbal order.
3. A memorandum - This is a memo which provides useful, specific information to officers not
amounting to a formal order. Memoranda may be issued by the Chief of Police but may be issued by
other police officers or agencies.
D. ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL:
2
101.ADM
1. The General Orders Manual is made up of general orders that are a collection of policy, procedures,
goals, objectives, rules, and regulations of the department. The manual contains a table of contents and
an index. The manual as well is divided into four general subject areas:
a. ADMINISTRATION
b. OPERATIONS
c. PERSONNEL
d. TRAINING
2. Within the context of the general order, the use of the word "shall" connotes an action or behavior that
is mandatory and unequivocal. The words "may", “should”, or "can" connotes an action or behavior
that is optional.
3. Any officer or civilian member of the department may suggest or recommend changes to the Chief of
Police concerning the policy manual.
E. DISSEMINATION/AMMENDMENTS:
1. Dissemination of the General Orders Manual:
a. The Accreditation Manager will publish the department General Orders Manual and ensure that
a digital copy is available for each officer through an electronic document management system
referred to as PowerDMS. The Accreditation Manager shall maintain hard copies of General
Orders in his / her office.
b. Current and newly hired sworn officers, along with civilian members of the Department, shall be
required to review each General Order. All members are required to read and electronically sign
off in their PowerDMS account that they have read the General Orders and any published
revisions.
2. Amendments/Changes to the Manual
a. The Chief of Police must approve any and all changes to the Police Department General Orders
Manual.
3. Amendment Procedure
a. All amendments shall be submitted in writing with justification to the Chief of Police through the
appropriate chain of command.
b. If the amendment receives preliminary approval by the Chief of Police it shall be forwarded to the
Accreditation Manager for research and drafted into the proper format.
c. The Accreditation Manager shall be responsible for the final preparation and distribution
of all approved General Orders.
d. The Chief of Police, through channels, will notify a member if his/her proposed amendment is not
approved.
4. Revisions and directives shall be disseminated as follows:
3
101.ADM
a. Copies of new or revised orders and directives will be distributed to all members of the
Department by changes to the digital copy. Members of the Department will be notified of these
changes through their PowerDMS accounts and emails.
b. Members shall read the new or revised order and may print out a hard copy.
c. Supervisors will be responsible for ensuring that each officer assigned to them reads a new or
revised General Order in a specific time frame.
d. The Accreditation Manager will maintain electronic and/or written documentation that each officer
has reviewed a new or revised General Order.
e. The Chief of Police or his designee may also post new or revised orders on bulletin boards within
the Police Department to accompany the emails and notifications on PowerDMS.
f. Members of the department are required to read and sign off electronically on their PowerDMS
account that they have read all current, new, and revised General Orders.
F. ANNUAL REVIEW OF GENERAL ORDERS:
1. The Accreditation Manager shall coordinate with the Command Staff an annual review of the General
Order Manual. The purpose of the review is to determine if the policies and directives are in
compliance with any applicable legal updates, changes in accreditation standards, or other technical
requirements. It will be determined if any directives should be canceled, revised, or continued in their
present form.
2. The Accreditation Manager will publish and issue an annual updated index list of new or
revised directives.
AUTHORIZATION;
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
4
101.ADM
NUMBER: January 19, 2022
August 10, 2005
SUBJECT: Oath of Office
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department requires all personnel, prior to assuming sworn status, to
take an oath of office to enforce the law and uphold the Constitution of the United States, the
Constitution of the Commonwealth of Virginia and the ordinances of the Town of South Boston,
Virginia.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this General Order is to establish an oath of office for all officers of the South
Boston Police Department.
III. PROCEDURE:
Prior to assuming sworn status, a newly employed officer will be taken before the Judge, Clerk,
or Deputy Clerk of the Halifax County Circuit Court to take an oath of office. The oath of office
will be in writing and dated and signed by the officer as well as the Judge, Clerk, or Deputy
Clerk. The oath will be maintained in the officer’s personnel folder. The oath reads as follows:
"I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will support the Constitution of the United States, the
Constitution of Virginia and the ordinances of the Town of South Boston and that I will faithfully
and impartially discharge and perform all the duties incumbent upon me as a Police Officer for
the Town of South Boston according to the best of my ability, (so help me God)."
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
102.ADM
August 10, 2005
SUBJECT: CODE OF ETHICS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department has adopted and requires that all officers abide by the Law Enforcement
Code of Ethics, as published by the International Association of Chiefs of Police.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this General Order is to establish a code of ethics for the officers of the South Boston Police
Department.
III. PROCEDURE:
As a law enforcement officer, my fundamental duty is to serve the community; to safeguard lives and property;
to protect the innocent against deception, the weak against oppression or intimidation, and the peaceful against
violence or disorder; and to respect the Constitutional rights of all to liberty, equality and justice .
I will keep my private life unsullied as an example to all and will behave in a manner which does not bring
discredit to me or my agency. I will maintain courageous calm in the face of danger, scorn, or ridicule; develop
self restraint; and be constantly mindful of the welfare of others. Honest in thought and deed in both my
personal and official life, I will be exemplary in obeying the law and the regulations of my department.
Whatever I see or hear of a confidential nature or that is confided in me in my official capacity will be kept ever
secret unless revelation is necessary in the performance of my duty.
I will never act officiously or permit personal feelings, prejudices, political beliefs, aspirations, animosities or
friendships to influence my decisions. With no compromise for crime and with relentless prosecution of
criminals, I will enforce the law courteously and appropriately without fear or favor, malice or ill will, never
employing unnecessary force or violence and never accepting gratuities.
I recognize the badge of my office as a symbol of public faith, and I accept it as a public trust to be held so long
as I am true to the ethics of police service. I will never engage in acts of bribery nor will I condone such acts by
other police officers. I will cooperate with all legally authorized agencies and their representatives in the
pursuit of justice.
I know that I alone am responsible for my own standard of professional performance and will take every
reasonable opportunity to enhance and improve my level of knowledge and competence. I will constantly strive
to achieve these objectives and ideals, dedicating myself before God to my chosen profession... law
enforcement.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
103.ADM
NUMBER: April 28, 2023
March 09, 2006
SUBJECT: MISSION STATEMENT & GOALS AND OBJECTIVES

I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department will maintain a written mission statement that defines the agency's purpose.
The mission statement is made available to all agency personnel through the electronic distribution of the General
Orders Manual, which it is a part of, and which all personnel receive and sign for. Employees will be notified of
updates and required to sign for their acceptance and understanding.
The scope of the police function is defined by its goals. As a result, the police function must be broadly interpreted
to include many tasks other than the enforcement of laws.
The goals of the South Boston Police Department and each employee thereof includes: the protection of life,
individual liberty and property; the preservation of peace; the prevention of crime and disorder; the detection and
arrest of violators of the law; and the enforcement of state laws and town ordinances within Departmental
jurisdiction. Department goals and objectives shall be reviewed on an annual basis and, if updated, will be made
available to all agency personnel. By establishing what we commit to do, how we intend to do it, and having a
mechanism of measuring our results – performance becomes clear for the department and the community.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this General Order is to define, in writing, the mission statement of the South Boston Police
Department and to give a general statement of the Department goals and define its objectives to guide South Boston
Police Department employees in their law enforcement activities.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The mission statement for the South Boston Police Department is as follows:
With a customer service oriented attitude, provide fair and professional law enforcement services to all
residents and visitors of the Town of South Boston.
B. The values of the South Boston Police Department are as follows:
1. Integrity
2. Courage
3. Accountability
4. Respect
C. Police Department Overall Objectives
1. Prevention of Crime
104.ADM 1
Crime is a social phenomenon and crime prevention should be the concern of every person in the
community. The Department is responsible however, for interacting with the community to generate
mutual understanding so that there may be public support for crime prevention. Community involvement
is essential to facilitate a free flow of information between the public and the Department to assist in the
identification of problem areas and to inform the public of crime statistics and trends. Additionally,
knowledge of the community is necessary so that each Department employee may be instilled with a
sense of concern for the crime problems and law enforcement needs in his or her assigned area of
responsibility.
In many ways, crime prevention is a more worthwhile function than after-the-fact detection and
apprehension. In addition to suppressing crime through visible, aggressive patrol, officers can accomplish
long term crime prevention objectives by informing citizens of ways to protect themselves and their
property from criminal acts by encouraging their cooperation with the criminal justice agencies and with
crime prevention programs in both the schools and the community.
2. Deterrence of Crime
While there are certain crimes that cannot be deterred, crimes committed against property and against
innocent victims in public places are reduced by police patrol. Street crime is reduced by the potential
criminal’s fear of immediate apprehension or by the increased likelihood of his detection. The deterrence
of crime requires the investigation of behavior that reasonably appears to be criminally directed.
In deploying patrol forces to deter crime and to inspire public confidence in its ability to ensure a peaceful
environment, the department must strike a balance between the desirable deterrent effects of visible patrol
and any undesirable appearance of oppression.
3. Apprehension of Offenders
The administration of criminal justice consists of the identification, arrest, prosecution, punishment, and
rehabilitation of a law violator, and it has as its objective the voluntary compliance with the law as an
alternative to punishment. Once a crime has been committed, it is the duty of the Department to initiate
the criminal justice process by identifying and arresting the perpetrator, obtaining evidence, and
cooperating in the prosecution of the case.
4. Recovery and Return of Property
The actual costs of crime are difficult to measure. There cannot be a dollar value assigned to the bodily
injuries, disrupted lives, and human misery which are its products. However, it is possible to observe the
steadily mounting costs of stolen property. The monetary loss as well as the other costs of crime must
ultimately be borne by its victims. To minimize the losses due to crime, the Department must make every
reasonable effort to recover lost or stolen property, to identify its owner, and ensure its return. The final
disposition of found, recovered and evidentiary property should be accomplished within six months after
legal requirements have been satisfied.
5. Maintenance of Order
Another broadly interpreted function of the police might best be defined as that of a manager of social
order; a definition which may include such activities as preventing or arbitrating neighborhood disputes
and family arguments, providing traffic escorts and direction, assisting ill or inured persons in need of
emergency help, etc.
D. Patrol Function Goals
104.ADM 2
The goals of patrol are essentially the same as those described for the Department as a whole. The patrol
function, through the patrol officer, is the most important element in society’s efforts to suppress crime.
Because the patrol officer is the heart of the police organization and is depended upon to attain desired
departmental goals, the patrol officer must be a highly trained professional, competent to fill the many
roles required by the community. All other elements of the department exist to assist the patrol officer in
carrying out the objectives of the Patrol Division.
Patrol Objectives
The Patrol Division exists to provide twenty-four hour a day police protection to the citizens of South
Boston; to prevent the occurrence of street crimes through visible preventive patrol; to respond rapidly to
all requests for emergency police service; to improve the criminal apprehension rate by conducting
thorough preliminary on-the-scene investigations of all reported crimes and follow-up investigations
where appropriated; to reduce traffic congestion and accident hazards through systematic enforcement of
traffic laws and ordinances; to respond to motor vehicle accidents, to aid victims and to investigate the
circumstances of the accident; to assist citizens in dealing with legal, medical or social problems through
direct crisis intervention and/or making correct referrals to agencies equipped to deal with such problems;
and to improve police/community relations through increasing the quality and quantity of contacts
between citizens and the police.
1. Response to Calls
The preliminary investigation of complaints and response to requests for service should be given
priority according to the seriousness of the situation and the availability of resources. Follow-up
investigation of these incidents should be conducted, as required, according to the same criteria. The
following is a list of priorities for guidance in responding to calls:
1. Life and death emergencies;
2. Violent felonies in progress;
3. Violent misdemeanors in progress ;
4. Other felonies in progress;
5. Other misdemeanors in progress;
6. Non-criminal calls relating to injury, present danger or property damage;
7. Other felonies not in progress;
8. Other misdemeanors not in progress;
9. Miscellaneous service calls not involving injury, present danger or property damages.
2. Preventive Patrol
Although the patrol officer’s work is often dictated by requests for service, a considerable portion of
the officer’s workday is normally available for preventive patrol. In order to make productive use of
the available time, officers should plan their patrol to focus on specific crime and traffic problems.
3. Active Patrol
104.ADM 3
The key to the prevention of street crime is active, preventive patrol. To this end, officers are
encouraged to make frequent contact with people, to utilize information provided at roll call, and
maintain an awareness of known high crime areas and activities.
4. Knowledge of Area
It is essential that patrol officers know the physical characteristics of their areas of responsibility as
well as the current crime problems in those areas. Additionally, they should become acquainted with
residents and business people within the town, to get to know their habits and idiosyncrasies and to
investigate any unusual conduct. Effective patrol officers should be skilled in the detection of
criminal activities and eager to conduct their own investigations and then relay information to others
within the Department.
5. Preventive Action
Patrol officers should be conscious of and alert for conditions which are conducive to crime, and
should take the necessary preventive measures whether this be advising a store keeper of crime
hazards, mediating a family dispute which could escalate into an assault or homicide, or getting an
intoxicated person off the street.
E. Community Relations
Community relations are based upon the principle that in a democratic society the police are an integral and
indivisible element of the public they serve. Community relations are enhanced by positive interaction
between the people and the police.
The department must strive to establish a climate in which the officer may perform his/her duties with the
acceptance, understanding and approval of the public. Additionally, the willing participation of the people in
enforcing the law is essential for the preservation of peace in the community.
In dealing with people, each officer should attempt to make his/her contact one which inspires respect for
himself/herself as an individual, a professional, and one which generates the cooperation and approval of the
public. While an officer is entitled to his/her personal feelings, negative feelings such as agitation,
frustration, anger, or annoyance should not be permitted to enter into public contact. However, since an
officer’s feelings may be subconsciously manifested, it is incumbent upon him/her to strive for the
elimination of attitudes that might impair his/her impartiality and effectiveness.
The South Boston Police Department is committed to establishing close ties with and responding to the needs
of the community. Any policy, procedure, or practices that contribute unnecessarily to community tensions
and complaints will be reviewed for changes.
1. Community of Resources
We, as public service employees, have an obligation to the citizens both collectively and individually.
Ideally, we would be able to satisfy each obligation equally, but in reality, this is not always possible.
Requests from individual citizens for special services such as increased patrol, the use of radar, house
checks, etc., should be carefully evaluated in terms of total departmental commitments before any
promises are made. If such a service is promised, it is incumbent upon the officer making the promise to
take immediate steps to ensure the request for service is being processed, and to qualify the promise by
informing the citizen that other demands may make it impossible to comply with the request.
104.ADM 4
2. Work Environment
It is the policy of the government of the Town of South Boston, and of this Department, to provide a work
environment which does not subject employees to harassment or discrimination on the basis of race, sex,
age, ethnic background, and political or religious affiliation. Further, it is an inherent responsibility of
management, supervisory personnel and employees at every level to ensure compliance with this policy.
AUTHORIZATION:
___________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
104.ADM 5
September 9, 2005
SUBJECT: AUTHORITY TO ESTABLISH DEPARTMENT

LIMITS TO AUTHORITY
I. POLICY:
The U. S. Constitution and Amendments guarantee every citizen certain safeguards from government intrusion
into their lives. These safeguards have become the cornerstone for the application of criminal justice in
America. Consequently, these safeguards have placed limitations on the authority of police to enforce the laws
of the nation, state, and the Town of South Boston. The department expects its officers to act with due regard
for citizens' civil liberties.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to define the legally mandated authority for the enforcement of laws, to
establish procedures for assuring compliance with constitutional requirements during criminal investigations, to
set forth guidelines concerning the use of discretion by officers, and to define the authority, guidelines and
circumstances when officers should exercise alternatives to arrests and pretrial confinement.
III. PROCEDURES: - GENERAL
A. Law enforcement authority to enforce laws:
1. Section 15.2-1704 of the Code of Virginia gives police officers of a locality the authority to enforce the
state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations of the locality in which they are appointed.
2. Section 49-1 of the Code of Virginia requires that all officers, upon entering their office, take an oath
whereby they swear to support the Constitution of the United States and the Commonwealth of
Virginia.
3. Section 19.2-74 of the Code of Virginia gives special policemen the authority to issue a summons or
arrest on misdemeanor offenses, and ordinances and regulations of the locality in which they are
appointed.
4. Section 15.2-1701 of the Code of Virginia provides that any locality may, by ordinance, provide for the
organization of its authorized police forces. Such forces shall include a chief of police, and such
officers and other personnel as appropriate.
B. Limitations on law enforcement authority:
Limitations on law enforcement authority are derived from statutes, judicial interpretation of laws, opinions
of the attorney general and commonwealth's attorney, departmental policies/rules and regulations, and town
administrative decisions.
1. Statutory limitations:
These limitations include, but are not limited to:
105.ADM
a. Enforcement of laws outside of the town limits. Section 19.2-250 of the Code of Virginia grants
authority to enforce state laws, in criminal cases involving offenses against the Commonwealth,
one mile beyond the boundaries of the town.
b. Section 15.2-1725 of the Code of Virginia grants authority to enforce laws on any town-owned
property located outside of its boundaries. Examples include: sewage treatment plants and the
town's water source.
c. Section 15.2-1704 prohibits officers from enforcing the civil laws of the Commonwealth.
2. Judicial limitations:
Courts constantly interpret laws that place limitations on the authority of law enforcement officers.
The more common include: Miranda rights/warnings, rulings on search and seizure, eyewitness
identification, and lineups.
3. Limitations on law enforcement authority by local courts:
Occasionally, the local courts may limit law enforcement authority to enforce statutes and local
ordinances. These limitations include, but are not limited to:
a. The enforcement of certain parking ordinances.
b. The handling of juvenile offenders.
c. The issuance of summonses as opposed to arrests/incarceration.
d. Restrictions relating to animal control ordinances.
4. Limitations on police authority by Commonwealth's Attorney:
Occasionally the Commonwealth's Attorney may issue opinions to the department which may impose
limitations on officers. These areas include, but are not limited to:
a. Prosecution of certain cases.
b. Extradition.
c. Enforcement of certain statutes pending opinions from the Attorney General's Office.
5. Limitations on police authority by the town manager and chief of police:
The limitations on police enforcement actions by town council, the town manager or the chief of police
include, but are not limited to:
a. Town decal violations.
b. Parking violations.
c. All police department policy/rules and regulations concerning the use of force.
6. Changes in laws/interpretational limitations:
Periodically, changes take place which may impose new limitations on police authority or remove or
105.ADM
alter existing limitations. Normally, annual updates on such changes are provided to all personnel by
the Commonwealth's Attorney. In case immediate changes in departmental operations are required, the
Office of the Commonwealth's Attorney may provide information orally and confirm it in writing.
C. Constitutional Requirement: General
Compliance with constitutional requirements during criminal investigations:
1. All officers when conducting criminal investigations will take all precautions necessary to ensure that
all persons involved are afforded their constitutional safeguards. Officers will ensure that:
a. All statements or confessions are voluntary and non-coercive.
b. All persons in custody, or whom may interpret that they are in custody, are advised of their rights
when interviewed or interrogated in accordance with this general order.
c. All arrested persons are taken promptly before a magistrate for formal charging.
d. All persons in custody, or whom may interpret that they are in custody, and are accused or
suspected of a criminal violation for which they are being interviewed or interrogated are afforded
an opportunity to consult with an attorney.
e. Prejudicial pre-trial publicity of the accused is avoided so as not to interfere with a defendant's
right to a fair and impartial trial.
D. The use of discretion by officers:
1. Officers, by the nature of their job, are required to exercise discretion in the performance of their
duties. The department provides officers with written policy and procedures, departmental orders,
directed patrol assignments, and training in order to aid them in making decisions which govern
discretion in performing their duties.
2. With the exception of departmental rules and regulations, departmental policy generally gives officers
guidelines to consider in exercising their discretion. It is up to the individual officer to consider the
relevant facts, the situation, and then, using knowledge, training, and good judgment, make appropriate
decisions. Supervisors must closely observe the use of discretion by their subordinates and point out
factual errors or alternatives that may be more appropriate.
E. Limitations on intelligence activity:
1. Departmental intelligence gathering activities will be limited to that information concerning criminal
conduct that presents a threat to the community.
2. Departmental personnel and equipment will only be used in conjunction with intelligence gathering
activities, as defined above, in full compliance with all law, and only with the advance approval of the
Chief of Police.
105.ADM
3. Intelligence information will be collected, used and processed in full compliance with all laws.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
105.ADM
NUMBER: September 16, 2022
March 20, 2014
SUBJECT: SEARCH AND SEIZURE
I. POLICY:
When any police officer seizes items or goods that may be introduced into evidence, the trial court will make
inquiry into the legality of the manner in which this evidence was obtained. The acceptance of the evidence by
the court will depend on whether the officer has followed the constitutional and statutory procedures for
searches and seizures. The officers in the department will follow the guidelines laid out under the United States
constitution and the Commonwealth of Virginia.
II. PURPOSE:
To specify the guidelines under which searches and seizures may be conducted by police officers. Because case
law regarding search and seizure is constantly changing and subject to interpretation by the courts, each
member of this department is expected to act in each situation according to current training and his/her
familiarity with clearly established rights as determined by case law.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. The principal guidelines for conduct of a search are found in the fourth amendment of the United States
Constitution and Article 1, Section 10 of the Constitution of Virginia. The fourth amendment guarantees the
right for people to be free from any unreasonable search and seizure of their homes, persons and things, and
enumerates the requirements of the issuance of a search warrant. The U.S. Supreme Court is continuously
interpreting the Fourth Amendment as it applies to police conduct. Illegally seized items of evidence will
not be admitted in court and may become the cause for the unsuccessful prosecution of a criminal case.
B. Types of Search/Seizures of a Person
1. Stop and Frisk (Terry Stop)
a. Grounds for Investigatory Stop – to lawfully stop an individual, an officer must be able to articulate
reasonable suspicion that the person stopped has committed, is committing, or is about to commit a
crime. Reasonable suspicion exists when an officer can articulate observable facts sufficient to
cause a reasonably prudent person to suspect that criminal activity is, has, or is about to occur. This
is a higher standard than mere suspicion and less than probable cause. An overly intrusive
investigatory stop may be viewed as an arrest requiring probable cause. The scope of activities
permitted during an investigatory stop is determined by the circumstances that initially justified the
stop. Pertinent considerations include:
1.) The amount of force used by police to detain the individual;
2.) The need for such force;
3.) The extent to which the individual’s freedom of movement was restrained; and
4.) The duration of the investigatory detention.
106.ADM
b. Grounds for Frisk – An officer must have a reasonable suspicion that a subject who has been stopped
is armed and dangerous before the officer is able to perform a lawful frisk of that subject. The
officer’s reasonable suspicion standard is based upon whether a reasonably prudent person in the
same circumstances would believe that his/her safety, or that of others, is in immediate danger. An
officer need not be absolutely certain that the individual is armed; the question is whether a
reasonably prudent person in the same circumstances as the officer would believe that his/her safety,
or that of another, is in immediate danger. In arriving at the reasonable suspicion standard, officers
are entitled to draw from the facts or of the circumstances in light of his/her past experience and
training.
c. Nature of Frisk – the search for weapons must be a limited intrusion. The scope of the frisk must be
designed to discover hidden weapons or instruments, which might be used to harm the officer.
2. Show-Up
a. A show up is a Terry Stop in which a subject is temporarily detained by law enforcement personnel
to permit a complainant or witness of a crime with the opportunity to view the detained subject
and then be asked if the detained subject is the perpetrator of that crime.
b. Extreme caution shall be taken to reduce the suggestive nature of the viewing, thereby reducing the
victim or complaint’s possibility of mistaken identity and/or an allegation of the unconstitutionality
of the show-up procedure.
1.) Generally, the complainant or witness should be brought to the location of the subject’s
detention.
2.) The detention should be in the reasonable proximity to the crime (i.e., time and location) and
the subject detained only for a reasonable amount of time.
3.) If possible, the subject should not be viewed in a police vehicle or be viewed while in
handcuffs.
4.) Conversation between officer and complainant/witness should be out of hearing range of the
detained subject.
3. Searches Incident to Arrest
a. A warrantless search of a person will be conducted at the time a subject is placed under arrest or as
soon as possible afterwards, dependant on the totality of the circumstances (e.g. place of arrest).
b. Searches incident to arrest shall be conducted in compliance with Arizona v. Gant, 556 U.S. 332.
Gant holds that police are authorized to search the passenger compartment of a vehicle incident to
arrest of an occupant or recent occupant only when the arrestee is unsecured and within reaching
distance of the passenger compartment at the time of the search, or it is reasonable to believe that
the vehicle contains evidence of the offense of arrest.
c. Post-arrest inventory searches of automobiles are not affected by Arizona v. Gant.
4. Strip Searches (Virginia Code 19.2-59.1)
a. For purposes of this section, “strip search” means having an arrested person remove or arrange
some or all of his/her clothing so as to permit visual inspection of the genitals, buttocks, anus, female
106.ADM
breasts, or undergarments of such person.
b. No person under custodial arrest for a traffic infraction, Class 3 or Class 4 misdemeanor, or a
violation of a town ordinance, which is punishable by no more than thirty days in jail shall be strip
searched without an authorizing supervisor’s confirmation that the law enforcement officer has
probable cause to believe that the subject is concealing a weapon.
c. Subjects under custodial arrest for a Class 1 or Class 2 misdemeanor, or for any felony, may be
strip searched if the arresting officer reasonably believes the subject is concealing a weapon,
contraband, stolen property or fruits of a crime.
d. No child under the age of 18 shall be strip searched or subjected to a search of any body cavity by a
law-enforcement officer, unless the child is in custodial arrest and there is reasonable cause to
believe, on the part of a law-enforcement officer authorizing the search, that the child is concealing
a weapon.
e. All strip searches shall be conducted by persons of the same sex as the person strip-
searched and on a premise where the search can not be observed by persons not physically
conducting the search.
f. Following a strip search, the arresting officer shall document the following in the IBR report:
1.) Date, time, and specific location of the search,
2.) Identity of the officer conducting the search and those present during the search,
3.) A detailed description of the nature, extent, and location of the search,
4.) Any weapons, evidence or contraband found during the search,
5.) Use of force, if any.
5. Body Cavity Searches
a. Should visual examination of a suspect during a strip search and/or other information lead an officer
to believe that the suspect is concealing a weapon, evidence or contraband within a body cavity
(excluding mouth), the following procedures shall be followed:
1.) The officer shall consult with a supervisor to evaluate the existing probable cause that is
required to seek a search warrant for a body cavity search.
2.) An affidavit for the search warrant shall be prepared and presented to the magistrate or the
court.
3.) On the basis of a search warrant, a body cavity search shall be performed only by a physician or
by other medically trained personnel authorized to do so.
4.) The search will be conducted at a medical facility.
5.) The authorized individual conducting a search shall file a report, to be attached to the search
warrant documents. The witnessing law enforcement officer (same sex as subject of the search)
shall sign that report and attach a copy of that report to the IBR.
106.ADM
C. Search/Seizure with Warrant
1. The Fourth Amendment guarantees the right for people to be free from unreasonable searches and
seizures of their homes, person, and things. The Supreme Court is constantly interpreting the Fourth
Amendment as it applies to police conduct. Illegally seized items of evidence will not be admitted in
court and may be cause for the unsuccessful prosecution of a criminal case. Additionally, an illegally
conducted search invites civil suits under the Civil Rights Act. In order to ensure that citizens Fourth
Amendment rights against an unreasonable search and/or seizure are protected, South Boston police
officers will apply for search warrants based on probable cause when conducting criminal
investigations, except in limited situations where exigent circumstances or other lawful exceptions to
the warrant rule exist.
2. Legal Authority
a. Section 19.2-52 of the Code of Virginia states that a judge, magistrate, or other person having
authority to issue criminal warrants may issue a search warrant when:
1.) There is reasonable and probable cause to do so.
2.) There is a complaint on oath supported by an affidavit.
b. Section 19.2-53 of the Code of Virginia states that search warrants may be issued for the search
of, or for, specified places, things, or persons, and seizure therefrom of the following things as
specified in the warrant:
1.) Weapons or other objects used in the commission of a crime;
2.) Articles, or other things in which the sale or possession of is unlawful;
3.) Stolen property or the fruits of any crime;
4.) Any object, thing, or person, including without limitation, documents, books, records, paper,
or body fluids, constituting evidence of the commission of a crime; or
5.) Any person to be arrested for whom a warrant or process for arrest has been issued.
c. Any search warrant issued for the search and seizure of a computer, computer network, or other
device containing electronic or digital information shall be deemed to include the search and
seizure of the physical components and the electronic or digital information contained in any such
computer, computer network, or other device.
d. Any search, including the search of the contents of any computer, computer network, or other
device conducted pursuant to subsection c, may be conducted in any location and is not limited to
the location where the evidence was seized.
3. Legal Requirement
a. Affidavit Requirement – Section 19.2-54 of the Code of Virginia requires that prior to the issuance
of a search warrant, an affidavit must be filed and sworn to before a judge or magistrate. The
affidavit must contain the following information:
1.) The specific offense for which the search warrant is to be used.
106.ADM
2.) A description of the person, place or thing to be searched.
3.) The items or identity of the persons to be searched for.
4.) Material facts constituting probable cause for the search. The officer must be specific in their
facts.
5.) The officer must have personal knowledge of the facts set forth in the affidavit or be advised of
the facts by an informant. When using an informant, the officer must establish credibility and
reliability.
6.) The magistrate must deliver the affidavit to the Clerk of the Circuit Court within seven days
after the issuance of the search warrant.
7.) Section 19.2-56 of the Code of Virginia requires that a copy of the affidavit be attached to the
search warrant.
b. Search Warrant Requirement - Section 19.2-56 of the Code of Virginia defines the following
requirements to be listed on the search warrant:
1.) Naming the affiant.
2.) Recite the offense or the identity of the person to be arrested.
3.) Name or describe the place to be searched.
4.) Describe the property or person to be searched for.
5.) Recite that the magistrate has found probable cause.
6.) Listing the date and time when it is executed.
7.) Listing the property seized in the inventory (or a notation that no property was seized).
8.) Execution of the search warrant must take place within fifteen days after the issuance, or it
must be returned to, and voided by the issuing magistrate or judge.
9.) Section 19.2-57 of the Code of Virginia requires that the executed search warrant with list of
property seized (or a notation that no property seized) must be filed in the Circuit Court within
three days after execution excluding Saturdays, Sundays or any legal federal or state holiday.
4. Place of Abode Searches (19.2-56 of the Code of Virginia)
106.ADM
a. Search warrants for the search of any place of abode shall be executed by initial entry of the abode
only in the daytime hours between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. unless (1) a judge, or a magistrate if a
judge is not available, authorizes the execution of such search warrant at another time for good
cause shown by particularized facts in an affidavit or (2) prior to the issuance of the search warrant,
law-enforcement officers lawfully entered and secured the place to be searched and remained at
such place continuously.
b. A search warrant for any place of abode shall require that an officer be recognizable and
identifiable as a uniformed law-enforcement officer and provide audible notice of his authority and
purpose, reasonably designed to be heard by the occupants of such place to be searched, prior to the
execution of such search warrant.
c. After entering and securing the place to be searched, and prior to undertaking any search or seizure,
the executing law enforcement officer shall give a copy of the search warrant and affidavit to
the person to be searched or the owner of the place to be searched. If the owner is not present, the
copy of the search warrant and affidavit shall go to any occupant of the place to be searched. If the
place is unoccupied the executing law enforcement officer shall leave a copy of the search warrant
and affidavit in a conspicuous place withing or affixed to the place to be searched.
d. No other person may be permitted to be present during or participate in the execution of a warrant
to search a place except (1) the owners and occupants of the place to be searched when permitted to
be present by the officer in charge of the conduct of the search and (2) persons designated by the
officer in charge of the conduct of the search to assist or provide expertise in the conduct of the
search.
e. A search warrant for a premises does not necessarily authorize a search of a person(s) at the
residence unless specified in the warrant.
f. According to state, federal and case law, officer(s) may not use a search warrant to conduct a search
that goes beyond the parameters of the requested search. Basically, an authorized search must
cease once the property being search for is found. Another search warrant may be obtained if there
is probable cause to believe there is evidence of another criminal offense.
5. No officer shall seek, execute, or participate in the execution of a no-knock search warrant. (§19.2-56
of the Code of Virginia)
6. When conducting high risk searches of a residence or structure, where there is time for in depth
planning, the officer in charge of the search shall complete an “Incident Operational Plan (Form
106.ADM 01)”. This form is not required for officers with this agency assigned to a Task Force where
the policies of that group already require a separate report of this type to be completed.
D. Search/Seizure Without Warrant
1. All officers should be guided by the general rule that when there is doubt as to the legality of an
impending warrantless search, the Commonwealth Attorney’s office should be consulted or a search
warrant should be applied for.
2. Officers should determine whether the premises are protected by the Fourth Amendment. Some areas
such as open fields and public places can be searched lawfully without consent, search warrant, or
arrest.
3. Examples of circumstances that may constitute justification for a search without a warrant include
the following:
106.ADM
a. Consent Searches – when one with authority to consent gives voluntary and intelligent consent to
a search. In order for a consent search to be valid, an individual must freely give unequivocal
consent to that particular search. In determining whether consent was voluntarily given, courts
look at the totality of the circumstances, including several factors:
1.) The number of officers present at the time of consent;
2.) The state of mind, intelligence, and age of the consenting person;
3.) The length of any detention involved.
4.) That the search was conducted within the limitation expressed or implied in the consent.
In order to document consent was given voluntarily officers may complete the “Consent to Search
Form (Form 106.ADM 02)” at the moment consent is given. Officers, whenever possible, shall
also record on their BWC or car cameras when consent is verbally given.
b. Plain View – the officer must be legally present where he/she can lawfully observe the fruits of a
crime, evidence, or contraband. The property seized must be in open view and readily identifiable
as fruits of a crime, evidence, or contraband.
c. Exigent Circumstances – when there is probable cause to believe that immediate entry (or other
relevant prompt action) is necessary to prevent physical harm to the police or others, the
imminent destruction of evidence, the escape of a suspect, or in hot pursuit of a fleeing felon.
d. Abandoned property - To constitute abandoned property, there are two conditions that must apply:
(1) the property was voluntarily abandoned, and (2) that the property was discarded outside
the area in which someone has a reasonable expectation of privacy.
d. Vehicle inventory – vehicle inventories will be done in accordance with General Order 209.OPR.
The vehicle inventory shall be used to document items of value in the vehicle at the time the
operator is deprived of possessing the vehicle. The vehicle inventory shall not be used as a means
to perform an illegal search of vehicle.
e. Narcotics K-9 Alert – An officer may search a vehicle without a warrant if a trained and certified
narcotics canine alerts on a vehicle for illegal narcotics.
f. Incident to a lawful arrest - the person and only the area within the immediate control of the person
may be searched (in compliance with Arizona v. Gant).
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
106.ADM
NUMBER: November 29, 2022
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: ARRESTS WITH & WITHOUT A WARRANT/

ALTERNATIVES TO ARREST
I. POLICY
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department that officers shall exercise legally sound law
enforcement judgment in making an arrest whether based upon a valid arrest warrant or upon probable
cause. Officers shall also have the authority in certain circumstances to exercise alternatives to arrest.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this General Order is to define the authority of officers to arrest, and the mechanism for
making an arrest. This General Order shall also set forth guidelines concerning the use of discretion by
officers and circumstances when officers should exercise alternatives to arrest and pre-trial confinement.
III. DEFINITIONS
A. Arrest – an individual has been arrested when he/she is not free to go, whether or not formal words of
arrest are used. An arrest constitutes a seizure of the person for Fourth Amendment purposes. The
Fourth Amendment requires probable cause to arrest. The test, in interviews or stops of persons, for
whether an arrest has occurred is whether a reasonable person under the circumstances of the
encounter would have felt free to leave.
B. Authorized Official – For the purpose of this General Order an authorized official refers to a judge or
clerk of the circuit court, general district court, juvenile and domestic relations court, or any magistrate
that has the authority to issue warrants.
C. Probable Cause – probable cause exists when the facts and circumstances within an officer’s
knowledge and of which he/she had reasonably trustworthy information are sufficient to cause a
prudent person to believe that an offense has been or is being committed, or that a specific situation
exists. Probable cause has come to mean more than mere suspicion.
D. Reasonable Suspicion – such suspicion that would justify an officer, or other prudent person under the
same circumstances, to believe criminal activity is at hand. It must be based on specific and articulable
facts, which, taken together with rational inferences from those facts, reasonably warrant limited
intrusion such as an investigatory stop and sometimes searching (as by frisking) a person thought to
be involved in criminal activity. Reasonable suspicion is more than a hunch, but does not require as
much evidence as probable cause.
IV. PROCEDURE
A. There are two ways for an officer to effect an arrest:
1. With a warrant
2. Without a warrant
Note: For most cases where an arrest is made in either manner or for certain offenses where an officer
releases a subject on summons in lieu of arrest, the officer shall prepare a “Prosecution Report (Form
107.ADM 01)” and submit it to the Records Section to be forwarded to the Commonwealth Attorney’s
Office.
107.ADM
B. Arrest With a Warrant
1. Who may issue a warrant is defined in section 19.2-71 of the Code of Virginia.
a.) Any authorized official has the authority to issue process for the arrest of any person charged
with a criminal offense.
2. When a warrant may be issued is defined in section 19.2-72 of the Code of Virginia.
a.) An authorized official may issue an arrest warrant in two ways:
i.) On a complaint to an authorized official that a subject has committed a criminal offense
and the authorized official finds probable cause that the crime had been committed and
the subject committed the alleged crime.
ii.) When an authorized official suspects that an offense punishable other than by fine has
been committed, he/she may, without a formal complaint, issue a summons for
witnesses. If after examining witnesses he/she finds probable cause, the officer
(authorized official) shall issue a warrant of arrest.
3. Contents of an Arrest Warrant

The officer/investigator shall ensure that the warrant to be served has the following information
before the warrant is executed:
a) Directed to an appropriate officer or officers,
b) Names the accused or if unknown, a description by which the accused can be identified,
c) Describes the criminal offense with reasonable certainty,
d) Commands the accused to be arrested, and
e) Is signed by the issuing officer (authorized official).
4. Magistrate issuance of summons instead of warrant in certain cases as defined in section 19.2-7 of
the Code of Virginia.
a) In any misdemeanor case the issuing authorized official may issue a summons instead of a
warrant when there is a reason to believe that the person charged will appear in court.
5. Criminal Process Recordings

When an arrest warrant, magistrate summons, capias, or protective order is obtained by, or to be
served by a member of the department, the following information will be documented and
maintained by the South Boston Police Department. A copy of the document to be served will be
retained by the Records Office of the department.
a) Date issued
b) Agency case/incident number
c) Type of document: Warrant (felony/misdemeanor), Summons, Capias, Protective Order
d) Name, address, and physical descriptors of defendant
e) Charge/Offense
f) Date of offense
g) Name of complainant
h) Court of jurisdiction
107.ADM
i) NCIC/VCIN entry
j) Date of service
k) Serving officer
l) Location of service or attempted service
m) Reason for non-service
Served and unserved warrants, magistrate summonses, capiases, and protective orders which had
been obtained by an officer of the department to serve during his/her shift shall be turned in to the
dispatch center by the end of the officer’s shift.
6. Civil Process
The South Boston Police Department officers will serve civil process paperwork in relationship to
criminal matters, handling of the mentally ill, cases of domestic violence, or other cases
necessitating their issuance. Officers of this department will assist the Sheriff’s Office in any
manner allowed by law in the service of civil process, such as assisting with locating persons
within the town, guiding officials to various locations, and serving as backup in potentially
hazardous situations within the town.
Emergency Custody Orders (ECO’s), Emergency Protective Orders (EPO’s), and
Temporary Detention Orders (TDO’s) shall be executed in compliance with the
applicable Code of Virginia. Officers initially taking a person into custody for an ECO
or TDO shall complete an “ECO & TDO Report Form (Form 230.OPR (01))” and submit
it to the Records Office.
C. Arrests Without a Warrant

1. A police officer may arrest a person without a warrant when a person commits a crime in the
presence of the officer. Further, a police officer may arrest any person whom the officer has
probable cause to believe committed a felony not in the officer’s presence.
2. In addition, an officer may arrest a person without a warrant when the officer’s personal
investigation supports probable cause to the charge, including information from eyewitnesses, in
the following circumstances:
a) At the scene of any accident, or at any hospital or medical facility to which any person
involved in such accident has been transported,
b) Apprehension of any person charged with the theft of any motor vehicle on any highway in
the Commonwealth of Virginia,
c) Persons charged with a crime in another jurisdiction upon receipt of photocopy of the warrant,
telegram, computer printout, facsimile printout, a radio transmission, telephone or teletype
message all with accurate description of the suspect,
d) Misdemeanors not committed in his/her presence when the officer receives a radio message
from his/her department or other law enforcement agency within the Commonwealth of
Virginia that a warrant for such offense is on file,
e) Specific crimes when arrest is based upon probable cause upon a reasonable complaint of the
person who observed the alleged offense:
i) Shoplifting
ii) Carrying a weapon on school property
107.ADM
iii) Assault and battery
iv) Brandishing a firearm in violation of 18.2-282
v) Destruction of property in violation of 18.-137 when such property is located on a
premises used for business or commercial purposes
vi) Assault and battery of a family or household member, in violation of a stalking

protective order or a violation of a family abuse protective order
f) Every law enforcement officer having probable cause to believe that a domestic assault and
battery has occurred MUST make an arrest (unless there are special circumstances that would
dictate another course of action other than an arrest). After determining probable cause for an
arrest, the officer has no discretion and will arrest on his/her own authority, even if the victim
of the assault declines or refuses to press charges. The officer must (1) file a written report
with the Department, (2) in every case where an arrest under this section has been made the
officer must petition for an emergency protective order, (3) even if no arrest is made, if the
officer has probable cause to believe that a danger of acts of family abuse exists, the officer
shall petition for an emergency protective order.
3. Cases in which a defendant should be brought before a magistrate are defined in 19.2-74 and
46.2-936 of the Code of Virginia:
a) DUI and Commercial Vehicle DUI in violation of 18.2-266, 46.2-341.24 and

46.2-341.31 of the Code of Virginia.
b) Drunk in Public in violation of 18.2-388 of the Code of Virginia.

c) Remaining at a place of riot or unlawful assembly in violation of 18.2-407 of the Code of
Virginia.
4. Arrests of Illegal Aliens

Section 19.2-81.6 states that any law enforcement officer enumerated in 19.2-81 may, in the
course of acting upon reasonable suspicion that an individual has committed or is committing a
crime, arrest the individual without a warrant upon receiving confirmation from the Bureau of
Immigration and Customs Enforcement of the United States Department of Homeland Security
that the individual (i) is an alien illegally present in the United States, and (ii) has previously been
convicted of a felony in the United States and deported or left the United States after such
conviction. Upon receiving such confirmation, the officer shall take the individual forthwith
before a magistrate or other issuing authority and proceed pursuant to 19.2-82.
Notification to the U.S. Immigration and Custom Enforcement (US-ICE) shall be made via the
US-ICE 24-hour, 7 day-a-week Law Enforcement Service Center (LESC) for law enforcement
inquiries and assistance. The law enforcement telephone number is 802-872-6020. The name,
address, D.O.B., nationality, charge, court date, subject’s present location, and a brief description
of the case should be supplied to the US-ICE. Subsequent follow up as to any immigration
proceedings is the responsibility of US-ICE.
Notification to the US Immigrations and Custom Enforcement (US-ICE) shall also be made under
the following circumstances:
a) Receipt of a confirmation message from NCIC indicating that a detained or arrested subject is
wanted and subject to arrest for a preexisting US-ICE detainer;
b) The arrest of an alien for involvement in terrorist or subversive activities;

c) The arrest of any person involved in fraudulent activity aimed at assisting undocumented
aliens to enter the United States;
107.ADM
d) The arrest or involvement of an alien in possession of a firearm;
e) The arrest or involvement of an alien in organized crime; to include gambling, prostitution,
narcotics distribution;
f) The arrest of an alien where the arrest is related to membership and participation in a criminal
street gang; or,
g) The arrest of an alien for a felony offense.
D. Issue a Summons in Lieu of Arrest/Confinement
1. An officer shall release an individual on a summons when the person is detained or in custody for
a violation of a misdemeanor that was committed in the presence of the arresting officer (except
for certain violations requiring that the person be brought before the magistrate such as
drunk in public or DUI violations).
2. Exceptions to the releasing of a person on a summons listed in VA Code Section 19.2-74:

a) When the subject refuses to discontinue the unlawful act,
b) If there is a reason to believe the subject could cause injury to himself or others, or
c) If the arresting officer believes that the person is likely to disregard the summons. An
example
is if the person refuses to sign a summons giving written promise to appear in court and
indicates that they will not appear in court for a class 1 or class 2 misdemeanor, then he/she
shall be taken before the magistrate.
(The Code of Virginia allows for a person to refuse to sign a summons.)
E. Distribution of Copies of Virginia Uniform Summons (V.U.S.)

1. Virginia Uniform Summons books shall be issued to officers upon request in numerical
sequence by the manufacturer. The officer’s name, along with the serial numbers of the
summonses contained in V.U.S. book will be recorded. The Records Manager will be
responsible for keeping a record of the issued V.U.S. books.
2. Officers shall use Virginia Uniform Summonses in the same numerical sequence as they
were issued. If a V.U.S. is needed to be voided, the word VOID shall be written across
page 1. The voided V.U.S. will be turned in to the Records Office where it will be verified
and destroyed.
3. When an officer issues a Virginia Uniform Summons to a defendant, the following copies
will be distributed accordingly:
a) Page 1 – Court Copy

b) Page 2 - DMV Copy
c) Page 3 - Defendant’s Copy
d) Page 4 – Agency Copy
e) Page 5 - Officer’s Copy
107.ADM
f) All copies except for the officer’s copy and defendant’s copy are to be turned in to the
Records Office.
4. The Records Office shall send the DMV copy to the Department of Motor Vehicles when
required. The Records Office shall send the Court Copy to the appropriate court. The
Records Office shall also file and retain the Agency Copy for one year after issuance.
F. Alternatives to Arrest/Pre-arraignment Confinement

Under certain circumstances police officers may be faced with situations where an arrest and pre-
arraignment confinement will not present an adequate solution to the problem. When these situations
arise, officers may elect to exercise certain alternatives; such as the issuance of summonses, referral to
a social service agency, or simply a warning. Some examples of alternatives to arrest/pre-arraignment
confinement may include:
1. Mentally or emotionally disturbed persons.
2. Domestic situations where counseling may be appropriate in accordance with the Code of
Virginia.
3. Juvenile offenders.
4. Transient persons who need shelter, food, etc.
5. Certain misdemeanor cases.
G. Informal Handling of Criminal Matters

Police officers often deal with situations where the interests of all people concerned may better be
served by a referral to a social institution or a crisis/professional agency. Persons can be referred to
these agencies when, in the judgment of the officer, a better solution to the problem will be achieved.
H. Use of Warnings as an Alternative to Arrest
The use of a warning can sometimes provide a satisfactory solution to a problem and may enhance the
public perception of the Department. Normally, the use of a warning occurs in traffic offenses, but
occasionally may be applied to minor criminal offenses. In determining if a warning should be issued
the officer should consider:
1. The seriousness of the offense
2. The likelihood that the violator will heed the warning
3. If the violator is a known repeat offender or has received previous warnings, etc.
I. Releasing a Person from Arrest
Facts and evidence may sometimes develop during an arrest or investigation that either negate or
diminish an officer’s probable cause. In situations such as this, the arresting officer shall release the
subject immediately. The arresting officer shall not formally charge those under arrest when it is
proven to his/her satisfaction that either the person under arrest did not commit a crime or that an event
investigated is found not to constitute a crime.
1. When an officer releases a subject from arrest, he/she should take care to return the person to the
same location occupied before the arrest. For example, an officer arrests a subject, then transports
him/her to the magistrate when the officer learns that the probable cause he/she used to make the
arrest no longer exists. Instead of releasing the subject along the roadside, the officer should
return to the location of arrest and release the person. If a vehicle has been towed, the vehicle
shall be returned to the operator/registered owner.
2. Upon releasing a person in this manner, the officer shall immediately contact his/her supervisor
and advise him of the incident.
3. To protect himself/herself and the department, the officer shall document in an incident report:
107.ADM
a) Date and time of arrest.
b) Person arrested (name, address, date of birth, race).
c) Location of arrest.
d) Location and time of release from arrest and whether the person was transported.
e) Reasons or discovery of information which led the officer to release from arrest.
f) Witnesses to the alleged crime, or to the fact the person arrested was allegedly involved.
4. If the officer makes an arrest based on probable cause, the arrest is lawful. Probable cause must
continue to exist through the appearance of the officer and arrested person before the magistrate.
If not, the officer must release the person as soon as practicable.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
107.ADM
NUMBER: June 17, 2022
April 20, 2022
SUBJECT: INTERVIEWS AND INTERROGATIONS
I. POLICY:
The United States Constitution provides citizens with certain inalienable rights. The fifth amendment to the
United States Constitution provides that a person has the right not to answer questions if the answers might be
used against him/her in a criminal trial. In the case of Miranda V. Arizona, 384 U. S. 436 (1966), the Supreme
Court held that certain safeguards were necessary to protect this constitutional right during interrogation of a
suspect in custody at the police station. Miranda applies to a custodial interrogation. Employees of the
Department shall adhere to all constitutional requirements in the conduct of criminal investigations that apply to
the use of coercion, involuntary confessions or admissions, informing defendants of certain rights, depriving
accused persons of counsel and any other protection afforded to citizens by constitutional law.
II. PURPOSE:
To specify those guidelines as to how officers are to conduct lawful interviews and interrogations of suspects.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Safeguards are necessary to ensure that a person being interrogated knows that he/she has a constitutional
guaranteed right not to speak. Moreover, any statements which are made must occur voluntarily and not
from police pressure. Even though the major focus of the Miranda decision is on the interrogation that
occurs at the police department, the question of the legal restraints on interrogation should be of interest to
all officers since the decision does have an effect on operations at all levels of enforcement.
B. What is an interview, an interrogation, and what is custody:
1. An interview, may be construed as any conversation with a suspect, witness, victim or citizen that at
any time are free to leave.
2. An interrogation, according to the Supreme Court, includes the following, per Rhode Island v. Innis,". .
. express questioning or its functional equivalent . . .any words or conduct on the part of police (other
than those normally attendant to arrest and custody) that the police should know are reasonably likely
to elicit an incriminating response from the suspect." Officers are reminded that an interrogation does
not rely solely or exclusively on words: conduct can be the "functional equivalent" of asking questions.
3. As to what constitutes custody, if a reasonable person in the suspect's position believes that he or she is
not free to leave, then Miranda applies. Note that the officer's view of what constitutes custody and that
of the suspect may differ. Officers must remember that the reasonable belief of the suspect is what
counts.
4. Officers shall record interviews and interrogations whenever possible in order preserve the content and
accuracy of the conversation.
C. Determining whether a suspect is free to leave
In determining whether a suspect is free to leave the police officer's presence, a court will look at the
108.ADM
circumstances of the interrogation: if police questioning is conducted in a police car or at a police station, if
the environment may be construed a coercive one, and if the interview is custodial. An arrest of a suspect
places him or her in custody, and Miranda warnings must be administered before the officer asks questions
about the offense. Miranda warnings must be given when:
1. The suspect reasonably believes that he/she is in custody, or
2. The officer is going to arrest the suspect due to having a warrant or probable cause where the suspect
will not be allowed to leave, and
3. The suspect is interrogated.
D. The basic holding of Miranda is that whenever a person in custody is interrogated, he/she has the right to
have a lawyer present in order to safeguard against self-incrimination. If the person cannot afford to hire a
lawyer, he/she must be provided with one free of charge.
E. Rights Admonition:
1. In order to achieve uniformity in administering Miranda warnings, police officers will be issued cards
or forms with the Miranda warnings and waivers on them. Officers will read the suspect from a card or
form:
a. You have the right to remain silent.
b. Anything you say can and will be used against you in a court of law.
c. You have the right to talk to a lawyer and have him/her present with you while you are being
questioned.
d. If you cannot afford to hire a lawyer, one will be appointed to represent you before any
questioning, if you wish.
e. You can decide at any time to exercise these rights and not answer any questions or make any
statements.
2. After the warning, in order to secure a waiver, the officer shall ask and receive affirmative replies to
the following questions:
a. "Do you understand each of these rights I have explained to you?"
b. "Having these rights in mind, do you wish to talk to me (us) now?"
F. Request for a Lawyer after rights are read:
If a person requests a lawyer no interrogation can then take place until the lawyer is present. An officer
shall not make comments or actions that would provoke a response from the person that has requested a
lawyer. The Supreme Court, however, has affirmed that after these warnings are stated, a person might
waive the right to have a lawyer present and proceed to answer questions. If a statement is made without
the presence of a lawyer, there is a burden on the Commonwealth to demonstrate that the accused did, in
fact, knowingly and intelligently waive the right to counsel. In order to provide this proof, the interrogating
officer should have the consenting subject complete the Advice of Rights form (Form 108.ADM 01) and
sign it. The Advice of Rights form should also be completed to indicate that the person has requested not to
speak with the officer, or does not want to speak until a lawyer is present.
108.ADM
G. Waiver of rights after Miranda is read:
1. After the rights have been read, understood, and the person wishes to waive them, the officer will have
the suspect complete and sign the Advice of Rights form. Officers must cease questioning whenever
the suspect invokes the right to silence or requests the presence of counsel.
2. If a suspect, once in custody, requests counsel after being advised of Miranda rights, he or she cannot
be interrogated again unless:
a. the counsel is present during the interrogation or
b. the suspect initiates the interrogation.
3. After the suspect has been charged, officers shall not try to elicit incriminating statements unless the
suspect waives the right to counsel.
4. Sometimes a suspect may initiate contact with law enforcement after being appointed or retaining
counsel. If a suspect initiates contact with law enforcement without their counsel present, officers shall
advise the suspect of their Miranda rights and have the suspect sign a Sixth Amendment Waiver form
(Form 108.ADM 02). Interrogations of suspects will be recorded whenever possible.
H. Juveniles:
1. The provisions that apply to the interview/interrogation of adults applies to the interrogation of
juveniles with the following additions:
a. Prior to any custodial interrogation of a child by a law-enforcement officer who has arrested such
child, the child’s parent, guardian, or legal custodian shall be notified of his/her arrest and the
child shall have contact with his/her parent, guardian, or legal custodian. The notification and
contact required may be in person, electronically, by telephone, or by video conference.
Exceptions to this rule as stated in 16.1-247.1 of the Code of Virginia include:
1.) If the child’s parent, guardian, or legal custodian is a codefendant;

2.) If the child’s parent, guardian, or legal custodian is being investigated for a crime against the
child;
3.) If every reasonable effort has been made to contact the child’s parent, guardian, or legal
custodian;
4.) If the child’s parent, guardian, or legal custodian refuses contact with the child;
5.) Or the officer conducting the custodial interrogation reasonably believes the information
sought is necessary to protect the life, limb, or property from an imminent danger and the
officer’s questions are limited to those that are reasonably necessary to obtain such
information.
b. If an officer is unable to make contact with the parent, guardian, or custodian of the juvenile due to
the exceptions previously listed, the officer shall document the reason for the exception in his/her
IBR report.
c. Officers shall document in the IBR report the name of the parent, guardian, or legal custodian that
was contacted prior to an interrogation of a child, whether contact was made or not.
d. The duration of the interrogation shall be reasonable and the police personnel
present should be limited to those assigned to the case and/or those whose technical expertise
108.ADM
is required.
e. The officer shall explain any applicable police or juvenile justice system procedures to the
child and the child’s parent or guardian before employing such procedures.
f. The age of the juvenile and his/her experience with the juvenile justice system will be
considered when determining if the juvenile understands his/her Miranda rights.
I. Exemptions to Miranda requirement:
1. Miranda warnings do not apply to the following situations:
a. Identification procedures during booking
b. Volunteered, spontaneous statements (once the officer has heard the suspect express spontaneous
incriminating statements, the officer shall then advise the suspect of Miranda rights and obtain a
waiver before undertaking additional questions.)
c. Brief investigative detention where the person is not under arrest. The person being detained
should be informed by the officer that they are not under arrest and are only being detained at that
time.
d. Roadside questioning during routine traffic stops
e. Questioning by private persons, not at the request of law enforcement.
2. Public safety exception:
When an officer urgently needs information from a suspect because lives are in imminent danger,
officers may delay giving Miranda warnings until the officers have received information sufficient to
dispel the emergency. Officers are advised that a genuine, life-threatening emergency must exist.
In New York v. Quarles, 104 S. Ct. 26526 (1984), police frisked a felony suspect who was thought to
be armed.
Finding no weapon and worried about its location because of nearby children and without
administering Miranda, the officers asked where the gun was and the suspect replied giving the
location. The presence of the gun constituted a public safety hazard, justifying the question in the
absence of Miranda.
J. Non-English Speaking or Hearing-Impaired Subjects
1. Officers shall ensure that a qualified bilingual member, a qualified impartial interpreter, or an
authorized translating phone service is used in those incidents where interviews arise involving non-
English speaking individuals. Recordings of all interviews and interrogations should be done whenever
possible to preserve accuracy.
a. Only qualified bilingual officers, or qualified impartial interpreters shall be used during custodial
interrogations of non-English speaking suspects. Miranda warnings shall be provided to the suspect
in their primary language by a qualified bilingual officer or a qualified impartial interpreter. An
approved form with Miranda warnings printed in the suspect’s primary language shall be used when
available.
108.ADM
b. The use of a person’s bilingual friends, family members, neighbors, or bystanders may be used only
when a qualified interpreter is unavailable and there is an immediate need to interview the
individual.
2. Officers shall use a qualified member who knows sign language, a qualified impartial sign language
interpreter, a teletypewriter (TTY), a telecommunication device for the deaf (TTD), a computer, text
messages, or writing in order to communicate with a person that is Hearing-Impaired. Miranda
warnings shall be in written form and the officer shall be responsible for making sure the Hearing-
Impaired suspect is able to understand their rights. Recordings of all interviews and interrogations
should be made whenever possible to preserve accuracy.
3. A non-English speaking or Hearing-Impaired complainant, victim, or arrested subject shall be made

aware that the interpreter, when available, will be provided at no expense.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
108.ADM
September 22, 2005
SUBJECT: NON-BIAS BASED POLICING
I. POLICY
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to patrol in a proactive manner, to investigate
suspicious persons and circumstances, and to actively enforce the motor vehicle laws of the Town of South
Boston and the Commonwealth of Virginia. The South Boston Police Department insists that citizens will
only be stopped or detained when there exists reasonable suspicion to believe that they have committed, are
committing, or are about to commit a violation of the law.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to unequivocally state that bias-based policing in law enforcement is
unacceptable. This policy shall provide guidelines for officers to prevent such occurrences and to protect
our officers from unwarranted accusations when they act within the dictates of the law and departmental
policy.
III. DEFINITIONS
Bias-Based Policing – actions of a law-enforcement officer that are based solely on the real or perceived
race, ethnicity, age, gender, or any combination thereof, or other noncriminal characteristics of an
individual, except when such characteristics are used in combination with other identifying factors in
seeking to apprehend a suspect who matches a specific description (VA State Code 52-30.1)
Reasonable Suspicion - Also known as articulable suspicion. Suspicion that is more than a mere hunch,
but is based on a set of articulable facts and circumstances that would warrant a person of reasonable
caution in believing that an infraction of the law has been committed, is about to be committed, or is in the
process of being committed by the person or persons under suspicion. This can be based on the
observations of a police officer combined with his or her training and experience, and/or reliable
information received from credible outside sources.
IV. DISCUSSION
A fundamental right guaranteed by the Constitution of the United States to all who live in this nation is the
right to equal protection under the law. Along with this right to equal protection is the fundamental right to
be free from unreasonable searches and seizures by government agents. Citizens are free to walk and drive
our streets, highways, and other public places without police interference so long as they obey the law.
They also are entitled to be free from crime, from depredations of criminals, and to drive and walk our
public ways safe from the actions of reckless and careless drivers.
The South Boston Police Department is charged with protecting these rights, for all, regardless of race,
creed, color, ethnicity, sex, sexual orientation, physical handicap or religion.
Because of the nature of our business, law enforcement officers are required to be observant, to identify
unusual occurrences, and enforce violations of the law. It is this proactive enforcement that keeps our
citizens free from crime by apprehending criminals.
109.ADM
This policy is intended to enhance the South Boston Police Department in accomplishing this mission in a
way that respects the dignity of all persons and yet sends a strong message to potential lawbreakers that if
they violate the law, they are likely to encounter the police.
V. PROCEDURE
A. Officers are prohibited from engaging in bias-based policing, as defined above, and shall base all
such enforcement actions upon reasonable suspicion that a person has committed, is committing, or is
about to commit an offense.
1. Officers will receive initial training about bias-based policing and cultural diversity while
attending the basic police academy, and continue ongoing periodic training as required by the
Department of Criminal Justice Services and the Code of Virginia.
2. Training programs will emphasize the need to respect the rights of all citizens to be free from
unreasonable government intrusion or police action.
3. Traffic enforcement will be accompanied by consistent, ongoing supervisory oversight to ensure
that officers do not go beyond the parameters of reasonableness in conducting such activities.
4. Motorists and pedestrians shall only be subjected to stops, seizures, or detentions upon reasonable
suspicion that they have committed, are committing, or are about to commit a law violation.
5. Appropriate enforcement action should always be completed, generally in the form of a warning,
summons or arrest.
6. No motorist, once cited or warned, shall be detained beyond the point where there exists no
reasonable suspicion of further criminal activity, and no person or vehicle shall be searched in the
absence of probable cause, a warrant, or the violator’s voluntary consent.
7. If the police vehicle is equipped with a video camera and the officer has been trained in its use, the
video and sound should be activated prior to the stop to record the behavior of the vehicle and/or
person and should remain activated until the person is released.
8. The deliberate recording of any misleading information related to the actual or perceived race,
ethnicity, gender, or sexual orientation of a person stopped for investigative or enforcement
purposes is prohibited and a cause for disciplinary action, up to and including dismissal.
B. REPORTING INVESTIGATORY STOPS AND TRAFFIC STOPS

Officers of the South Boston Police Department shall record the following information listed in 52-
30.2 of the Code of Virginia to be submitted to the Department of State Police pursuant to 52-30.4 of
the Code of Virginia.
Each time a law-enforcement officer stops a driver of a motor vehicle, stops and frisks a person based
on reasonable suspicion, or temporarily detains a person during any other investigatory stop, such
officer shall collect the following data based on the officer's observation or information provided to the
officer by the driver:
1. The race, ethnicity, age, gender of the person stopped, and whether the person stopped spoke
English;
2. Residency;
3. The reason for the stop;
4. The location of the stop;
5. Whether a warning, written citation, or summons was issued or whether any person was arrested;
6. If a warning, written citation, or summons was issued or an arrest was made, the warning
provided, violation charged, or crime charged;
7. Whether the vehicle or any person was searched; and
8. Whether the law-enforcement officer used physical force against any person and whether any
person used physical force against any officers.
109.ADM
Each officer shall fill out a “South Boston Police Department Community Policing / Traffic Stop Data”
Form and submit it to the Records Office prior to the end of their shift. The Office Manager shall
collect this information and submit it to the Department of State Police in a manner provided by law.
C. COMPLAINTS OF BIAS-BASED POLICING

1. Any person may file a complaint with the Department if they feel they have been stopped,
detained, or searched based on racial, ethnic, or gender-associated policing. No person shall be
discouraged, intimidated, or coerced from filing such a complaint or discriminated against because
they filed such a complaint.
2. All bias-based policing complaints received by the South Boston Police Department shall
be investigated in accordance with the internal affairs process in General Order 124.ADM
“Complaints Against Police Personnel”.
3. Each state and local law-enforcement agency shall also collect the number of complaints the
agency receives alleging the use of excessive force. Excessive force complaints shall also be
investigated through the internal affairs process in General Order 124.ADM “Complaints Against
Police Personnel”, 112.ADM “Use of Force”, and any other General Order that is applicable to the
complaint. Data from excessive force complaints shall also be submitted to the Department of
State Police in the same manner as listed in section B above.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
109.ADM
NUMBER: February 6, 2023
September 9, 2005
SUBJECT: RIGHTS OF FOREIGN NATIONALS
I. POLICY
The South Boston Police Department will comply with all instructions of the U.S. Department of State
(DOS) relating to the arrest and detention of foreign nationals, deaths of foreign nationals, the appointment
of guardians for minors or incompetent adults who are foreign nationals, and related issues pertaining to the
provision of consular services to foreign nationals with whom we come in contact in this country.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this directive is to establish guidance for members who come in contact with foreign
nationals or subjects claiming to be foreign nationals.
III. PROCEDURE
A. Requirements pertaining to foreign nationals:
1) When foreign nationals are arrested or detained, they must be advised of the right to have their
consular officials notified.
2) In some cases, the nearest consular official must be notified of the arrest or detention of a foreign
national regardless of the national’s wishes. The list of countries which require mandatory
notification of consular officials in the event that one of their citizens has been arrested is
extensive. The State Department may be contacted for guidance. To determine the foreign
national’s country, in the absence of other information, you may assume that this is the country
whose passport or other travel documents the foreign national has.
Suggested statements to arrested or detained foreign nationals:
a) When Consular notification is at the foreign national’s option:
“As a non-United States citizen who is being arrested or detained, you are entitled to have us
notify your country’s consular representatives here in the United States. A consular official
from your country may be able to help you obtain legal counsel, and may contact your family
and visit you in detention, among other things. If you want us to notify your country’s
consular officials, you can request this notification now, or at any time in the future. After
your consular officials are notified, they may call or visit you. Do you want us to notify your
country’s consular officials?”
b) When Consular notification is mandatory:
“Because of your nationality, we are required to notify your country’s consular
representatives, here in the United States, that you have been arrested or detained. After your
consular officials are notified, they may call or visit you. You are not required to accept their
assistance, but they may be able to help you obtain legal counsel and may contact your family
and visit you in detention, among other things. We will be notifying your country’s consular
officials as soon as possible.”
3) Consular officials are entitled access to their nationals in detention, and are entitled to provide
consular assistance.
4) Upon the death of a foreign national, consular officials must be notified.
110.ADM
5) When a guardianship or trusteeship is being considered with respect to a foreign national who is a
minor or incompetent, consular officials must be notified.
6) Officers should refer to the to the U.S. Department of State publication “Consular Notification
and Access” which is located on the internet. This publication contains links for telephone
numbers and email addresses for consular offices of foreign nationals.
B. Diplomatic Immunity from Arrest or Detention

Diplomatic immunity is a principle of international law by which certain foreign government officials
are not subject to the jurisdiction of local courts and other authorities for both their official and, to a
large extent, their personal activities.
If an officer comes into contact with a violator who claims diplomatic or consular privileges and
immunities, the officer should immediately:
1) Inform the person that they will need to confirm his/her diplomatic status and request the person’s
identification card. The only authoritative identity document is the identity card issued by the
U.S. Department of State, the U.S. Mission to the United Nations in the case of persons accredited
to the United Nations, and the American Institute in Taiwan for the employees of TECRO or
TECO. There are three types of identification cards. Police officers should be alert to the fact
that newly arrived members of diplomatic and consular staffs may not yet have these official
identity documents and should contact the U.S. Department of State at the numbers listed:
a. ALL FOREIGN MISSIONS AND THEIR PERSONNEL

(Other than United Nations or TECRO/TECO)
During Business Hours (Monday-Friday, 8am-5pm EST)
To verify immunity, call the Office of Foreign Missions
(OFM): 202-895-3521.
Send Reports/Citations to OFM: OFMDMVEnforcement@state.gov
202-895-3646 (Fax)
For 24/7 Hour Response, Call (DOS) Diplomatic Security Command Center
(571)-345-3146
(866)-217-2089
MISSIONS AND SECRETARIAT TO THE UNITED NATIONS AND THEIR PERSONNEL

To verify immunity and for law enforcement inquiries:
212-415-4168
212-415-4407
212-415-4300
Diplomatic motor vehicle registration and driver’s licensing inquiries:
202-895-3521 OFMDMVInfo@State.gov
After Hours: USUN–Communications Section
212-415-4444
TECRO/TECO AND THEIR PERSONNEL

To verify immunity and for law enforcement inquiries:
703-525-8474
Diplomatic motor vehicle registration and driver’s licensing inquiries:
202-895-3521 OFMDMVInfo@State.gov
110.ADM
2) Once officers verify immunity status by making contact with the U.S. Department of State (DOS),
they shall follow instructions regarding release, detention, arrest, and prosecution as indicated by
the DOS representative. This may require immediate release, even if a crime has been committed.
3) If a person claiming immunity does not possess a proper identification card (listed above) and the
incident involves a criminal offense, officers may detain the person either at the scene or at the
department long enough to verify official status.
4) The U.S. Department of State’s distinctive license plates are designed to assist officers in
identifying vehicles that belong to foreign missions and those mission members who may enjoy
some degree of immunity. However, those plates alone should not be considered verification of the
status of the vehicle’s operator. Diplomat or Consulate license plates can be queried by running
through the National Law Enforcement Telecommunications System (NLETS), designating "US"
as the state.
5) When encountering a criminal suspect who claims diplomatic immunity, officers shall first take
reasonable measures including pat downs or other legal searches to ensure safety to the public
and/or other officers. Verification of the diplomatic status claim shall take place after a
danger has been neutralized. Suspects with immunity may be reasonably restrained in exigent
circumstances for purposes of self-defense, public safety, or the prevention of serious criminal
acts.
6) Stopping a mission member or dependent and issuing a traffic citation for a moving violation is
permitted and does not constitute arrest or detention. However, the subject may not be compelled
to sign the citation. In all cases, officers should follow their departmental guidelines and document
the facts of the case fully. A copy of the citation and any other documentation regarding the
incident should be forwarded to the U.S. Department of State as soon as possible.
7) In serious cases, e.g., DUI, personal injury, and accidents, officers on the scene should make
telephonic notification to the U.S. Department of State (using the numbers provided on the reverse
side of the Department of State driver’s license if available). The officer should follow his or her
department’s guidelines with respect to the conduct of a field sobriety investigation. If appropriate,
standardized field sobriety testing should be offered and the results fully documented. The taking
of these tests may not be compelled. If the officer judges the individual too impaired to drive
safely, the officer should not permit the individual to continue to drive (even in the case of
diplomatic agents). Depending on the circumstances, there are several options. The officer may,
with the individual’s permission, take the individual to the police station or other location where
he or she may recover sufficiently to drive; the officer may summon, or allow the individual to
summon, a friend or relative to drive; or the police officer may call a taxi for the individual.
B. Documentation of Incident
1) Keep a written record of:
a. What information you provided to the foreign national and when.
b. The foreign national’s requests, if any.
c. Whether you notified consular officers and, if so, the date and time and the means used to
notify them (e.g., fax, email or phone.) If you used fax or email to notify the consular officers,
you should keep the fax confirmation sheet or sent email in your records.
d. Any other relevant actions taken.
110.ADM
e. If a person claims privileges and immunities afforded foreign diplomatic and consular
representatives, it should be thoroughly documented and reported to the DOS.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
110.ADM
111.ADM
SUBJECT: PROHIBITED POLITICAL ACTIVITIES
VLEPSC STANDARDS: N/A
I. POLICY:
This policy establishes a standard of conduct for employees of the department in reference to participation in
political activities.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to outline what an officer may or may not do in reference to political
activities and utilizing the department.
III. PROCEDURES
A. Prohibited Activities; Members of this department shall not:
1. Solicit, aid in soliciting or publicly sanction the soliciting of any assessments, contributions, or any
financial support for any political purpose from any officer, member, or employee of the department,
when either member, officer, or employee is on duty or on the property of the department.
2. Promote, remove or reduce in rank any officer or employee or promise or threaten to do so for
withholding or refusing to make any contribution to any political party, candidate, club, or other political
purpose whatsoever, or for his/her refusal to render any political service.
3. In any way use or attempt to use the authority of his/her office for influence or interfering of any
candidate for nomination or election to public office.
4. Violate any provision of 15.2-1512.2 code of Virginia or any similar local or federal laws regulating the
holding of office or membership on any committee of any political party.
5. While on-duty or in uniform make statements, distribute literature, wear or carry messages or otherwise
convey a position regarding a candidate for public office or a matter subject to public vote or
referendum.
6. Use a police vehicle or any publicly owned property in the custody of the officer to convey a position
regarding a candidate for public office or a matter subject to public vote or referendum.
B. Exemptions; Members of this department are not prohibited or discouraged from joining:
1. Armed forces reserve components
2. Recognized civil, fraternal and social police organizations and working through such organizations
1
111.ADM
for the betterment of the same and for better public relations and civic relations between said
organizations and the department. It is through participation of such organizations that a closer
understanding of the functions of the organization and problems of mutual interest can be
resolved.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
2
111.ADM
General Order Effective Date
Number May 5, 2023
March 24, 2023
Subject: USE OF FORCE / DUTY TO INTERVENE
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department recognizes and respects the value and integrity of each human life. In
vesting police officers with the lawful authority to use force to protect the public welfare, a careful balancing of
all human interests is required. Therefore, it is the policy of this department that officers shall use only that
force which is reasonable to effectively bring an incident under control, while protecting the lives of the officers
and/or others.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish rules and regulations governing the use of force by officers of the
South Boston Police Department.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. USE OF FORCE WHEEL:
An instructional aid wherein an officer is hypothetically placed in the center or “hub” of a “force wheel”
and reacts to potential use of force issues using a reasonable amount of force to gain control over a subject.
When the subject’s actions indicate a behavioral escalation or de-escalation, the officer’s new use of force
option may either travel around the perimeter of the wheel, straight across the wheel or in any direction to
meet the tense, uncertain and rapidly evolving situations that the officer may encounter.
Examples of the type of force wheel options that are available to officers are: mere presence of the officer;
verbal communications; defensive tactics; chemical agents; impact weapons; and deadly force (firearms).
B. REASONABLE BELIEF:
When facts or circumstances the officer knows, or should know, are such as to cause an ordinary and
prudent officer to act or think in a similar way under similar circumstances.
C. SERIOUS PHYSICAL INJURY:
Bodily injury which creates a substantial risk of death, or which is likely to cause serious permanent
disfigurement or loss, or extended impairment of the function of any body member or organ.
D. DEADLY FORCE :
Any force applied in a manner by any means that could reasonably be expected to cause death or
serious physical injury.
1
112.ADM
E. NON-DEADLY FORCE:
Force employed which is neither likely nor intended to cause death, serious physical injury, or great bodily
harm. Included within this definition is the use of a department issued and authorized pepper spray
(commonly referred to as OC), expandable baton, and less than lethal uses of force such as “Bean Bag
Rounds”.
F. EXCESSIVE FORCE:
Force is excessive when its application is inappropriate to the circumstances. As a guide, the U.S. Supreme
Court, in Graham v. Conner, set forth guidelines for determining whether force has been excessively
applied.
IV. PROCEDURE GENERAL
A. General
1. Officers shall only use that force which is reasonable to protect life and effect lawful objectives.
2. For the purpose of the “Use of Force” directives, ‘use of force’ shall encompass both deadly and non-
deadly force and will be implemented by the use of the “Use of Force Wheel”.
3. The department’s “Use of Force Wheel” shall serve as a basis for the use of an officer’s discretion in
responding to perceived threats of aggression and is listed in the following ascending order:
a. Mere Presence
b. Verbal Command
c. Defensive Tactics /Open hand
d. Chemical Spray
e. Impact Weapons/Less lethal
f. Deadly Physical Force/Firearms
4. The “Use of Force Wheel” is based upon the appropriate selection of force options available in response
to the required level of compliance from an individual that is to be restrained or controlled. The
minimum force option that will safely accomplish lawful objectives should be chosen.
5. Officers must be familiar with all alternative options on the “Use of Force Wheel” and should be
prepared to respond to the level of the threat present at the specific moment in time (e.g., compliance,
escalation, de-escalation).
6. Officers should attempt to de-escalate a situation whenever possible as an alternative to using physical
force. De-escalated techniques may not be practical or effective in every situation (e.g., active shooter
incident, individuals under the influence of drugs or alcohol).
7. Physical Use of Force options will not be used under the following conditions:
a. As a threat to make a person comply with an officer’s verbal order when no physical violence is
imminent.
2
112.ADM
b. To illicit information from a person.
c. As a retaliation for verbal or physical abuse.
8. When practical, officers should give verbal commands when using force in order to instruct the suspect
how to comply (e.g.; put your hands behind your back, drop the weapon)
9. It is the responsibility of each officer to provide and/or obtain first aid for anyone claiming or
needing medical attention after any degree of force is utilized by an officer.
B. Training / Qualification
All sworn personnel shall:
1. Be issued copies of, and trained in, G.O. 112.ADM Use of Force/Duty to Intervene, before being
authorized to carry firearms and less lethal weapons.
2. Receive initial training for new hires/appointments on the Duty to Intervene.
3. Receive refresher training within every calendar year thereafter for G.O. 112.ADM which covers Use
of Force and the Duty to Intervene.
4. Receive training and demonstrate proficiency in the use of any weapons issued/authorized by the
department before carrying them.
5. Qualify at least once every calendar year with all department issued handguns. Officers should
undergo familiarization training, at least annually, for any long-gun they are authorized to use.
6. Undergo refresher training and/or qualification (if applicable) at least once within every two calendar
years for any issued/authorized weapon other than firearms.
7. Have documentation for initial training, qualifications, and refresher training.
8. Qualify at least once every calendar year with any off-duty carry firearm. Officers will be responsible
for providing ammunition to qualify for their off-duty carry firearm if it is not department issued.
Inability to Qualify:
1. Sworn officers who fail to qualify with department issued firearms or demonstrate proficiency with
other department issued weapons to meet Department of Criminal Justice Service (DCJS) standards
will not perform law enforcement duties, nor will they be allowed to perform off-duty law enforcement
work until qualification and/or consistent proficiency can be obtained.
2. If, after remedial training, an officer is unable to meet the certification requirements, his/her
employment as a police officer shall be reviewed. Issued handgun qualification is a DCJS requirement
for law enforcement certification and is a requirement for employment.
V. PROCEDURE FOR APPLICATION OF NON-DEADLY FORCE:
The department trains officers in the use-of-force continuum, emphasizing the recognition of and response to
increasing levels of threat. Most instances in which force is applied are non-deadly. Officers shall assess the
incident to determine which technique will best defuse the situation and bring it under control. The following
3
112.ADM
discussion reinforces key principles from training.
A. MERE PRESENCE:
The mere presence of an officer displaying a professional demeanor may suffice to gain control and
compliance.
B. VERBAL CONTROL:
Verbal control refers to the manner in which the officer speaks to a person, which of itself can effectively
manage a situation. Verbal control includes advice, persuasion, admonitions, or orders. The volume and
tone of the officer's speech may also contribute to control without having to resort to another method of
force. The department urges the use of verbal commands without the use of profanity, disrespectful, or
argumentative behavior.
C. COMPLIANCE TECHNIQUES (DEFENSIVE TACTICS):
At times, uncooperative people who refuse to be taken into custody may only respond to a combination of
strength, leverage, hand holds, control holds, or come-alongs with sufficient force to make the lawful arrest
without aggravating tension or a suspect's combativeness. The object of this level of force is to gain control
and enforce the suspect's compliance while minimizing the risk of injury to officers, bystanders, or the
person being placed in custody.
1. No officer shall use any defensive tactic technique until he or she has been properly trained. Training in
the use of defensive tactics shall be provided in the basic law enforcement training academy.
2. No officer shall use any defensive tactic or physical hold in which they have not been trained; unless the
officer is in a combat life/death situation where deadly force is authorized.
3. Officers may be required to attend remedial defensive tactics training whenever supervisory staff
determines a need for retraining.
D. CHEMICAL TOOLS:
The use of chemical agents is restricted to situations where higher levels of force are necessary and
lesser levels are inappropriate or ineffective. The only chemical tools authorized for patrol personnel is
Oleoresin Capsicum (OC), commonly referred to as pepper spray. Chemical agents shall be used only to the
extent to overcome the resistance of the subject, and within training standards. Officers may only carry OC
issued to them by the Department. The purchasing and use of OC or any chemical agent by an officer, in
the performance of their duties, is prohibited.
Specialized chemical agents, such as tear gas and/or ferret rounds, shall be restricted to special
circumstances and used only by specially trained personnel under direct orders of the on-scene supervisor
upon consultation with the chief of police, or a lieutenant if unavailable.
1. Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) / Pepper Spray
a. OC spray is a chemical spray designed to temporarily incapacitate a subject.
b. Chemical sprays shall not be used to threaten or to elicit information, nor will they be used on
people who are handcuffed, secured, and properly in custody that are non-combative and
complying with orders. They shall not be used on subjects who are passively resisting.
c. The use of OC spray is authorized during the apprehension of a suspect or suspects engaged in
4
112.ADM
criminal activity, or other situations, where the person or persons are combative.
d. Officers should keep the application of chemical sprays to the minimum required to effectively
control the subject.
e. If possible and safety permitting, the officer using chemical sprays should clearly announce his
intention to use it verbally with loud and clear statements.
f. Once the aggressive or combative subject is restrained and under control, officers should
decontaminate the face with water as soon as possible.
2. Tear gas
If the use of tear gas is authorized by the on-scene supervisor, observe the following:
a. These chemicals are used primarily in dealing with unruly crowds and armed barricaded subjects.
b. Gas grenades are used to disperse unruly crowds and induce the surrender of barricaded subjects
when negotiations have failed.
c. The tear gas gun is used to fire projectiles into the area of an armed barricaded subject when the use
of hand-tossed grenades would be unsafe or impractical.
d. Tear gas may only be used with explicit permission by the chief of police, or a lieutenant if
available. Tear gas must be deployed by an officer trained in its use.
E. IMPACT WEAPONS:
1. Expandable baton
The department authorizes the carrying and use of the expandable baton as the only striking weapon
for officers. This does not limit the future authorization of other striking weapons or batons by the
chief of police. All other forms of striking or punching weapons are prohibited for carrying or use,
including but not limited to saps, slapjacks, brass knuckles, nunchuks and similar sticks. The
expandable baton may be used in quelling confrontations involving physical violence where higher
levels of force are unnecessary or inappropriate, and lesser levels are inappropriate or ineffective. No
officer shall carry an expandable baton unless they have been properly trained in its use.
Expandable batons are authorized for use as a means to:
a. Maintain physical control or restraint of a combative/aggressive subject.
b. Defend the officer or another person.
Officers should avoid striking any person with a baton in or about the head or lethal areas of the body
unless deadly force is justified as described in this order. Officers must realize that blows delivered to
the head and other vital areas of the body could be fatal. Blows should be directed to less lethal areas
of the body as this produces less resultant trauma and are often more effective.
The baton shall not be used to strike handcuffed individuals unless such individuals are violently
resisting arrest and/or engaging in other similar conduct requiring the officer to utilize this level of
force.
5
112.ADM
Uniformed officers shall be required to have the baton accessible when answering complaints
and/or performing enforcement activities to include any approved off-duty law enforcement related
employment.
2. LESS LETHAL/ “BEAN BAG” ROUNDS:
The department also stores, in the department armory, a 12-gauge shotgun with the stock and forearm
painted orange, designating it as a “Less Lethal” shotgun. This shotgun will be issued with shotgun
shells loaded with devices commonly known as “Bean Bag” rounds. These rounds may be employed
in the same situations as hand held batons and the same guidelines shall apply.
The patrol lieutenant shall oversee the training regarding these rounds and shall issue the properly
marked shotgun and “Bean Bag” rounds to the trained officer when a situation requires the use of it.
Whenever possible, officers shall deploy “Less Lethal” shotgun rounds with deadly force cover.
The officer issued the “Less Lethal” shotgun shall load it as necessary and unload it when the incident
is completed.
The officer issued the “Less Lethal” shotgun shall carry no other shotgun shells in this weapon other
than the “Bean Bag” rounds, and the assigned officer shall maintain control of this shotgun at all times.
After the incident, the officer shall return the “Less Lethal” shotgun and any unused “Bean Bag”
rounds to the patrol lieutenant to be secured back in the department armory. The patrol lieutenant
shall inspect that the “Less Lethal” shotgun is unloaded prior to being secured.
VI. PROCEDURE FOR APPLICATION OF DEADLY FORCE:
Officers may use deadly force only under a reasonable belief that the action is in defense of human life,
including the officer’s, or in defense of any person in imminent danger or facing a significant threat of serious
physical injury.
A. FIREARMS - GENERAL:
Firearms may be used:
1. In defense of the officer or others from what is reasonably believed to be an imminent threat of death
or serious bodily harm; or
2. To prevent the escape of a fleeing felon whom the officer has probable cause to believe will pose a
significant threat to human life should escape occur. The United States Supreme Court, with its
decision in TENNESSEE v. GARNER, U.S. 1 (1985), has set forth the guidelines in the use of deadly
force against fleeing felons.
a. In evaluating an imminent threat, the officer must reasonably believe that the person has either
used deadly force in the commission of a crime or may inflict death or serious harm to the officer
or others if apprehension is delayed.
b. Where feasible, officers shall identify themselves and give a warning before shooting.
3. To kill seriously injured or dangerous animals when no other action is reasonably practical. A
supervisor's approval should be sought when possible, and the officer should use appropriate caution.
6
112.ADM
4. To give an alarm or call for assistance for an important purpose when no other form of
communications is readily available.
5. In routine firearm training or practice at an approved range.
B. Unholstering Weapons:
Weapons, such as a handgun, may be unholstered when the officer has a reasonable belief that the weapon
may be needed, without the provocation necessary to warrant its discharge.
C. Pointing a Firearm:
When pointing a firearm at a person in response to their actions in order to gain control and compliance, the
officer will make immediate verbal notification to a supervisor. They will also create an incident report and
complete the Use of Force form (Form 112.ADM (01)) and submit it to the patrol lieutenant for review.
D. Firearms Requirements:
1. The department issued handgun will be carried in a department issued holster.
2. The department issued shotgun and rifle will be secured in the officer’s assigned vehicle unless being
utilized for an incident, for care and maintenance, or for training purposes. The shotgun and rifle
should be transported with the safety on and no rounds in the chamber.
3. Only department issued ammunition will be used in department issued firearms.
4. Only DCJS certified firearm instructors will conduct firearm training classes.
5. Officers will not exchange department issued firearms for any reason unless approved by the chief or
his designee. The administrative lieutenant will document the assignment of all department firearms.
6. Officers shall not carry any unapproved firearm or ammunition while on-duty or when working an
approved off-duty assignment of a law enforcement nature.
7. Personal firearms will not be carried on-duty at any time, except for transporting to the range for
qualification with the range instructor.
8. The firearm range instructor will maintain Range Qualification Forms (FORM 307.PER (04)) while at
the range and submit them to the administrative lieutenant. The Range Qualification Form shall
contain a record of the officer, the range instructor, the date at the range, the department issued and off-
duty firearms being used for qualification or familiarization to include the make, model, caliber, and
serial number, along with an indication of a pass or fail grade with the firearm.
E. Long-Guns:
1. Shotgun: Due to its wide shot dispersion, the shotgun should primarily be used when:
a. A possibility exists that the officer will be dealing with an armed suspect, e.g., armed robbery in
progress, searching for armed suspects;
b. Answering calls when the complainant has indicated a person is armed; or
c. Killing an animal as required.
7
112.ADM
2. Patrol Rifle: The patrol rifle may be used when:
a. A possibility exists that the officer will be dealing with an armed suspect, e.g., armed robbery in
progress, searching for armed suspects;
b. Answering calls when the complainant has indicated a person is armed; or
c. Killing an animal as required.
F. Care and Maintenance:
1. Sworn employees shall be responsible for keeping all firearms issued to them clean and in proper
working condition at all times. No modifications and/or changes are to be made to issued firearms by
the sworn employee to whom they are issued, or by public or private repair shops. All repairs or
adjustments shall be made by a department armorer, or shall be sent to the manufacturer as directed by
the chief. All firearms should be test fired subsequent to any repairs being made to them by the
department armorer or the manufacturer. Test fires shall be done safely at locations such as a shooting
range.
2. All officers shall safely secure their issued firearms in such a manner as to not endanger life or limb.
Failure to do so may subject the sworn employee to criminal, civil, and administrative actions.
3. Yearly firearm inspections should be completed on issued handguns by the department armorer. When
possible, patrol rifles and shotguns should be inspected as well.
G. Off-Duty Carry:
The carrying of an off-duty handgun is not required, but will be at the option of the individual sworn
employee in accordance with 18.2-308 (C) of the Code of Virginia and Title 18 Section 926 B of the
United States Code. If the sworn employee elects to carry their issued handgun off duty, only issued
ammunition may be carried in the department handgun. Should the sworn off-duty employee be placed in
situation where official action is required, they will act in accordance with all applicable laws and
department policies.
Sworn employees may elect to carry their own handgun while off-duty in compliance with state and federal
laws. The sworn employee shall qualify annually with their handgun on a department prescribed off-duty
handgun course, and shall be able to clear, field strip, and re-assemble the handgun.
Any time an officer is off-duty and is armed, he/she must carry proper police credentials.
VII. LIMITATIONS ON FORCE:
A. The following acts associated with the use of force are strictly prohibited:
1. Firing a warning shot.
2. Firing at or from a moving vehicle, except where the officer reasonably believes that:
a. An occupant of the other vehicle is using, or threatening to use, deadly force by a means other
than
the vehicle; or
b. A vehicle is operated in a manner deliberately intended to strike an officer or a citizen, and all
8
112.ADM
other reasonable means of defense have been exhausted (or are not present), which includes
moving out of the path of the vehicle, and the safety of innocent persons would not be unduly
jeopardized by the officer's action.
3. Firing into a building or through doors when the person fired at is not clearly visible unless officers are
being fired upon from such building or through such door.
4. Firing into a crowd.
5. Firing at a suspect when lesser force could be used, when the officer believes that the suspect can be
apprehended reasonably soon thereafter without the use of deadly force, or when there is any
substantial danger to innocent bystanders. (When in doubt, don't shoot.)
6. Application of restraint to the neck such as a choke hold or carotid control hold, except when the
officer reasonably believes such holds are the only means of protecting him/herself or another person
from an imminent threat of serious physical injury or death.
7. Use of flashlights as batons. An officer may use a flashlight or other object designed for a use other
than as a weapon ONLY to defend himself/ herself or another from imminent serious physical injury or
death and ONLY if departmentally sanctioned methods are not available or are impractical.
9. Carrying or use of any non-issued firearm, or non-issued non-lethal weapon (such as blackjacks, saps,
etc.) while on duty.
10. Use of deadly force against:
a. Unarmed, non-dangerous fleeing felons,
b. Unarmed, non-dangerous fleeing misdemeanant(s), or
c. Unarmed, non-dangerous fleeing traffic offenders.
11. Any use of force not reasonably necessary in the light of the circumstances confronting the officer.
B. Police officers operate within a legal framework which defines the amount of force which may be used. If
excessive force (more than is necessary) is used in making an arrest, the officer is liable to a civil suit and
to criminal prosecution as well. However, the fears of being accused of undue force must not influence an
officer to the extent that he/she jeopardizes his/her personal safety. The determining factors must be the
circumstances surrounding the arrest, the evaluation of the situation, and the officer's judgment.
The officer must consider the following factors in combination when assessing the need to use force.
1. The severity of the crime;
2. The nature and extent of the threat posed by the suspect;
3. Is the suspect submitting peacefully or is there resistance? What level is the resistance (e.g., Passive,
Active, Aggressive, Aggravated)?
4. Is the suspect armed or in proximity to weapons?;
5. The suspect’s mental state;
6. Prior history with the suspect or awareness of any propensity of violence;
9
112.ADM
7. How many subjects are involved and how much police assistance is available at the scene?;
8. Consideration of the officer’s and the suspect’s age, size, relative strength, and state of health.
C. It is the responsibility of each officer to provide and/or obtain first aid for anyone claiming or
needing medical attention after any degree of force is utilized by an officer.
VIII. DUTY TO INTERVENE
Officers of the South Boston Police Department have the duty and obligation to intervene, to prevent, or to
stop the known and apparent use of excessive force by another officer, including law enforcement officers
from other agencies, when it is feasible to do so, and to render aid as circumstances reasonably permit in
accordance with 19.2-83.6 of the Code of Virginia. Officers who intervene or witnesses another officer use,
or attempt to use excessive force shall report such intervention, use, or attempted use of excessive force
immediately to their supervisor and/or the patrol lieutenant. The witnessing officer shall also complete a
written report of the incident and submit it to their supervisor and/or the patrol lieutenant for an
administrative review. The officer(s) reported to have used excessive force shall be removed from active
patrol or investigative duties pending an internal investigation. If the law enforcement officer is from
another agency, the Chief of Police, or his designee, will contact the head of the other law enforcement
agency about the witnessed incident.
§ 19.2-83.6. Failure of a law-enforcement officer to intervene in use of excessive force.

A. Any law-enforcement officer who, while in the performance of his official duties, witnesses another law-
enforcement officer engaging or attempting to engage in the use of excessive force against another person shall
intervene, when such intervention is feasible, to end the use of excessive force or attempted use of excessive force,
or to prevent the further use of excessive force. A law-enforcement officer shall also render aid, as circumstances
reasonably permit, to any person injured as the result of the use of excessive force.
B. Any law-enforcement officer who intervenes pursuant to subsection A or who witnesses another law-
enforcement officer engaging or attempting to engage in the use of excessive force against another person shall
report such intervention or use of excessive force in accordance with the law-enforcement officer's employing
agency's policies and procedures for reporting misconduct committed by a law-enforcement officer. No employing
agency shall retaliate, threaten to retaliate, or take or threaten to take any disciplinary action against a law-
enforcement officer who intervenes pursuant to subsection A or makes a report pursuant to this subsection.
IX. REPORTING USE OF FORCE
A. Other than “Mere Presence” and “Verbal”, all officers shall document any physical application of force
utilizing the “USE OF FORCE REPORT (Form 112.ADM (01))”. This reporting shall also include
pointing a firearm to gain control/compliance as stated in section VI (C), and the use of Stop Sticks on a
motor vehicle which is covered in G.O. 202.OPR. Officers are not required to fill out a Use of Force form
for training purposes or department demonstrations.
B. If officers have employed chemical tools or any higher degree of force; or if a use of force results in an
injury or death they shall:
1. Immediately notify the sergeant or immediate supervisor (if the sergeant is unavailable);
2. Submit the “Use of Force Report Form” and, in cases involving the discharge of a firearm, the
“DISCHARGE FIREARM REPORT (Form 112.ADM (02))”, to the chief of police or his/her
designee, before the end of the officer's tour of duty. The same procedures and investigation will be
conducted for any accidental discharge of a firearm while on duty.
10
112.ADM
3. The on-duty supervisor shall notify the patrol lieutenant and chief of police of the use of force
incident resulting in serious physical injury or death as soon as possible. The chief of police, or the
patrol lieutenant, if the chief is unavailable, shall determine if the incident will be investigated
internally or by an outside agency.
C. Depending on the seriousness of any injury resulting from the application of force, whether to a citizen or
officer, the chief of police shall notify the town manager and, in case of death, the commonwealth's
attorney and the medical examiner.
X. DEPARTMENTAL RESPONSE TO USE OF FORCE

A. Assignment:
Pending administrative review, any officer who has taken the life of another person or who has caused
serious physical injury to another person will be removed from line-duty assignment until the situation
is resolved. This action protects both the officer's and the community's interests.
B. Review:
1. All reported uses of force (including reports under Duty to Intervene) will be reviewed by the
chief of police to determine whether:
a) departmental orders were violated;
b) relevant departmental policy was clearly understandable and effective to cover the situation;
and
c) departmental training was adequate;
2. The chief of police may convene a board of inquiry to examine an incident in which force was
applied. The board of inquiry will also ascertain training and policy needs.
C. Internal Investigations:
Internal investigations of serious applications of force (usually of compliance techniques and more
severe methods) shall be of two types conducted simultaneously;
1. an administrative investigation to determine whether department standards were followed;
2. a criminal investigation to detect lawbreaking. (The criminal investigation shall be discontinued

whenever the department and the commonwealth’s attorney are satisfied that no misconduct
occurred.)
D. Psychological Services;
Psychological follow-up of officers involved in incidents of serious physical injury or death may be
directed by the chief of police whenever deemed appropriate. During an internal investigation, the
department will do all within its power to avoid placement of a stigma on the officer whose actions or
application of force results in serious physical injury or death in the performance of duty.
1. Following an application of force incident resulting in death, the officer shall not return to duty
until a psychological evaluation has been conducted, and the officer has received counseling.
2. The officer may be required to participate in the Employee Assistance Program or be interviewed
or counseled by a psychologist provided by the town at no expense to the officer, prior to returning
11
112.ADM
to duty.
AUTHORIZATION:
__________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
12
112.ADM
NUMBER: May 15, 2017
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: ORGANIZATION OF THE DEPARTMENT
I. POLICY:
The department is established by law, Code of Virginia, 15.1-137, 15.1-143.1 and chapter 62 of the
South Boston Town Code. The department “shall consist of a chief of police, such regular officers and
employees as may be specified by the town manager. The police department shall be under the general
supervision of the town manager. The chief of police shall be the chief executive of the police
department, and he shall at all times enforce the rules and regulations for the government of the police
prescribed by the town manager...” The chief of police reports directly to the town manager. Police
officers are charged with enforcing the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia and all the ordinances
of the town of South Boston. Jurisdiction of the police department is limited to the town boundaries,
except when another department requests assistance, or when enforcing laws on property owned by the
town, but outside its boundaries. The organization of the police department will support the effective
and efficient accomplishment of departmental responsibilities and functions.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to describe the organization of the police department.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Organizational structure:
1. The Chief of Police is responsible for the direction of all activities of the department.
This direction will be accomplished through written and oral orders, policy, directives,
guidelines, and guidance as well as by personal leadership.
2. The department organizational structure includes persons to whom are assigned specific
responsibilities which include activities directly related to carrying out or supporting the
department's objectives.
3. The town council determines the number of officers that are required to protect and serve
the community.
B. Chain of Command:
The Chief of Police has full control over department activities. In the absence of the
Police Chief, the Deputy Chief shall take command and notify the Chief of all decisions
that he may make. If the Chief and the Deputy Chief are not available, the senior ranking
Lieutenant shall be in charge. If all of the above officials are not available, the highest
ranking officer shall be in charge until a ranking officer is available and shall make any
necessary reports to the chief.
Each organizational component within the Department (i.e. Administration, Patrol,

Investigations, etc.) shall be under the direct command of only one supervisor at any
113.ADM 1
given time.
In the day-to-day operations of the Department the normal chain of command shall be
followed with the highest ranking officer on duty making the needed decisions unless and
until relieved by a superior officer. In any exceptional situations the same procedures
shall be followed. In the event that two ranking officers are of the same rank, decisions
should be coordinated between the two officers with the senior ranking officer making
the final decision unless and until relieved by a superior officer.
C. Span of control:
For any major event in which all or most of departmental personnel will be on duty, and personnel
of different functions may be engaged in a single operation the Chief or Deputy Chief shall assign
an overall supervisor for the event. Plans for the event will clearly delineate the command and
structure and consider the span of control of that particular operation to ensure that each employee
is responsible to only one supervisor at any given time.
IV. ORGANIZATIONAL CHART:
The following chart denotes the chain of command and interdepartmental relationships:
(SEE PAGE 3)
113.ADM 2
TOWN MANAGER
CHIEF OF POLICE
Colonel
DEPUTY CHIEF
Captain
CROSSING
OFFICE GUARDS
MANAGER
CRIMINAL INVESTIGATOR(S) DRUG & GANG
Sgt/Cpl/POII INVESTIGATOR(S)
RECORDS Sgt/Cpl/POII
SPECIALIST
PATROL/OPERATIONS
SUPERVISOR
Lt ANIMAL
CONTROL
PROFESSIONAL OFFICER
STANDARDS ASST PATROL/OPERATIONS
Lt./Sgt/Cpl SUPERVISOR SCHOOL
FSgt RESOURCE
OFFICER
SHIFT A SHIFT B SHIFT C SHIFT D

SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR –
Sgt/Cpl Sgt/Cpl Sgt/Cpl Sgt/Cpl
ASSISTANT ASSTISTANT ASSISTANT ASSISTANT

SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR
Cpl/POII Cpl/POII Cpl/POII Cpl/POII
OFFICERS OFFICERS OFFICERS OFFICERS

POII/POI POII/POI POII/POI POII/POI
113.ADM 3
V. COMMAND STRUCTURE:
A. Administration Section
The Administration Section is commanded by the Captain who reports directly to the Chief of
Police. The Section serves a vital role within the Department and has the following
responsibilities:
1. Storing and controlling Department equipment and supplies.
2. Maintaining records and handling the submission of reports.
3. Ensure that all department personnel are up to date on training
4. Coordinating all activities and business within the department.
1. Patrol / Operations Supervisor
The Patrol / Operations Supervisor is a Lieutenant, as designated by the Chief of Police,

who reports directly to the Captain. The Lieutenant seeks to provide quality training to all
members of the Department to keep both sworn and civilian staff up to date on the most recent
law enforcement equipment, techniques, and procedures.
a. The Lieutenant is responsible for the planning, scheduling, coordination and

record keeping of all Department training which shall include, but not limited to:
1. Entry level training
2. Department mandated training
3. Department of Criminal Justice training mandated in-service training
4. Intermediate and advanced law enforcement training
5. Supervisory, middle management and command staff training
6. Remedial training
7. Maintaining a quality of training staff of Department instructors
b. In addition the Lieutenant shall maintain an individualized training file to

record
training received by both sworn and civilian members of the Department.
Further, the file shall include Department members who are:
1. Department of Criminal Justice Services members who are certified

instructors.
2. Breathalyzer technicians
3. Radar instructors
4. VCIN/NCIC certified operators
113.ADM 4
2. Assistant Patrol / Operations Supervisor
The Assistant Patrol / Administrative Supervisor is a First Sergeant, as designated by the Chief
of Police, who reports directly to the Lieutenant. The First Sergeant seeks to assist the Patrol /
Administrative Supervisor to provide quality training to all members of the Department to keep
both sworn and civilian staff up to date the most recent law enforcement equipment,
techniques, and procedures. In addition, the First Sergeant is responsible for:
a. Storing and controlling Department equipment and supplies
b. Preparing departmental documents as directed by the Chief of Police
c. Provide analysis and research in problem area
d. Providing for the control and security of department property
e. Supervising the upkeep of the building and arranging for maintenance and
custodial services
f. Establish and maintain a neighborhood crime prevention program
g. Involve business in crime prevention programs
h. Provide crime prevention seminars for the public
3. Office Manager / Records Specialist
Office Manager reports directly to the Captain and the Records Specialist reports directly to the
Office Manager. All personnel assigned to these positions are civilian employees of the
Police Department. The responsibilities of these positions include but are not limited to:
a. Providing the public reception function of the Department
b. Maintaining records of warrants, accidents, crime, arrests, and other incidents
c. Answering the police business telephone lines and sending and receiving teletype
messages of the Department
d. Maintaining court liaison and providing proper records to the court as needed
e. Inputting and maintaining data for the submission of Incident Based Reporting
reports
f. Disseminating official reports and records
4. Professional Standards Officer
The Professional Standards Officer is a Lt, Sgt, or Cpl position, as designated by the Chief of
Police, and reports directly to the Chief of Police. Responsibilities of the Accreditation
Manager:
a. Ensure that the Department general orders system is managed in compliance with
how the general orders outline.
b. Plan, research and implement special projects at the direction of the Chief of
113.ADM 5
Police
c. Provide program and policy analysis of ongoing departmental programs and

practices
d. Systematically establish, review and improve forms and documents used within
the Police Department
e. Disseminate information within the Department pertaining to issues that effect

Department General Order, Rules and Regulations and Command Directives
f. Ensure that the Virginia Law Enforcement Professional Standards Commission

(VLEPSC) Standards are continually met
g. Maintain accreditation standard folders containing documented proof of

compliance with established standards
h. Prepare for and manage any accreditation on-site assessments for re-accreditation
i. Annual review of general orders
B. Shift Supervisors
There are four uniformed patrol shifts in the Patrol Unit. All four shifts are rotating shifts each
commanded by a Sergeant who reports directly to the Patrol Lieutenant who is assisted by the First
Sergeant. The uniformed patrol shift responsibilities include:
1. All police line operations up to the point where a specialized component must
take over, due to the complexity or nature of the incident
2. Proactive patrol and crime prevention
3. Preliminary investigation of most crimes and complete investigation of others
4. Preparation of reports relating to crimes or incidents
5. Providing a variety of non-criminal services to the public
1. Specialized Units
a. S.R.T. (Special Response Team)
The S.R.T. is under the command of a Lieutenant or Sergeant who reports directly
to the Captain. All members of this team receive specialized training. This team is
responsible for:
1. Building searches that involve high risk, i.e. armed suspects
2. Dignitary protection
3. Warrant service involving high risk
4. Containing or resolving incidents involving hostages, barricaded armed suspects

or snipers
113.ADM 6
b. K-9 Officer
The K-9 officer is assigned to a shift and reports to that shift’s Sergeant. The K-9 officer
may respond to any situation where he or she can be utilized. The Department’s primary
objectives in the implementation of the canine officer is to:
1. Reduce crime and the fear of crime by high visibility patrol
2. To provide a support function to patrol
3. Use in a tactical role where crime analysis may suggest the need for saturation
patrol
4. Provide the Department a community relations aspect
c. School Resource Officer
The School Resource Officer is under the direct supervision of the Patrol Lieutenant with
assistance from the First Sergeant. This officer is charged with maintaining a close liaison
with the youth, parents and schools of the
Town of South Boston. The responsibilities of a School Resource Officer include:
1. Assisting classroom teachers in teaching specific lessons on crime awareness,

drug resistance and legal subjects.
2. Arranging field trips, guest speakers, and demonstrations on specific topics

relating to law enforcement and criminal justice.
3. Counseling and assisting students in need of assistance on legal matters, school

behavior problems, and personal problems.
4. Advising the school administration on matters pertaining to the handling of

juveniles, police procedures, and the criminal and juvenile justice system.
5. Keeping records of all school and police activities involving the school resource
officer.
6. Keeping police administration advised of program needs.
7. Providing necessary security to create a safe learning environment.
8. Ensure that every member of the public and department is treated with the
utmost dignity, respect and professionalism.
d. Animal Control Officer
The Animal Control Officer is a component of the Patrol Unit and is under the supervision of
the Patrol Lieutenant with assistance from the First Sergeant. The Animal Control Officer
responsibilities include:
1. Enforcement of state and local laws regulating animals within the Town
2. Maintaining animal control equipment belonging to the Town
3. Preparing reports and maintaining records on animal control actions
113.ADM 7
e. School Crossing Guards
School Crossing Guards are under the direct supervision of the Deputy Chief. These
members of the Department do not become involved in general law enforcement activities.
The basic responsibilities of the School Crossing Guards are:
1. Control vehicular traffic at designated school crossings
2. Cross pedestrians traffic at designated school crossings
3. Report violations by drivers or pedestrians
4. Direct traffic at other assigned locations when necessary or assigned
C. Investigations Unit
The Investigations Unit is commanded by a Captain or Lieutenant who reports directly to the Chief
of Police. The unit is responsible for: crimes against persons, property crimes, and vice. Their
responsibilities include:
1. Investigate major crimes which occur in the Town of South Boston
2. Cause to be collected, identified and preserved any necessary physical evidence

which has not previously been processed by the Patrol Unit
3. Prepare cases and present then to the Commonwealth Attorney for formal
charging and prosecution of offenders
4. Recover, identify and arrange for the return of recovered stolen or found
property to its rightful owner
5. Assist other elements of the Department in investigations, taking of statements,

and prosecution following the arrest of suspects and offenders
6. Assist Patrol Unit in the supervision and inspection of all public places within
the Town and assisting in the enforcement of laws and ordinances pertaining to
their operation
7. Communicate information obtained concerning crime, criminals, or suspects to

other elements of the Department as necessary for the proper coordination of the
police effort
8. Coordinate/serve warrants and other legal papers and to execute the required
returns in all cases where an Investigations Unit member is assigned or may be
assigned
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
113.ADM 8
113.ADM 9
March 2, 2006
SUBJECT: JOB FUNCTIONS AND ASSIGNMENT OF AUTHORITY
I. POLICY:
The department is established by law, Code of Virginia, 15.1-137, 15.1-143.1 and chapter 62 of the South
Boston Town Code. The department “shall consist of a chief of police, such regular officers and employees as
may be specified by the town manager. The police department shall be under the general supervision of the
town manager. The chief of police shall be the chief executive of the police department, and he shall at all times
enforce the rules and regulations for the government of the police prescribed by the town manager...” The chief
of police reports directly to the town manager. Police officers are charged with enforcing the laws of the
Commonwealth of Virginia and all the ordinances of the town of South Boston. Jurisdiction of the police
department is limited to the town boundaries, except when another department requests assistance, or when
enforcing laws on property owned by the town, but outside its boundaries. The organization of the police
department will support the effective and efficient accomplishment of departmental responsibilities and
functions.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to assign responsibilities, functions, and duties.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Authority and responsibility:
1. At every level within this department, personnel must be given the authority to make decisions
necessary for the effective execution of their responsibilities.
2. Each departmental employee will be held fully accountable for the use of, or failure to use, delegated
authority. Any employee who has any questions concerning his delegated authority should bring such
questions to the attention of his supervisor or the Chief of Police for prompt resolution. Legal
questions may be referred to the town attorney or the Commonwealth's Attorney.
3. Any gross improper use of authority or failure to accept authority will be reported through command
channels as rapidly as possible.
4. It is the responsibility of every member of the Department to ensure that every member of the public
and department is treated with the utmost dignity, respect, and professionalism.
5. Supervisory personnel are accountable for the performance of employees under their immediate
control.
B. Direction, obedience to orders:
The Chief of Police is the chief executive of the department. As such, the Chief of Police has full
1
114.ADM
authority and responsibility for the management, direction and control of the operation and
administration of the department. Both code and policy define certain areas of operation and
administration where the town manager or other officials have full responsibility or share responsibility
with the Chief of Police, and must be complied with.
C. Complaints:
1. Department personnel with complaints against other police personnel, except the Chief of Police, must
present such complaints to the Chief of Police through the chain of command. An employee
dissatisfied with the decision of the Chief of Police may appeal to the town manager in accordance
with Town policy.
2. Complaints by Department personnel against the Chief of Police must be presented in writing to the
town manager. The complainant must simultaneously deliver a copy of the complaint to the Chief of
Police.
D. Delegated Authority
1. Each member of the South Boston Police Department is vested with the delegated authority to make
decisions as necessary to accomplish the assigned task. Each member of the Department in whom
delegated authority is vested is accountable for the use of such delegated authority.
E. Lawful, Unjust, Illegal, or Conflicting Orders
1. All employees shall obey any lawful order of a superior including any order relayed from a superior by
an employee of the same or lesser rank.
2. Employees who are given orders they feel to be unjust, in conflict with previous orders or contrary to
the rules and regulations of the Department should notify the person giving the order of the conflict. If
the order is repeated and the negative view persists, the individual shall obey the order and then notify
the next higher supervisor in the chain of command. At the first opportunity the employee may report
the full facts of the incident to the Chief of Police.
3. Officers shall not obey any order which they know or should know would require them to commit any
illegal act. If in doubt as to the legality of an order, officers shall request the issuing officer to clarify
the order or to confer with higher authority. An officer who receives an order which he or she
reasonably believes would require him or her to commit an illegal act must at least question that order,
and refuse to obey it if not satisfied as to its legality. An officer may not be disciplined for questioning
the legality of an order.
V. JOB DESCRIPTIONS:
A. CHIEF OF POLICE (Colonel)
1. General Definition and Conditions of Work:
Under limited supervision, performs complex professional and difficult administrative work directing
all activities of the Police Department. Plans, directs the implementation and ensures the effectiveness
of law enforcement services and programs. Has the authority to promulgate rules and regulations for
the conduct of the members of the police department and such rules and regulations are subject to the
approval of the town manager and shall be in conformity with the laws of the state and the provisions
of the South Boston Town Code. Supervision is exercised over all department personnel. Reports to
the Town Manager.
2
114.ADM
This is sedentary work requiring the exertion of up to 150 pounds of force occasionally, and/or a
negligible amount of force frequently or constantly to lift, carry push, pull or otherwise move objects;
focal communication is required for expressing or exchanging ideas by means of the spoken word;
hearing is required to perceive information at normal spoken word levels; visual acuity is required for
preparing and analyzing written or computer data, visual inspection involving small defects and/or
small parts, operation of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the accuracy and thoroughness of
work, and observing general surroundings and activities; the worker is subject to inside and outside
environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme, noise, vibration, and hazards. The worker may be
exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be required to wear specialized personal protective
equipment.
2. Essential Functions/Typical Tasks:
Responsible for the enforcement of all applicable laws and ordinances.
Ensure that mission and values of the Department are advanced while ensuring that every member of
the public and Department are treated with the utmost dignity, respect, and professionalism.
Planning, organizing and directing all police operations; coordinating work with other department
agencies, local officials, and Town Manager; maintaining records and reports; and ensures the
maintenance of Department files.
Plans, programs, directs, and evaluates the operation of the Police Department; Identifies needed
policy and operational changes and implements same.
Develops annual budget proposal and controls budgeted expenses
Formulates and implements police policy, procedures, rules, regulations and programs
Prepares and reviews operational and administrative reports
Directs the work of subordinate supervisors who in turn supervise police officers and other personnel.
Performs a variety of administrative duties associated with supervising staff, to include promoting,
assigning, interviewing, instructing, evaluating and disciplining. Advise and assists subordinates with
complex police investigations and other difficult or sensitive work issues.
Assumes command of police force in emergencies and other major law enforcement operations.
Receives and disposes of complaints, attends civic club and school meetings to explain the activities
and functions of the police department and to establish a favorable public image in the community.
Makes periodic public addresses concerning police operations and law enforcement;
Meets with the news media for interviews; issues news releases;
Attends meetings and serves on committees, boards and agencies related to promoting crime
prevention and improving law enforcement;
Evaluates and implements Federal State law mandates.
Performs related tasks as required.
3
114.ADM
3. Additional Job Functions:
Performs a variety of office administration duties associated with directing the Police Department, such
as answering phone calls, using the office computers to research, obtain and record information, etc.
Plans for and coordinates training for Police personnel.
Ensures the maintenance of Police equipment.
Performs other work as assigned.
4. Minimum Training and Experience Training:
Graduation from college with major in criminal justice, law enforcement, public administration or a
related field. Requires 10 - 15 years of progressively responsible police and law enforcement
experience which includes experience supervising police officers and other law enforcement staff; or
any equivalent combination of training and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills
and abilities.
5. Special Requirements:
Must pass the Basic Law Enforcement as administered through an accredited police academy. Must
complete 40 hours of in-service training bi-annually. Must possess a valid driver's license issued by the
Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Firearms.
6. Knowledge of Job:
Has thorough knowledge of the laws, rules and regulations relating to the administration of criminal
justice and law enforcement; thorough knowledge of the geography of the municipality; and
thorough knowledge of scientific methods and practices of crime prevention, crime
detection, criminal identification and radio communication. Has thorough
knowledge of the use of police records and information systems and their use in solving police
problems; thorough knowledge of the trends, and developments in the field of law
enforcement.
General knowledge of supervisory principles and practices. Is skilled in the use and care of a wide
range of police equipment. Is able to analyze complex administrative and technical police problems
and to plan police and law enforcement programs accordingly. Is able to exercise independent
judgment and initiative to ensure that local police execute police operations in a professional manner
according to established policies and procedures. Is able to plan, direct, and coordinate the work of
subordinates. Is able to understand and follow written and oral instructions; and to communicate
effectively orally and in writing. Is able to exercise tact, courtesy, and firmness in contacts with Town
personnel, other agencies, local organizations, and the general public. Is able to establish effective
working relationships as necessitated by work assignments.
7. Acting Chief of Police
In the absence of the Chief of Police, an “Acting Chief of Police” shall be designated by the Chief in
conformation with this directive. Such assignment will remain in effect during the absence of the Chief of
Police or for the time specified by the Chief.
The person assuming command shall have all the power and responsibility of the Chief of Police, except
during the following instances, unless specifically authorized by the Chief of Police:
4
114.ADM
Selection and appointment of new personnel
Dismissals
Promotions
Demotions
Modification of the rules, regulations, procedures, or department policies in non-emergency instances.
B. DEPUTY CHIEF (CAPTAIN)
Under general supervision, supervises and engages in law enforcement and protective service
activities. Work involves assigning, supervising and providing protection and law enforcement services
in order to deter crime or apprehend violators or suspects and to secure crime scenes. Employee is
subject to the usual hazards of law enforcement work. Performs difficult protective service and
administrative work assisting in directing of the Police Department; does related work as required.
Work is performed under the general supervision of the Police Chief. Supervision is exercised over
department personnel in the absence of the Police Chief. Reports to Police Chief.
This is sedentary work requiring the exertion of 150 pounds of force occasionally, and/or a negligible
amount of force frequently or constantly to lift, carry, push, pull or otherwise move objects; work
requires climbing, balancing, stooping, kneeling, crouching, crawling, reaching, standing, walking,
pushing, pulling, lifting, fingering, grasping, and feeling; vocal communication is required for
expressing or exchanging ideas by means of the spoken word; hearing is required to perceive
information at normal spoken word levels; visual acuity is required for preparing and analyzing written
or computer data, visual inspection involving small defects and/or small parts, use of measuring
devices, operation of machines, operation of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the accuracy
and thoroughness of work, and observing general surroundings and activities; the worker is subject to
inside and outside environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat, noise, vibration, hazards,
atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be
required to wear specialized personal protective equipment.
Assisting with the overall direction and supervision of the Police Department; overseeing files,
records, operations, personnel and support operations;
Plans, organizes and directs the operational planning for the patrol, services, and investigations
functions; Adjusts operational plans according to crime trends, special events and problem areas;
Coordinates operational training activities;
Assists
with recruiting, training, counseling, and disciplining of departmental staff;
Organizes and plans special events and functions which cross shift schedules, involve other
department divisions, other departments, or law enforcement agencies;
5
114.ADM
Directs patrol, services, and investigation programs;
Inspects
patrol, services and investigations operations, officers, and equipment on a random basis;
Briefs Chief of Police on operations and major incidents and crimes;
Assists
Chief of Police in formulating and implementing organizational goals, policies and
procedures, and with budget formulation and administration;
Acts
as Deputy Chief;
Performs related tasks as assigned.
Performs a variety of office administration duties associated with directing the Police Department,
such as answering phone calls, using the office computers to research, obtain and record information,
etc.
Ensures
the maintenance of Police equipment.
Performs
other work as assigned.
4. Minimum Training and Experience:
Graduation from college with major criminal justice, law enforcement, public administration or a
related field. Requires 5 - 10 years of progressively responsible experience which includes experience
supervising police officers and other law enforcement staff; or any equivalent combination of training
and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
Possession of an appropriate driver's license valid in the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must meet and
maintain all Town and State training and education requirements for position. Must complete 40 hours
of in-service training bi-annually. Must be certified in Firearms.
6. Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities:
Has thorough knowledge of the laws, rules and regulations relating to the administration of criminal
justice and law enforcement; thorough knowledge of scientific methods of crime detection, criminal
identification and radio communication; thorough knowledge of controlling laws and ordinances;
thorough knowledge of the geography of the locality; demonstrated ability to lead and direct the
6
114.ADM
activities of police officers; ability to evaluate the effectiveness of the police operation and to
institute improvement; ability to prepare and review reports; resourcefulness and sound judgment in
emergencies; demonstrated integrity; tact.
C. POLICE LIEUTENANT
Under general supervision, performs complex protective service and intermediate administrative work
directing all daily operations of a police division. Work involves managing and administering the
daily operations of an assigned division; scheduling, assigning personnel and equipment to meet
operational needs. Supervises subordinate protective, technical and technical staff. Reports to the
Captain.
information at normal spoken word levels; visual acuity is required for preparing and analyzing
written or computer data, visual inspection involving small defects and/or small parts, use of
measuring devices, operation of machines, operation of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the
accuracy and thoroughness of work, and observing general surroundings and activities; the worker is
subject to inside and outside environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat, noise, vibration,
hazards, atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and
may be required to wear specialized personal protective equipment.
2. Essential Job Functions:
Plans, organizes and directs the work of the Patrol, or Services Division. Assists with the
administration of the Police Department. Reviews and updates department operating policies and
procedures.
Plans and supervises the activities of Police Sergeants, Corporals, Investigators and Police Officers.
Performs a variety of administrative duties associated with the supervision of staff to include assigning,
interviewing, instructing, evaluating and disciplining.
Reviews and coordinates activities for various shifts; develops and implements duty assignments.
Provides guidance and direction to subordinates on difficult law enforcement problems.
Actively patrols the streets of the jurisdiction enforcing all criminal and traffic violations.
Assists with criminal investigations.
Receives complaints or reports of emergencies, determines appropriate action, and directs or assists staff
in responding.
Makes arrests and testifies in Court; and assists other officers in preparing for court testimony.
Schedules and provides in-service training to Police officers; develops and recommends training
programs.
7
114.ADM
Undertakes special assignments as directed by the Police Chief; conducts internal affairs investigations.
Prepares a variety or reports for officials and other Law Enforcement agencies.
Helps prepare and administer the department budget.
Performs a variety of duties associated with directing the Police Department, such as answering phone
calls, using the office computers to research, obtain and record information, etc.
Graduation from high school or equivalent. Requires 5 - 10 years of progressively responsible police and
law enforcement experience which includes experience supervising police officers and other law
enforcement staff; or any equivalent combination of training and experience which provides the required
knowledge, skills and abilities.
Must pass the Basic Law Enforcement as administered through an accredited police academy within one
year of employment. Must complete 40 hours of in-service training bi-annually. Must possess a valid
driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Firearms.
D. FIRST SERGEANT
Under general supervision, performs complex protective service and intermediate administrative work
directing all daily operations of a police division assigned. Work involves managing and administering
the daily operations of an assigned division; scheduling, assigning personnel and equipment to meet
operational needs. Supervises subordinate protective, technical and technical staff. Reports to the
Lieutenant.
information at normal spoken word levels; visual acuity is required for preparing and analyzing
written or computer data, visual inspection involving small defects and/or small parts, use of
measuring devices, operation of machines, operation of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the
accuracy and thoroughness of work, and observing general surroundings and activities; the worker is
subject to inside and outside environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat, noise, vibration,
hazards, atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and
may be required to wear specialized personal protective equipment.
2. Essential Job Functions:
8
114.ADM
Assists with planning, organizing and directing the work of the Patrol Division. Plans, organizes, and
directs the work of the Services Division which includes the school resource officer and animal control
officer. Assists with the administration of the Police Department.
Plans and supervises the activities of Police Sergeants, Corporals, and Police Officers.
Performs a variety of administrative duties associated with the supervision of staff to include assigning,
interviewing, instructing, evaluating and disciplining.
Reviews and coordinates activities for various shifts; develops and implements duty assignments.
Provides guidance and direction to subordinates on difficult law enforcement problems.
Actively patrols the streets of the jurisdiction enforcing all criminal and traffic violations.
Assists with criminal investigations.
Receives complaints or reports of emergencies, determines appropriate action, and directs or assists staff
in responding.
Makes arrests and testifies in Court; and assists other officers in preparing for court testimony.
Schedules and provides in-service training to Police officers; develops and recommends training
programs.
Undertakes special assignments as directed by the Police Chief; conducts internal affairs investigations.
Prepares a variety or reports for officials and other Law Enforcement agencies.
Helps prepare and administer the department budget.
Performs a variety of duties associated with directing the Police Department, such as answering phone
calls, using the office computers to research, obtain and record information, etc.
Graduation from high school or equivalent and successful completion of Police Academy training.
Requires 3-5 years of progressively responsible experience performing law enforcement work; or any
combination of training and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
Must pass the Basic Law Enforcement as administered through an accredited police academy within
one year of employment. Must complete 40 hours of in-service training bi-annually. Must possess a
valid driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Firearms. Must
hold the most senior Sergeant position at time position becomes available.
9
114.ADM
E. SERGEANT
Under general supervision, supervises and engages in law enforcement and protective service activities
on an assigned shift. Work involves assigning, supervising, and providing protection and law enforcement
services in order to deter crime or apprehend violators or suspects and to secure crime scenes. Employee
is subject to the usual hazards of law enforcement work. Reports to the First Sergeant or other authority.
This is medium work requiring the exertion of 150 pounds of force occasionally, up to 120 pounds of
force frequently, and up to 110 pounds of force constantly to move objects; work requires climbing,
balancing, stooping, kneeling, crouching, crawling, reaching, standing, walking, pushing, pulling,
lifting, fingering, grasping, and feeling; vocal communication is required for expressing or exchanging
ideas by means of the spoken word; hearing is required to perceive information at normal spoken word
levels; visual acuity is required for preparing and analyzing written or computer data, visual inspection
involving small defects and/or small parts, use of measuring devices, operation of machines, operation
of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the accuracy and thoroughness of work and observing
general surroundings and activities; the worker is subject to inside and outside environmental
conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat, noise, vibration, hazards, atmospheric conditions and oils. The
worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be required to wear specialized personal
protective equipment.
Supervises shift operations and activities of the department for an assigned shift.
Instructs subordinate officers and civilian personnel; assigns patrol district or other shift assignment; and
procedures in patrol, investigations, traffic or other assigned areas.
Directs and evaluates the work of subordinate employees; counsels guides, and disciplines when
necessary; supervises subordinates' preparation of reports and investigations.
Receives complaints or reports of emergencies; determines need for action; and directs or assists
subordinates in handling difficult problems and responding to emergencies/calls appropriately.
Supervises and engages in criminal investigations and stakeouts; interviews crime scene witnesses,
suspects and crime victims.
Makes arrests; and appears in court as witness to give testimony.
May be assigned to special projects such as accreditation program, traffic safety, etc.
Conducts internal affairs investigations. Prepares news releases.
Reviews and prepares a variety of police reports and forms such as incident reports, daily activity reports,
vehicle maintenance reports, etc.
Monitors traffic flow and helps to clear traffic jams.
Directs and/or escorts funeral attendees.
10
114.ADM
Inspects parking zones and issues parking tickets to violators.
Assists other Town departments such as Fire department and Public Works.
Requires 3-5 years of progressively responsible experience performing law enforcement work; or any
combination of training and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
valid driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Firearms.
E. CORPORAL
Under general supervision, supervises and engages in law enforcement and protective service
activities on an assigned shift. Work involves assigning, supervising and providing protection and
law enforcement services in order to deter crime or apprehend violators or suspects and to secure
crime scenes. Employee is subject to the usual hazards of law enforcement work. Reports to a
Police Sergeant or other authority.
force frequently and up to 110 pounds of force constantly to move objects; work requires climbing,
lifting, fingering, grasping, and felling, vocal communication is required for conveying detailed or
important instructions to others accurately, loudly and quickly; hearing is required to receive detailed
information through oral communications and/or to make fine distinctions in sound; visual acuity is
required for preparing and analyzing written or computer data, visual inspection involving small
defects and/or small parts, use of measuring devices, operation of machines, operation of motor
vehicles or equipment, determining the accuracy and thoroughness of work, and observing general
surroundings and activities; the worker is subject to inside and outside environmental conditions,
extreme cold, extreme heat, noise vibration, hazards, atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker
may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be required to wear specialized personal protective
equipment.
Supervises shift operations and activities of the department for an assigned shift in absence of a
Sergeant.
Instructs subordinate officers and civilian personnel; assigns patrol district or other shift assignment;
and procedures in patrol, investigations, traffic or other assigned areas. Directs and evaluates the work
of subordinate employees; counsels guides, and disciplines when necessary; supervises subordinates'
preparation of reports and investigations.
11
114.ADM
Receives complaints or reports of emergencies; determines need for action; and directs or assists
subordinates in handling difficult problems and responding to emergencies/calls appropriately.
Supervises and engages in criminal investigations and stakeouts; interviews crime scene witnesses,
suspects and crime victims. Makes arrests; and appears in court as witness to give testimony.
May be assigned to special projects such as accreditation program, traffic safety, etc.
Conducts internal affairs investigations. Prepares news releases.
Reviews and prepares a variety of police reports and forms such as incident reports, daily activity
reports, vehicle maintenance reports, etc.
Monitors traffic flow and helps to clear traffic jams.
Directs and/or escorts funeral attendees.
Inspects parking zones and issues parking tickets to violators.
Assists other Town departments such as Fire Department and Public Works.
Requires 3 - 5 years of progressively responsible experience performing law enforcement work; or any
combination of training and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills, and abilities.
valid driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Firearms.
F. POLICE OFFICER II
Under general supervision, performs law enforcement work to protect the lives, property, and
rights of the public for the town Police Department. Work involves responding to calls and
complaints requesting protective services or assistance; investigating the activities and events
prompting the calls; and taking action to resolve problems and restore law enforcement. Duties
also include investigating crimes and drug activities; securing evidence; apprehending criminal
offenders; and presenting evidence in court. Employee is subject to the usual hazards of law
enforcement work. Reports to a Police Sergeant, Police Corporal or
other authority.
12
114.ADM
lifting, fingering, grasping, and felling, vocal communication is required for conveying detailed or
important instructions to others accurately, loudly and quickly; hearing is required to receive detailed
information through oral communications and/or to make fine distinctions in sound; visual acuity is
extreme cold, extreme heat, noise vibration, hazards, atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker may
be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be required to wear specialized personal protective
equipment.
Patrols an assigned area of the Town, monitors radio calls; inspects troublesome areas and checks
security of business establishments.
Responds to calls and complaints received by persons within the Town. Investigates crimes and
disturbances; arrests suspected lawbreakers; interviews witnesses and prepares investigation reports.
Investigates accidents; performs first aid as needed; secures and clears accident scenes; and directs
traffic.
Provides assistance to the general public; counsels and refers people with family problems to
appropriate human services agencies; and answers questions regarding police policies, procedures
and public laws.
Investigates crimes and illegal drug activities. Uses investigative techniques and questions witnesses
and informants; examines crime scenes; conducts interviews and interrogations; reviews files and
current bulletins, maintains surveillance on suspects and determined appropriate actions based upon
preliminary investigative results, evidence, etc.
Works with local drug task forces and other organizations in deterring, preventing and prohibiting
illegal drug activities.
Serves legal papers such as summons and warrants; explains briefly the meaning of the papers served
and makes arrests when necessary.
Appears in court as witness to give testimony.
Conducts interviews and interrogations to obtain information regarding incidents and crimes.
Trains new officers in the field. Serves as leader to Police Officer I personnel in absence of
Police Sergeant and Police Corporal.
Prepares a variety of police reports and forms such as incident reports, daily activity reports,
vehicle maintenance reports, etc. Prepares investigative reports documenting case information,
activities and findings.
Performs maintenance checks on police vehicles.
Reports unsafe conditions in Town streets, public facilities, etc.
13
114.ADM
May assist disabled motorists.
Operates 911 equipment.
Escorts funeral attendees, parades and public figures.
Requires 3 years of experience performing law enforcement work; or any combination of training
and experience with provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
Must pass the Basic Law Enforcement test as administered through an accredited police academy
within one year of employment. Must complete 40 hours of in-service training bi-annually. Must
possess a valid driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia. Must be certified in Radar
and Firearms usage.
G. POLICE OFFICER I
Under general supervision, performs law enforcement work to protect the lives, property and rights of
the public for the town Police Department. Work involves patrolling throughout the Town in an
official vehicle, motorcycle or on foot to deter crime; and responding to calls for protective services
or assistance. Employee is subject to the usual hazards of law enforcement work. Reports to a Police
Sergeant, Police Corporal or Police Officer II.
lifting, fingering, grasping, and feeling; vocal communication is required for conveying detailed or
important instructions to others accurately, loudly, or quickly; hearing is required to receive detailed
information through oral communications and/or make fine distinctions in sound; visual acuity is
extreme cold, extreme heat, noise, vibration, hazards, atmospheric conditions, and oils. The worker
may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may be required to wear specialized personal protective
equipment.
Patrols an assigned area of the Town; monitors radio calls, inspects troublesome areas and
checks security of business establishments.
Responds to calls and complaints received by persons within the Town. Investigates crimes
and disturbances; arrests suspected lawbreakers; interviews witnesses and suspects; and
prepares investigation reports.
14
114.ADM
Investigates accidents; performs first aid as needed; secures and clears accident scenes; and
directs traffic.
Provides assistance to the general public; counsels and refers people with family problems to
appropriate human services agencies; and answers questions regarding police policies,
procedures and public laws.
Serves legal papers such as summons and warrants; explains briefly the meaning of the
papers served and makes arrests when necessary.
Prepares a variety of police reports and forms such as incident reports, daily activity reports,
vehicle maintenance reports, etc.
Performs maintenance checks on police vehicles.
Reports unsafe conditions in Town streets, public facilities, etc.
May assist disabled motorists.
Operates 911 equipment.
Escorts funeral attendees, parades and public figures.
Communicates with the public via community policing.
Graduation from high school or equivalent and successful completion of Police Academy
training. Requires experience through in-service training which is part of the Academy
program.
Must pass the Basic Law Enforcement test as administered through an accredited police
academy within one year of employment. Must complete 40 hours of in-service training bi-
annually. Must possess a valid driver's license issued by the Commonwealth of Virginia.
Must be certified in Radar and Firearms usage.
H. ANIMAL CONTROL OFFICER
Responds to calls for animal control. Work significantly impacts the safety of the general public.
Reports to a Police Lieutenant, Police Sergeant or other authority. This is light work requiring the
exertion of up to 90 pounds of force occasionally, up to 60 pounds of force frequently, and a negligible
amount of force constantly to move objects; work requires climbing, balancing, stooping, kneeling,
crouching, crawling, reaching, standing, walking, pushing, pulling, lifting, fingering, grasping, feeling,
and repetitive motions; vocal communication is required for expressing or exchanging ideas by means
15
114.ADM
of the spoken word, and conveying detailed or important instructions to others accurately, loudly, or
quickly; hearing is required to perceive information at normal spoken word levels, and to receive
detailed information through oral communications and/or to make fine distinctions in sound; visual
acuity is required for preparing and analyzing written or computer data, visual inspection involving
small defects and/or small parts, assembly of fabrication of parts at or within arms length, operation of
machines, operation of motor vehicles or equipment, determining the accuracy and thoroughness of
work, and observing general surroundings and activities.
The worker is subject to inside and outside environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat,
hazards, and atmospheric conditions. the worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens and may
be required to wear specialized personal protective equipment.
Responds to calls and complaints received by persons within the Town. Investigates crimes; arrests
suspected lawbreakers; interviews witnesses and suspects; and prepares reports.
Provides assistance to the general public; counsels and refers people to appropriate service agencies;
and answers questions regarding policies, procedures and public laws.
Serves legal papers such as summons and warrants; explains briefly the meaning of the papers served
and makes arrests when necessary.
Prepares a variety of reports and forms such as incident reports, daily activity reports, vehicle
maintenance reports, etc.
Obtains necessary information to determine appropriate animal control or pick up response. Gathers
necessary equipment and responds to site to resolve problem. Obtains information from dispatch and
determines the appropriate response.
Directs and/or escorts funeral traffic.
Files attendance sheets.
Graduation from high school or equivalent. Any equivalent combination of training and experience
which provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
Animal control and infection disease certifications.
I. ADMINISTRATIVE ASSISTANT / OFFICE MANAGER / RECORDS SPECIALIST
1. General Definition and Conditions of Works:
Under general supervision, performs a variety of clerical and administrative duties for the Police
16
114.ADM
Department. Reports to Police Chief, Police Captain, or other authority.
This is sedentary work requiring the exertion of up to 10 pounds of force occasionally and a
negligible amount of force frequently or constantly to move objects; work requires fingering,
grasping, feeling, and repetitive motions; vocal communication is required for expressing or
exchanging ideas by means of the spoken word; hearing is required to perceive information at
normal spoken word levels; visual acuity is required for preparing and analyzing written or computer
data; the worker is not subject to adverse environmental conditions.
Prepares a variety of documents, reports, meeting minutes and correspondence in accordance with
guidelines, formats and deadlines provided by program schedules, police officers and management.
Maintains departmental files and other operational information and records.
Procures supplies and information for programs; maintains inventory on supplies and equipment; and
assigns accounting codes to billing invoices. Researches and documents information in support of police
activities.
Schedules and establishes travel arrangements for police personnel.
Answers phones and answers general inquiries or refers to appropriate staff.
Provides assistance and clerical support as requested.
Provides clerical support for Crime Prevention Officer as needed.
Files records, reports, correspondence and other information; and orders office supplies.
Graduation from high school or equivalent, supplemented by course work in typing, business practices or
related field. Requires 1 - 2 years of experience performing clerical or secretarial work; or any equivalent
combination of training and experience which provides the required knowledge, skills, and abilities.
Requires a valid Virginia driver's license.
J. SCHOOL CROSSING GUARD
1. General Definition and Conditions of Works:
Under the general supervision of the Chief of Police ensures the safe conduct of people and traffic in
school crossing areas. Problems encountered are routine in nature. Requires a high degree of
independence and has frequent exposure to risk situations. Reports to Police Sergeant, Corporal, Police
Officer II or other authority.
The worker is subject to the outside environmental conditions, extreme cold, extreme heat, hazards,
17
114.ADM
and atmospheric conditions. The worker may be exposed to blood borne pathogens.
Work traffic for children crossing the street and bus traffic.
Graduation from high school or equivalent. Any equivalent combination of training and experience
which provides the required knowledge, skills and abilities.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
18
114.ADM
NUMBER: August 1, 2012
November 30, 2006
SUBJECT: MAINTAINING RECORDS OF CALLS FOR SERVICE
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department participates in the National Uniform Crime Reporting/Incident Based
Reporting system and reports data via the Virginia Central Criminal Records Exchange.
The Halifax Emergency Operations Center (EOC) receives and assigns all of the South Boston Police
Department’s “calls for service”. The calls include, but are not limited to, reports of crime, citizen reqests/calls
for service, and other matters affecting the safety of the community. The EOC also handles all of the
Department’s radio traffic from officers that have initiated enforcement actions, which include criminal
investigations, arrests, citations and summonses and incidents where the officers have dealt with non-criminal
matters and/or public safety hazards. The EOC assigns a unique number to every agency identified incident.
II. PURPOSE:
Activities related to police action are referred to as “calls for service.” The EOC records information about the
dispatch and assignment of officers and the nature of these calls for service in CAD. The information recorded
in CAD is entered into a computer database on the Department’s local area network that is known as “calls for
service.” This data can be accessed by members of the Department for analysis and reference. The purpose of
this general order is to explain the departments record keeping system.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Incidents required to be reported:
The South Boston Police Department will report/document the following incidents that are alleged to have
occurred in the town limits of South Boston as well as those that a South Boston Police officer are assigned,
outside of the town limits, when requested to do so by Halifax County Sheriff's Office:
1. Citizen reports of crime;
2. Citizen requests/calls for service;
3. When an officer is dispatched or assigned;
4. Criminal and non-criminal cases initiated by law enforcement officers;
5. Incidents involving arrests, citations, or summonses.
B. Criminal Record System:
The criminal record system of the South Boston Police Department is compatible with the requirements of
the Virginia Central Criminal Records Exchange and records are accessible 24 hours a day. Terminals that
contain access to these records are available in the Records Department and administrative officer’s offices.
115.ADM 1
C. Automation: (Departments Computer System)
1. The South Boston Police Department Computer System maintains an electronic alphabetical master
name index. The following files are maintained electronically:
a. Incidents by type of offense or report;
b. Incidents by location; and
c. Stolen, found, recovered and evidentiary property files.
D. Field Reports:
1. The following reports and the information blocks contained on them will be filled out if applicable.
All officers are required to fill out the following field reports for any criminal investigation that they
respond to or initiate as well as any vehicle accident:
a. Accident report (FR 300P)
b. Incident Based Report (IBR) & Supplemental Report
c. Request for Laboratory Examination (DFS 70-001)
d. CCRE (SP-180)
2. All reports will be forwarded to the on-duty shift supervisor for approval, who will either:
a. Return the report to the submitting officer for corrections;
b. If needed return a copy of report to the submitting officer to be placed in his/her case file until
conviction;
c. In cases where property is involved, return copy of the report to the submitting officer so that the
officer can attach the report to the property and place in the evidence room; or give to the records
supervisor for processing;
d. If appropriate, forward a copy of the report to the Chief of Police; or
e. If appropriate, forward the report (FR 300P) to the records supervisor for processing.
3. Dissemination of Incident Reports
a. Copies of an Incident Report that is released to the public will comply with the following guidelines.
Information that meets the following criteria will be redacted from the report:
1) Information that would affect ongoing investigations.
2) Information protected by the victim’s privacy act.
3) Information related to juveniles that are victims, witnesses or arrestees.
b. Parties involved in Incident Reports that demonstrate a need for the report such as proof of loss for
insurance or income tax purposes can be given a public copy, “Criminal Incident Form (Form
115.ADM 01)” of an incident report. This copy is generated by the records clerk/supervisor and
there is a three-dollar ($3.00) fee
115.ADM 2
for copies of incident reports. Proper identification will be required to receive the report.
d. Copies of Incident Reports may be given to another criminal justice agency if the agent requesting
the copy can demonstrate a need for the report. Need is generally defined as; the report is
necessary for them to carry out their official duty. Reports that are part of an ongoing
investigation should not be released until the assigned investigator has been consulted and
approved the report release. Proper identification will be required (badge with I.D.).
e. Required Incident Based Report information shall be retrieved from the Department’s database on
a monthly basis, and forwarded to the Virginia Department of State Police by the 15th day of the
month following the indexed month.
4. Dissemination of accident reports
a. Accident Reports (Virginia DMV Form FR-300) may be released to an interested party. Examples
of persons allowed access to Accident Reports are insurance company representatives, parties
involved in accidents and agents representing involved parties.
b. There is a two-dollar ($2.00) fee to help defray cost of copies and manpower involved in generating
reports.
c. Copies of accident reports will be provided to persons listed on the accident report upon presentation
of photo identification verifying identity.
d. Copies of accident reports will be provided to insurance company representatives or legal agents
that present the policy declaration page or signed information release of one of the involved parties.
e. Mail requests for accident reports will be filled provided that the request comes from an involved
party or is on letter head of the insurance company and cites the name of the insured and their policy
number.
f. The completed Police Accident Report (FR-300) is submitted electronically to the Virginia
Department of Motor Vehicles, Richmond, Virginia.
H. Release of information from Division of Motor Vehicle Files
a. The release of vehicle registration and driver’s license information maintained in the Department of
Motor Vehicle files is governed by applicable VCIN regulations as well as Virginia Code Sections 46.2-
208 and 46.2-210. Department personnel will only release information from DMV files to the following
people.
1) Sworn officers of this department or any other recognized law enforcement agency. (This included
Community Service Officers)
2) Agencies clearly involved in the administration of justice, such as the Commonwealth Attorney ‘s
Office, Magistrate, Judge, Court Clerk, Probation Officer, etc.
3) Towing companies may receive registration information on vehicles that they have towed at the
direction of this department. No other information shall be released.
I. Traffic Record System:
1. Traffic Accident data:
115.ADM 3
All officers of the department use state form, FR 300P, to record traffic accident data/information.
This report is turned over to the records supervisor for filing and safe keeping.
2. Citations/Arrest/Summons:
All citations/arrest/summons issued for traffic offenses are recorded in the Police Crime Information
System (PCI Base) by the records supervisor, and reports may be retrieved from the system in many
different forms.
3. Roadway Hazard Reports:
All reports of roadway hazards are entered as a complaint into the Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD
System) and can be retrieved to generate hazard reports when necessary.
4. Enforcement Analysis:
Information from concerned citizens as well as from any of the above sources can be compiled so that
a complete analysis can be done on traffic accidents and locations where more traffic enforcement is
needed.
J. Warrants and Wanted person Files:
1. Warrants and wanted person files are maintained by the EOC (Emergency Operations Center). Their
office is occupied 24 hours a day by employees of the EOC.
5. All outstanding warrants, where service is being attempted, are physically kept in a file/jacket along
with other documents awaiting due process. An officer picks this file/jacket up from the EOC and
upon service or attempted service of the warrant promptly returns the file/jacket to the EOC.
6. The Wanted Person file is maintained by the EOC and is handled in accordance with Va. Code 19.2-
76.1.
7. The entering of wanted persons into VCIN and NCIC are handled by the EOC and are done in
compliance with the VCIN Operating Manual and the NCIC Operating Manual.
8. Any notice received from other jurisdictions, BOL's or wanted person notice, or copies of the wanted
person file received from the EOC are placed in a read file for all officer viewing.
K. Records Retention Schedule:
All records are retained and disposed of in accordance with the schedules published by The Commonwealth
of Virginia, (The Library of Virginia, Records Management Division) "Records Retention and Disposition
Schedules."
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
115.ADM 4
November 30, 2006
SUBJECT: MAINTENANCE AND RELEASE OF CRIMINAL HISTORY

RECORDS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department shall create and maintain a record of each arrest. The
department shall maintain local criminal history information. The department will also contribute
arrest information to the Central Criminal Records Exchange (CCRE) and Federal Bureau of
Investigation (FBI) Criminal History Section. The department has access to automated criminal
history files and will use these files appropriately to conduct police business and insure public
safety.
II. PURPOSE:
The department must maintain accurate criminal history records and provide access to local, state
and national criminal history records. This access if for the use of agents involved in the
administration of justice. It will comply with all local, state and federal regulations regarding the
keeping and dissemination of criminal history information.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Maintenance and release of criminal history records by Records Department:
1. Records Section Access
a. The Records Department will be the repository for and will insure the safe keeping of all
department records related to incident reports, calls for service, arrests, summons and warrants for
both adults and juveniles.
b. No person shall have physical access to records maintained with the Records Department except
for those who are authorized to include members of the Records Department, the Halifax County
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office and members of the department who have a demonstrated need
for regular access and have approval from the Chief of Police for regular access.
2. Storage of records:
a. All records on adults and juveniles will be filed with the records clerk/supervisor who will
maintain them in separate but secure filing cabinets.
b. Arrest cards are maintained by members of the Records Department and the security and
control of the arrest cards is the responsibility of the Records Department supervisor.
c. Completed case files, fingerprints and photographs of an adult will be given to the records
clerk/supervisor, who will place them in a secure file cabinet.
d. The records clerk/supervisor will maintain physical security of the records and control access to
116.ADM 1
the files.
3. Local Criminal History Security and Maintenance - Adult
a. On arrests made by this department, data entry will be made from Incident Reports or a
Virginia Uniform Summons.
b. Data entry on arrests made by other jurisdictions for our department will be made from whatever
forms and information are provided by the arresting agency. The arrest entry will be as complete
as possible considering all information provided by the arresting agency.
c. The database created by this arrest data entry is the department’s local criminal history
information.
d. The department also has local criminal history information recorded in the old master name files.
e. Each charge in the arrest data will contain a document control number. This number corresponds
to the summons serial number or the document control number on the CCRE Form SP-180 and
SP-222 (Electronic Submission). This number insures proper recording of disposition on each
charge.
f. Each officer reports dispositions of cases to the records clerk/supervisor within 10 days after their
court date. Dispositions are then recorded by the Records Department staff on each charge within
20 days of receiving notification from the officer.
4. Local Criminal History Creation and Maintenance - Juvenile
a. The Records Department will create and maintain records of all detentions of juveniles made for or
by the South Boston Police Department.
b. The department will comply with the Virginia Code Section 16.1-299 through 16.1 309 when
handling juvenile records.
c. CCRE Form SP-180’s that document juvenile detentions will be handled separate from adult
paperwork. The original (top ) copy will be filed in the juvenile records filing cabinet and the
remaining parts of the SP-180 will be sent to the Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court.
d. Upon notification by Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court the department will destroy all copies
related to charges that receive other than delinquent dispositions.
e. Every detention for a charge that would be considered a criminal offense if committed by an adult,
will be entered into the departments database. Data entry will be done from an Incident Based
Report or a Virginia Uniform Summons. The arrest processing procedure specific to juveniles will
be followed. Special care will be taken to enter the correct data in the juvenile disposition field on
these charges. This enables members of the Records Department to segregate these records from
the adult records.
5. Local Criminal History Dissemination - Adult
a. Local criminal history information will be disseminated by Records Department personnel only or
persons requesting the information can contact Central Criminal Records Exchange to request all
reportable offenses. For non-reportable offenses the requesting party can go on-line onto the
Virginia Supreme Court Case Management System at www.courts.va.us. A form detailing how to
get criminal history information from the Central Criminal Records Exchange or from the Virginia
Supreme Court Case Management System is available in the Records Department and will be
116.ADM 2
provided upon request.
b. Local criminal histories currently exist in the computer database form and the old card file. These
old file (hard copy) are from the period prior to January 1, 1993. A local criminal history check
should include a query of both systems.
c. There will be a three dollar ($3.00) fee for local criminal history dissemination. Criminal Justice
agencies and other governmental agencies are exempt from this fee.
d. Local criminal history information will be disseminated as follows:
1) Sworn members of the South Boston Police Department:
a) A print out or written report of all charges regardless of disposition.
b) The dissemination log will be completed properly by the member of the Records
Department that is disseminating the information.
2) Sworn members of other criminal justice agencies:
a) A print out or written report of all charges regardless or disposition.
b) Proper identification will be required; this usually means badge and department
identification but the records clerk/supervisor knowledge of the individual making the
request and the individual being in uniform and displaying badge of authority can also be
taken into account.
c) The dissemination log will be completed properly by the member of the Records Department
that is disseminating the information.
3) In accordance with State and Federal law, individuals and agencies which require criminal
history information to implement a state or federal statue or executive order (examples of such
agencies are Department of Defense and other state or federal agencies that are not classified as
criminal justice) must follow the below procedure:
a) A local criminal history request form (Form 116.ADM (01)) must be completed and filed.
b) Proper identification will be required. This usually means department or agency

identification with photo.
c) The dissemination log will be completed properly by the member of the Records
d) The records clerk/supervisor will print out or write out a report and will redact the
following information: any and all Part A and Part B offense(s) for which there is no
disposition. Any old file history will be similarly redacted before release.
4) People requesting a copy of their own record must complete the following procendure:
a) Fill out a “Local Criminal History Request (Form 116.ADM 01).
b) Proper identification will be required; this usually means identification with photo.
116.ADM 3
5) Person requesting a copy as agent for subject of the criminal history:
a) A local criminal history request must be completed and filed. The request must contain
the notarized signature of the subject of the request.
b) Proper identification will be required; this usually mean identification with photo.
6. Errors and/or omissions to the local criminal history report
a. If an applicant states that there are errors and/or omissions to their local criminal history
information then the records supervisor or a department supervisor shall complete a review or
challenge of criminal offender record information form (Form 116.ADM (02)), shown on the
following page.
b. Upon a thorough review of the subjects local criminal history information if the record is found to
be in error the records supervisor will make the appropriate correction(s).
7. Local criminal history dissemination - Juvenile
a. Juvenile detention information will be released to appropriate criminal justice agencies only. The
department will only provide juvenile detention history to those criminal justice agency personnel
who have a demonstrated need for the information. The records department supervisor must
approve release of this information. Examples of appropriate release are as follows:
1. Commonwealth Attorney for prosecution purposes.
2. Juvenile Court appointed caseworker conducting a social history investigation.
3. Sworn law enforcement officer conducting an investigation related to the juvenile offender.
8. Juveniles:
a. Completed case files, fingerprints and photographs of a juvenile will be given to the records
department personnel, who will place them in a secure file cabinet separate from the adult records.
b. The administrative assistant will maintain physical security of the records and control access to the
files.
c. The records will not be released to anyone except law enforcement personnel.
9. Expungement and sealing of criminal history information:
a. The department will expunge and seal all information related to criminal arrests based on court
116.ADM 4
order. The following procedure will apply:
1) The department must be in receipt of a written request from the Central Criminal Records
Exchange. It must be accompanied by a petition and court order. The Records Department
supervisor will direct the compliance with this procedure and Virginia Code Section 19.2-
392.2. A Record Expungement Checklist (Form 116.ADM (03), will be completed through
the course of the expungement process and placed in the sealed envelope with the other
records referenced below.
2) The subjects master name file information will be removed from all records related directly to
the offense for which the expungement was ordered. This includes hard copies, computer files,
fingerprints, photographs, and any FBI or CCRE correspondence related to the charge. Both
the arrest record and the report need to be removed from database. They must however be
disconnected from the master name file and all references to the subject removed.
3) The expunged record will be placed in and envelope and sealed. Upon the front of the envelope
will be written “Expunged Record”, which is to be unsealed only by court order. The records
supervisor will assign a number to the expunged record and write that number on the envelope.
The number will correspond to secure expungement list of names. The sealed envelope will be
placed in a secure location designated for expunged records.
4) Once the expungement is complete, a letter will be forwarded to the Central Criminal Records
Exchange advising them that the expungement is complete and the record sealed.
5) In accordance with Virginia Code Section 19.2-392.3, an expunged record will not be opened
without a court order, nor will any acknowledgement of a prior record be given to any
requestor of such information.
B. Contributions to State and Federal Criminal History Records
1. The department will comply with Virginia Criminal Code Section 19.2-390 and other state and federal
regulations regarding the submission of criminal history information.
2. The department will submit arrest information on Part A offenses, committed by adults, to the Central
Criminal Records Exchange via the “Live Scan” processing unit or by the mailing of inked prints.
a. Exceptions to this procedure may occur in certain circumstances. In such cases arrangements for
processing and records submission will be made as soon as practical. Such circumstances may
include:
1) Mass arrest
2) Inoperative Live Scan System
3. Part B offenses, committed by adults will be reported to the Central Criminal Records Exchange after
conviction. If the subject was not processed at the time of the arrest then a member of the department
will process the subject if directed to by the court and turn the CCRE into the Records Department for
proper notification of relevant agencies. Typically processing of individuals after conviction in court is
handled by the Halifax County Sheriff’s Office.
4. The Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court is responsible for forwarding all information on juvenile
detentions and their dispositions to the CCRE and FBI.
C. Release and Destruction of Criminal History Information from CCRE, FBI, and III.
116.ADM 5
a. Release of criminal history information obtained through our VCIN terminal will comply with Virginia
Code Section 19.2-389. Officers who require a criminal history to further their investigation or arrest
processing may request a member of the Records Department, when available, to make an inquiry on the
subject’s name into the Virginia Crime Information Network (VCIN).
1) The resulting VCIN criminal history hard copy will be issued in the name of the officer requesting the
criminal history.
2) Once the criminal history hard copy has been received by the requesting officer, that officer is
responsible for its confidentiality and safekeeping.
b. Release of information will be made to criminal justice agency personnel only.
c. Only Records Department staff will make release of these records.
d. Members of this department when necessary, may share criminal history information obtained from the
Virginia Central Criminal Records Exchange, the Federal Bureau of Investigation or the Interstate
Identification Index with any authorized members of the criminal justice community.
1) Officer sharing criminal history information with a Magistrate, or any other authorized person, shall
not leave their hard copy report with the Magistrate or with any other person. Should a magistrate or
any other authorized person with whom an officer has shared their criminal history information with
requests to keep a hard copy of that criminal history report, the officer will inform that person that a
new criminal history report (secondary dissemination) can be generated in their name if they request.
e. Release of information will comply with all the requirements of the VCIN Operators Manual, Virginia
State Police, May 1999. This includes the logging of secondary dissemination as defined in the manual.
f. No member of this department shall maintain copies of these criminal histories in case files. All such
criminal histories shall be destroyed by shredding or burning after they have served the purpose
for which they were obtained.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
116.ADM 6
April 20, 2006
SUBJECT: PLANNING AND RESEARCH
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department conducts a variety of planning activities in areas such as crime analysis,
information systems, budgeting, manpower allocation, grant management, community demographics, and patrol
operations. The department’s administrative and supervisory officers under the direction of the Chief of Police
are responsible for these planning activities and procedures.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to explain how the department’s planning and research functions are
performed, to whom each of these functions and responsibilities are assigned, and ultimately, how the planning
and research managerial structures and relationships interact.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. General overview
Planning and research activities are essential to effectively managing the South Boston Police Department.
Increasing demands for law enforcement services and cost-effective management require that all operations
are carefully researched and future programs are adequately planned.
B. Planning and research functions are performed under the direct supervision of the Chief of Police and
include, but are not limited to, the following types of activities:
1. Long-range planning is assigned to the office of the Chief of Police. Additionally, the Chief
will routinely conduct multi-year planning with the Command Staff. This planning should
include, but is not limited to, department needs in the areas such as budget, equipment, manpower,
training, community relations, and crime fighting.
2. Operations planning is conducted by the Chief of Police and the Command Staff. In addition to
operational plans for events and activities, they develop and maintain standard operational procedures,
design preventative patrol activities, and publish policies and procedures known as general orders.
These orders are reviewed as scheduled for the purpose of deletion and revision.
3. The development of manpower allocation alternatives is a function of the Chief of Police and the
Command Staff.
4. The Patrol Lieutenant will analyze traffic accidents and enforcement patterns. The Office Manager will
provide any applicable data to the Patrol Lieutenant for this planning study.
5. Budgeting is a responsibility of the Chief of Police, coordinated by the Administrative Lieutenant and
developed with input from the Command Staff.
6. The gathering of Incident Based Reporting statistical information for departmental purposes is a
function of the Office Manager.
117.ADM
7. Systems analysis is a function shared by the Chief of Police and the Office Manager.
They will periodically review the department’s information management systems and attempt to
introduce state-of-the-art law enforcement application systems whenever possible.
8. All Command Staff will conduct “contingency planning” for their individual command operations.
This planning should cover issues such as command substitution, crisis management, and system
failure.
9. The Chief of Police is responsible for coordinating the department’s efforts to obtain monetary and
property grants. The Chief may assign members of any department component to tasks related to grant
acquisition, research, and management.
C. All Command Staff will perform planning and research activities as part of their normal staff duties. All
planning and research reports will be made directly to the Chief of Police.
D. The unit supervisors will analyze field operation activities to insure adequate resources are being applied
and enforcement measures are being taken. The analysis of field operations may include the collection of
“calls for service” data from the Computer-Aided Dispatch (CAD) system and crime reports. The extracted
reports should include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Time of day
2. Day of week
3. Month
4. Year
5. Shift
6. Reporting area
E. The Patrol Lieutenant and Investigations Lieutenant will produce statistical reports of patrol, investigative,
and special operations activities when requested to do so by the Chief of Police. At the direction of the
Chief of Police these reports shall be forwarded to the shift supervisors.
F. The Chief of Police will insure the department’s goals and objectives for its operations are well planned
and documented in order to provide for adequate staffing/operational funding for future years. Multi-year
considerations shall include:
1. Anticipated workload and population trends

2. Anticipated personnel levels
3. Anticipated capital improvements and equipment needs
AUTHORIZATION:
___________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
117.ADM
117.ADM
April 27, 2006
SUBJECT: CRIME ANALYSIS
I. POLICY:
Crime analysis is a law enforcement function utilized by the South Boston Police Department where by data
relating to crime is collected, analyzed, and disseminated. Data pertaining to crime and criminal activities is
primarily generated from records and reports within the department. The utilization of this data will assist in the
prevention and the suppression of crime, and aid in the apprehension of criminal offenders, both strategically
and tactically.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to explain how crime analysis stores, retrieves, and analyzes valid reliable
data, and how it will aid line units with useful information that can benefit them in the development of daily
operational and tactical plans. Staff units will be able to use this data for planning as it relates to such topics as
crime trends, agency resource allocation, crime prevention, and other associated areas.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. General
1. Crime analysis is a function of the Office Manager who develops analytical data to meet the needs of
the chief and various sections.
2. Crime analysis should provide current, useful information to aid operational personnel in meeting their
tactical crime control prevention objectives by:
a. Identifying and analyzing methods of operation of individual criminals;
b. Providing crime pattern recognition;
c. Providing analysis of data from field interrogation, arrests, and citizens’ reports of criminal activity.
B. Sources of data:
1. Essential crime analysis data will be captured from the Incident Based Report.
2. Data will also be obtained from Community Policing Data Reports.
3. Known criminal offender data will be collected from arrest reports.
C. Collation of crime data:
1. Criminal offense data will be collated and charted by crime type, time of occurrence, and geographic
location.
2. The department utilizes computer software that automates the following files:
1
118.ADM
a. Offense reports
b. Known offenders
c. Modus operandi
d. Suspect actions
e. Field interviews
f. Stolen property
g. Day, date and time of occurrence
h. Location
i. Suspect’s personal descriptors
3. The crime analyst will focus attention on crime patterns or trend development information. The crime
analyst will advise the appropriate personnel and the chief of any pattern or trend. Specific factors to
consider include:
a. Frequency by type of crime, geographic and temporal factors.
b. Victim and target descriptors, physical evidence information.
c. Suspect, suspect vehicle, modus operandi, etc. information.
D. Crime data analysis:
1. The responsibility for the analysis of crime data shall be that of the Investigations Lieutenant. The
reports shall analyze data for patterns and trends using data collected from the computer system on
a daily and monthly basis. The information will be forwarded to the chief and, at his or her direction,
to unit and shift supervisors.
2. Data for analytical purposes shall be maintained for (3) three years.
3. Data will be analyzed by the Investigations Lieutenant on a quarterly basis and reports prepared
and submitted to the chief and other personnel at the chief’s discretion. The report will give the total
number of crimes that were reported to the South Boston Police Department during the period
including:
a. Type of crime
b. Number of crimes in any reporting area
4. This information will be used to assist the Chief and the Patrol Lieutenant in making
geographical/temporal assignment of personnel and equipment; and the establishment of preventive
patrols.
5. Information will also be used to identify or dispel potential or actual police/citizen concerns.
2
118.ADM
E. Dissemination of crime data:
1. The Office Manager shall disseminate information in a timely fashion to the chief
and other personnel so noted within this general order.
2. Occasionally, certain crime information shall be disseminated to the general public, whether by request
or police initiative, in an effort to enhance public information and solicit community assistance and
support. Such release(s) of information will be approved and final reports reviewed by the chief
prior to its release.
3. Information concerning police operational matters (i.e., suspects, known offenders, investigative leads,
etc.) will be carefully controlled and will not normally be disseminated.
4. The dissemination of crime analysis data shall be limited to the following persons:
a. Chief of Police
b. Office Manager
c. Lieutenants
d. Accreditation Manager
e. Investigators and Patrol Sergeants
f. Administrative assistants performing duties as per departmental directives
F. Use of crime analysis information:
Crime analysis information will be used by the Chief and all unit supervisors for:
1. Short range tactical planning of crime reduction techniques and strategies.
2. The development of departmental plans for and in response to operational problems.
3. Long range planning, particularly as it relates to predicting manpower and resource needs for a multi-
year period.
G. Evaluation of data:
1. For the crime analysis function to be effective, feedback from the patrol unit and investigators is
essential. The utility and effectiveness of crime analysis can be evaluated by:
a. Seeing crime reduced in certain areas as a result of useful crime analytical data.
b. An increase in arrests in dealing with certain problems identified in the analysis process.
c. Having specific problem areas identified by analysis of data gathered through the police reporting
system.
2. Unit and shift supervisors should solicit feedback from their officers on analytical data provided and
share the feedback via comments at regular staff meetings.
3
118.ADM
3. The crime analysis function of the department shall be evaluated and revised as necessary.
AUTHORIZATION:
__________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
4
118.ADM
April 27, 2006
SUBJECT: MUTUAL AID
I. POLICY:
On occasion the need arises to request assistance from or give assistance to a neighboring law enforcement
agency. This need usually results from an emergency such as a civil disorder, fire, flood, or other disaster.
Before the need arises, agencies must clarify and plan emergency procedures. Available state support systems
shall be appropriately used in support of our law enforcement operations.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures, duties and responsibilities for providing assistance to, or requesting assistance from,
another law enforcement agency and to provide for use of statewide law enforcement support systems.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Jurisdiction:
1. Generally, the legal jurisdiction of the police department stops at the town limits, as defined by charter,
and Virginia Code. However, Virginia Code Section 19.2-250, in criminal cases involving offenses
against the commonwealth, extends jurisdiction one mile beyond the corporate limit of the town. This
authority may be used for such circumstances as:
a. Assisting neighboring law enforcement agencies or the Virginia State Police in handling
emergency calls at times when they are unable to respond immediately.
b. When a felony or serious misdemeanor crime-in-progress is observed by an officer occurring

within the one-mile zone.
2. Whenever a person in the custody of an officer shall escape or whenever a person shall flee from an
officer attempting to arrest him/her, such officer, with or without warrant, may pursue such person
anywhere in the state and, when actually in close pursuit, may arrest him/her whenever he/she is found
(Va Code Section 19.2-77). No officer of the department shall leave the town in a pursuit or chase
without informing the dispatcher. Mutual aid shall be requested from other law enforcement agencies
as appropriate. On-duty supervisors shall closely monitor all pursuits and will terminate them when
necessary.
B. Mutual Aid:
1. Mutual aid is provided for in law by Virginia Code section 15.2-1724, as amended. For the purpose of
this policy, mutual aid is defined as the short-term assistance given or asked for between the South
Boston Police Department and neighboring agencies during emergencies such as civil disorders, fires,
floods, or public disasters. Typical law enforcement services required or provided may include mass
processing or arrest, transporting prisoners, and operating temporary detention facilities. The
circumstances which require mutual aid, per Section 15.2-1724, can include one or more of the
following situations:
119.ADM 1
a. Enforcement of laws which control or prohibit the use or sale of controlled drugs
b. Any law-enforcement emergency involving an immediate threat to public safety
c. When executing orders for the temporary detention or emergency custody of people for mental
health evaluation
d. Any public disaster, war, fire, flood, epidemic, civil disorder (per Section 15.2-1724)
2. Mutual aid may be requested from or provided to another law enforcement agency by the department
at the discretion of the on-duty supervisor. Officers must remember however, that they are responsible
for providing law enforcement services to our jurisdiction. Normally, outside agency personnel will be
used to assist in a show of force, traffic control, mass processing of prisoners, prisoner transportation,
and operating temporary detention facilities. There are generally three levels of mutual aid assistance
as follows:
a. Short duration, approximately 30 minutes or less, where an additional show of force or traffic
control or assistance with prisoner transportation is required.
b. Medium duration, one to four hours, where the senior officer on duty may request assistance from
the neighboring law enforcement agencies and the state police; however, their role should
normally be in a showing of force, transporting prisoners, or traffic control.
c. Long duration, more than four hours, full scale assistance required. The on-duty supervisor shall
immediately notify the chief of police or his assistant who will assist in coordinating additional aid
as required.
3. Any long-term support between the South Boston Police Department and neighboring police agencies
shall be coordinated in advance by department heads. Coordination shall be accomplished by written
agreement incorporating the following:
a. Indemnification of the provider agency and its personnel, i.e., life, health, and liability insurance.
Both agencies must understand that one agency's liability insurance will not release an officer's
department from liability if the officer's action is negligent. Both agencies may be liable.
b. List of resources to be shared.
c. Estimate of amount of aid available.
d. Payment for certain expenses, e.g., meals, lodging, gas, overtime pay.
4. Occasionally it is necessary to request assistance from a federal law enforcement agency, such as the
FBI, when a bank robbery or a major crime has been committed (e.g., murder and kidnapping) and it is
believed that the perpetrator of the crime has left the state. The chief of police or his designee will
decide whether or not to notify such agencies.
5. If the department, with the help of neighboring police agencies are unable to cope with an emergency
such as a riot or civil disturbance, the chief may call upon the Virginia State Police. In this event, the
procedures as outlined from the office of the governor dated June 7, 1982 will be followed. (Copy
below)
6. The National Guard may be requested through the Virginia Department of Emergency Management.
119.ADM 2
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
Office of the Governor
Richmond 23219
June 7, 1982
MEMORANDUM
TO: Mayors, City Managers, Chiefs of Police, County Managers, County Administrators, and County
Sheriffs
FROM: Charles S. Robb
SUBJECT: REVISED PROCEDURES TO BE FOLLOWED IN THE EVENT STATE ASSISTANCE IS

REQUIRED IN CONNECTION WITH CIVIL DISTURBANCES
To assure that a request from any locality for State assistance to quell a riot or civil disturbance is handled
promptly and effectively, these procedures which supersede those dated March 22, 1979 should be followed:
If local law enforcement personnel are unable to cope with the situation because of a lack of
sufficient personnel or equipment, the Governor should be notified and requested to provide State Police
assistance
1. This notification and request should be made by telephone to the Governor’s Office, 804-786-2211. If the
call is made during other hours than office hours, the Capitol Police Dispatcher who answers the
Governor’s Office telephone will locate the Governor or a member of his staff who will be available at all
times.
2. To further assure immediate attention to the request, the requesting local authority should contact the
nearest State Police office simultaneously with the notification of the Governor.
3. In addition, the local Chief of Police, Sheriff or ranking law enforcement staff officer should contact the
Superintendent of State Police, 804-323-2010. If the Superintendent cannot be reached, the Deputy
Superintendent, the District Field Supervisor, or the Captain of the appropriate State Police Division should
be contacted.
When authorized by the Governor, the Department of State Police will furnish all equipment and manpower
necessary and available to cope with the situation.
119.ADM 3
C. Statewide law enforcement support:
1. The South Boston Police Department is available to relay radio traffic through the Statewide
Interdepartmental Radio System (SIRS) by way of the Emergency Communications Center.
2. The department participates in the use of the National Crime Information Center (NCIC) and the
Virginia Criminal Information Network (VCIN) and complies with the procedures for the use of these
systems. User agreement contracts and a copy of the procedures for the use of these systems can be
found on file in the Office Manager’s office.
3. The department participates in the use of the Central Criminal Records Exchange (CCRE) and
complies with the procedures for the use of this exchange. In addition, the department participates in
the Uniform Crime Reporting System of the Commonwealth of Virginia and the Federal Bureau of
Investigation.
4. Certain state-owned law enforcement resources may be made available to the department for special
use. These resources, and the state agency to contact, include:
a. Canine teams – Virginia State Police, Virginia Department of Corrections, and other Virginia law
enforcement agencies that have canines with certain capabilities that are needed for a particular
incident or event. Canine teams, if requested, will only be used according to their training (i.e.,
tracking, explosives, or drug detection), and great caution will be used in deploying teams in
heavily populated or congested areas. Handlers will be responsible for compliance with their own
agency policies, procedures, and restrictions.
b. Helicopter & Fixed wing aircraft - Virginia State Police and Virginia National Guard -normally
requested in advance by the Chief from the state superintendent but may be available on an
emergency basis.
c. Polygraph - available upon request from the Virginia State Police or other Virginia law
enforcement agencies with a trained polygrapher.
d. Riot truck and equipment - available for emergency use by the Virginia State Police.
e. Bomb Disposal - Virginia State Police.
f. Crime Scene processing/equipment – available upon request from the Virginia State Police.
g. Digital and Multimedia Evidence Recovery – available upon request from the Virginia State
Police and other Virginia law enforcement agencies with digital and multimedia capabilities.
h. Tactical Team – Virginia State Police.
AUTHORIZATION:
______________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
119.ADM 4
May 4, 2006
SUBJECT: RELATIONSHIPS WITH OTHER AGENCIES
I. POLICY:
Establishing and maintaining effective liaison and open channels of communication between the South Boston
Police Department, neighboring law enforcement agencies, criminal justice and referral agencies, and local fire
and rescue agencies are essential first steps in improving cooperation. Good liaison can break down barriers that
may exist, and can result in savings and improvements, for more efficient and effective law enforcement
operations. The South Boston Police Department will normally provide all possible information, assistance, and
support to agencies allowed by law.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures and responsibilities for liaisons, and maintaining communication between the police
department, neighboring law enforcement agencies, and other criminal justice or social service agencies, both
public and private.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Relationships with other criminal justice agencies:
1. It shall be the responsibility of all department personnel to maintain harmonious working relations and
communication with the Commonwealth’s Attorney and related personnel; Public Defender and related
personnel; District, Juvenile and Domestic Relations, and Circuit Courts; respective clerk’s offices, local
probation and parole officers; Blue Ridge Regional Jail personnel, Halifax County Sheriff’s Office;
Halifax Police Department; Virginia State Police; federal officials and agencies; juvenile detention home
personnel; and any other criminal justice agency or official. The department will normally provide all
possible information, assistance, and support to such officials and agencies as allowed.
a. Any serious policy or procedural problems or differences with another agency or its personnel shall
be brought to the attention of the Chief who will meet with appropriate personnel of these
agencies in order to resolve the problems.
b. During any investigation (or during planning for, arrest, or pretrial stages), any questions of law or
criminal procedure shall be addressed to the Commonwealth's Attorney or assistant. Questions on
law enforcement procedure will be addressed to a supervisor or to the Chief.
c. Any criminal cases referred to the Commonwealth's Attorney which result either in a decision of
declined to prosecute or dismissed, due to department mishandling, must be carefully reviewed and
appropriate corrective action taken. The Commonwealth's Attorney has been asked to bring such
cases to the attention of the Chief.
2. The Chief, or designee when unavailable, shall be the liaison with other agencies through the County
911 Board. The County 911 Board meets periodically and consists of the 911 Coordinator, the
Emergency Services Coordinator, town and county Fire Chiefs, Chiefs of Police, the County Sheriff,
County Government Officials, and Town Officials.
120.ADM 1
B. Relationships with local fire and rescue (Emergency Service) agencies:
1. It shall be the responsibility of all department personnel to maintain harmonious working relations and
communications with:
a. South Boston Fire Department;
b. Halifax County Rescue Squad;
c. Any other local fire or rescue agency encountered through job related circumstances.
2. All personnel will provide all possible information, assistance, and support as allowed by law to such
officials and agencies.
3. The Chief, or designee when unavailable, shall be the liaison with other agencies through the County
911 Board. The County 911 Board meets periodically and consists of the 911 Coordinator, the
Emergency Services Coordinator, town and county fire chiefs, local chiefs of police, the county sheriff,
and county government officials.
C. Referrals:
1. Officers of the department often encounter citizens, either adult or juvenile, who need specialized help
that the department cannot give, i.e., marriage counseling, mental health counseling, alcohol
counseling, social services assistance, victim/witness assistance, and assistance in handling civil
matters. Under such circumstances, the officer, using his or her best judgment, shall refer the citizen to
the most qualified agency to deal with the problem, or consult his or her supervisor.
2. The Emergency Communication Center will maintain a directory that identifies the services and
resources available through both public and private service agencies. Examples of public service
agencies include: social services, health department, mental health, and victim/witness assistance.
Examples of private service agencies include the Red Cross and the Salvation Army. When an officer
needs immediate assistance from one of these resources, the officer is to notify his or her supervisor
and then contact the Emergency Communications Center.
AUTHORIZATION:
___________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
120.ADM 2
N/A
SUBJECT: VCIN/NCIC UTILIZATION
I. POLICY
The South Boston Police Department participates in the Virginia Criminal Information Network and
the National Criminal Information Network. The Records Department supervisor directs and
coordinates our participation. He/she insures the department maximizes use of the system and
complies with relevant regulations and procedures.
II. PURPOSE
The Virginia State Police and Federal Bureau of Investigations operate criminal information
networks to facilitate law enforcement statewide and nationwide. The department participates in the
use of these systems to enhance it’s mission. This procedure provides for a method to govern our
participation. The department utilizes the system to enhance public safety. It also provides a means
to apprehend fugitives that have fled our jurisdiction or that have fled other jurisdictions and are
located within the town. The system also enables our department to recover stolen property removed
from or brought into our jurisdiction. Much of this department’s participation in the system is done
via the Halifax Emergency Operations Center (EOC) which the department is a member of along
with other local jurisdictions. There is a VCIN Terminal located in the department which is handled
by members of the Records Department. This procedure shows which functions the department
utilizes its in house terminal for and which functions members of the department contact the EOC
for.
III. PROCEDURES
A. System Operation
1. The Records Department supervisor will serve as the department VCIN Terminal Agency
Coordinator. His/Her responsibilities include:
a. Ensuring compliance with VCIN/NCIC rules and regulations, including validation of

wanted file records as prescribed in the VCIN Manual.
b. Security of VCIN Terminal.
c. Updating of VCIN/NCIC Manuals.
d. Liason between department members and VCIN staff.
2. VCIN access is established through the use of terminal emulation software known as G-Link.
This software and subsequent access are available through authorized computer workstations
only.
3. Department members who are properly trained and certified as terminal operators by the
Virginia State Police may access VCIN through these workstations. Other department
members may access the system under the supervision of a certified operator.
121.ADM 1
4. The department participates with several other agencies in the Halifax Emergency Operations
Center (EOC) which serves as the primary VCIN terminal twenty-four hours a day. All
emergency traffic sent to our department is addressed to this terminal. There is a VCIN
Terminal in the department which is operated by members of the Records Department during
normal business hours.
B. Administrative Messages and Bulletins
1. The EOC will handle the sending of all formal administrative messages and the posting of
bulletins. Members of the department needing messages sent should submit their request to an
EOC staff member. In the event that there is a problem with the EOC then officers should
contact a member of the Records Department.
2. When the EOC receives bulletins and messages for the department they fax these down to the
police department. The Records Department typically will receive these faxes and forward
them to the appropriate officer or unit. The bulletins and messages include bulletins on
wanted persons, missing person, vehicles and officer safety notices; messages requesting
“similar case” information; officer death notice bulletins; training announcements; and traffic
fatalities.
C. VCIN/NCIC System Queries
1. Any certified terminal operator or person under the supervision of a certified operator can
make queries into any of the NCIC/VCIN files.
2. Queries that result in a positive response will be immediately verified by a hit confirmation
request.
3. The EOC should handle all hit confirmation requests.
D. Wanted Persons
1. Wanted person inquiries are the primary responsibility of the EOC.
2. Wanted person entry, clearing, canceling and modification will be handled exclusively by the
EOC.
3. The EOC is responsible for entering all felony warrants and all capias warrants into the VCIN
system.
4. Members of the department can request for the EOC to enter warrants into the NCIC wanted
filed. The request must be accompanied by the appropriated extradition authorization from the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office.
5. Any member of the department who has made an arrest of someone who has been entered into
the VCIN/NCIC system will submit arrest documentation to the EOC as soon as possible. As
appropriate, EOC staff will immediately clear or place a locate against any VCIN/NCIC entry.
6. Any member of the department who is made aware of any legal process that has been recalled
by the court or has otherwise become invalid will immediately contact his or her supervisor
and then contact the EOC to ensure that any VCIN/NCIC entries are cancelled.
E. Missing Persons
121.ADM 2
1. The EOC enters all missing juvenile into the VCIN/NCIC system immediately after
receiving the report.
2. Missing adults are entered in accordance with VCIN/NCIC regulations and at the request of
the investigating officer or supervisor.
3. The EOC also uses the VCIN system to post an area wide bulletin for missing juvenile(s).
F. Stolen Vehicles
1. Stolen vehicles will be reported by the investigating officer or supervisor to the EOC as soon
as possible so their staff can enter it into the VCIN/NCIC system.
2. Clearing, canceling and locates of stolen vehicles will be done by the EOC after receiving
appropriate documentation and/or proper notification.
G. Stolen Boats, Securities, Tags, Guns, and Other Articles
1. The EOC enters stolen items upon request of an investigating officer or supervisor. Requests
are made by submitting pertinent information requesting the VCIN/NCIC entry.
2. Members of the department recovering or locating any of these items will notify the EOC
requesting removal of the item(s) from VCIN/NCIC.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
121.ADM 3
June 21, 2007
SUBJECT: DEPARTMENT COMMUNCIATIONS FUNCTIONS
I. POLICY
The Halifax Emergency Operations Center (EOC) is an independent agency that provides the official
radio communications function to the South Boston Police Department, Halifax County Sheriff’s
Office, Halifax Police Department, and all fire departments and medical service units within the
County of Halifax. Accordingly, the EOC will provide the South Boston Police Department with its
official radio function and 9-1-1, 24 hour, toll-free telephone access for emergency calls for service.
When members of the department are utilizing the radio communications function they are expected to
conduct themselves in a professional manner and be always aware that their actions are being
observed by the general public as well as other officers.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this directive is to establish responsibility and accountability for the communications
function within the department’s organizational structure.
III. PROCEDURE
A. Organization of radio communications function
1. The EOC has its own administrative and supervisory staff and an agency standard operating
procedure.
2. The Town of South Boston and County of Halifax will retain the license(s) for the respective
radio frequencies and maintain ownership and control through the Board of Directors.
a. The Chief of Police or his/her designee shall be a member of the E911 Board of Directors.
B. Administrative Office
1. Telephone communications, teletype and automatic data communications, and computer

network
a. The Captain of Police shall be responsible for the administration and management of the
department’s communication functions.
b. The department’s communication functions shall be assigned to the following units and the
specific component commanders shall be accountable for their individual assigned
command function(s):
1) Records Department
a) Telephone communication
b) VCIN/NCIC teletype
122.ADM 1
c) Automated data communications
d) Computer network
2) Administrative Officer
a) Department pager units and wireless communications devices
b) FCC licenses
c) Walkie-talkie inventory/issue
C. Emergency Operations Center
1. It is the responsibility of the EOC to establish and maintain procedures for obtaining, recording,
maintaining, and purging relevant information for each request for service to include, but not
limited to:
a. Control number;
b. Date and time of request;
c. Name and address of complainant (if possible);
d. Type of incident reported;
e. Location of incident reported;
f. Identification of officer(s) assigned as primary and backup units;
g. Time of dispatch;
h. Time of officer arrival;
i. Time of officer return to service; and,
j. Disposition or status of reported incident
2. Members of the department are refrained from entering into the EOC unless on official business.
The EOC is responsible for maintaining security measures for the communications center to
include, but not limited to:
a. Limiting access to unauthorized personnel
b. Protecting equipment
c. Providing for back-up resources
3. The EOC maintains the capability of playback of recorded telephone and radio conversations
while it maintains continuous recording of radio transmissions and emergency telephone
conversations within the communications center. The EOC will provide a specific procedural
method for the following:
a. The secure handling and storage of audio records.

b. Criteria and procedures for reviewing recorded conversations.
c. Providing retention of audio records for a minimum of one year.
122.ADM 2
4. Communications personnel shall have immediate access to the following departmental
resources:
a. Officer in charge
b. Duty roster of all personnel
c. Residential telephone number of every agency member
d. Visual maps detailing the agency’s service area
e. Officer status information
f. An on-call list of agencies providing support services to the South Boston Police Department
g. Emergency contact numbers for any agency, company, facility or resources that may be
required by the South Boston Police Department in the provision of emergency services
D. Communications - Radio Procedures
1. Each officer will be issued a portable radio and will be responsible for its safekeeping – this will
include preventing unauthorized persons from using the radio.
2. Non-law enforcement radio traffic is not permitted on the South Boston Police Department VHF
radio system. The South Boston Police Department’s radio systems are for law enforcement
purposes only.
3. No maintenance shall be performed by the officer on any portable radio except for changing
batteries, antennas, earphones, or external microphones. No maintenance will be performed on
any police vehicle radio by the officer. When any portable radio or police vehicle radio needs
repair, it should be brought to the attention of the administrative officer who will arrange repair.
4. The on-duty patrol officer shall remain available for contact via the portable radio during any
absence from his/her vehicle except when a shift supervisor grants permission for the radio not
to be utilized due to the nature of the assignment or other special conditions.
5. In the event that an on-duty officer’s radio fails, he/she will be responsible for notifying his/her
supervisor and the EOC of such failure as soon as possible.
E. Frequency Assignments
1. VHF Channel 1 (RX frequency 151.0925; TX frequency 158.925) (both digital and analog)
VHF Channel 1 (digital) is the Department’s primary operating channel. All radio traffic to
EOC should be on this channel. All radio traffic should remain on this channel unless there is a
reason to be on another channel.
2. VHF Channel 2 (RX frequency 154.7550; TX frequency 155.7900)
VHF Channel 2 serves as a back up for Channel 1. Special Units or unusual details may be
assigned to this channel on a temporary basis. This will be done by the on-duty Shift
Supervisor. Use of this channel for non-essential traffic or any other traffic that can be handled
by phone or in person is discouraged and shall be done on a limited basis. Personal or
extended conversations will not be conducted on this channel.
122.ADM 3
3. VHF Channels 3 (159.0375); 4 (160.9100); 5 (150.9100); 6 (154.8650); 7 (155.7825)
VHF Channels 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 serve as back up channels for Channel 1. Use of these channels
for non-essential traffic or any other traffic that can be handled by phone or in person is
discouraged and shall be done on a limited basis. Personal or extended conversations will not
be conducted on this channel.
4. VHF Channel 8 (TASK FORCE) (159.2100)
VHF Channel 8 serves as a frequency for the investigations unit. Use of this frequency by
patrol members is prohibited unless directed to do so by a member of the investigations unit.
F. Notification of Status
1. It shall be the responsibility of each member of the department who uses the police radio to
keep the dispatcher advised of their status. All officers will be required to notify EOC of their
status in certain circumstances which include but not limited to:
a. Beginning tour
b. Ending tour
c. Arrival at the scene or area of either dispatched or officer initiated incidents
d. Vehicle stops
e. Pedestrian stops
f. Any activity that would prevent immediate response to emergency calls
g. Foot patrol
2. A patrol officer marking out of service for any reason will notify EOC of his/her exact location,
unless such disclosure will jeopardize the confidentiality of an investigation.
a. Generally EOC notification will be accomplished by radio.
b. However, in cases requiring confidentiality, the officer should inform his/her immediate
supervisor of his/her location. The supervisor shall either notify EOC by phone as soon as
possible or have the officer notify them.
G. Standard Transmission Procedures
1. The manner in which radio messages are handled is often a measure of the efficiency of an
organization and the attitude of its individuals. Observing simple basic rules will expedite
message handling and improve working relationships among all concerned.
a. Listen before transmitting to make certain the channel is clear and organize your thoughts
before transmitting.
b. Maintain clear professional radio traffic at all times.
c. Unnecessary radio traffic is a safety hazard.
d. Speak in clear even tones.
122.ADM 4
e. Never inflect your voice so as to indicate displeasure (or any other emotion) while using
the radio.
f. Make sure the microphone switch is fully depressed and pause briefly before transmitting.
g. Avoid slang – use proper English, and/or the following phrases or codes that are listed as
follows:
PHONETIC ALPHABET
A - ADAM N - NORA
B - BOY O - OCEAN
C - CHARLES P - PAUL
D - DAVID Q - QUEEN
E - EDWARD R - ROBERT
F - FRANK S - SAM
G - GEORGE T - TOM
H - HENRY U - UNON
I - IDA V - VICTOR
J - JOHN W - WILLIAM
K - KING X - X-RAY
L - LINCOLN Y - YOUNG
M - MARY Z - ZEBRA
122.ADM 5
SIGNALS
Signal 1 Emergency / Mayday (replaces 10-33)
Signal 2 Back-up needed
Signal 3 Taking subject in custody and resistance is anticipated
Signal 4 Confidential / critical information to be relayed

(This will be used to indicate that a possible hit has been received
and information needs to be relayed to the unit that should not be
heard from the subject.)
Signal 5 Bank robbery
Signal 6 Robbery (specify type)
Signal 7 Bomb threat
Signal 8 Drug activities / cases
Signal 9 Sexual activities / cases
Signal 10 Breakfast / Lunch / Dinner / Break
Signal 30 Community policing (talking with public / handling community

safety function)
122.ADM 6
STANDARD RADIO PHRASES
Affirmative Yes; OK
At location Unit is at location of call; busy
Beginning Tour of Duty Unit is starting their shift; ready for calls
Be Advised Understand the following; used to correct error
Be on the Lookout Introduces radio traffic for all units
Can Handle Units or personnel on scene can handle the call
Cancel Cancel response of a unit
Clear Back in service/available for calls
Copy Receives and understands message
Correction Corrects mistaken message just given
Direct Understands radio traffic given first to another unit
Disregard Cancels message given earlier
Downgrade Change the level of response to a lower level
Ending Tour of Duty No longer available for assignments
En route A substitute for “responding” going from one
Location to another
E.T.A Estimated Time of Arrival
Go Ahead Ready to receive traffic
In the Area Unit in the vicinity of incident
In Quarters Unit back in assigned station
In Service Unit available for call
Loud and Clear Radio traffic is readable
Meal Break Unit asked to go to meal break when clear
Needs Assistance Unit needs additional help from other Units
Negative No
Off the Air No longer receiving radio traffic
On the Air Available; 10-8
On location Unit is at scene of incident
Out of Service Unavailable for calls
Prepare to Copy Signals that unit is going to be given a message or
assignment
Priority Traffic Unit should hold traffic pending urgent traffic by
base or other unit in emergency situation
Proceeding Unit is going to assigned call
Reduce Response Slow down; situation not urgent
122.ADM 7
Relay More powerful radio, usually base, repeats a
message not copied by third unit
Respond Dispatch command; go to assigned call
Responding Unit is going to assigned call
Returning Ready/ Not Ready Unit is going with or without supplies and/or
manpower to take another call. (Give reason)
Stand-by Hold traffic; higher priority activity is taking place
Transporting Taking patient; accompanied by unit number and
destination
Unreadable Radio traffic can not be copied
2. The procedure for contacting and responding to EOC will be as follows:
a. The contacting unit will identify themselves by their badge number, then specify that he/she
is attempting to call central (“1909 to Central”). (Always make a contact call before giving
information to central.)
b. When responding to central , it is recommended that the unit identify himself/herself by

badge number.
c. After a message transmission, an acknowledgment that it was received should be made

(“1909 en route”, “1909 direct”, etc.)
d. Whenever an officer calls for assistance, he or she should repeat their badge number and
location if at all possible (“1909 needs assistance at College and North Main”).
3. The procedure for contacting and responding to another unit will be as follows:
a. The calling unit will identify themselves by the badge number, then specify the unit he/she
is attempting to contact (“1909 to 1906”).
b. The unit being called will reply in like manner (“1906 go ahead 1909”).
c. After the message transmission, a receipt acknowledgement will be made (“10-4”,

“direct”).
G. Emergency Radio Procedures
1. Non-essential radio traffic shall be suspended under the following conditions: (No
announcement of this suspension should be necessary from Central to other officers.)
a. An officer call for immediate assistance.
b. An officer marks in foot or vehicle pursuit.
c. An officer requests that traffic be held (a brief description of the problem and location
122.ADM 8
should be given if possible).
2. When an officer is involved in any of the above, the following procedure shall be followed:
a. The dispatcher should repeat the traffic the officer just gave and ensure that other officer(s)
are en route.
b. Any officer in the area shall respond to assist, while being cognizant of departmental
policies. Officers should keep their traffic to an absolute minimum.
c. In these cases, secondary channels may be used by officers to talk to each other. The
primary high band channel shall stay clear for the officer engaged in the pursuit/call for
assistance and for the supervisors. If the involved gives unreadable information, the
supervisor or dispatcher will ask them to repeat the traffic.
d. If involved in a vehicle pursuit, per policy, the second officer engaging in the pursuit will
make notification on the main channel that they have entered the pursuit and shall
continue to relay information throughout the incident.
e. Only the officer who called for help, marked in pursuit, or requested that traffic is held or
an on-scene supervisor should clear the radio channel unless circumstances dictate
otherwise.
3. The EOC may suspend traffic on a channel only if an extraordinary circumstance exists that
dictate for safety reason that traffic be suspended. EOC should notify the on-duty supervisor
by mobile phone of these circumstances as soon as possible.
4. Officers should avoid broadcasting certain information over any radio frequency:
a. Unnecessary signals or messages of a personal nature.
b. Criminal history information except to effect an immediate identification or to ensure the

adequate safety for officers and the general public.
c. Details of an incident that may be of a personal nature and therefore embarrassing to

those involved.
5. Name or addresses of complainants, victims, or witnesses.
6. Give a clear and exact disposition. Repeat you badge number, and state “Clear ___” with
your disposition status.
a. Dispositions to be given are:
1) “SI” – summons issued
2) “AR” – arrest(s) made
3) “RT” – report taken
4) “IN” – information taken
5) “RE” – referred to another organization or office
6) “UN” – unfounded
122.ADM 9
7) “FA” – false alarm
8) “OT” – other
7. Officers should respond to all calls to which they are dispatched. If the call is in their area and
another unit was dispatched in error, the officer should notify central that he or she will handle
the call.
8. Generally, only one unit will be assigned to handle any one call, however, certain calls and
situations may require the dispatching of additional units to ensure officer safety and to
adequately deal with the problem. Calls which would normally indicate the need to dispatch a
back-up unit include, but are not limited to:
a. An assault on an officer;
b. On-scene arrest for a felony or violent misdemeanor;
c. Resistance to an arrest;
d. Any officer safety issue;
e. Use of force;
f. A crime in progress;
g. A fleeing suspect;
h. 911 hang-ups;
i. Alarms;
j. Domestic calls for service;
k. Disorders
9. If a shift supervisor or additional assistance is needed, the request shall be made as brief and
clear as possible. Shift supervisors will be informed in the event of major crimes or other
circumstances which require the supervisor’s presence on the scene (e.g. , serious injury, fatal
accidents, major traffic problems, personal injury, use of force, etc.). Additionally, shift
supervisors will report their response to major incidents to the EOC so a more thorough
assessment of manpower allocation can be made.
H. Types of Communication
1. The Emergency Operations Center serving the South Boston Police Department maintains and
operates a modern, disciplined two-way radio communications system. The system provides
continuous, 24-hour, two-way communications between EOC, the South Boston Police
Department and other local and state public safety agencies.
2. Also, the EOC maintains an intra-departmental and inter-departmental communications

network including teletype and automated data communications network to facilitate
management control. All methods of departmental communication, including radio, telephone
and mail is reserved for official business only.
3. Further, EOC has teletype capabilities to receive and transmit information from the Virginia
Crime Information Network (VCIN) and several national networks: the National Law
122.ADM 10
Enforcement Telecommunications System (NLETS) and the National Crime Information
Center (NCIC). The Records Department and the EOC have access to these automated
systems. The EOC should be utilized if information from a teletype is needed (e.g. criminal
histories, stolen property, etc.). Each component shall operate the automated data systems in
accordance with published guidelines for the appropriate system.
4. All calls that require a police response, whether in an emergency or non-emergency situation,
will be handled by the EOC. Even if the caller indicated that the call is not an emergency, the
call taker should find out what the problem is and offer assistance if a police response is
necessary. After getting the information from the caller, it shall be given to a field officer
who will provide the caller with the information needed to handle the incident safely and
correctly.
5. Radio traffic by Records Department is usually transmitted on the primary frequency

although it is recommended that members of the Records Department have an officer call
them by phone to relay a message and for officers to relay messages for the Records
Department by phone.
a. If the Records Department receives a priority call (e.g., calls in progress), they will transfer
the call to the EOC if possible via the 911 lines. Records Department personnel should
use their best judgment in the manner in which they transfer calls (e.g. if a call involves a
potential loss of life then the member may see fit to notify on-duty officers via primary
frequency prior to transferring the call). All other calls (e.g. past larcenies, information
calls, etc.) will be transferred to the EOC’s administrative line. When a member of the
Records Department transfers any call to the EOC he or she should remain on the line until
they are sure that the complainant is speaking with a member of the EOC.
I. Alarms
1. Receipt of alarms
a. EOC receives alarms from several different sources. Communications officers are aware of
the steps to be followed to verify the alarms and send the proper response for each. The
various alarms include the following:
1) Phone in alarms – may be called into the EOC from any number of alarm monitoring
services from local and distant locations.
2) Dialer alarms – ring into the EOC with a prerecorded messages.
3) Audible alarms – are reported by citizens or officers in the field
4) Lifeline alarms- Emergency medical alarms that are called in by a monitoring service.
J. State-wide Interdepartmental Radio Systems - SIRS
1. Overview
a. SIRS was created as a law enforcement communications link to assist law enforcement
agencies in providing more efficient service to the public and to help in reducing crime. It
is to be used for interdepartmental (between departments) purposes only. This means that
no SIRS member should routinely dispatch its own units on the SIRS channel. SIRS
provides a base station-to-base station and car-to-car contact with key state agencies such as
the Department of State Police and the Department of Corrections. Certain non-law
enforcement agencies, which have demonstrated a need, have been granted a restricted
SIRS membership and those agencies should observe the restrictions. Generally speaking
122.ADM 11
SIRS members can use the system for any police business of an interdepartmental nature.
An advisory board made up of Chiefs of Police, Sheriffs and representatives of the State
Police and State Corrections govern SIRS.
2. System Use
a. The success or failure of SIRS will be determined by whether or not dispatchers constantly
monitor the channel. If a base station or car from another agency cannot contact your
dispatcher, the system will not function.
b. The Board recognizes that a wide variety of “APCO 10 Series” signals are in use.
Therefore, to avoid confusion, the Board recommends that “plain language” be used on
SIRS channel. Basically, the system functions as follows:
1) If a car from Department A needs to contact a unit from Department B, Car A should call
the dispatcher at Department B and state which unit he or she needs to contact. The
Department B dispatcher will contact its unit on the Department B normal dispatch
frequency and advise him or her on the traffic and request the Department B unit to
switch to the SIRS channel. If the A and B cars are within 10 miles of each other, they
should be able to talk car to car. If not, the Department B dispatcher should either relay
the traffic or direct its unit toward the Department A unit until the car to car contact is
established. When the units have completed their business, they should both switch back
to their normal department dispatch channel.
2) Likewise, a dispatcher can respond to a request from one of its units to contact another
local or state unit. If the request involves a unit from an adjacent local department, the
dispatcher can contact that department by appropriate means and set up the contact. If the
local unit wants to reach a state police unit and is unable to do so by calling car to car, he
can request the dispatcher to contact the state unit by the base station and arrange for the
necessary contact.
3) The State Police will not have dispatch capability on SIRS. All State Police patrol cars
will be equipped with a SIRS radio and it will be monitored at all times.
4) Any station or unit with emergency traffic should be given priority and all other routine
traffic suspended until the emergency is resolved.
5) Some agencies have mobile radios with a monitoring receiver that permits the officer to
hear both the normal dispatch channel and the SIRS channel without moving the channel
selector switch. This will enable these cars to bypass the dispatcher in some cases,
especially where the cars are within the 10-mile range. However, it is important to note
that the dispatcher never loses contact with this unit because the base station monitors
both the normal dispatch channel and the SIRS channel.
6) If a priority call comes in while a unit is handling routine business on the SIRS channel,
the dispatcher should call the unit on the SIRS channel and ask him/her to switch to the
normal dispatch channel; the dispatcher should then give him the priority message.
7) The above-described procedures will govern both local and state law enforcement usage
of the system. Remember that SIRS was designed to help you. It is supposed to be used
to make your work easier and more efficient. Please use it wisely!
3. System discipline
a. In order for SIRS to accomplish its purpose, it must have “free” time to permit easy access
to the channel. This means that all SIRS users must cooperate and make certain that traffic
122.ADM 12
on SIRS is of a direct law enforcement nature and necessary. Base station dispatchers
should be especially aware of this rule since base stations have a much greater range and
thus cause more wide-spread interference. Dispatchers should always try to find alternate
means for communication with other base stations for routine administrative messages.
b. All SIRS users should strive to use good radio procedure and accomplish each SIRS
transaction in the minimum time possible. Remember that SIRS is a “plain language”
system so please avoid the use of the “10 series signals”.
c. In the event a department is found to be abusing the SIRS channel or violating the Board’s
guidelines, such infractions should be reported to the head of your department. Department
heads receiving such report should report the circumstances to an Advisory Board member.
In order for SIRS to accomplish its purpose, everyone must abide by the rules.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
122.ADM 13
August 31, 2006
SUBJECT: EQUIPMENT, CAPITAL ASSETS, AND FISCAL MANAGEMENT
I. POLICY:
The property management function of the South Boston Police Department is the responsibility of the
Administrative Lieutenant. The Department has an obligation to town taxpayers to operate a property
management system that is economical, efficient, and provides maximum returns for tax dollars expended. All
employees have individual responsibilities for the proper use and care of all Department equipment issued to or
used by them during the performance of their duties.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for the management of South Boston Police Department owned supplies, property, and
equipment.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Procurement:
1. Individual and shift equipment and supply requests for the Patrol and Administrative Divisions should
be directed to the shift supervisor for approval (if appropriate) and then to the Administrative
Lieutenant by the use of an “Equipment Request Form (Form 123.ADM 01)”.
2. The Administrative Lieutenant will then approve or deny the request. Approved requests will be
forwarded to the Office Manager for the appropriate purchase order.
3. Individual or Division requests for the Investigations Division shall be directed to the Investigations
Lieutenant for approval by the use of an “Equipment Request Form (Form 123.ADM 01)”.
4. The Investigations Lieutenant will then approve or deny the request for the Investigations Division.
Approved requests will be forwarded to the Office Manager for the appropriate purchase order. A copy
of this request will also be sent to the Administrative Lieutenant for their records.
5. Once a purchase order is obtained, the approved material or equipment may then be ordered.
B. Purchasing:
1. All purchasing is done according to guidelines issued by the Town of South Boston, and the
Commonwealth of Virginia. Only the Chief of Police and their designees are authorized to sign
purchase orders.
2. Standardized purchases (Up to $5,000), i.e. office equipment and supplies, uniforms, miscellaneous
small equipment, etc. may be purchased simply by finding the best price and ordering the material from
that vendor.
123.ADM 1
3. Bidding procedures and the selection of vendors should follow the Virginia Public Procurement Act and
Town of South Boston Small Purchase Policy.
C. Maintenance of Departmental Cash Funds:
1. Any Departmental cash funds or accounts where Department of Police personnel are permitted to
receive, maintain, or disburse cash shall be governed by the following procedure. Funds affected by
this procedure are the Records Office (petty cash) and the Investigative Unit (Asset Forfeiture).
2. Personnel responsible for the above account(s) shall maintain a balance sheet, ledger, or other system
that identifies the initial balance of the account, credits (cash income), debits (cash disbursed), and the
balance on hand.
3. Receipts and/or documentation for cash received shall also be maintained.
4. Authorization for cash disbursement must be signed by the Chief of Police or his designee.
5. Records, documentation, or invoices shall be maintained for all cash expenditures;
6. The Investigation Lieutenant or designee is authorized to disburse cash with the approval of the
Chief of Police. This does not apply to returning found or evidentiary property.
7. Each employee responsible for a cash fund shall conduct a quarterly accounting of the activities
involving the fund;
8. Audits of all cash funds shall be conducted in accordance with policies and procedures established by
the Finance Department of the Town of South Boston.
D. Cash Receipts
1. The Office Manager, or assistant, are authorized to accept cash receipts and shall be required to
prepare documentation for the cash.
2. The Office Manager is authorized to accept department members’ reimbursement forms,

“Request for Reimbursement Form (Form 123.ADM 02)”. Upon receiving the form, he/she
shall review the form for accuracy, obtain the appropriate signature, and forward completed forms to
the Town Finance Department.
3. The Office Manager, or assistant, are authorized to receive cash payments from private
citizens and businesses for department fees charged in providing copies of official reports, e.g. vehicle
accident reports, IBR reports, fingerprint application cards, etc. The fee received will be documented
and sent to the Town Finance Department.
E. Accounting
1. The Chief is responsible for maintaining financial records which reflect Department financial
transactions. The process for Department financial record keeping will be in accordance with
instructions received from the Chief of Police and /or the Town Finance Director.
2. The Chief of Police and Office Manager will review the department’s statement of revenue and
expenditures quarterly, at a minimum. The statement will show:
a. The initial appropriation for each account,
123.ADM 2
b. The balances at the commencement of the period,
c. Expenditures and encumbrances made during the period, and
d. The unencumbered balance.
NOTE: Any errors, omissions and/or unexplainable transactions found in the statement will be
brought to the immediate attention of the Town Finance Director by the Chief of Police or his/her
designee.
3. The financial records of the Department shall include, but will not be limited to:
a. Department forms that will clearly delineate cash receipts, if any.
b. Documentation of the hours worked, and the annual sick and compensatory leave used by each
employee.
c. Documentation of the purchase of goods, supplies, and services by the Department. (This
documentation will include purchase requisitions and purchase orders used to control budget
expenditures.)
d. Department checkbook and statements pertaining to the Asset Forfeiture account. These records
are kept by the Town Director of Finance.
e. Credit Card receipts and statements documenting expenditures by employees of the Department.
f. Documentation of transactions by the Investigations Division and the Records Office.
F. Emergency Purchases or Rentals:
1. Emergency purchases are covered in the Town of South Boston – Small Purchase Policy.
2. Any fund transfers within accounts must be approved by the Town Manager, or designee.
3. Supplemental budget requests shall be made in a timely manner to the Town

Manager’s Office.
4. Emergency Appropriations shall be requested by the Chief of Police upon approval of the Town
Manager.
G. Pick-up and Delivery of Goods:
Employees assigned to pick up and sign for any item of Department ordered equipment, materials, etc.,
will verify the quantity and condition of items prior to signing the receipt. Invoices, bills, and receipts
will be forwarded to the Office Manager for processing, filing, etc. Supplies, materials, and equipment
received damaged or not meeting purchase specifications will be brought to the attention of the Office
Manager.
H. Maintenance of Equipment and Supplies:
1. The Administrative Lieutenant will be responsible for maintaining stored agency property/equipment
in a state of operational readiness. Personnel authorized to have keys to the storage room include:
123.ADM 3
Chief of Police, the Administrative Lieutenant, the Patrol Lieutenant, and the Office Manager. The
Administrative Lieutenant shall maintain an inventory of all capital assets within the Department.
He/she is also responsible for distribution, issuance, and accounting of all expendable supplies and
Departmental property/equipment excluding the following:
a. Office supplies shall be maintained by the Office Manager and assistant;
b. Surveillance/undercover/intelligence equipment and investigative equipment shall be

maintained by the Investigative Lieutenant or his designee,
2. All shift and division supervisors will be responsible for property and equipment assigned to them. In
turn, each employee will be responsible for the proper care of all property and equipment issued to
them or used during the performance of their duties. All assigned patrol vehicles will be inspected bi-
weekly by a shift supervisor and that inspection will be documented by the supervisor on a “Bi-Weekly
Vehicle Inspection Form (FORM 232.OPR (02)”. Once completed the supervisor will give the form to
the Administrative Lieutenant who will file the form. Any abuse of issued property/equipment may
result in disciplinary actions. An assigned department vehicle shall only be taken home by an assigned
sworn employee if the sworn employee lives within 30 miles (driving distance) of the nearest town
boundary from their residence, and if approval for such action has been approved by the Chief of
Police or his/her designee. Certain exemptions may apply if an officer is assigned to the Investigations
Division, a special function such as Canine Officer, or any other situation authorized by the Chief of
Police.
3. The Accreditation Manager will be responsible for the dissemination of the General Order Manual to
employees of the Department and will be responsible for providing updates to the General Order
Manual.
4. The Administrative Lieutenant, upon receiving proper authorization, will make arrangements for
repair or disposal of damaged or unserviceable equipment, as authorized by the Chief of Police.
5. The Administrative Lieutenant shall prepare an inventory listing of all equipment (of a significant
monetary value) of the Department. The Administrative Lieutenant shall submit a list of
quantities to the Chief of Police upon request.
6. The Administrative Lieutenant shall document all initial equipment and uniforms issued to each
new employee. He shall also maintain an on-going inventory of additional items requested by
each employee. Following termination of employment, all employees will return Town/Department
owned equipment and property that was issued to them. If the equipment and property are not returned,
the department may issue an invoice to the former employee for the fair market value of the
unreturned equipment and/or property. Final clothing items will be clean. Soiled clothing items will not
be accepted.
7. Department equipment that is lost will be reported to the Administrative Lieutenant through the
chain of command in memo form.
8. The maintenance and upkeep of certain specialized equipment (stop sticks, A.E.D.’s, patrol rifle,
etc.) may be assigned to specific personnel. Personnel assigned any specific equipment shall
maintain that equipment in a state of operational readiness and be inspected by a supervisor or the
Administrative Lieutenant as to the condition of all equipment assigned to them.
123.ADM 4
AUTHORIZATION:
______________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
123.ADM 5
April 9, 2009
SUBJECT: COMPLAINTS AGAINST POLICE PERSONNEL
I. POLICY:
The image of the Department depends on the personal integrity and discipline of all Departmental employees.
To a large degree, the public image of this Department is determined by the professional response of the
Department to allegations of misconduct against it or its employees. The Department must competently and
professionally investigate all allegations of misfeasance, malfeasance, and nonfeasance by employees and
complaints bearing on the department's response to community and employee needs.
All complaints will be investigated in a fair and impartial manner and, under no circumstances, shall this policy
be used arbitrarily or for arbitrary purposes, or in a manner inconsistent with the mission and values of the
South Boston Police Department, or in a manner inconsistent with the law.
II. PURPOSE:
To describe procedures for making complaints against Departmental personnel, for investigating complaints,
and to list and define the dispositions of complaints.
III. PROCEDURES
A. General
The Department encourages citizens to bring forward legitimate grievances regarding misconduct by
employees. Department members shall receive complaints courteously and shall handle them efficiently.
All officers are obligated to explain to inquiring citizens the complaint procedures. No employee shall
discourage any person from filing any complaint, and no employee shall discriminate or retaliate against
any person who has filed a complaint.
The Department recognizes that its personnel are often subject to intense pressures in the discharge of their
duties. The employee must remain neutral under circumstances that are likely to generate tension,
excitement, and emotion. In such situations, works, actions, and events frequently result in
misunderstanding and confusion. It is to the advantage of all employees to have a procedure for
investigating allegations and underlying circumstances so that complaints can be resolved with respect to
the complicated pressures of police work.
All investigations made pursuant to a complaint against police personnel are classified. Complaint
investigations may be either administrative or criminal.
A copy of this General Order will be disseminated electronically to all Department personnel to read and
acknowledge by electronic signature. Officers will receive updates whenever changes are made.
B. Receipt of complaints
1. A copy of "How To Provide Comments About The Quality Of Service Provided By The South Boston
Police Department" (Form 124.ADM (01)) will be posted in the public area of the Police
1
124.ADM
Department, provided to media representatives upon request, and may be given to any citizen requesting
information on how to make a complaint against the Department or an employee of the Department.
2. Complaints, regardless of nature, can be made in person, by mail, by e-mail, or by phone at any time.
All complaints against the Department or employees will be documented (recorded) and
forwarded to the Administrative Lieutenant.
a. A Department member receiving a citizen complaint through the U.S. Mail shall place the
correspondence and the envelope in a sealed envelope and forward it to the Administrative
Lieutenant.
b. Complaints received over the telephone by the records department personnel or other employees will
be courteously and promptly referred to the Administrative Lieutenant. The employee shall record the
name and the telephone number of the complainant and state that the Administrative Lieutenant, or if
unavailable, another Lieutenant, or Sergeant shall call back as soon as possible. They may also be
offered the option to leave a voicemail for the Administrative Lieutenant if desired. All complaints
received over the telephone will be documented.
c. A Department member receiving a citizen complaint through e-mail shall place a copy of the
correspondence in a sealed envelope and forward it to the Administrative Lieutenant.
d. Non-supervisory Department members shall refer all in-person citizen complaints to an on-duty
supervisor, who shall assist the citizen in recording pertinent information on a complaint form
(Form 124.ADM (02)). The complaint form shall be forwarded to the Administrative Lieutenant.
3. As part of the follow-up investigative activity, persons making complaints by mail, email, or phone
normally shall be interviewed and a written, signed complaint form prepared if possible. Anonymous
complaints shall still be investigated to the most extent possible.
4. Every effort shall be made to facilitate the convenient, courteous, prompt receipt and processing of
citizen complaints. An employee of the Department who interferes with, discourages, or delays the
making of such complaints shall be subject to disciplinary action.
5. If the Department employee determines that the complainant is apparently under the influence of an
intoxicant or drug, or apparently suffers from a mental disorder, or displays any other trait or condition
bearing on his or her credibility, he/she shall note such conditions on the reverse side of the complaint
form.
6. Any visible marks or injuries relative to the allegation shall be noted and photographed. The
photographs will be submitted with the complaint form to the Administrative Lieutenant.
7. Prisoners or arrestees also may make complaints, although circumstances may require a Department
representative to meet the complainant at a jail or prison for an interview. If the complaint involves
alleged injuries, and if appropriate, the police representative will have photographs taken of prisoners'
alleged injuries. The photographs will be submitted with the complaint form to the Administrative
Lieutenant.
8. In the event of circumstances where the employee receiving a complaint form is not a supervisor, the
report shall be immediately forwarded to the Administrative Lieutenant. The employee will record the
date and time they received the report and sign the report acknowledging its receipt.
9. The above procedure may also be used when Department employees desire to enter a complaint against
any other employee governed by this General Order.
2
124.ADM
C. Responsibility for handling complaints:
1. As a rule, all complaints regarding law enforcement operations and personnel will be forwarded
immediately to the Administrative Lieutenant to be investigated, unless the Administrative Lieutenant
is named in the complaint. If the complaint names the Administrative Lieutenant, then the complaint
will be submitted to the Chief of Police to determine who shall conduct the investigation. Generally,
the Administrative Lieutenant will determine if the compliant should be investigated and
handled by a shift supervisor, or turned over to the Investigation Lieutenant for an Internal
Affairs Investigation. The Administrative Lieutenant will also inform the Chief of Police of all
complaints against the Department and personnel. (The goal of the internal affairs process is to ensure
that the integrity of the agency is maintained through an internal system where objectivity, fairness,
and justice are assured by intensive and impartial investigation and review.)
It is possible that upon receipt of a complaint, the receiving supervisor may determine the matter to be
a service-related inquiry and the receiving supervisor, or the supervisor assigned to investigate the
inquiry (i.e., employee’s immediate supervisor), may be able to promptly resolve the matter to the
satisfaction of the citizen. Nonetheless, the complaint form, shall be forwarded to the Administrative
Lieutenant along with the narrative explaining how the matter was resolved.
2. The Investigation Lieutenant is responsible for the Internal Affairs (I.A.) Functions within the
Department. The Investigation Lieutenant, or his/her designee will conduct the Internal Affairs
investigations for the Department, unless otherwise determined by the Chief of Police. The Internal
Affairs investigator will conduct investigations that may be a criminal matter or an administrative
matter and overseen by the Investigation Lieutenant. The Investigation Lieutenant, or his/her designee
shall report directly to the Chief of Police about the status of an Internal Affairs Investigation.
a. Internal Affairs Function investigates the following:
i. Serious injury or death of a prisoner during arrest or custody procedures.
ii. Discharge of a firearm by employee:

1) Resulting in death or injury
2) While apprehending or arresting a violator.
iii. Incidents which may result in litigation against the Department.
iv. Alleged civil rights violations, to include workplace or racial discrimination or harassment.
v. Alleged violations of county, municipal, state, or federal criminal statutes, to include

complaints alleging fraudulent transactions described in Section 30-138 of the Code of
Virginia.
vi. Other matters of a serious nature when investigation is requested by the Chief of Police (or
designee).
3. The Chief of Police may ask an investigator from another agency or the Department of State Police to
undertake an investigation due to the nature of the complaint.
4. Investigator reports pertaining to Internal Affair investigations are retained in the records storage room
and kept separate from the personnel files. These reports are kept under a separate lock and key.
5 The Chief of Police shall maintain close liaison with the Commonwealth’s Attorney in investigating an
alleged criminal conduct. Where liability is at issue, the Chief shall similarly maintain contact with the
Town Manager and Town Attorney.
3
124.ADM
6. All allegations of employee misconduct shall be appropriately investigated and promptly adjudicated.
Additionally, all reports or accusations made against members of the agency, or the agency in general,
from all sources, should be completely investigated in order to ensure the integrity of the agency and
its members.
6. All interviews of involved officers, complainants and witnesses conducted by I.A. investigators shall
be recorded whenever possible. Any Supervisors investigating a complaint should proceed in the same
manner. Any officer(s) or witness officer(s) subject of an investigation are prohibited from recording
any interviews. The recordings by the I.A. investigator will be secured with the I.A. investigator
report. Any recordings done by a supervisor will be turned over to the Administrative Lieutenant to be
secured.
7. Any and all evidence presented by the complainant, witnesses, the subject officer, or any other party
shall be collected, photographed, copied, or documented and become part of the investigator report.
8. All notes, writings, forms, documents, photos, videos, recordings, electronic data, and evidentiary
items will be entered into the official record of the investigation and shall become part of the
investigative report.
9. The I.A. investigator may have another I.A. investigator present during any interviews with the subject
officer or witnesses.
D. Notification and Rights of Employees under Investigation:
1. When an employee becomes the subject of an investigation focusing on matters which could lead to the
dismissal, demotion, suspension or transfer for punitive reasons, the Administrative Lieutenant will
provide the employee a written statement of the allegations and the employee’s rights and
duties/responsibilities relative to the investigation. Prior to questioning, the employee shall be
informed of the name and rank of the investigating officer and of any other individual to be present
during the questioning along with the nature of the investigation (Form 124.ADM 04).
2. Any questioning of the officer(s) shall take place at a reasonable time and place as designated by the
investigating officer, preferably when the officer under investigation is on duty and at a location
at the department determined by the investigating officer, unless circumstances dictate otherwise.
3. Information obtained in the course of an administrative investigation will not be used by this
Department for any purpose other than the completion of, or investigation and determination of
appropriate disciplinary action, if any, to be taken.
4. Any statements or comments made in the course of a Critical Incident Stress Debriefing are
considered confidential and NOT subject to exploration in any internal affairs investigation.
Critical Incident Stress Debriefings are neither counseling sessions nor operational critiques.
These debriefings serve as an opportunity to defuse stressful feelings following a traumatic
event while educating participants about coping techniques.
5. The investigating officer will compile his investigative findings into a final report in a timely manner,
which will include a summary narrative. The final report shall be submitted to the Administrative
Lieutenant and then forwarded to the Chief of Police.
H. Relief from Duty Pending Investigation
1. An employee may be relieved from his/her duties during an investigation pending final disposition
4
124.ADM
when his/her continued presence on the job would not be in the best interest of the Department. This
action may result in the employee being placed on administrative leave with / without pay pending
review by the Chief of Police and the Town Manager.
2. Any officer whose use of force has resulted in death shall be relieved of line duty, pending conclusion
of the investigation through either:
a. Temporary reassignment, or
b. Administrative leave with/without pay.
3. It shall not be considered disciplinary action if an officer is placed on administrative leave with pay.
4. An employee, whether the subject of, or a witness in an investigation shall be subject to disciplinary
action, for failure to:
a. Fully cooperate with the investigation.
b. Truthfully and completely discuss related incidents under investigation.
c. Comply with examinations, procedures, and disclosures.
I. Determination of Complaints:
Investigations may be administrative or criminal. Different rules govern interviews of employees in

each case.
1. Interview for Administrative purposes:
a. If the Chief of Police wishes to compel an employee to answer questions directly related to his or
her official duties, and the Chief is willing to forego the use of such answers in a criminal
prosecution, the Chief of Police or another interviewer shall advise the employee that:
(1) The purpose of the interview is to obtain information to determine whether disciplinary action
is warranted. The answers obtained may be used in disciplinary proceedings resulting in
reprimand, demotion, suspension, or dismissal.
(2) All questions specifically related to employment must be fully and truthfully answered.
Refusal to answer may result in disciplinary action.
(3) No answers given nor any information obtained by reason of such statements are admissible
against the employee in any criminal proceeding.
(4) Read to the employee the following:
"I wish to advise you that you are being questioned as part of an official investigation of the
Police Department. You will be asked questions specifically directed and narrowly related to
the performance of your official duties or fitness for office. You are entitled to all the rights
and privileges guaranteed by the laws and the constitution of the United States, including the
right not to be compelled to incriminate yourself. I further wish to advise you that if you
refuse to testify or to answer questions relating to the performance of your official duties or
fitness for duty, you will be subject to Departmental charges which could result in your
dismissal from the Police Department. If you do answer, neither your statements nor any
information or evidence which is gained by reason of such statements can be used against you
5
124.ADM
in any subsequent criminal proceeding. However, these statements may be used against you in
relation to subsequent Departmental charges."
When an officer is advised of these rights the interviewing officer shall complete the
“Advisement of Garrity Rights Form (Form 124.ADM (03))”.
b. In an interview for administrative purpose, no Miranda rights are required. Further, the foregoing
rules are inconsistent with Miranda in that employees' statements cannot be used as evidence for
criminal matters. Further, as the interview does not serve criminal prosecution, the employee
has no Sixth Amendment right to counsel. The employee is not permitted to have an attorney or
any other representative present with them in the room during an administrative interview
regarding allegations of misconduct.
c. The governing case is Garrity v. New Jersey, 395 U.S. 483, 87 S. Ct. 616 (1967).
d. The interviewing officers shall use the "Administrative Proceedings Rights (Form 124.ADM
(04))”.
e. All interviews of subject officers, complainants, and witnesses conducted by an I.A. investigator
or Supervisor shall be recorded whenever possible. Any subject officer, complaining officer, or
witness officer, is prohibited from recording any interviews.
2. Interviews for Criminal investigative purposes:
a. If the Chief of Police believes that criminal prosecutions are possible and wishes to use statements
against the employee in a criminal proceeding, or at least wishes to maintain the option of their
use, he or another interviewer shall:
(1) Give the employee Miranda rights.
(2) Advise the employee that if he/she asserts his/her right not to answer questions, no adverse
administrative action will be taken based upon the refusal.
If the employee decides to answer questions at this point, the responses may be used in both
criminal and disciplinary proceedings.
(3) Note that the Miranda admonition includes the provision that a lawyer may be present at an
interview. Although technically the employee has no right to counsel until the employee has
been criminally charged or his or her freedom of action has been deprived, the Department
wishes the employee to have the option. The Department wishes no possibility to arise in
which its actions might be construed coercive.
b. The governing case is Gardner v. Broderick, 392 U.S. 273, 88 S. Ct. 1913, 1916, (1968). The case
made clear that a public employee may not be fired for asserting his/her Fifth Amendment right
not to incriminate himself/herself.
c. All interviews of subject officers, complainants, and witnesses conducted by an I.A. investigator
shall be recorded whenever possible. Any subject officer, complaining officer, or witness officer
is prohibited from recording any interviews. If the subject officer is to be charged, copies of the
interview(s) will be made for the subject officer and his/her attorney.
J. Investigative tools and resources:
In addition to interviews of the employee and witnesses, the Chief of Police may require other activities in
6
124.ADM
support of an investigation, including:
1. Medical and Laboratory Examination
The Chief of Police or officer in authority may, based on his/her observation of conduct or appearance
creating a reasonable suspicion that an officer may be under the influence of alcohol or drugs, require
a Department employee to submit to a test for alcohol or drug use while on duty. The results may be
used in a disciplinary hearing. Refusal to submit to the examination will be grounds for disciplinary
action and may result in the employee’s dismissal. The test shall be administered under medical
supervision where hygienic safeguards are met. The sample will be handled in accordance with the
Virginia Law-Enforcement Officers Procedural Guarantee Act.
2. Photograph and Lineup Identifications Procedures:
Officers may be required to stand in a lineup for viewing by citizens for the purpose of identifying an
employee accused of misconduct. Refusal to stand in a properly conducted lineup is grounds for
disciplinary action and may result in dismissal.
a. Photographs of Department employees may be maintained for the purpose of identification by

citizens of an employee accused of misconduct. Photo lineups should be prepared utilizing
acceptable standard and procedures. Under no circumstances shall these photographs be used for
purposes other than investigative.
b. Photographs or videotape pictures of employees, with or without an employee's consent may be

taken for the purpose of internal investigations as related to the employee's job when the
employee is suspected of misconduct.
3. Financial Disclosure Statements:
In accordance with Virginia Code Section 9.1-503, as amended, an employee may be compelled to
make financial disclosure statements when such information is necessary in investigating a possible
conflict of interest with respect to the performance of his official duties, such disclosure is required by
law, or such information is related to an investigation.
4. Blood or urine specimen:
If required to determine whether a law-enforcement officer has used drugs or alcohol, a blood or urine
specimen can be taken. This must be done in accordance with procedures in Virginia Code 9.1-501, as
amended and the Town of South Boston Personnel Policy Handbook.
5. Polygraph
a. Policy: All police personnel, effective with the promulgation of this policy, shall be required to
submit to a polygraph when ordered to do so by the Chief of Police, or by another superior officer
with the authorization of the Chief of Police.
b. The Police Chief or his designee may order employees to take a polygraph when charged with a
Category III offense.
c. The results of the polygraph examination shall not be used as the sole basis for disciplinary action
against any employee.
d. Any polygraph examination administered under the provisions of this policy and procedure shall
be administered by a private contractor licensed to administer polygraph examinations in the
7
124.ADM
Commonwealth of Virginia or must be a licensed examiner from another law enforcement agency.
No Department employee shall be used to administer an examination to another Department
employee.
e. Refusal to submit to a polygraph examination or to answer all questions pertaining to the charges
in the polygraph examination shall be grounds for disciplinary action and may result in dismissal
from the Department.
f. In order to comply with state and federal law, the following information must be provided to the
officer asked to submit to such examination:
(1) The nature of the inquiry, the name and rank of the investigating officer, and the name and
rank of any person present during the examination.
(2) That his answers will not be used to prosecute him.
(3) That he may refuse to take the polygraph or examination to answer any questions, however,
such refusal shall be grounds for disciplinary action which may include dismissal.
(4) That answers given during the polygraph examination do not constitute a waiver of the
privilege against self-incrimination as it relates to criminal matters.
(5) A “Polygraph Examination Acknowledgement of Rights” form (FORM 124.ADM (05) must
be initialed and signed in the spaces indicated. Refusal to do so shall be grounds for
disciplinary action which may result in dismissal.
g. The declaration is here made that the intent of all of the above is that any person who refuses to
submit to a polygraph examination or refuses to answer any questions pertaining to the charges in
such an examination may be terminated from employment.
6. Order of Secrecy
The internal affairs investigative process is extremely sensitive in nature and must be treated with the
utmost confidentiality by all involved parties. Therefore, any and all sworn employees involved with
an investigation are strictly prohibited from discussing the nature of the investigation, their
involvement, or any interview with anyone unless granted authorization by the Chief of Police.
Investigators deem such an order necessary to maintain the integrity of the investigation and to prevent
possible collusion between witnesses. Employees violating such order shall be subject to disciplinary
action.
7. Workplace Searches
Department employees have no expectation of privacy in Department property or premises. Where the
Department suspects that an employee has engaged in workplace misconduct, it may conduct
an evidentiary search of property of work areas assigned to that employee. Property and area which
may be subject to a search could include, without limitation, the following: desks and their contents,
file cabinets, computers and related applications, storage lockers, Department vehicles assigned to the
employee, etc.
K. Adjudication of complaints:
1. The investigator, whether the I.A. Investigator or an assigned Supervisor, will prepare a detailed report
of their investigation that will include persons interviewed and a synopsis of their statements, a listing
of evidence recovered or identified and its relevance, a chronological sequence of events, and a
8
124.ADM
summary of facts. The report will not offer conclusions, speculation, or recommendations, except that
the investigator may recommend further investigation if other misconduct or criminal violations are
discovered during in the investigation.
2. The Chief of Police will classify completed investigations as:
a. Unfounded - no truth to allegations.
b. Exonerated - adherence to proper and appropriate Police procedures and techniques.
c. Not sustained - unable to verify the truth of the matters under investigation.
d. Sustained - allegations true.
3. Completed investigations will be securely maintained by the Administrative Lieutenant to include

Internal Affair investigations. Completed Investigation files shall be kept in a secured file storage area
and/or database where access is limited to individuals designated by the Chief of Police. The
Administrative Lieutenant shall maintain a log of all complaints and oversee that they are investigated,
and promptly adjudicated in a timely manner.
4. The Administrative Lieutenant shall:
a. Maintain complaint files and Internal Affair files separate from personnel files.
d. Make notification of the status/disposition of the complaint to the agency or employee(s)

investigated.
e. Make recommendations to the Chief of Police for what disciplinary action to be taken.
f. Make notification of the status/disposition of the complaint against the agency or its employees to
the complainant if the complainant is able to be contacted.
g. The Chief of Police or his designee shall take over the duties of the Administrative Lieutenant if
he/she is named in the compliant.
L. Disciplinary Action / Grievance Procedure:
Disciplinary action taken shall be determined by the seriousness of the violation and/or the extent of
injury to the victim. It shall be commensurate with the circumstances surrounding the incident and in
consideration of the officer's service record and prior sustained complaints. General Order: 304.PER
Employee Discipline references disciplinary action for members of the Department and the Town
Grievance Procedure.
M. Due Process:
1. The Fourteenth Amendment to the Constitution provides that a citizen may not be deprived of "life,
liberty, or property, without due process of law." Public employees have a limited property interest in
continued employment sufficient to require due process in any administrative proceedings that might
result in suspension or dismissal.
2. The Department seeks to observe due process of law in the philosophy of the 14 th Amendment in any
disciplinary proceeding. Nevertheless, the foregoing rules circumscribe when legal counsel may or
may not be used during interviews of employees suspected of misconduct.
9
124.ADM
3. Despite an employee’s limited property interest in his job, as described in paragraph A, the simple fact
that an employee has held a job for years does not entitle him or her to keep it.
4. The Department recognizes that an employee, though dismissed or suspended, may have a liberty
interest to enjoy future employment elsewhere and, if suspended or dismissed, should have an
opportunity to set forth his or her point of view for name-clearing purposes. In view of this interest the
Department affords an employee the right to file a grievance for which the procedures for are detailed
in the Town of South Boston Personnel Policy Manual.
AUTHORIZATION:
_________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
10
124.ADM
October 5, 2006
SUBJECT: LINE INSPECTIONS AND STAFF EVALUATIONS
I. POLICY:
The Chief of Police is responsible for establishing and maintaining a system of inspections and evaluations to
obtain the information needed to direct the operations of the department. Although the ultimate responsibility of
inspections, evaluations, and control rests with the Chief, it must be carried out continuously at all levels of
command and supervision. The goal of inspections and evaluations is operational efficiency and effectiveness.
The inspection and evaluation process is an essential mechanism for evaluating the agency's operations,
ensuring that the agency's goals are being pursued, identifying the need for additional resources, and ensuring
that control is maintained throughout the agency. Although infractions discovered during the process of
inspection should be handled according to policy and the particular circumstances, inspection should not be
viewed as a disciplinary process. It should be a fair, impartial, and honest appraisal of efforts. The inspector
should have a positive, constructive attitude and make every effort to instill respect for and understanding of the
inspection process.
Generally, the line inspections focus on the conditions of facilities, equipment, uniforms, vehicle, etc. and are
done frequently by a line supervisor (Sgt., Cpl., etc). Staff Evaluations generally focus on agency goals and
objectives and which are evaluated infrequently by the Chief of Police or designated administrative personnel.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish policy and procedures for inspections of personnel, resources, and operational readiness, along
with an evaluation process of the police department's divisions/units, their goals, and their objectives; and to
make the necessary corrections when deficiencies are noted in either area.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Inspection and evaluation objectives: The objectives of the inspections and evaluations include:
1. To determine whether tasks are being performed as outlined in policy and if procedures are followed.
2. To determine whether the anticipated results of orders and standards are achieved.
3. To discover whether department resources are used to the best advantage.
4. To identify and document the existence of needs, deficiencies, omissions, or problems.
B. Inspections and Evaluations Responsibilities:
1. Line inspections:
Line Inspection: The frequent inspection of personnel, equipment and/or facilities

(VLEAPM 8th edition).
Line inspections focus on the conditions of facilities, equipment, uniforms, vehicles, etc. For example,
1
125.ADM
a line inspection may determine if patrol officers are checking their vehicles at the beginning of their
shift, or an inspection of an employee work area may show how Department property is treated and
cared for. Additionally, inspections shall also recognize exemplary performance.
Per town policy this type of inspection is considered a self-inspection and will be handled in
accordance with the town policy on workplace safety.
Line inspection responsibilities shall include the inspection of employees, the equipment they use, how
it is used and cared for, and the facilities utilized by the employee. Employees will respond
immediately to correct deficiencies identified during inspections. Additionally, inspectors will
recognize exemplary performance.
The sergeant/corporal shall inspect officers and equipment daily. The sergeant/corporal shall not allow
any member to go on duty until any deficiency in the inspection is corrected.
The sergeant/corporal shall bi-weekly inspect officers assigned/fleet vehicles and compare the
conditions of the vehicles with the notes from the last inspection (Bi-Weekly Vehicle Inspection Form
(Form 232.OPR 02)). Department equipment kept in the patrol vehicle will be inspected to verify that
it is kept in a state of operational readiness for immediate deployment. A report of the inspections shall
be turned in to the Administrative Lieutenant.
It shall be the responsibility of the Administrative Lieutenant, or his/her designee, to ensure that all
stored agency property is inspected semi-annually for its operational readiness for immediate
deployment. This requirement refers to special weapons, firearms, tactical tools, gear, equipment and
devices, along with spare vehicles (including department equipment assigned to such vehicle). The
Administrative Lieutenant, or his/her designee, shall make an inventory list of the stored inspected
agency property along with the date, and immediately correct any identified deficiencies during the
inspection process. This inventory will be kept on file by the Administrative Lieutenant.
Other line inspections that will be conducted on an annual basis by the chief of police or his designee
include building services survey, fire protection inspection survey, security survey, AED inspection,
Americans with Disabilities Act Survey, and grounds survey. The results of these inspections will be
reported to the town’s safety committee.
2. Staff Evaluation:
Staff Evaluation: Staff evaluation is a process that the Chief Administrator uses to
ensure that responsibilities and achievements at each organizational level are
consistent with the Department’s goals and objectives. A staff evaluation;
therefore, is designed to provide a comprehensive review and appraisal of diverse
departmental operations, including, but not limited to, departmental divisions,
operational units, administrative operations, and support functions, and is
conducted by personnel, appointed by the Chief Administrator, from different
divisions, units, etc., than the function(s) being evaluated (VLEAPM 8 th edition).
Staff evaluations generally focus on each divisions compliance with agency objectives and to ensure
accord with existing policies, rules, regulations, and procedures. These evaluations should be done
annually by the appointees designated by the Chief of Police, from different divisions than the ones
being evaluated. Staff evaluations revealing significant procedural problems or deficiencies may
require a written report directed to the Chief of Police with corrective recommendations. The Chief of
Police, in consultation with the evaluator(s), will implement measures to correct noted problems and/or
deficiencies and assign a member of the department to follow-up ensuring that the problems and/or
deficiencies are corrected. The staff evaluator(s) shall record the dates and results of each evaluation.
2
125.ADM
Staff evaluations will be done on a Staff Evaluation Form (Form 125.ADM 01) and submitted to the
Chief of Police.
C. Follow-up Procedures:
1. Officer Deficiencies:
Any noted deficiencies of an employee during a line inspection shall require the employee to respond
immediately to correct the deficiencies. This will be monitored by the officer conducting the inspection
to ensure that it is corrected
2. All other Deficiencies:
If deficiencies exist, or recommendations of change or needs are made that may or may not require the
changing of policy and procedure, this would be so noted in the original report to the Chief of Police.
The Chief of Police may take it upon his/her own to implement immediate change or temporary
change, or he/she may schedule a leadership team meeting to make sure that measures will be taken to
ensure that the deficiencies are corrected or that the recommendations and needs are addressed.
AUTHORIZATION:
___________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
3
125.ADM
June 1, 2012
SUBJECT: COMMUNITY RELATIONS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department is committed to providing quality law enforcement services to the citizens
of the Town of South Boston. In this regard, input from the community is essential to the proper delivery of
those services. To obtain that input, the Department shall maintain close ties with the community and maintain
a position of responsiveness to its needs.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to set forth procedures for building and maintaining effective community
relations.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Community Relations
1. The community relations goal includes, at a minimum, the following:
a. Identify and address mutual concerns between the Department and all segments of the community;
b. Foster a professional, community focused and accessible agency;
c. Develop programs that increase community understanding and confidence in current and proposed
agency activities.
d. Establishing liaison with formal community organizations and other community groups.
e. Developing community relation policies for the agency, as a whole.
f. Publicizing agency objectives, problems, and successes.
g. Conveying information transmitted from citizens’ organizations to the agency.
h. Identifying training needs through interviews with citizen representatives, consultations with those
involved in internal investigations, and conferences with supervisors.
i. Establishing community groups where such groups do not exist.
2. All department personnel have an individual responsibility to achieve agency community relations
objectives. These objectives require the participation, enthusiasm, and skills of all members. Officers
will address citizens with concerns that they may have. Some concerns may be resolved by an officer,
and some may need to be addressed at higher levels of command. If an officer cannot resolve a
concern, the officer should contact a supervisor. Citizen “concerns” differ from “complaints”. A
citizen may be “concerned” about people speeding in a neighborhood, compared to making a
126.ADM 1
“complaint” about a particular officer speeding in a neighborhood.
3. The South Boston Police Department makes information available to the public on procedures to
follow for filing complaints against the agency or members of the department. These procedures are
covered under General Order: 124.ADM Complaints Against Police Personnel.
4. The Chief of Police and/or designee(s) will be the liaison(s) for the department with community
organizations/groups. The Chief may choose different designees to interact with different types of
community groups.
5. Official and unofficial contacts between agency employees and citizens in any setting in our
community constitute a vital part of the community relations objectives. Ideally, all such contacts
should contribute to the development of positive images toward the Department and its employees and
activities. Officers are encouraged to visit businesses and walk in communities, for the purpose of
initiating positive contact between the police department and citizens.
6. The Town of South Boston maintains a webpage that contains information about the South Boston
Police Department. Among the information listed are annual reports that contain agency statistics and
agency activities. On the webpage, the public has access to leave messages, concerns, complaints, or
comments for police department and its members. The messages, concerns, complaints, and comments
are sent to the Chief of Police to determine the best department member to address the matter. The
South Boston Police Department also maintains a Facebook page where it posts public service
announcements, community events, press releases, crime alerts, department promotions, and agency
activities. The Chief of Police and his/her designee(s) monitor and address comments, concerns,
complaints, and messages sent to the department Facebook page.
7. All full-time officers are assigned department cell phones that are carried on duty to be accessible.
Supervisors and managers are accessible by cell phone on and off duty. Officers are also issued
business cards with their name and the issued cell phone number printed on them. This allows for
community members who receive a business card to be able to contact the officer directly with any
information, comments, and concerns.
8. It shall be the responsibility of every employee of the department to promote good relations with the
community, regardless of race, creed, color, national origin, age, handicap, sexual orientation, or
religion.
9. The department is continually committed to addressing community concerns by correcting actions,

practices, and attitudes that may contribute to community problems, tensions, or grievances. By
recognizing such problems at an early stage, preventive action can be taken by the agency that may
prevent greater problems in the future.
10. The department utilizes a “Ride – Along Program” to allow citizens to understand the job functions of
a patrol officer and his/her perspective of responding to calls for service, traffic enforcement, etc.
a. This program is designed so those citizens interested can ride with officers while on duty to
observe the officer’s daily job functions.
b. Any citizens requesting to participate in the program must complete a “Ride-Along Program
Application (Form 126.ADM (03))” which must be approved by a member of the administration.
c. Any officers assigned to conduct a ride-along should keep the following in mind:
1.) When assigned to, and upon first meeting a ride-along participant, be courteous and friendly.
Ask the participant what they hope to observe or learn during this period, and attempt to
match your activities to meet that goal. Introduce the participant to the other officers on your
126.ADM 2
shift.
2.) Ride-Along participants shall not carry weapons or operate any police equipment except in
case of an emergency.
3.) Ride-Along participants shall not carry any cameras or recording equipment unless given
written permission by the Chief of Police.
4.) The officer is responsible for the safety and welfare of the Ride-Along participant. Officers
should not place, or allow the participant to become involved in a dangerous or violent
situation. Officers should always be cognizant of the participant and where they are. The
officer may drop off the participant in a suitable area if the officer expects a volatile and
dangerous situation to develop. It is not recommended for a participant to be allowed to go
with an officer inside of a residence on a call for service as this raises serious concerns
reference privacy laws. If an officer does allow this, the officer needs to be familiar with
privacy laws and what permission is required by the homeowner.
AUTHORIZATION:
_________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
126.ADM 3
August 29, 2000
SUBJECT: EVIDENCE AND NON-EVIDENTIARY HANDLING, STORAGE,

AND CRIME SCENE PROCESSING
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department that all evidence recovered or submitted; or non-
evidentiary property found by members of this agency be securely handled, packaged, recorded, stored and
accounted for.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to establish a lawful system for the secure and efficient storage and retrieval of
evidence and non-evidentiary items that enters the custody of the Department. In no way shall these policies
and procedures be interpreted to supersede Federal, State, or Town statutes. These policies and procedures are
intended to comply with all existing laws in all manners. The Department’s policies and procedures are
highlighted in this policy and shown in detail in the South Boston Police Department Property and Evidence
Manual.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Crime Scene Processing – General
1. Securing crime scenes is crucial. Once medical needs are attended to and order is restored, officers
shall immediately secure the crime scene with yellow police barrier tape if needed.
2. Authority to process a crime scene shall originate with consent, a search warrant, or exigent
circumstances which will be determined by the on scene supervisor.
3. Whenever needed and practical the crime scene shall be processed by an Evidence Technician
(member of the Investigations Unit) who shall be responsible for the identification and collection of
evidence. In those instances when an Evidence Technician is not available, it shall be the decision of
the shift supervisor to either permit a patrol officer to process the scene or to notify the Investigations
Unit Supervisor.
4. Requests for crime scene searches/processing by an Evidence Technician can be made by any officer
but in most cases the shift supervisor should be consulted.
a. Notification of and/or consulting with the Investigations Unit in primary crime scene cases (e.g.
rape, aggravated robbery, suspicious or unnatural death shall be the responsibility of the on-site
supervisor (Uniform or Investigations).
b. All secondary crime scene (e.g. property crimes such as breaking and entering, larceny, vandalism,
traffic accidents) will be routinely handled by an Evidence Technician or patrol officer.
c. At a minimum, an Evidence Technician will search for evidence at a crime scene and then
127.ADM 1
document the search in a supplemental case addendum. Most scenes will require that a latent
search be performed, photographs of the crime scene taken and evidence collected.
5. Major crime scenes, i.e., murder, rape, aggravated robbery, assaults with serious injury and aggravated
burglary require the on-scene supervisor to notify the Investigations Unit Supervisor or their designee
as quickly as conditions permit.
6. The initial arriving officers to a major crime scene shall:
a. Establish a crime scene perimeter
b. Initiate a scene entry log which will include the following information: case number, date(s),
location, person(s) name, time in and out, reason for entering the scene, name of the entry control
officer maintaining the log, and name, date, time of officer relieving the entry control officer.
c. Secure a control walking path
d. Limit the crime scene access to only necessary personnel
7. Although all deaths shall be considered potential crime scenes the responding officer should be aware
of the tremendous emotional trauma and grief that death imparts upon family members. Keeping this
in mind, the members assigned to any death scene will be required to complete a “Death Scene
Checklist Form (Form 127.AM (01))”.
8. Section 32.1-283 of the Code of Virginia requires the medical examiner to be notified, prior to the
movement of a body, in the “death of any person from trauma, injury, violence, poisoning, accident,
suicide, homicide, or suddenly, when in apparent good health, or when unattended by a physician, or
suddenly as an apparent result of fire or in any suspicious, unusual, or unnatural manner.” The medical
examiner will advise if, when, and/or how the body can be moved.
9. Any officer seeking to obtain a known DNA sample from a suspect, victim or witness in any crime
shall use one of the following methods:
a. DNA Buccal Swabs – any officer seeking to obtain a DNA buccal swab sample from a suspect,
victim, witness, family member, or other person involved in any crime shall take the person to the
police department where a Buccal Swab Kit will be utilized. The Buccal Swab Kit can also be
utilized at other locations when necessary.
b. Known Blood Sample – any officer seeking to obtain a known blood sample from a suspect,
victim, witness, family member, or other person involved in any crime shall take the person to the
Halifax Regional Hospital where such sample shall be drawn by a registered nurse or certified
blood technician.
c. The drawn blood sample or buccal swab kit shall be handled as evidence. Proper procedures will
be followed and the buccal swab kit or known blood sample shall be turned into an evidence
technician or placed into a temporary evidence locker for proper storage.
10. When Perk Kits are needed the victim shall be transported, by an officer if necessary, to Lynchburg
General Hospital. Proper procedures will be followed and Perk Kits shall be turned into and evidence
technician or placed into a temporary evidence for proper storage.
11. Suspicious fires and arson scenes are under the authority of the Town Fire Marshall. Evidence
technicians shall assist the Town Fire Marshall in processing the scene.
127.ADM 2
12. Patrol officers, during their normal tour of duty, may routinely process for latent prints, photograph and
collect other evidence from crime scenes.
13. Crime scene processing – outside the jurisdiction
a. In the event a supervisor from another police or Sheriff's department contacts a supervisor from
this department requesting assistance with processing a crime scene and/or evidence; the
department supervisor shall follow a specific protocol prior to sending any evidence technicians
outside this jurisdiction
b. Determine the severity of the crime scene the other agency is requesting assistance with
c. Determine if they are requesting that we process the scene or simply assist their department
evidence technicians or officers with processing
d. Notify and brief the Investigations Unit Supervisor.
e. Notify and brief the Captain or Chief of Police. One of them must approve department evidence
technicians processing another agency’s crime scene or evidence outside this jurisdiction.
f. This section does not prohibit processing scenes or evidence from offenses originating in this
jurisdiction but does require notification and approval by one of the Captains or the Chief of
Police.
B. Detailed responsibilities of a police officer when identifying/collecting/handling evidence is covered in the
South Boston Police Department Property and Evidence Manual. Those responsibilities include:
1. To prevent the tampering, alteration, contamination, and/or destruction of evidence, the recovering
officer will be responsible for properly handling, packaging, and sealing with evidence tape all
evidence and initialing items and package seals collected
2. Officers seizing evidence shall check all items through available resources to try to determine if the
items are stolen.
3. The recovering officer shall properly describe and list all evidence items, with item number, recovered
on the Property Report Form. The item description should include make, model and serial number. A
copy of this form will be provided to the person whom the property is taken from.
4. With the exception of the Halifax/South Boston Regional Narcotic Enforcement Task Force
investigators, all evidence will be turned in prior to the expiration of the recovering officer’s workday.
Evidence may be turned directly into the Property Officer (normally member of the Investigations
Unit) or placed in a temporary evidence locker located to the right of the evidence room door. No items
of evidence shall be stored in any vehicle, locker, desk, drawer, closet, cabinet or file cabinet that is not
a temporary or permanent evidence storage area.
5. It is the responsibility of the seizing officer to follow the status of case evidence, updating its status
when required.
6. The seizing officer shall return evidence to its owner whenever possible. Should the officer not be able
to contact the owner or owner’s next of kin, the officer will notify the Property Room officer in writing
of the owner’s name, address and telephone number. When property is returned the return of such
property shall be documented on a “Property Release (Form 127.ADM 02)” which requires the person
receiving the property sign and the officer returning the property sign as a witness. Once complete the
127.ADM 3
original of this form should be given to the Records Department and a copy provided to the Property
Room Officer.
7. Evidence involving a large sum of money, drugs, items of exceptional value/sensitive or firearms
shall be turned into the Property Room Officer who shall place that evidence directly in the Evidence
Room.
8. Whenever an officer has seized a quantity of United States currency and/or coins the officer shall
specify denomination, quantity and total amount. Prior to placing the monies into a sealed envelope,
the officer shall obtain a witness to verify the total amount of money that is to be placed in the sealed
envelope.
9. Officers seizing potential forfeiture monies shall promptly notify the designated Asset Forfeiture
Officer who will be responsible for completing the appropriate state or federal forms in a timely
manner.
10. Evidence pertaining to firearms, knives, controlled substances, money, items requiring refrigeration or
latent prints will be packaged separately. When packaging a firearm, the officer shall unload the
weapon, properly secure the weapon in a firearms box, initial and date the package, write “unloaded”
on the box and forward to the Property Room Officer. Ammunition removed from the firearm shall be
placed in an evidence envelope and also forwarded to the Property Room Officer. Any firearms tracing
forms shall be completed and turned in accordingly. Any firearm seized by a member of the South
Boston Police Department, whether evidence or found property shall be turned into the Property Room
for storage. Firearms are never to be mailed to the lab for analysis, they shall be hand delivered.
11. When seizing marijuana officers shall field test it on scene and provide the suspect with the appropriate
documentation from the courts and from the Division of Forensic Science. Officers shall also
complete a “Field Testing Supplemental Form (Form 127.ADM 03)” and turn a copy of that
documentation in to the Records Unit with their IBR.
12. Officers shall be responsible for signing out evidentiary materials needed for follow-up investigations,
court appearances or return to owner and will make the necessary advance arrangements through an
Property Room Officer.
B. A more detailed account of the South Boston Police Department’s procedures for the handling of evidence
and non-evidentiary (found) property is in the Property and Evidence Manual. This manual also details
procedures for the Property Room.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
127.ADM 4
NUMBER: May 9, 2023
January 11, 2007
SUBJECT: MEDIA RELATIONS & PUBLIC INFORMATION
I. POLICY:
One of the first and most fundamental considerations of the nation's founders in drafting the Bill of Rights was
to provide for a free press as an essential element of the First Amendment to the Constitution. They recognized
that a well-informed citizenry is vital to the effective functioning of a democracy. Police operations profoundly
affect the public and, therefore, arouse substantial public interest. The department shall make every reasonable
effort to serve the needs of the media in informing the public about crime and other police issues. This shall be
done with an attitude of openness and frankness whenever possible. The media shall have access to personnel
who are fully informed about the subject of a press inquiry. Further, journalists or reporters shall be told
whatever will not impinge on a person's right to a fair trial, impede a criminal investigation, imperil a human
life, or seriously endanger the security of the people.
In all other matters dealing with the media on current news, every member of the department shall make every
reasonable effort consistent with accomplishing the police task in providing the media representatives with full
and accurate material.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to provide guidelines about information which may be released to media
representatives, to specify some types of information which may not be released, to identify who may release
information, and to establish procedures for media relationships with the department.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. General:
1. The department is committed to informing the community and the news media of events within the
public domain that are handled by or involve the department.
2. The public information function includes:
a. Assisting news personnel in covering routine news stories, and at the scene of incidents while
allowing due regard for safety and the security of the operation.
b. Responding to news media inquiries, in person or telephonically.
c. Preparing and distributing news releases.
d. Arranging for news conferences, as required or requested.
e. Releasing information about victims, witnesses, and suspects as allowed by law and without
hindering the integrity and continuity of the investigation.
f. Coordinating and authorizing release of information concerning confidential departmental
128.ADM
investigations and operations.
3. All employees of the department have individual responsibilities concerning the release of information.
4. Only the Chief of Police or his/her designee can authorize a news release by any member of the
department.
5. Normally media representatives either visit the department in person or call seeking information about
newsworthy items. Routinely, they shall be referred to the Records Office or designated personnel for
press releases. Command Staff will handle requests for a press conference (See section I).
6. The Records Office handles dissemination of the Arrest Report Log and accident report information to
the media after checking for non-releasable information. The Chief of Police, the Investigation
Lieutenant, or a designee shall handle requests for press releases (See section H).
7. Inquiries concerning departmental policies, procedures, practices or relationships with other criminal
justice agencies will be referred to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police or his/her designee will
coordinate all responses to inquiries or release of information pertaining to department involvement
with other public service agencies (e.g., fire department, medical examiner, Commonwealth's
Attorney, etc.)
8. The Chief of Police or his/her designee shall coordinate responses to inquiries and release of
information concerning confidential departmental investigations and operations.
B. Who may release information reference inquiries from the media
1. General Media Inquiries and Follow Up:
a. The Chief of Police or the Investigation Lieutenant are the primary facilitators for routine media
inquiries and information concerning on-going Department investigations and operations. After
hours, the shift supervisor or the Investigations Division supervisor shall be the primary media
contact. All officers are permitted to engage the media who are actively covering an event and
should be professional and courteous. Officers shall follow rules and guidelines covered in this
general order.
b. Any member of the department who has responded to a media inquiry concerning current department
investigations or operations shall supply his or her supervisor with the brief details of the information
released and the media source it was released to.
2. Any member of the Department who is investigating a particular crime or is involved in a department
operation should make his or her supervisor aware of details of the event and/or provide
an incident report containing information for a media release, when applicable. This information
shall be forwarded to the command staff. Media Releases, also known as Press Releases, will normally
be done by the Chief of Police or by the Investigations Lieutenant.
a. Where several officers at the scene of a department operation or criminal investigation have
information, the ranking investigator or ranking officer will serve as the media contact. While the
handling of the crime or the incident shall take priority, as soon as convenient, media requests should
be addressed.
b. In the case of a follow up investigation where a high profile crime has been solved or an arrest made,
the shift supervisor or the Investigation Division supervisor, as available and appropriate, will ensure
that the necessary information is forwarded to the command staff for a press release to the media.
128.ADM
3. In matters of immediate importance or urgency (such as a major department operation or major crime
investigation), the appropriate shift supervisor or the Investigation Division supervisor shall release
information as it is governed by this policy. In situations in which the shift supervisor or
Investigation Division supervisor is not available, their designee(s) will take responsibility for release
of information as per this policy.
a. The supervisor releasing the information to the media shall provide the Chief of Police with a brief
summary of the information that has been provided to the media.
b. When other government agencies are involved in a mutual effort, the lead agency will be
determined based upon function and responsibility. The lead agency is responsible for any news
release pertaining to the incident.
Note: In all cases where another agency assumes responsibility for an investigation, that
agency or its representatives will be responsible for release of information and any request for
information will be referred to that agency.
4. Any member and/or unit requested to speak to the media or appear before a group or body regarding
police operations or police department related matters, will notify their immediate supervisor of such
request. Approval of the request must be received prior to the speech or appearance.
5. Members of the Department who belong to non-Department organizations and are authorized to speak
in behalf of those organizations shall insure that any public comment made is clearly understood as
coming from that organization and not from the police department. The member or members,
speaking on behalf of that organization, shall not identify themselves as a member of the South Boston
Police Department, or in a manner that is likely to infer or represent them as speaking on behalf of the
Department.
6. Members shall receive permission from the Chief of Police before permitting their name or
photograph to be used in any commercial endorsement in connection with their position with the
Department.
C. Information not releasable:
The following information will not be released due to the 6th Amendment, statutory, or other restrictions:
1. The identity or address of victims of sex related crimes or the location of the sexual assault if the
location would tend to identify the victim.
2. The identity of any subject for whom a warrant or summons has not been issued, or indictment
returned.
3. The existence of any criminal record or any information concerning the character or reputation of the
accused or remarks which tend to establish the defendant as a "professional" criminal.
4. The existence or contents of any confession, admission or statement of the accused after arrest.
5. The performance of any examination or test by the accused or the refusal or failure to submit to an
examination or test.
6. The identity of actual or prospective witnesses to crimes, other than the victim as mentioned above or
upon approval by the Commonwealth Attorney, or comments on the expected testimony or credibility
of any witness
128.ADM
7. Any opinions as to the innocence or guilt of the accused, the merits of the case, the possibility of any
pleas or negotiations or the value of any evidence.
8. The identity of any juvenile arrested who has not been certified by the Circuit Court as an adult.
(NOTE:) A judge may authorize release of juvenile identity information when the crime is a Class 3
felony or above or when the juvenile is sentenced as an adult.
9. The names of deceased until the identity has been verified and the next of kin has been notified.
10. Information relating to motor vehicle accident reports specifically prohibited by the CODE of
VIRGINIA.
11. Comments which suggest that a defendant has aided in the investigation or may lead to the identity of
an informant.
12. No information concerning operational plans, tactics, personnel matters, or information that is purely
of an administrative concern shall be released without proper release of information authorization or
subpoena. The release of this type of information shall be handled by Command Staff.
13. Home address of the victim or witness of any crime.
14. The amount of money or value of goods taken by any unlawful means, except that such loss may be
described in general terms, e.g. “a small sum of money”, “three Poulin chain saws”, or “a 1992
Cadillac Fleetwood” would be appropriate since none of these would disclose the exact value of the
loss.
15. Testimony presented to a Grand Jury.
D. Release of information pertaining to juveniles:
Normally, a juvenile’s name, address, or other distinctly unique information which would serve to identify
a juvenile SHALL NOT be released. Age, sex, area of residence (not address), and details of the offense
MAY be released. Under certain circumstances, a judge may authorize the release of identity information.
E. Crime or incident information release
Crime or incident information to be released upon media request includes:
1. The type of event or crime and when and where it occurred, to include a brief synopsis of known facts
concerning the incident. This includes the type of weapon used and types of injuries to the victim or
suspect, if releasing such information does not interfere with the investigation or prosecution of the
case. If this information is released, it is released at the discretion of the investigating officer.
2. The identity of the victim (not listed in section C) or the name of the person who reported the crime.
If the victim or complainant requests that his or her name not be used in the media, this request will be
given to the media. The media is obligated to respect this request. Also, a victim or witness may
request information pertaining to his or her or a family member’s residential address, place of
employment, telephone number, email address may not be released according to Virginia Code 19.2-
11.2. (The department has a general practice of describing crime victims and/or witnesses such as: a
39-year-old female resident from South Boston, or a 52-year-old male from Danville.)
3. Information concerning property loss or physical injuries.
128.ADM
4. Information concerning the type of investigation and length of investigation.
5. Information concerning the existence of suspect(s).
6. If a suspect is being sought then a picture, video, and/or description of that person can be released
unless it would have a negative impact on apprehension.
7. Summary of the facts and essential circumstances of the arrest or incident, including charges.
8. Sex Crimes
a. Information about a sex crime victim that does not identify or tend to identify the victim may be
released, e.g. the site of the crime. (For example, in a spousal rape or the sexual abuse of a child by
a parent, release of the name of the assailant or a home address would tend to divulge the identity of
the victim, therefore, could not be released. Information that directly or indirectly identifies the
victim of a crime involving any sexual assault or abuse may not be released (Virginia Code 19.2-
11.2).
b. The name, street of residence, and physical description of a person who has been arrested unless the
offender is a juvenile.
c. The type of weapon used, if releasing such information does not interfere with the investigation or
prosecution of the case. If this information is released, it is released at the discretion of the
investigating officer.
d. The type of force used.
e. Injuries to the victim or suspect.
f. Summary of facts and essential circumstances of the arrest or indictment, including charges.
g. A description of a suspect or suspects being sought.
F. Release of individual arrest information:
After arrest of a person other than a juvenile, the following may be released upon media request:
1. Arrestee's name, age, street of residence, and other factual background information.
2. The nature of the charge upon which the arrest is made.
3. The identity of the investigative agency of the police department and any assisting agencies.
4. The circumstances surrounding the arrest, including the place of arrest and the identity of the arresting
officers.
5. Custody status.
6. The dates of various hearings.
7. Photographs of the defendants without the police identification data may be furnished if available.
G. Names of police officers:
128.ADM
Names of officers providing information to the media may be given to the media and published, unless the
officer(s) involved is/are on an undercover assignment. Addresses and telephone numbers of police
personnel shall not be released.
H. Press Release
1. The Chief of Police, Investigation Lieutenant, or a designee shall issue press releases.
2. Any member of the department preparing a press release may utilize the standard South Boston Police
Department press release form (FORM 128.ADM 01).
3. When a written press release has been drafted and distributed by the Chief of Police or a designee,
media requests for further information shall be referred to the contact person listed on the press release
or to the investigating officer. If either is unavailable, media requests should be referred to the
appropriate shift supervisor or Investigation Division supervisor.
I. Press Conference
1. Press conferences shall not be held without the authorization of the Chief of Police.
2. A member designated by the Chief of Police will be responsible for arranging and coordinating
department press conferences. The assigned member shall be responsible for:
a. Securing the press conference location and making sure it is appropriately arranged.
1.) Proper lighting.
2.) Adequate electrical outlets if needed.
3.) Appropriate speaker’s location including speaker’s podium with suitable background area.
4.) Chairs for media.
b. Preparing for a press release, if required.
c. Notifying the media representative of the date, time, location and general topic of the news
conference.
d. Assisting the media with access into the news conference site and providing liaison to the media at
the news conference.
e. Any distribution of handouts as required.
f. Assisting at the news conferences as needed or as directed by the Chief of Police.
J. Access at Scenes
In accordance with 15.2-1714 of the Code of Virginia, personnel from informational services such as
press, radio, and television shall have access to scenes of fires, crimes, accidents, wrecks, explosions, riots,
or other emergencies and shall proceed at their own risk. It shall be unlawful for the media to obstruct the
police, firefighters, or emergency medical services personnel in the performance of their duties at such
scenes.
128.ADM
1. Media representatives shall produce valid media credentials that shall be prominently displayed at all
times while in areas otherwise closed to the public.
2. Media representatives should be prevented from interfering and may be removed for interfering with
emergency operations and criminal investigations. However, media representatives shall be assisted in
gaining access to the scene when it will not interfere with law enforcement performing their duties.
3. Based upon available resources, reasonable effort should be made to provide a safe staging area for the
media that is near the incident and that will not interfere with emergency or criminal investigation
operations. All information released to the media should be coordinated through a supervisor or
designated spokesperson.
4. Officers may deny access for legitimate investigative or safety reasons; additionally, they may not
authorize the press to trespass on private property.
5. The media is responsible for obtaining any necessary permission to enter upon private property once
law enforcement allows access to a scene.
K. Photographing by the News Media:
1. Photographing a person in department custody will not be permitted within confines of a department
facility, except upon authorization by the Chief of Police.
2. News media representatives may be permitted inside police lines at the scene of an investigation or a
crime scene only after the scene has been cleared, and then only with the approval of the Investigations
Division supervisor, shift supervisor, or their designee. (See section J)
3. Photographing outside-established police lines will not be restricted. Police lines are used to stop
evidence destruction and to control access. Telescopic-photography does not destroy evidence or
disturb police operations.
4. Official department photographs will not be released without authorization from the Chief of Police or
his designee, or by court subpoena.
AUTHORIZATION:
_________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
128.ADM
N/A
SUBJECT: VIRGINIA FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT REQUESTS
I. POLICY
The Department shall promptly respond to all requests for public records made under the Virginia
Freedom of Information Act (VFOIA). The Department’s response shall be made in accordance
with the requirements of VFOIA, Code of Virginia §2.2-3700, et seq.
II. PURPOSE
To provide members of the Department with guidelines for handling Virginia Freedom of
Information Act requests.
III. PROCEDURE
A. Point of Contact
1. The Chief of Police will be the point of contact within the Department to handle all official responses to
third party requests for information or public documents made under VFOIA.
2. Upon receipt of a VFOIA request the Chief of Police shall immediately notify the Records Supervisor of
the request and of the date by which the Department is required to respond to the request. The Records
Supervisor will be responsible for preparing the Department’s response to the request in accordance with
Code of Virginia §2.2-3704. This responsibility will include
a) collecting copies of all records responsive to the VFOIA request from the proper
division/bureau/unit commanders,
b) previewing the responsive documents to determine whether any or all may be
exempt from being disclosed under VFOIA, and
c) preparation of a written response to the request that complies with the requirements
of Code of Virginia §2.2-3704(B).
3. It will be the responsibility of the Records Supervisor to ensure that a prompt response (within five
business days of a Department member’s receipt of a VFOIA request) is made. The record’s supervisor
may, with approval from the Chief of Police, seek assistance from the Town Attorney’s Office, in
determining whether any requested records are subject to disclosure under VFOIA, or in preparing written
response to the request.
B. Handling a Request for Information
1. Any member of the Department who receives a request for information or Department records will treat
that request as a VFOIA request. Upon receipt of a request by any person to inspect or copy any records of
the Department, the Department member receiving that request shall immediately forward the request to the
Chief of Police for response.
2. A requesting person does not need to cite the VFOIA, or to justify or explain the reason for a request for
Department records. A member receiving any request for inspection of copying of Department records
shall simply forward the request to the Chief of Police.
3. All requests for records need to be made with “reasonable specificity” however, there is no particular
required format. Department members should be aware that VFOIA requests for inspection and copying of
129.ADM 1
Department records may be communicated by various means: verbal, written, electronic communication
(e-mail), facsimile, etc. No member of the Department shall attempt to determine the validity or
sufficiency of any person’s request without the concurrence of the Chief of Police
4. If a requested record or document does not already exist, the Department is not required to create a record,
or to put information into any particular format. However, the Department may abstract or summarize
information under such terms and conditions as may be agreed upon between the requesting party and the
Chief of Police.
5. The Department shall provide records maintained in electronic formats or databases in such format or
medium as may be required by Code of Virginia §2.2-3704 (G).
C. Responses
1. All responses to requests will be in compliance with the VFOIA and the Department reserves the right to
withhold information in accordance with the VFOIA. The Department’s official response to a VFOIA
request shall issue from the Chief of Police.
2. Department personnel who have been contacted by the Chief of Police or the Records Supervisor regarding
the need to respond to a request received by the Department under the VFOIA shall immediately provide
one of the following responses to the member requesting the information, so that there will be a timely
response to the requesting party:
a) The requested records will be provided to the requester. In this case, true copies of
the requested records will be forwarded to the Records Supervisor and shall be
provided with information as to a date, time and location that records will be made
available at the Department for inspection by the requesting party.
b) The records will be entirely withheld because law prohibits a release of such records.
In this case, the Records Supervisor will be notified of the specific provisions of law
that prohibit a release of the requested records or which exempt the requested records
from the requirements of disclosure under VFOIA. If the responding personnel
cannot cite to a specific provision of law, then he or she may request the Records
Supervisor to obtain guidance from the Town Attorney’s Office.
c) The requested records will be provided in part and withheld in part because the
release of part of the records is prohibited by law or the custodian has exercised his
discretion to withhold a portion of the records in compliance with the code section.
As indicated in paragraphs (a) and (b), above, copies of records to be provided shall
be forwarded to the Records Supervisor, and documentation may be withheld only
pursuant to a specific provision of law.
d) If it is not practically possible to provide the records or determine the availability
within the five working day period, the Records Supervisor shall immediately be
notified of this fact, and of the conditions that make a response impossible, so that
he/she can prepare a written response communicating that to the requesting party. If
the Records Supervisor is able to make this response to the requesting party within
five business days, then the Department will have an additional seven work days to
make one of the preceding responses
3. All responses prepared by the Chief of Police to a requesting party, except actually providing the records,
will :
a) be in writing,
b) identify with reasonable particularity the subject matter of withheld records, and
c) cite, as to each category of withheld records, the specific Virginia Code section,
which authorizes the withholding of the records. The Department may delete or
129.ADM 2
excise only the portion(s) of a requested record to which an exemption applies and
must release the remainder of the record.
D. Charges for Information Requested
1. The Department will charge a reasonable amount for costs incurred in the supplying of information
requested in compliance with the VFIO.
2. The charges will be calculated with respect to the labor and materials needed for the process of accessing,
duplicating, supplying, and searching for requested records.
E. Withholding Information
1. The Department reserves all the rights granted under the VFOIA or other provisions of Virginia Law, to
withhold or exempt certain records from disclosure.
2. Examples of Departmental records that will be withheld include, but are not limited to the following:
a) Any record that contains specific tactical plans, the disclosure of which would
jeopardize the safety or security of law-enforcement personnel or the general public
(See Code of Virginia § 2..2-3705 (A) (57) and §2.2-3706.)
b) Non-criminal incident records, investigative reports or other Department records or
materials containing identifying information of a personal, medical or financial
nature, where the release of such information would jeopardize the safety or privacy
of any person. (See Code of Virginia §2.2-3706; 19.2-11.2.)
c) Personnel records containing information concerning identifiable individuals, except
that access shall not be denied to the person who is the subject of the records, and
public disclosure shall not be denied if the person who is the subject of the records
has waived, in writing, the protection afforded by law to his or her personnel records.
(See Code of Virginia §2.2-3705 (A) (4).)
d) Those portions of any record containing information related to plans for, or resources
dedicated to undercover operations. (See Code of Virginia §2.2-3706)
e) Records of background investigations of applicants for law-enforcement agency
employment, or other confidential administrative investigations conducted pursuant
to law. (See Code of Virginia §2.2-3706)
f) Complaints, memoranda, correspondence and evidence relating to a criminal
investigation or prosecution, other than “criminal incident information” specifically
required by law to be disclosed. (See Code of Virginia §2.2-3706)
g) Any other information or records exempt from VFOIA, or which may be withheld at
the discretion of the Department, as set forth in Code of Virginia .
F. Information Required to Be Disclosed
1. As a general rule, law enforcement officials are required by VFOIA to make available, upon request,
“criminal incident information” relating to felony offenses. “Criminal Incident Information” means, for
purposes of VFOIA (See Code of Virginia §2.2-3706):
a) a general description of the criminal activity reported,
b) the date and general location the alleged crime was committed,
c) the identify of the investigating officer, and
d) a general description of any injuries suffered or property damaged or stolen.
2. “Criminal Incident Information” need not be disclosed under VFOIA in the following circumstances:
129.ADM 3
a) where the release of criminal incident information is likely to jeopardize an ongoing
investigation or prosecution,
b) is likely to jeopardize the safety of an individual,
c) is likely to cause a suspect to flee or evade detection, or
d) is likely to result in the destruction of evidence.
Under these circumstances the Department may withhold requested records and
information until the above-referenced damage is no longer likely to occur as a result of
release. If criminal incident information is not likely to cause any of the above-
referenced damage(s), then it must be released to a requesting party.
3. Information in the custody of law enforcement officials relative to the identity of any individual (other than
a juvenile) who is arrested and charged, and the status of the charge of or arrest, must be released.
G. VFOIA Requests from Media
1. Generally, VFOIA requests received from the media are to be handled under this policy.
2. However, when a VFOIA request pertains to or seeks information about an ongoing criminal investigation
or other sensitive operations, response to the VFOIA request shall also be handled consistently with the
rules set forth within the general order pertaining to media relations
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
129.ADM 4
June 1, 1997
SUBJECT: LINE OF DUTY DEATHS OR SERIOUS INJURY
VLEPSC STANDARDS: ADM.23.04
I. POLICY:
In any line-of-duty death of a member of the South Boston Police Department or a serious injury to a member,
the department will act in a timely manner notifying the family. All personnel having contact with the family
will act in a personal manner, assisting and supporting the family.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to direct the South Boston Police Department to provide proper emotional care for
the deceased officer’s family. It should be remembered that the funeral arrangements are to be decided by the
family, with their wishes taking precedence over the agency’s.
Note: The Chief of Police may put certain parts of this directive in effect for cases of natural death or accidental
death of a ember of the Department that is cause by a non-related police incident, either while the member is on
off-duty status or when the member is a retired officer.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Notification:
1. Serious Injuries to department member:
a. Upon absolute confirmation of an officer’s identity and death or critical injury, the ranking on-scene
officer or supervisor shall immediately notify one of the following administrative or supervisor
officers through a secure means. The priority of notification shall be made as follows:
1.) Chief of Police
2.) Appropriate Unit Supervisor:
a.) Patrol Unit
b.) Investigations Unit
3.) Shift Supervisor
2. The Chief of Police or his designee will proceed to the family’s residence as soon as possible to notify
the family members and offer assistance, including transportation to the hospital.
3. Line-of-Duty Death:
a. The name of the deceased officer WILL NEVER be released to the media before immediate
130.ADM 1
survivors living in the area are notified.
b. If there is knowledge of a medical problem with an immediate survivor, medical personnel will be
dispatched to the residence to coincide with the death notification.
c. Notification WILL ALWAYS be made in person and should never be made alone. The Chief of
Police and/or his designee will act as the informing officers.
1. If the Chief of Police and a Lieutenant are not readily accessible, notification should not be
held up. If the opportunity to get the family to the hospital prior to the demise of the officer
presents itself, DON'T wait for the proper delegation to gather.
2. As soon as most families see you, they will know something is wrong, ask to be
admitted to the house do not make the notification on the doorstep. Gather everyone in the
home and ask them to sit down. Inform them slowly and clearly of the information you have
on the incident. Make sure you use the officer's name during the notification.
3. If the officer has already died, relay that information. Never give the family a false sense of
hope. Use words like "died" and "dead" rather than "gone away" or "passed away".
4. If the person (s) responsible for the death notification has been seriously affected by the death,
he/she should understand that showing emotion is perfectly acceptable.
5. If the specifics of the incident are known, the notifying officers should relay as much
information as possible to the family.
6. Reactions of the family may include hysteria, anger, fainting, physical violence, shock, etc.
7. If the family wants to go to the hospital, they should be transported via department vehicle(s).
It is highly recommended that the family not drive themselves to the hospital. Should there
be serious resistance and the family insists on driving, have an officer accompany them in the
car.
8. The department should find out if there are any young children in the home. The department
will be responsible for arranging immediate baby-sitting needs.
9. Because of the nature of possible radio transmissions, the officer making transport should
notify the hospital that the family is enroute.
10. Surviving parents will be afforded this same courtesy of personal notification if they live in
the same geographic area.
11. If immediate survivors are from out of town, request personal death notification from the
police department/sheriff's office in that area. Logistical arrangements should enable
simultaneous telephone contact with the South Boston Police Department.
B. Assisting the Family at the Hospital
1. The Chief of Police or his designee will appoint an officer to act as information liaison between the
medical personnel, family of the officer, and fellow police officers.
2. When a critically injured member has been transported to the hospital, or a deceased member has died
enroute to a hospital or dies after arriving at a hospital, the first ranking officer, excluding the Chief of
Police or Unit Supervisor shall become the hospital liaison officer.
130.ADM 2
3. The hospital liaison officer is responsible for coordinating the arrival of next-of-kin, police officials,
the press and others. He/she is also responsible for seeing to it that the family is updated on the
incident as soon as the family arrives at the hospital. In addition, the hospital liaison officer
responsibilities shall include:
a. Making arrangements with hospital personnel for appropriate waiting facilities. There should be
segregated area reserved for:
1.) The immediate family, The Chief of Police or if unavailable the highest ranking member of the
Department, notification officer, and others as requested by the family.
2.) A separate waiting room for fellow officers and friends.
3.) Media staging area.
b. Requesting that medical personnel relay pertinent information on the officer’s condition to the
family first.
c. Assisting the family members, in accordance with their desires, in gaining access to the injured or
deceased officer.
d. Providing medical personnel with all necessary information on billing for medical services. The
hospital liaison officer will ensure that all medical bills are directed to the South Boston Police
Department and are not to be forwarded to the officer’s family or survivors.
e. Remaining with the family while they are at the hospital and rendering any assistance that my be
needed.
f. Arranging transportation to and from the hospital for immediate family members if such
transportation is needed.
g. Those present at the hospital should be aware of the following when dealing with the immediate
family:
1.) Do not be overly protective of the family. This includes sharing the specific information on
how the officer met his or her demise, as well as allowing the family sometime with the remains
of the deceased.
2.) Do not make idle promises, e.g. “We’ll retire his badge.”
3.) Understanding that raw emotion expressed by anyone, including officer’s present, under the
circumstances is perfectly understandable.
h. The liaison officer will insure that pertinent information on the officer's condition is relayed on a
timely basis. He/she shall also make the family and fellow police officers aware of hospital
policy about visitation with the injured officer and/or visitation with the body following the
demise, and to explain why an autopsy is needed.
i. If it is possible for the family to visit the officer prior to death, they most certainly should be
afforded that opportunity. IT IS THE FAMILY'S RIGHT to visit their loved one. The liaison officer
should "prepare" the family for what they might see in the emergency room and accompany the
family into the room for the visit if the family requests it.
130.ADM 3
4. The Chief of Police and the Captain and/or others of the South Boston Police Department will be
present the entire time the family is in the hospital and should arrange whatever assistance the
family may need at that time.
C. Continued Support for the Family
1. Within 24 hours of an officer’s death, the Chief of Police shall designate a department liaison officer
and a benefit’s coordinator. The assignment will be made in writing and the family will be informed
of the designated officers. In addtition, the Chief of Police may:
a. Authorize the wearing of a black band, approximately ½ inch wide on the police shield, to signify the
loss of a member of the Department. The band shall be worn for a time period determined by the
Chief of Police.
b. Request, in the event of a line of duty death, that all Town of South Boston American flags be flown
at half-staff for a period of 30 days.
2. An administrative officer/public information officer will be designated to handle the media throughout
this traumatic ordeal. In the unlikely event that the family should decide to accept an interview, this
officer will attend and "screen" all questions presented to the family so as to not jeopardize
upcoming legal proceedings.
D. Department Liaison Officer
The Unit or Shift Supervisor will normally be designated department liaison officer because of the need to
make expedient provisions of the necessary Department resources. It shall be the responsibility of the
department liaison officer to:
1. Be the primary point of contact between the family and the Department.
2. Coordinate all other liaison activity and explain their roles to the family.
3. Ensure that the family’s wishes are communicated directly to the Chief of Police and the Chief of
Police’s principal staff.
4. Serve as a liaison between the media and the immediate family. Provide a Department liaison with the
media that include coordination of any statements and press conferences.
5. Coordinate all official law enforcement notifications and arrangement including honor guard,
pallbearers, traffic control, and liaison with visiting law enforcement agencies.
6. Ensure that security checks of the survivor’s residence are initiated immediately following the incident
and for as long as necessary thereafter.
7. Coordinate all funeral activities to include:
a. Being available to the family prior to and throughout the funeral.
b. Relay any information concerning the circumstances of the decedent officer’s death and appropriate
information regarding any investigation.
c. Briefing the family on the procedures in the law enforcement funeral.
d. Ensuring that the needs and wishes of the family come before the department.
130.ADM 4
e. Meet with the family regarding funeral arrangements. Since most officers have not prearranged
their wishes for the handling of their own funeral, the family will most likely need to decide all
aspects of the funeral. The department should only make the family aware of what they can offer
in the way of assistance if the family decides to have a "line-of-duty funeral".
E. Benefits Coordinator
1. The Benefits Coordinator, if it is the desire of the family, shall be responsible for filing the appropriate
benefit paperwork and following through with the family to ensure that the benefits available to them are
actually paid. In addition, it shall be the responsibility of the Benefits Coordinator to:
a. Present information on all benefits that are available to the family. Those benefits will include Town,
State and Federal claims, and from organizations such as the Fraternal Order of Police.
b. Contact appropriate Town offices to insure that the beneficiary receives timely death and retirements
monies, and that the family receives the Department member’s remaining paycheck and payment of
any reimbursable leave balances.
c. Filing worker compensation claims and the related paperwork.
d. Filing all benefits paperwork and maintaining contact with the family in order to insure that the
benefits are received.
e. Advise the surviving family of the role of the police associations and the nature of support programs
that they sponsor for law enforcement survivors.
F. Family Support Advocate
1. It will be at the discretion of the Chief of Police to appoint a member of the Department to the position
of family support advocate on a case by case basis or to work closely with the local Victim Witness
Coordinator. The duties and responsibilities of the family support advocate include the following:
a. Keeping the family abreast of criminal proceedings relating to the death of their family member.
b. Accompanying family members to criminal proceedings, explaining the proceedings, introducing them
to prosecutors and others.
c. Working on behalf of the family to secure any support services that are available.
d. Maintaining routine contact with the family to provide an ongoing relationship between the Department
and the immediate family.
e. Relaying concerns and needs of the family to organizations and individuals that may provide assistance
and encouraging others to visit and help as necessary.
G. Memorials
1. A file will be maintained in the office of the Chief of Police on a member who is killed in the line of
duty. The file shall contain a narrative of the circumstances that led to member’s death and other
pertinent information about the member and their immediate family. The file may also include:
a. Copies of official police reports
130.ADM 5
b. Medical examiner’s reports
c. Court documents
d. Photographs
e. Newspaper clippings
f. Video tapes
g. One portrait type photograph (if available)
h. Most recently taken photograph before the member’s death
2. The Chief of Police shall ensure that the fallen member is honored during the annual National Police
Week. The immediate family, if there whereabouts are known, shall be invited to any memorial service
that the Department may conduct. The invitation will be the responsibility of the officer or committee
organizing the memorial service.
3. The Chief of Police or his designee shall work with community groups and government leaders towards
the establishment of any memorial tribute, commemorative plaque or other appropriate expression of
remembrance. The immediate family shall continue to receive emotional support from the Department
and will be evidenced by invitations from the Chief of Police to appropriate Police Department
functions.
4. The Chief of Police may initiate remembrances on the anniversary of the member’s death, as he deems
appropriate.
5. Plaques/memorabilia, etc. given to the spouse will also be given to the parents.
H. Guidelines for Funeral Service and Ceremony
1. It is recognized that funeral arrangements are a family decision. Therefore, subject to the wishes of the
immediate family, a department funeral may be requested. All requests shall be submitted by the
department liaison officer to the Chief of Police.
2. Department services that shall be provided upon the approval of the Chief of Police are:
a. For the death of a member in the line of duty:
1.) Honor Guard for casket watch
2.) Honorary pallbearers
3.) American flag (unless otherwise provided)
4.) Flag folding team (may be done by pallbearers)
5.) Uniform for burial
6.) Honor Guard to accompany remains if out of area burial
b. For death of an active member:
130.ADM 6
1.) Honor Guard for casket watch
2.) Honorary pallbearers
3.) Flag folding team (may be done by pallbearers)
4.) A uniform for burial must be specifically requested
c. For the death of a retired member
1.) Honor Guard as pallbearers or honorary pallbearers
2.) Escort for funeral procession
I. Special Responsibilities and Duties of the Funeral Detail
1. Honor Guard watch shall be posted at the head and foot of the casket, one hour in advance of and during
all viewing hours. The watch shall be removed prior to all religious, fraternal, or civic related
ceremonies. The Honor Watch shall be posted and relieved in a military manner and may be changed at
30-minute intervals. The watch shall terminate one half hour after viewing hours.
2. The movement of the casket shall be conducted in the following manner:
a. Uniformed South Boston Police Department officers shall form the primary Honor Cordon from the
door of the church/parlor to the hearse.
b. If available, the Color Guard shall be positioned near the hearse, with the Colors towards the door of
the church/parlor.
c. The Department Liaison Officer, or other member assigned by the Chief of Police, shall position all
non-uniformed officers and officers from other agencies in a secondary Honor Cordon leading from
the from of the funeral procession and as far along the side of the roadway as is needed.
d. The pallbearers shall be positioned inside the church/parlor and near the exit door.
e. Prior to movement of the casket the immediate family shall be escorted to their appropriate vehicles.
f. The Department Liaison Officer, or other member assigned by the Chief of Police, shall exit the
church/parlor, proceed to a point near the rear of the hearse and in view of where the casket will exit
the door. When in position, the Department Liaison Officer or member assigned by the Chief of
Police will command all personnel to stand at the position of attention. As soon as the casket exits,
the officer shall command “Present Arms” which shall be held until the casket is placed in the hearse
at which time the command “Order Arms” shall be given.
g. After the casket has been placed in the hearse, the pallbearers shall proceed to their transportation, the
Department Liaison Officer or other member as assigned by the Chief of Police, shall signal the
Color Guard, if available, to move to their transportation.
h. When the motorized funeral procession is ready to proceed, the Department Liaison Officer or other
member assigned by the Chief of Police shall call the secondary Honor Cordon to “Present Arms”
and they shall remain in that position until the motorized procession has passed.
3. Graveside services shall be conducted in the following manner:
130.ADM 7
a. An Honor Cordon shall be positioned in two parallel lines from the hearse to the graveside.
b. The Color Guard (if available) shall be positioned in close proximity to the gravesite so as to be
visible to the Department Liaison and not interfere with the casket or family.
c. The Department Liaison or other member assigned by the Chief of Police shall be located to meet the
hearse upon its arrival as the hearse arrives he shall come to attention and voice the command “Detail
Attention” (directed to the Honor Cordon). As the hearse approaches, the detail shall present arms,
which shall be held until the hearse passes.
d. The Department Liaison or other member assigned by the Chief of Police shall signal the pallbearers
when to pick up the casket and begin movement to the gravesite. At the first appearance of the casket
from the hearse, the Department Liaison or other member assigned by the Chief of Police shall order
“Present Arms” which shall be held until the casket is placed at the gravesite. Upon placing the
casket at the gravesite, the pallbearers shall momentarily stand at the position of attention and then
complete the process of folding the flag. A designated member shall take the flag and give it to the
Chief of Police or his designee, render a slow salute and about face, exiting the gravesite to a nearby
location with the rest of the other pallbearers. The Chief of Police shall approach the family and
present the flag to a family representative.
e. At the completion of the graveside services the Department Liaison Officer of other member assigned
by the Chief of Police shall voice the commands “Attention” and “Present Arms”. The order shall be
given for a Department detail to give a 21-gun salute, which will be followed by the sounding of taps.
At the conclusion of taps, “Order Arms” will be given.
f. The Department Liaison or other member assigned by the Chief of Police will hold the detail in
position until the family has entered their vehicles, at which time the command to dismiss will be
voiced.
g. If requested a motor escort will be maintained to assist in returning the immediate family’s motorized
funeral procession to their return destination.
4. The Chief of Police or his designee shall have the authority to make any changes to the above guidelines
for funeral service and ceremonies that he deems necessary.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
130.ADM 8
NUMBER: December 21, 2006
February 18, 2000
SUBJECT: VICTIM / WITNESS SERVICES
I. POLICY:
The rights of suspects and defendants involved in the criminal process are unquestionably important; yet it is
equally important to protect the rights of the victims of crime. Victims have a need and an expectation to obtain
fair and humane treatment from law enforcement personnel. Crime victims often suffer physical, psychological,
and financial injuries. The first source of protection for most victims is the police officer. "The manner in which
the police officers treat the victim affects not only his immediate and long term ability to deal with the event but
also his willingness to assist in a prosecution." (President's Task Force on Crime, 1982). A victim treated well
during crisis provides the officer with a better witness who will give a more accurate account of what happened.
The South Boston Police Department recognizes the importance of adequate victim services. Responsiveness to
the needs of crime victims is a department priority. For this very reason, the South Boston Police Department
has entered into a Cooperative Agreement with the Halifax County Victim/Witness Assistance Program, to
provide better services to victims of crime.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines, responsibilities, and procedure for crime victim assistance.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. General responsibilities:
1. "Victim" means a person who suffers personal physical injury or death as a direct result of a crime
including a person who is injured or killed as a result of foreign terrorism or who suffers personal
emotional injury as a direct result of being the subject of a violent felony offense. (Virginia Code 19.2-
368.2)
2. All members of the South Boston Police Department have responsibilities for and shall support crime
victim assistance procedures.
3. Department personnel shall consider victims as clients of the criminal justice system who are to be
treated with respect and fairness.
4. Department personnel shall view victim assistance as a partnership. Better treatment of victims will
result in better investigations leading to more convictions.
5. Cultural/language differences may exist. Personnel are encouraged to use interpreters and translator
services, if needed.
6. Officers are required to render assistance to victims, unless victims refuse it. An officer who has a duty
to act to assist a victim may be liable for negligence for improperly performing, or failing to perform, a
duty. (Federal and state courts have decided recently that victims of crime have a right to equal
protection of the law under the 14th Amendment of the Constitution and that victims, under certain
circumstances, may have a special relationship with law enforcement agencies. Failure to provide
131.ADM 1
either an appropriate response to victims or to respond upon the pleading of a victim for help may be
judged as malfeasance or nonfeasance of official law enforcement duties and obligations.)
B. Officer Responsibilities:
1. To ensure that victims and witnesses receive protection from harm and threats of harm arising out of
their cooperation with the police or Commonwealth’s Attorney.
2. To provide victims with information pertaining to financial assistance, social services, legal services,
compensation programs, and counseling available as a result of being a victim of crime, to include
information on how to apply for assistance and services.
3. To ensure that stolen property belonging to a victim and being held by the Department for evidentiary
purposes is returned promptly.
4. To maintain contact with crime victims and witnesses during the investigating and prosecutory
processes and provide information concerning case status and court proceedings.
5. To assist where appropriate and in accordance with applicable Virginia law in seeking restitution for
losses incurred to victims as a result of a crime.
6. To ensure the confidentiality of records and files of victims and witnesses and their role in case
development to the extent consistent with applicable law.
7. Determine where the victim will be over the next several months, obtain addresses for any temporary
or permanent residence, place of business, or other place to contact.
D. Victim/Witnesses Assistance Services
The following victim/witness assistance services shall be rendered to crime victims and witnesses by patrol
officers and investigators over and above normal preliminary or follow up investigative services:
1. Preliminary Investigation
a. Information concerning available services such as counseling, medical attention, compensation

programs, emergency financial assistance, and information concerning victim advocacy.
b. Advising victims/witnesses to immediately notify the police department if either the suspect(s) or
their friends or family members threaten or intimidate them.
c. Provide victims/witnesses with the police department’s non-emergency telephone number they
they may call to receive additional information about their case or to receive information about the
status of their case.
d. Provide victims/witnesses with the case number assigned to their offense report and inform them
of the subsequent steps in the processing of their case.
e. Petition for an emergency protective order, if necessary.
f. The officer may, upon request, transport or arrange transportation of the victim to a hospital or
safe shelter.
g. Following a crime, officers shall provide the victim with a Victim/Witness Assistance program
131.ADM 2
brochure listing the specific rights afforded to crime victims. The brochure shall include a
telephone number by which the victim can receive further information about assistance, provide
additional information, or check on the status of their case. Officers will also provide a
Victim/Witness business card to the victims and write the incident number on this card that has
been assigned to the call. No matter what the final disposition of the call officers or investigators
should refer the victim to the Victim/Witness Assistance Program located in the same building as
the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office.
E. Interacting with witnesses at a crime scene:
1. Identify and separate witnesses:
a. Record names and addresses of witnesses and other persons at the scene.
b. Obtain valid identification, if possible
c. Obtain preliminary statements.
2. Interview victims separately from witnesses and in privacy.
a. Victims are interviewed; suspects are interrogated. Interviews with victims require patience, firm
but not overbearing control, tact, and a demonstrated concern for their discomfort.
b. Establish rapport with the victim. Explain the necessity of asking specific personal questions.
c. Use appropriate interview techniques.
d. Explain to the victim, the procedures involved in there case and their role in the procedures.
e. If feasible, schedule line-ups, other interviews or other required appearances at the convenience of
the victim/witness.
f. If property is taken as evidence, explain the importance of the property.
1.) Notify victim where the property is stored
2.) Schedule an approximate return date if possible. (except for contraband, disputed property,
and weapons used in the course of the crime)
3.) Expedite the return of property. Photograph as much as possible in order to return the
property to its owner sooner.
3. Assess medical/psychological needs of victim.
a. Arrange for appropriate treatment as soon as possible. The victim may want or need to be
examined and reassured of his or her physical condition. Similarly, the victim may want or need
to speak to someone for psychological support (relative, friend, or counselor).
b. The victim may be confused or unable to express his or her needs. Use good judgment and, if
approbate, refer the victim to another agency.
F. Follow-up Investigation
1. Re-contact the victim/witnesses periodically to determine if there is any additional information
131.ADM 3
concerning the crime, and to determine if there are any additional services the Department can provide.
2. If not damaging to the case, explain to victims/witnesses the procedures involved in the prosecution of
their cases and their role in those procedures.
3. Scheduling interviews, line-ups, or other meetings with victims/witnesses at their convenience, if

feasible.
4. Return property to victims/witnesses as promptly as possible and in accordance with applicable state
law, with the exception of contraband, disputed property, etc.
5. Notify the victim/witness as soon as possible of the arrest of a suspect also letting him or her know of
the custody status and what charges were filed.
G. It is the investigating officer’s responsibility to :
1. maintain victim's case information;
2. provide support for the victim;
3. protect the victim/take action regarding intimidation or threats by the defendant and his family and
friends;
4. keep the victim informed of results of hospital/lab tests;
5. notify the victim if defendant makes bond or has a bond reduction hearing scheduled;
6. explain the criminal justice procedures pending; remind the victim that he or she will see the accused
in court and reassure the victim's safety;
7. work closely with prosecuting attorneys in retrial and trial preparations;
8. give victim one's name and phone number for future contacts;
9. advise victim of social service agencies (such as victim/witness assistance program or domestic
violence shelter)
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
131.ADM 4
NUMBER August 29, 2022
December 6, 2007
SUBJECT: TRAFFIC CHECKING DETAILS
I. POLICY:
One of the primary goals of this Department is the protection of the public. Ensuring safety on the highways is
an important objective in achieving this goal. An effective tool toward this objective is the use of traffic
checking details. This Department will use traffic checking details to help ensure public safety on the
highways.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to establish the procedures for conducting Traffic Checking Details in
accordance with the Code of Virginia and court decisions.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Initial Procedures for Setting Up a Traffic Checking Detail
1. The Chief of Police will maintain a list of approved Traffic Checking Detail sites. Sites will be
reassessed on an annual basis. The Chief of Police can remove any site from the list at any time if the
site no longer meets the below listed criteria or is deemed to be generally unsafe. The current list of
approved sites will be reviewed on an annual basis by Command Staff and updated as necessary. All
Checking Detail sites will be selected using the following criteria:
a. Site locations shall be distributed throughout the town to ensure a fair sampling of the
motorists using the highways.
b. The site shall have adequate visibility to provide safety to approaching motorists and
members of the detail.
c. The site shall have adequate space available to park police vehicles in a safe manner.
d. Adequate space shall be available to allow vehicles to be pulled out of the flow of traffic
for additional examination without creating a traffic hazard.
e. The site shall be designated as approved for daylight or night operations, or approved for
both.
f. The site shall have no particular characteristics which would create a hazard to motorists
or members.
132.ADM
2. All traffic checking details must be pre-approved by the Chief of Police or his/her designee on a
“TRAFFIC CHECKING DETAIL APPROVAL AND OPERATIONAL PLAN FORM (FORM
132.ADM (01))”. The form shall be completed and submitted by the officer designated as the on-site
supervisor prior to the start of the checkpoint to outline and ensure the following:
a. Date for the checking detail to take place.
b. Location of the checking detail.
b. Time and duration of the traffic checking detail (unless there are exigent circumstances traffic
checking details should last no less than 1 hour and no more than 3 hours).
c. One officer will be designated as the on-site supervisor. The officer,

whether it is the Chief of Police or his/her designee, who approved the checkpoint shall not
participate in the traffic checking detail. The on-site supervisor’s duties include:
i. Identify the signing, safety equipment, warning devices, and any other equipment that will be
used, as well as their placement and proper use.
ii. Specify the method for selecting motorists to be contacted to ensure consistency and
objectivity.
iii. Ensure that the initial screening period (initial period officer is checking what is required) is
kept to a minimum to reduce unnecessary delay or intrusion.
iv. Provide for the removal of vehicles to a predetermined area when further investigation is
required, and the disposition of vehicles subsequent to arrest.
B. Procedures While Conducting Traffic Checking Details
1. Site selection shall be approved by the Chief of Police or his/her designee from a list of pre-approved
sites and conducted by an on-site supervisor.
2. Traffic checking details shall be conducted with a minimum of three (3) sworn law enforcement
officers to include the on-site supervisor. The officers shall be in uniform displaying their badge of
authority and wearing a traffic safety vest at every traffic checking detail. Non-sworn personnel may
be utilized to perform additional duties such as counting vehicles, completing non-law enforcement
paperwork, or maintaining traffic safety control devices.
3. All officers setting up the Checking Detail will be responsible for ensuring safety precautions are taken
to afford safety to motorists, pedestrians, and other officers.
4. The on-site supervisor is responsible for establishing a predetermined pattern for stopping vehicles
passing through the checkpoint. The average screening time per vehicle, traffic volume, and the
number of checkpoint officers should be considered when determining the appropriate pattern for
checking vehicles. Screening procedures may, upon the on-site supervisor direction, be varied during
the checkpoint to match traffic flow. Whenever possible, the on-site supervisor will not participate in
the stopping of vehicles.
5. The on-site supervisor will document screening procedures and any change in screening procedures
along with the reason for the change.
132.ADM
6. Vehicles will be screened in a predetermined pattern, which may be modified by the on-site supervisor
due to traffic volume. Vehicles will not be randomly stopped on a discretionary basis.
7. All motor vehicles falling within the established screening pattern, regardless of the vehicle type, will
be checked. This includes commercial motor vehicles such as buses and large trucks.
8. Patrol vehicles shall be parked to provide protection to the participants and to be highly visible to
approaching motorists. Patrol vehicles shall be situated to allow for pursuit if necessary.
9. Traffic control measures will be implemented to provide adequate warning to motorists, i.e., use of
flares, emergency lights, and/or well-lit areas at night when other safety measures are inadequate.
10. A safe place shall be designated for those vehicles that require additional inspection. These sites shall
be out of the general flow of traffic, preferably off the roadway.
11. Traffic checking details shall be maintained for a period of at least 1 hour, unless otherwise approved
or circumstances arise that would warrant cancellation or suspension of the checkpoint, as determined
by the on-site supervisor. The on-site supervisor shall determine if a checking detail needs to be
stopped for unusual circumstances (weather, lack of police personnel to maintain safety, traffic
congestion, etc.); or if there needs to be any changes to the operational plan due to the circumstances
on scene at the traffic checking detail. Traffic checking details shall not exceed 3 hours.
a. Any changes to the operational plan are to be detailed by the on-site supervisor on the “TRAFFIC
CHECKING DETAIL AFTER ACTION REPORT (FORM 132.ADM (02))”
13. Multi-jurisdictional checking details are encouraged to increase the number of uniformed officers on
scene. In cases of multi-jurisdictional traffic checking details one agency shall be designated as the
lead law enforcement agency.
14. To achieve the desired goal of producing a sustained voluntary compliance with the traffic laws and
deterrence through enforcement, checkpoints should be conducted at various times of the day, various
days of the week, and at various locations.
C. Upon Completion of a Traffic Checking Detail
1. All equipment, materials, litter, and etc. shall be removed at the completion of the detail.
2. A “TRAFFIC CHECKING DETAIL AFTER ACTION REPORT (FORM 132.ADM (02))” shall be
completed by the on-site supervisor upon the completion of every checking detail. This report shall
detail the following:
a. Date of report and officer completing the report.
b. Date, time, and location of traffic checking detail.
c. Number of vehicles that went through the detail and the sequence vehicles were checked.
d. Total number of violations to include a detailed list of the number and types of violations addressed
by arrest and summons.
e. List of officers participating in the traffic checking detail and their assignments.
f. Any special circumstances requiring deviation from the operational plan for the traffic checking
detail and an explanation of the deviation.
132.ADM
g. Once completed, all paperwork listed in this general order will be submitted to the records
department where it will be kept on file in accordance with Library of Virginia requirements.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
132.ADM
N/A
SUBJECT: PAWN SHOPS AND PRECIOUS METALS BUSINESSES
I. POLICY:
It is required by the code of the Commonwealth of Virginia that local law enforcement agencies shall track
purchases made by pawn shops and businesses that purchase precious metals within their jurisdictional limits.
The South Boston Police Department shall have procedures that businesses must go through before beginning
these types of activities and shall have procedures in place to track purchases.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to outline policies and procedures utilized by the Police Department to track
purchases made by pawn shops and businesses purchasing precious metals.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Pawn Shops
1. In accordance with Town policy only three pawn shops shall be allowed in operation at any one time
within the Town limits of South Boston.
2. Prior to opening any pawn shop the owner of the business must go through the application process
with the Police Department. This process must be completed prior to the issuance of a business license
from the Town Finance Office.
3. The application process includes several steps including the business owner submitting a request with
the Circuit Court Clerks’ Office to operate said business within the Town of South Boston.
4. The application is included with this general order, “Pawnbroker Permit (Form 133.ADM (01))”.
5. After opening, a pawn shop must submit reports in a timely manner as directed by the Chief of Police
and in accordance with the code of the Commonwealth of Virginia. The Chief of Police shall also
determine in what form these reports are made, hard copies or electronic; and what information is to be
included on these reports (information that must be included is detailed in the Code of Virginia).
B. Precious Metals
1. The purchasing of precious metals includes the buying of certain types of jewelry and coins. There are
certain businesses, as defined by the code of the Commonwealth of Virginia; that are exempt from
having to report these purchases to local law enforcement.
2. Prior to purchasing precious metals the owner of the business must go through the application process
with the Police Department. This application is separate from the application process for pawn shops
(i.e. even if a pawn shop purchases precious metals the owner must go through the precious metals
application process in addition to the pawn shop application process).This process must be completed
133.ADM 1
prior to either the issuance of a business license from the Town Finance Office; or if the business
license a business already has allows such purchases then the application process must be completed
prior to the business starting to make purchases of precious metals.
4. The application is included with this general order, “Precious Metals Application (Form 133.ADM
(02))”.
5. After beginning to purchase precious metals a business must submit reports of such purchases in a
timely manner as directed by the Chief of Police and in accordance with the code of the
Commonwealth of Virginia. The Chief of Police shall also determine in what form these reports are
made, hard copies or electronic; and what information is to be included on these reports (information
that must be included is detailed in the Code of Virginia).
6. Precious metals applications have to be renewed yearly. The same cost(s) that apply to the business
when submitting the initial application shall apply with the renewal. When requesting a renewal the
business owner shall submit a written letter to the Chief of Police. The Chief of Police or his/her
designee shall review the original application to see if any updates are needed. If updates are needed
the business owner shall provide them before being approved. If approved a renewal approval letter
“(Form 133.ADM (03))” shall be issued to the business by the Chief of Police.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
133.ADM 2
Number August 1, 2012
N/A
Subject: EMPLOYEE DRUG SCREENING
I. POLICY:
Some citizens as well as some law enforcement personnel use drugs, whether legally or illegally.
The South Boston Police Department does not tolerate employees’ use of illegal drugs or the abuse of
legally and commercially available ones. The courts have ruled that the threat to public safety by law
enforcement officers who use drugs or abuse alcohol is a legitimate reason for mandating drug and
alcohol testing.
Drug abuse is a medical condition: employees should seek medical assistance if they perceive they have
a problem. Similarly, supervisors should know the working habits of their subordinates in order to
observe anomalies in behavior that might flag substance abuse. Supervisors bear a responsibility to their
subordinates to instruct, guide, and counsel them, and to the department to ensure high standards of
performance. Whenever possible and feasible, the department will assist employees to get help.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to offer guidelines to ensure an employee’s drug-free status as a
condition of employment, to ensure drug and drug/alcohol tests are ordered for employees based on
reasonable suspicion, and to provide procedures for drug/alcohol testing and the handling of cases of
suspected drug use within the department. (The term ‘employees’ in this order means sworn personnel
only, or applicants for sworn positions).
The South Boston Police Department recognizes that alcohol and drug abuse are serious problems across
our nation. It is therefore the goal of the Department to establish and maintain a safe and healthy
workplace for its employees, free from drug and alcohol abuse, and to protect the safety of the public by
providing the highest level of service. Illegal drug use breaks the law; employees who experiment with
or routinely use illegal drugs have no place in law enforcement.
To maintain the Department’s credibility and reputation, applicants shall undergo drug testing as part of a
pre-employment physical examination pursuant to the guidelines set forth in the Town of South Boston
Personnel Handbook. Also, the Department may conduct random drug screenings each year, at the
discretion of the Chief of Police or his/her designee. In cases of suspected or confirmed drug use, the
Chief shall order an internal investigation. Most important, employees about whom the Department has
formulated a well-grounded, documented suspicion of illegal drug use (or abuse of legally available
ones) shall submit to drug testing. The Department shall not conduct random testing upon reassignment
or promotion as such an action creates an atmosphere of suspicion, poor morale, and decreased
productivity.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Drug use/drug abuse:
Illegally-used controlled substances (as defined by state and federal laws, encompassing the use of
narcotic and non-narcotic drugs, and prescription drugs used abusively), and non controlled (over the
counter) substances, as well as alcohol if they impair one’s work performance.
134.ADM 1
B. Drug-Drug/Alcohol Test:
A urinalysis test to detect drugs and or drugs and alcohol, administered under approved medical
conditions and procedures.
C. Reasonable suspicion:
A ground for belief linked to articulable, objective facts or circumstances to warrant submitting an
employee to testing. Reasonable suspicion must be documented before ordering testing.
IV. PROCEDURES:
A. General guidelines:
1. Department employees shall not take any controlled substances unless prescribed by a
person licensed to practice medicine.
a. Employees who are required to take any drugs (prescriptions or over-the-

counter) which may impair job performance must disclose this information to
their immediate supervisor.
b. Any statutorily defined illegal use of drugs by an employee, whether on or off

duty, is prohibited.
c. Employees shall report evidence of suspected drug use by another employee

to their immediate supervisors.
2. Failure to comply with this general order will be grounds for disciplinary action up to and
including termination.
B. Legal issues:
1. Fourth Amendment:
According to the courts, the threat to public safety posed by police employees who are
drug users or alcohol abusers is a legitimate factor in determining the reasonableness of a
urinalysis, a search of urine. Therefore, a urinalysis is not prohibited by the Fourth
Amendment to the Constitution [Turner v. F.O.P., 500 A. 2d 1011 (1985)]. In fact, at
least seven significant department interests justify a drug testing program.
Note that these factors do not completely outweigh employees Fourth Amendment rights.
A reasonable suspicion to require drug testing however is based on these factors:
a. public safety;
b. public trust and integrity;
c. potential for corruption;
d. presentation of credible testimony;
e. co-worker morale and safety;
f. loss of productivity;
134.ADM 2
g. civil liability (negligent hiring and retention).
2. Fourteenth Amendment:
The Department observes the due process rights of employees as guaranteed by the
Fourteenth Amendment to the Constitution in the drug/alcohol testing program. The
Department uses adequate procedural safeguards consistent with the Law Enforcement
Officers’ Procedural Guarantees to include:
a. employee notification;
b. reliable tests;
c. chain of custody of specimen;
d. confidentiality of test results;
e. right to appeal the findings.
(1) Note that probationary employees maintain no Fourth Amendment

property rights to employment. [Note: Agencies must stipulate under
terms of employment that probationary employees may be dismissed
any time without cause for (1) to be valid.]
3. Federal Rehabilitation Act:
Under this statute, drug abuse is considered a handicap but employees are protected only
if the current use of drugs/alcohol does not impair job performance. It does not include
any person whose drug use “would constitute a threat to the property of safety of others”
[Section 706 (7) (B)]. Drug abusers who are neither rehabilitated nor in treatment are not
handicapped persons within the meaning of this act.
C. When to require drug test/urinalysis:
1. Randomly and pursuant to this policy
2. When there is reasonable suspicion of the abuse of either legal or illegal drugs
3. When an officer is involved in a motor vehicle accident while operating a town owned
vehicle
D. Drug testing/urinalysis process:
1. Urinalysis will be the primary method for the drug screening of employees.
a. The employee or applicant designated for a drug test must be positively

identified by name and social security number before obtaining any sample.
b. The employee’s supervisor shall notify the employee that drug screening
through urinalysis will be required in accordance with the specifications in
this order. The supervisor shall document the time that the employee was
notified and the employee will have twenty minutes from the time of
notification (barring any extenuating circumstances) to report to Halifax
Regional Hospital for testing.
134.ADM 3
c. Skilled, trained personnel shall conduct all tests.
d. Both applicants and employees shall be tested at an approved medical site.

Specimen collection should not demean, embarrass, or cause physical
discomfort to the person tested.
e. Before the test, the employee must list all medication currently taken under
medical supervision. The form this information is recorded on is NOT
retained in any police records, nor is it reviewed by police personnel. This
form will be completed and submitted to the medical examiner reviewing the
test results, and retained in medical files only.
f. To ensure integrity in the process, both Halifax Regional Hospital’s lab and
the Police Department will document notification on South Boston Police
Department forms “Form 127.ADM (01)” and “Form 127.ADM(02)”.
2. When a urine specimen is taken it shall be divided and placed into two separate
containers. One specimen shall be tested while the other is held in a proper manner to
preserve the specimen by the Halifax Regional Hospital. Should the first specimen test
positive, the employee shall have the right to require the second specimen to be sent to a
laboratory of his/her choice for independent testing in accordance generally with
procedures set forth in 18.2-268.1 through 18.2-268.12, Code of Virginia. The officer
shall notify the Chief of Police in writing of this request within 10 days of being notified
of positive specimen results. The laboratory chosen by the officer shall be accredited or
certified by one or more of the following bodies: the American Society of Crime
Laboratory Directors/Laboratory Accreditation Board (ASCLD/LAB), the College of
American Pathologists (CAP, the United States Department of Health and Human
Services Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), or
the American Board of Forensic Toxicology (ABTF).
3. The lab shall report as positive only those samples which have been confirmed to be
positive for the presence of drugs/alcohol.
4. All persons with positive test results shall be notified by the Chief of Police as soon after
notification by the lab as possible. A copy of the lab report will be provided to the person
tested by the department upon request, whether applicant or employee.
5. A medical examiner, a licensed physician, will review the results. In the case of positive
results, the physician will meet with the employee, discuss the results of the test, and
review the employee’s biomedical history before verifying a positive result. The Chief of
Police will not impose any discipline until receiving verification by the medical
examiner.
E. Disciplinary action
1. Applicant testing for sworn positions:
a. Refusal to take the drug screening test at the pre-employment physical or

having positive confirmed test results shall disqualify an applicant in the
selection process.
(1) Applicants may not appeal or grieve the hiring process. If

disqualification is based solely on a positive drug test, the Chief of
Police may permit an applicant to have further laboratory analysis of
specimen performed. If a split sample was taken, the second specimen
may be tested at the applicant’s expense.
134.ADM 4
(2) After one year, the applicant may reapply for employment with
evidence of negative retest and/or rehabilitation. Applicants shall
undergo Department drug testing.
b. Applicants admitting to prior involvement with drugs shall be treated case by

case. The Department may consider the nature of drug use and the intensity
of drug involvement.
2. Employees:
a. Every employee has due process rights under the Town’s disciplinary and
grievance procedures.
b. In the case of an employee’s confirmed positive drug test results, the

Department shall pursue an internal investigation.
c. Based on the internal investigation, disciplinary action may result.
d. The disciplinary actions available for drug violations are extended suspension
with rehabilitation or termination.
e. The Chief of Police may suspend with rehabilitation, employees who abuse
legally obtained prescription or over-the-counter drugs, or who come forward
before being tested to seek help for their drug problems for their drug
problems or who have mitigating factors to explain the temporary use of an
illegal drug. This past consideration-the temporary use of an illegal drug-may
subject the employee to a criminal prosecution. Any decision about illegal
drug use not lading to prosecution will only be made in consultation with the
Department legal advisor or Commonwealth’s Attorney.
(1) This alternative applies to the first offense only. Suspension shall be
without pay and the Department shall recommend community agencies
for private rehabilitation.
(2) To return to duty, the employee must take the following steps:
(a) Complete a physical exam after treatment to determine fitness

for duty.
(b) Authorize the release of the treatment facility’s case files to

the Department for the purpose of further evaluating the
employee’s fitness for duty.
(c) Submit to periodic, unannounced drug screening tests for one

year after return to duty.
3. Treatment records and reason for suspension shall remain confidential.
a. The Chief of Police shall terminate employment of any member who has a
documented history of drug use, who uses drugs with no mitigating
circumstances, and for a repeated offense after a suspension for drug use.
(1) After one year, an employee may re-apply for employment with the
Department with the evidence of a negative drug test and/or
rehabilitation.
134.ADM 5
b. An employee may request a hearing from the Chief of Police if he/she wants
to dispute the Department decision. If a split sample was taken, the second
specimen may be tested at the employee’s expense.
H. Drug abuse training:
1. Drug abuse and drug testing training may be developed and implemented for all members
of the Department. Training may be in the form of lectures, films, videos, or printed
materials. The training officer shall be responsible for such training which includes:
a. Physiological and psychological aspects of addiction and specific information

about major drugs of abuse, such as marijuana and cocaine, and abuse of
alcohol;
b. How to detect deteriorating work performance that may be related to drug or

alcohol use;
c. Special issues surrounding drug abuse in the workplace—testing, drug

trafficking, etc.;
d. Prevention and education strategies;
e. Stress management.
2. The Chief shall ensure special training for the command staff to include:
a. Orientation about drug abuse programs in other work places;
b. Statistics and evaluations of existing programs;
c. National drug use and abuse information;
d. Evaluation strategies for the department;
e. How to encourage an atmosphere in which drug use in not tolerated;
f. Prevention program planning ideas.
3. The Department shall train supervisors, both in general drug and alcohol abuse
information, as well as about their functions in the referral process to include:
a. Observing and documenting unsatisfactory job performance;
b. Notifying employees when their job performance is unacceptable;
c. Referral of employee for drug testing and rehabilitative resources;
d. Encouraging an atmosphere in which drug se and alcohol abuse are not

tolerated.
I. Resources for rehabilitation and information
1. Within the Department
a. Existing psychological services;
134.ADM 6
b. Health insurance benefits for drug abuse treatment;
c. Trained supervisors;
d. Existing employee assistance program;
e. Existing peer assistance program.
2. Available through community programs
a. Inpatient chemical dependency programs (independent or associated with

hospitals or medical centers);
b. Outpatient treatment centers;
c. Halfway houses and other residential treatment programs;
d. Volunteer and self-help organizations;
e. City or county-funded drug abuse prevention and education centers;
f. Local community mental health centers.
3. State and national services:
a. Virginia Department of Mental Health/Mental Retardation

Office of Substance Abuse Services
109 Governor Street
Post Office Box 1797
Richmond, VA 23214
804-786-3906
b. Data Center and Clearinghouse for Drugs and Crime

1600 Research Boulevard
Rockville, MD 20850
1-800-666-3332
c. National Institute on Drug Abuse, Drug-Free Workplace Helpline

c/o Social and Specific Systems, Inc.
12280 Wilkens Avenue (1st Floor)
Rockville, MD 20852
1-800-843-4971
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
134.ADM 7
Number August 2, 2021
N/A
Subject: TELEPHONE USE
I. General Order
The South Boston Police Department will improve public safety communication and
response through the professional, efficient and effective use of telephones and
cellular telephones.
II. Purpose
The purpose of this General Order is to establish uniform guidelines for telephone and
cellular telephone use by Department personnel.
III. Definitions
Telephone: All town-owned telephones, excluding cellular telephones.

Cellular Phone: Any wireless telephone device or smart phones.
Business call: Any phone call made by an employee for the purpose of
conducting official department business in accordance with that employee’s
assigned duties and responsibilities.
Personal call: Any phone call made by an employee that is not for the purpose
of conducting official department business in accordance with that employee’s
assigned duties and responsibilities.
Family emergency: Illness or injury, emergency child care issue, and/or other
emergencies.
IV. Procedure
A. Department Issued Cellular Telephones
1. All officers will be issued a Cellular Telephone that will be used for
official business. Should officers determine the need to use the
134.ADM 1
cellular phone for personal use, this use should be for emergencies
and on a very limited basis. (Refer to “D.1.”)
2. The cellular telephone number will be provided but not limited to

the following:
a) All department employees;
b) The Halifax County Communication Center;
c) Displayed in the signature line of the employee’s emails;

and,
d) Generally, be provided to the public (i.e. business card).
(1) Unless supervision approves otherwise on a specific

case by case basis
3. Cellular telephones are to remain on, readily accessible by officers,

and will be used for business use, emergency contact, and after-
hours contact. Officers have the responsibility to ensure that
cellular telephones have a proper charge so that they remain in
operational readiness.
a) Officers are expected to answer or return phone calls as soon

as practical while on-duty or on-call.
(1) Officers are strongly encouraged to carry the issued

cellular telephone while in an Off-Duty status.
b) Exceptions to this section of the General Order when cellular

telephones may be turned off include:
(1) Approved leave;
(2) Scheduled rest days;
(3) Sick leave or other related types of leave;
134.ADM 2
(4) Covert operations, or;
(5) While testifying in a judicial or administrative

proceeding.
c) Employees with the rank of Sergeant or above are expected

to have their issued cellular telephone on and carried with
them at all times to include rest days. In the event the
employee cannot carry their phone or have it off for an
extended period they shall designate another ranking
employee to oversee their duties.
(1) If leave is extended more than seven (7) consecutive

days the employee will change their voice mailbox
greeting to indicate the leave dates and contact
information for the ranking employee overseeing
their duties.
4. Employees must always remember that when they are in a public

place or a private meeting that inappropriate conversation may
jeopardize, embarrass, or reflect poorly on the professionalism of
the Department.
5. Department-issued cellular telephones may be used for the gathering

of evidence.
6. Department employees will utilize all cellular telephones

(department and personal) in a responsible manner while operating
a motor vehicle.
a) Department employees will use hands-free devices when

available while operating a motor vehicle.
7. Issued cellular telephones are standard equipment and therefor
subject to inspection by the Chief of Police (or his designee) at any
time, as needed.
B. Voice Mailboxes
1. All department employees issued a cellular telephone will enable

voice mail to answer calls in the event they are unable to take the
call.
134.ADM 3
2. All department employees will set up a courteous voice mailbox
greeting to include:
a) The employee’s name;
b) department name;
c) Rank or position if appropriate;
d) Police Department Phone Number
e) Halifax County Communications Center (Sgts and below)
3. Example Voicemail Script: “You have reached the voicemail for

Officer Jane Doe with the South Boston Police Department. If this
is an emergency, please hang up and dial 911. If you are calling to
report a crime that is not in progress, please call 1-434-476-3334.
For other matters you may contact the South Boston Police
Department at 434-575-4273. For a return call please leave a
message with your name and number and I will return your call as
soon as possible. Thank you.”
4. Officers in a covert position are exempt from this section of the

General Order.
C. Long Distance Telephone Calls
1. In the interest of economy, all long-distance calls made from

department telephones will be business-related.
2. Except for a family emergency, personal long-distance telephone

calls shall not be made from department telephones.
3. The Chief of Police (or designee) may review Division telephone

bills and investigate any call which appears to be unusual in regard
to the number of calls, minutes per call, the origination point,
termination point, or charge.
134.ADM 4
D. Personal Phone Calls/Texting
1. Personal phone calls and texting while on-duty shall be limited so as

to not adversely affect work performance and/or compromise the
mission or operations of the Department.
E. Personal Cellular Telephones
1. The Division strongly urges officers not to conduct department

business on personal cellular telephones, including but not limited
to phone calls, email, and texts.
2. If an officer chooses to use a personal device for department

business the device is subject to the provisions of the Freedom of
Information Act and motions for discovery and as such may require
disclosure.
3. Personal cellular telephones should not be used for the gathering of

evidence. The use of a personal device for photographic, video, or
audio recording of evidence may require that the device be secured
and placed in evidence pending disposition of the case to which the
evidence relates.
F. Security Safeguards
1. Any time a Department system is accessed from a mobile device or

computer, whether owned by the Department or not, the device or
computer shall be secured by a password or PIN number. The
device or computer must be set up so that when the device or
computer is not in use or remains inactive for a period of time, the
user will be prompted to re-enter the password or PIN number
before access is granted.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
134.ADM 5
PROPERTY & EVIDENCE MANUAL
SOUTH BOSTON
Police Department
Property & Evidence Manual

Table of Contents
CHAPTER ONE
Page
I. GENERAL .....................................................................................................1-1
II. JOB DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1-1
III. SPECIALIZED TRAINING..........................................................................1-2
IV. JOB DUTIES & RESPONSIBILITIES ..........................................................1-2
CHAPTER TWO
Page
I. CATEGORIES OF PROPERTY
Evidence ........................................................................................................2-1
Found Property ............................................................................................2-1
Safekeeping....................................................................................................2-1
Under Observation........................................................................................2-2
Property for Destruction..............................................................................2-2
II. DOCUMENTATION & RECEIPT OF PROPERTY
Documentation of Property ........................................................................2-2

Receipt of Property...................................................................................... 2-2
Computer Inquiry & Entry..........................................................................2-2
III. PROPERTY FORMS
Property Report ..........................................................................................2-3

Incident Based Report (IBR)........................................................................2-4
Property Release Form................................................................................ 2-4
Request for Laboratory Analysis (RFLE) ..................................................2-4
CHAPTER THREE
Page
I. LOGGING PROPERTY & EVIDENCE
Marking & Packaging ..................................................................................3-1

Packaging Money / Currency.....................................................................3-3

Packaging Latent Print Lift Card ...............................................................3-4
Packaging Firearms.......................................................................................3-4
Packaging Narcotics......................................................................................3-4
Storing Bicycles ............................................................................................ 3-5
Storing Motor Vehicles.................................................................................3-5
CHAPTER FOUR
II. TEMPORARY STORAGE FACILITIES
Metal Storage Lockers..................................................................................4-1

Bicycle Storage Hangers...............................................................................4-1
Large Wooden Storage Box.........................................................................4-1
Refrigerator/Freezer.....................................................................................4-2
Drying Lockers..............................................................................................4-2
Hazardous Materials Locker.......................................................................4-2
III. PROPERTY ROOM COLLECTION, INVENTORY & STORAGE
Property Collection.......................................................................................4-2
Property Inventory........................................................................................4-3
Improperly Submitted Property.................................................................4-3
Property Storage............................................................................................4-4
Computer Entries..........................................................................................4-7
IV. SECURITY & HOURS OF OPERATION

Page
Access..............................................................................................................4-8
Key Control....................................................................................................4-9
CHAPTER FIVE
I. PROPERTY & EVIDENCE RELEASE GUIDELINES
Authorized Persons .....................................................................................5-1

Release Authority..........................................................................................5-1
CHAPTER SIX
I. Inventories, Audits, and Annual Reports 6-1

CHAPTER ONE
I. GENERAL
The Property Room is placed organizationally in the Investigations Unit. It is

responsible for the receipt, storage, safekeeping, release and disposal of all
property or evidence that comes under the control of the Police Department.
II. JOB DESCRIPTION
A. The Department’s Property Room Officer is responsible for

maintaining security and control of property and evidence that the
Police Department acquires through normal duties and
responsibilities. The Property Officer is assigned to the
Investigations Unit (typically an investigator).
B. Personnel assigned to the property room must possess a valid

Virginia Driver license and have a good work record.
C. Duties of the Property Officer require excellent organizational

skills, initiative and resourcefulness. The work involves high
frequency contact with the public requiring the person to have
good interpersonal and communication skills.
D. The work shift shall be Monday through Friday, unless changed to

meet the needs of the Department. Overtime may be required in
special situations.
E. The position requires that the Property Officer be able to work with
minimum supervision. The Property Officer must have the ability
to communicate orally and in writing, be able to operate a
computer terminal and specialized software related to inventory
control, and maintain a working relationship with a variety of
individuals and organizations.
F. The Property Officer must have the ability to effectively organize

work assignments and establish priorities with minimum
supervision.
1-1
G. The Property Officer must have a good working knowledge of
Virginia rules of evidence, Penal Code, Government Code, Civil
H. Code, Health & Safety Code, Administrative Code, and other

related codes as they apply to the evidence/property function.
III. SPECIALIZED TRAINING
The recommended training for the Property Officer is satisfactory completion of a

POST approved basic course on the management of the property function, on the
job training, and other related training courses, seminars and/or conferences as
appropriate.
IV. JOB DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
The primary duty of the Property Officer is to log, classify, store, dispense,
destroy, and release property/evidence to its rightful owner, for court presentation
and/or for destruction or auction. Additional duties include, but are not limited to:
A. Maintain evidence, found and stored property in such a manner

that the individual items are secure from theft, loss or
contamination, and can be located in a timely manner.
B. Maintain property reports and other documentation associated

with the “chain of custody” for all property.
C. Ensure the timely and legally correct notification of owners and

release/disposal of property recovered, found, or seized by the
Department.
D. Operate computer terminals to access information regarding case

dispositions and other related information involving the
classification and proper disposition of property/evidence.
E. Coordinate the disposal of unclaimed and/or surplus property and

the special disposal of narcotics, weapons, explosives, and
hazardous materials pursuant to law.
F. Release of property for court, to persons legally entitled, for auction

and for disposal.
1-2
G. Supervise, train, and evaluate other Department personnel
assigned to the Property Room.
H. Provide in-service training to Department personnel regarding the

appropriate logging, packaging, documenting and storage of
property and evidence.
I. Provide effective liaison between the Police Department and local,

county, state and federal law enforcement agencies.
J. Represent the Department while attending state and local

associations involved with the management of property and
evidence.
K. Stay abreast of local, state, and federal law involving property and
evidence handling. Recommend and facilitate appropriate
changes.
L. Maintain a clean and orderly property storage facility.
1-3
CHAPTER TWO
I. CATEGORIES OF PROPERTY
For the purpose of these procedures, property taken into police custody is
categorized and defined and follows:
A. Evidence
Evidence is any property that comes into the custody of a South Boston
Police Department employee when such property may tend to prove or
disprove the commission of a crime, or the identity of a suspect, pursuant
to an official criminal investigation.
Examples: physical or chemical evidence left at the scene of a crime by a

victim or suspect; recovered stolen property; or property currently under
observation which is suspected to have been used in, or be the result of,
the commission of a crime.
B. Found Property
Found Property is any property of no evidentiary value whatsoever, which

comes into the custody of a South Boston Police Department employee,
and whose rightful owner may, or may not; be known to the finder or the
Department. Due diligence must be exercised to discover the rightful
owner. If the owner cannot be located, the Department will dispose of the
property in a time and manner prescribed by law.
C. Safekeeping
Safekeeping is any property of no evidentiary value surrendered to an

employee of South Boston Department for temporary custody with the
understanding that the person surrendering the property has the legal right
to do so, and that the property will be returned to the rightful owner(s) at
the end of a specified period of time, unless disposition by the department,
in a manner prescribed by law, is requested by the owner(s).
D. Under Observation
Under Observation is any property, of no apparent immediate evidentiary

value, but is held, examined and/or tested by the police department for 72
hours pending the issuance of a criminal complaint. After 72 hours, the
property will be returned if no charges have been filed.
2-1
E. Property for Destruction
Property for Destruction is any property, including firearms and

ammunition, seized from or released by a citizen to the South Boston
Police Department for disposal.
II. DOCUMENTATION & RECEIPT OF PROPERTY
A. Documentation of Property
1. All property that is taken into custody and retained by South Boston
Police Department must be documented in a police report prepared
by the Department employee accepting that property. Who, what,
when, where and how he/she came into possession, and the
disposition of that property shall be described in that report.
2. The report must also provide a complete description of the property

collected or seized complete and accurate information of the person,
who found the property, or from whom it was seized or recovered.
3. All property retained by South Boston Police Department shall be

documented on the Property Report Form per established guidelines.
B. Receipt of Property
1. A copy of the Property Report Form shall be furnished as a receipt

to any person, regardless of status, anytime property is taken from
that person irrespective of the classification of that property.
a. A computer printed receipt of the Property Report Form has been

specially designed for and serves as the required receipt.
C. Computer Inquiry & Entry
1. All Department employees SHALL make the appropriate inquiries

to the State computer system (VCIN) on all serialized or
identifiable items collected or seized to determine if the property is
reported stolen or otherwise entered into the statewide system
PRIOR to placing the property into storage.
a. After verification, Communications/Records will be

responsible to send locate information. Acted and advised to
verify all hits with the originating agency prior to
2-2
b. The status of the property should be reflected in the offense

and property report. The case should also reflect that a locate
was sent to the originating agency. It is the originating
agency’s responsibility to update the VCIN system from
stolen to recovered status.
1. Employees shall submit descriptions of serialized property that has

been reported stolen, lost, found, recovered or under observation
into the VCIN/NCIC automated system. Officers shall forward a
full copy of the IBR to the dispatch center with the needed
information so that it can be entered into VCIN/NCIC.
III. PROPERTY FORMS
The following forms are used in conjunction with the property and evidence
function:
A. Property Report Form
This triplicate form serves as the primary instrument to record property

listed in a police report. It is to be used under the following conditions:
a. Anytime property of any classification is logged into a property

locker
b. Officers shall check the appropriate box to indicate the type of

evidence / property being turned in to the property room (evidence,
found, recovered, safekeeping)
Routing (how original and copies are disseminated):
1. Original – Property Room Copy:
The top page serves as the original of the Property Report Form and shall
be given to a Property Room Officer.
Officers shall provide the top page of the Property Report Form to the
Property Room Officer by either placing it in the temporary storage locker
with the property/evidence or placing it in the designated Property Room
Officer’s box. Either of these may be done but must be done at the time
the property/evidence is secured in the temporary storage locker. If the
property/evidence is too large to place in one of the temporary storage
lockers (i.e. bicycles) the officer shall place the form in the designated
Property Room Officer’s box.
2-3
2. Second Page – Officer’s Copy:
This copy serves as the officer’s copy.
3. Third Page - Property Receipt:
This copy serves as the property receipt to be given to the person from
whom property has been taken by an employee of the South Boston Police
Department. This receipt shall be given to any person, regardless of status
(e.g., suspect, arrestee, victim, finder, etc.) and regardless of the type of
property taken from that person (e.g., stolen property, body fluid taken for
evidentiary purposes, clothing, etc.).
Every effort should be made to personally give the receipt to the person
from whom the listed property has been taken; however, in the event it is
impractical or impossible to do so, the primary case officer or the Property
Room Officer may mail a copy of the receipt to that person.
Note: In the event that multiple persons need to be given receipts from
the same Property Report, photocopies should be made and given
to each person.
B. Incident Based Report (IBR)
For any property seized/received by officers an IBR must be completed

and provided to the Records Management Unit. The designated Records
Specialist will then enter that property into the Department’s records
management system.
C. Property Release Form
When the case has been adjudicated and the property has been
permanently released from Department custody, this form will be
forwarded to Records for inclusion into the original case file.
D. Request for Laboratory Examination (RFLE)
The officer making the seizure is to complete this form. The officer may
request that the Property Room Officer take the evidence to the lab of the
officer may mail it. Firearms are never to be mailed to the lab.
2-4
CHAPTER 3
I. LOGGING PROPERTY & EVIDENCE
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to log into the
property system all property/evidence as soon after seizure as possible.
Property is not to be secured in personal lockers, files or desks.
Note: Maintaining property/evidence in a case file may be

acceptable under certain circumstances; however, the
property/evidence must first be logged into the property system
and then signed out. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
A. Marking and Packaging
All property that is collected or seized shall be labeled for

identification and packaged to avoid contamination and to ensure
the integrity of the evidence. No evidence will be marked on the
evidence collected.
1. In the case of stains, hair, blood, controlled

substances, etc., place the item in a vial, envelope, container
or other suitable package, then seal and mark the container.
2. There are a variety of containers and materials that

can be used to package physical evidence and other
property. Officers should strive to use the appropriate size
and type of material of the container for the type of property
logged. An assortment of packaging materials and supplies
for this purpose will be maintained near the property
processing counter outside of the property room. It is the
responsibility of the Property Room Officer to maintain an
adequate amount of supplies for this purpose.
a. Always use new, clean containers to prevent contamination.
b. Plastic envelopes are suitable for small, dry objects.

WARNING: DO NOT PLACE DAMP OR BIOLOGICAL
EVIDENCE IN PLASTIC BAGS.
3-1
c. Paper or Glassine envelopes are suitable for folded paper
bindles containing small powdery material if all corners are
sealed. Do not use paper envelopes for fiber evidence....a vial

or pill box is preferred.
d. Garments and large exhibits can generally be placed in paper

bags, cardboard boxes, or wrapped in paper.
e. Standard sized plastic envelopes or customized plastic

evidence bags or boxes can be used.
f. Larger items such as safes, vehicle bumpers, etc, that requires

further forensic processing can be wrapped in plastic or paper,
as appropriate, and secured with tape.
g. Paint cans, heavy mil quality plastic bags or other suitable

containers are used to store arson evidence and hazardous
materials samples.
h. Plastic tubes or sharps boxes/containers are used to store

hypodermic syringes or other sharp objects.
WARNING: DO NOT USE PAPER OR PLASTIC BAGS

TO PACKAGE ANY SHARP WEAPON OR OBJECT.
i. Officer should contact an Evidence Technician immediately if
they seize hazardous materials. The Department does have a
storage unit for a limited amount of hazardous materials and
the Fire Department may be contacted also for assistance in
handling the item(s).
3. Do not over-seal a package or container. Avoid or

limit the use of staples. Never staple a plastic bag containing
fine particles of material.
4. Keep items of evidence separate if cross-

contamination is a factor. Every item secured from different
locations should be packaged separately.
5. Property that requires evidence processing should

be clearly marked and be accompanied by the
appropriate evidence processing form(s).
3-2
6. FIREARMS, MONEY AND CONTROLLED

SUBSTANCES must always be packaged separately from
other items of evidence or property.
B. Packaging Money / Currency
Money/currency should be packaged in evidence bags marked for

money/currency. Cash is defined as coin and/or currency. Checks, credit
cards or other negotiable items are not to be used with the money/currency
evidence bags. The Property Room Officer will not accept money that has
not been packaged / logged appropriately and according to the following
procedures:
1. Money is to be itemized by denomination listing sub totals and

total amounts on both the money/currency evidence bag and on the
Property Report Form.
2. All money logged into the property room will require at least two
officers or employees to verify the count.
3. All Property Report Forms MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST TWO

signatures verifying the amount listed and enclosed. The officer
making the seizure and the verifying officer shall sign their names
at the bottom of the property description section of the form. Also,
both officers shall seal the money/currency evidence bag with
tamper-proof security tape, and then both must initial the back of
the evidence bag in the area to show it was properly sealed prior to
entering into the property locker.
Note: It is strongly suggested that two separate counts be

conducted with large amounts of cash.
4. Extremely large amounts of coin and/or currency might be seized

which, because of the container or quantity of money, make it
impractical to package in the money/currency evidence bag (e.g.,
coins stored in a large piggy bank or water bottle, large amount of
bills in a briefcase or satchel, etc.). In those rare cases, it is
acceptable to log the container containing the money as is.
However, a money count and completion of the Property Report
Form must still be done.
5. A money/currency evidence bag may be used for suspected

counterfeit bills; however, it will not be listed as having any cash
value. Make a notation on the outside of the evidence bag
reflecting that the contents contain suspected counterfeit bills.
3-3
C. Packaging Latent Print Lift Card
The card is used to store the transfer of latent prints lifted and
submitted as evidence. A Property Report Form must be
submitted when submitting this type of evidence.
1. Officers shall package lift cards in an envelope and write the case
number, date taken, officer name, location where print was lifted
(not just address but actual item taken off of and where item
located), and item number on the front of the envelope. If
packaging multiple lift cards they may all be packaged in the same
envelope but each lift card shall be assigned its own item number
and that number will be written on the lift car.
D. Packaging Firearms
Never place a loaded firearm into the temporary storage locker. If

for some reason an officer is unable to unload a firearm they are to
notify the Property Room Officer immediately.
Officers are to package unloaded firearms in a firearms box, fill

out the information required, initial and date, and write
“unloaded” on the box. The ammunition taken out of the firearm
is to be packaged in an envelope and also turned in. A Property
Report Form must be completed.
If lab analysis of the firearm is required the firearm must be hand

delivered. Firearms are never to be mailed to the lab.
E. Packaging Narcotics
Narcotics should be packaged in the appropriate evidence bag.

Any required field testing should be completed prior to the
evidence bag being sealed. Marijuana should be field tested prior
to packaging and the appropriate form from the Department of
Forensic Science completed along with Department
Documentation (“Field Testing Supplemental Form”). The
required information on the evidence bag should be filled in and
the bag properly initialed. The item should be secured in a
temporary storage locker and the Property Report Form turned in.
If the item needs to be mailed to the lab for analysis the officer
should complete a Request for laboratory analysis and contact the
Property Room Officer to make arrangements to have the item
taken or mailed to the lab.
3-4
F. Storing Bicycles
In most cases bicycles are found property. Officers are to store

them in the appropriate location in the Police Department and
affix a tag to the bicycle writing the date seized, incident number,
location found, person who turned the bike over or taken from if
applicable, and officer making the seizure. The officer also shall
complete a Property Report Form and submit it to the Property
Room Officer.
G. Storing Motor Vehicles
Motor vehicles taken and needing to be held by the Police

Department shall be store in the impound lot. The officer making
the seizure shall immediately submit a Property Report Form and
completed IBR to the Property Room Officer along with the keys
to the vehicle.
Note: Vehicles having to be towed due to a suspended driver

status that requires impoundment are not to be stored at
the impound lot. In those instances the officer shall
request a wrecker with impound capabilities and the
vehicle shall be the responsibility of the wrecker
company.
3-5
CHAPTER 4
I. TEMPORARY STORAGE FACILITIES
After the seizing officer marks the property for identification and packages it to
avoid loss or contamination, the property accompanied by a Property Report Form
(form may also be placed in Property Room Officer’s box) will then be deposited
into one of the following appropriate temporary storage areas, and then secured.
A. Metal Temporary Storage Lockers
1. Individual metal property lockers are located beside the door to the
property room. The officer needs to only place the evidence into the
locker and turn the handle to lock it. Once they are locked they are
only accessible by the Property Room Officers.
B. Bicycle Storage Hangers
1. All bicycles, or parts thereof, shall be temporarily stored in the bicycle

storage location located in the basement of the Police Department near
the exterior exit door of the basement.
2. Any completed Property Report Forms for bicycles shall be put in a

Property Room Officers’ box, do not leave the form with the bicycle.
C. Large Wooden Storage Box
1. Large items other than bicycles which will not fit in the metal
temporary storage lockers shall be secured in the large wooden storage
box located beside the metal temporary storage lockers. To secure the
box use the chain and lock to secure both doors to the box.
2. Any completed Property Report Forms for items placed in this location
should be put in a Property Room Officers’ box.
D. Refrigerator/Freezer
1. A refrigerator and freezer are located in the property room. In order to

place items that need to be refrigerated or frozen into the refrigerator
or freezer officers need to contact a Property Room Officer
immediately to turn the evidence over to.
2. The Property Report Form for all evidence stored in the refrigerator /
freezer shall be given to the Property Room Officer with the evidence.
4-1
E. Drying Lockers
1. There is a drying locker located in the property room. In order to

place items that need to go through a drying process in the drying
locker officers need to contact a Property Room Officer immediately
to turn the evidence over to.
2. The Property Report Form for all evidence stored in the drying locker
shall be given to the Property Room Officer with the evidence
F. Hazardous Materials Storage Locker
1. A hazardous materials storage locker is located outside in the secure

cage area by the back door. Before placing an item in this locker an
officer shall contact a Property Room Officer.
2. All flammable materials placed in the hazardous materials storage

lockers must be stored in the appropriate containers prior to being
secured in the locker.
3. Fireworks shall be stored in a hazardous materials storage locker;

however, FIREWORKS SHALL NOT BE STORED IN THE
SAME LOCKER WITH ANY FLAMMABLE LIQUID OR
MATERIAL.
4. The Property Report Form for all evidence stored in the hazardous
materials locker shall be placed in a Property Room Officers’ box.
II. PROPERTY ROOM COLLECTION, INVENTORY & STORAGE
A. Property Collection
1. On a daily basis, the Property Room Officer or assistant shall inspect

all temporary storage locations and the impound lot, remove and
process all property submitted.
2. The Property Room Officer or assistant shall also;
a. Collect and retain all Property Report Forms,
b. Assign a bar-code to each property item submitted; placing a tag

on each individual item or the packaging of the item with the
assigned bar code,
4-2
c. Make the appropriate entries into the automated property system,
d. Conduct evidence processing as requested,
e. Store each item in the designated location in the property room or

alternate approved location.
f. Arrange for transportation to the laboratory for examination as

required,
3. Property room personnel are not responsible for the proper packaging;
if an item is not packaged properly property room personnel should
contact the officer that packaged the item to have the packaging
corrected.
4. Property room personnel are responsible for entering information into

the property room computer.
5. Property room personnel shall arrange for the permanent storage,

transfer, or disposal of all items temporarily placed into the hazardous
materials and bicycle storage area.
B. Property Inventory
Every item that is submitted into the property system must be accounted
for. This process begins at intake.
1. The Property Room Officers will compare items listed on the property
report form with those actually found in temporary storage. If any
item is discovered missing, the Property Officers will immediately
notify the submitting officer and/or supervisor.
2. If the missing item(s) cannot be located, the Property Officer shall

notify the Investigations Unit Supervisor via memorandum explaining
the circumstances surrounding the missing property. A copy shall also
be forwarded to the employee’s Supervisor and Patrol Lieutenant.
3. All property connected to the case will not be processed until the
missing item(s) are found or the discrepancy has been corrected.
C. Improperly Submitted Property – “Right of Refusal”
1. Every item submitted into any of the temporary storage locations is

expected to be done so in a safe and thorough manner consistent with
these guidelines and other Department policies.
4-3
2. The Property Officer has the authority to refuse acceptance of any item
of property submitted in an unsafe, incomplete, or otherwise improper
manner as defined in this manual.
Note: Property room personnel SHALL NOT accept any money or

controlled substances in which the, envelope, packaging or
container has been opened, tampered with, or otherwise
improperly submitted.
The Proper Officer shall, as soon as practical, notify the

employee submitting the item, or the employee’s supervisor,
who shall immediately cause the problem to be corrected.
3. A breach in safety protocol will be corrected immediately...NO

EXCEPTIONS!
D. Property Storage
The following types of property and evidence shall be stored separately

and according to the listed guidelines. Other miscellaneous types of
property may be stored separately as determined by the Property Officer.
1. Firearms
a. The Property Room Officer shall store all firearms in

containers (boxes) specifically designed for handgun, rifle
and/or shotgun. Exceptions can be made for those weapons
which, due to size or other considerations, are not compatible
for storage in such containers.
b. The Property Officer shall segregate the storage of all firearms

from other types of property retained by the Department. All
firearms will be separated by handgun and long guns,
REGARDLESS OF PROPERTY CLASSIFICATION, shall be
stored within the weapons locker located within the property
room. This locker will be locked at all times unless property is
being stored, removed, inventoried or inspected.
2. Substances
a. The Property Room Officer shall segregate the storage of all

drugs and narcotics from other types of property retained by
the Department. All controlled substances, REGARDLESS
4-4
OF PROPERTY CLASSIFICATION, shall be stored within

the narcotics cabinets located within the property room. These
cabinets will be locked at all times unless property is being
stored, removed, inventoried or inspected.
b. The Property Room Officer shall not open any sealed container
containing any controlled substance or suspected controlled
substance for the purpose of counting, verifying, testing,
weighing or any other purpose other than as may be necessary
to facilitate the transportation and/or destruction of that item.
3. Currency

money from other types of property retained by the
Department. All money, REGARDLESS OF PROPERTY
CLASSIFICATION, shall be stored in the money locker safe
within the property room. This safe will be locked at all times
unless property is being stored, removed, inventoried or
inspected.
b. With the approval of the Captain and Lieutenant, large

quantities of cash may be transferred to the Department safe
deposit box located at SunTrust Bank on Main Street or
deposited in the a Department account at SunTrust Bank.
c. The Property Room Officer shall not open any sealed container
containing money for the purposes of counting or verifying the
contents other than as may be necessary to release the contents
to the rightful owner or to transfer the money to a financial
institution. Opening any money envelope shall be done with at
least one other South Boston Police Department employee
present.
d. Negotiable stocks, bonds or bank securities should also be

secured in the safe; however, no value will be assigned.
4. Found Property

items classified as “Found Property” from other types of
property retained by the Department. No additional security or
safety measures are required unless that property is controlled
by other restrictions listed in these guidelines.
4-5
5. Property Held for Safekeeping
a. The Property Room Officer shall segregate the storage of

all items classified as “Safekeeping” from other types of
property retained by the Department. No additional
security or safety measures are required unless that
property is controlled by other restrictions listed in these
guidelines.
6. Homicides
a. The Property Room Officer shall store all items of evidence

associated with a homicide case together, unless that
evidence requires storage elsewhere to facilitate the
additional security or safety measures required by these
guidelines.
b. All homicide cases shall be segregated from other types of

property retained by the Department.
7. Hazardous Materials
a. The Property Room Officer is responsible for the transfer

and storage all hazardous materials in containers designated
for that purpose.
b. The Property Room Officer shall segregate the storage of

all hazardous materials from other types of property
retained by the Department. All hazardous materials,
REGARDLESS OF PROPERTY CLASSIFICATION,
shall be stored within a hazardous materials storage locker,
clearly marked and designed for the storage of flammable
materials.
8. Motor Vehicles
a. Motor vehicles SHALL NOT be stored in the any portion

of the police facility not specifically designated. Officers
are to only have vehicles towed to the impound lot that are
being seized for evidence of a crime, needs processing, or
as part of an asset forfeiture action. Vehicles being towed
due to a suspended driver required are not to be towed to
the impound lot; in those cases the officer must request a
tow company with impound capabilities.
4-6
9. Photographs
a. The Property Room Officer shall store undeveloped film

canisters separate from other types of evidence retained by
the Department.
b. The Property Room Officer or Office Manager shall ensure

that film that requires processing or negatives that require
printing will be sent to the state lab or if need in an
emergency will be sent to a private vendor to be developed.
10. Miscellaneous
a. Nothing in this manual shall prevent the Property Room

Officer from further segregating/organizing property as
deemed necessary or desirable for the efficient operation of
the property function.
E. Computer Entries
1. Computerized Property System
a. The Property Room Officer shall enter all property that

comes into
the possession of the property room of the is retained for
any length of time. Property being retained, disposed of or
released should be entered as soon as possible.
Information entered into this system shall minimally

include:
 Classification of property
 Type/Description of property
 Quantity
 Case number
 Officer submitting property
 Location property stored
 Chain of evidence
 Disposition of property
b. The Property Officer shall update the status of all property

retained in inventory as necessary.
4-7
c. The Property Room Officer shall also retain a complete

“hard copy” file on each piece of property as a back up to
this computer system and to facilitate regular inspections,
audits and inventories.
d. Property room personnel and the Investigations Unit

Supervisor are the only persons authorized to input, alter,
modify or delete records in this computer system. In
certain situations other personnel may be given access to
perform these functions. That access must be granted by
the Chief of Police.
2. Records Management System (RMS)
a. The Records Management Unit is responsible for entry

into RMS of all property retained by the Department and
stored in the property room. Records shall also update the
RMS system of the status of such property as may be
required.
b. Officers are responsible for the entry into VCIN all

identifiable (serial or owner applied numbers) property
pursuant to DOJ requirements and established procedures.
To do this officers need to submit a copy of all IBR reports
with this information to dispatch.
c. In all cases when a firearm is to be released, the Property

Room Officer shall conduct a criminal history check of the
person who is to receive the weapon. This will establish
that no restrictions exists preventing release of the firearm
to that individual. Additionally, the firearm shall be
checked through ATF Clearing house, VCIN, and Virginia
Firearm Clearing Report to confirm it is not reported as
stolen.
III. FACILITIES SECURITY & HOURS OF OPERATION
A. Access
1. Access to the Property Room and all other temporary or long-term

property storage areas is restricted to the Property Room Officers,
Investigations Unit Supervisor and personnel assigned to the
Property Room. The Investigations Unit Supervisor may authorize
after-hours entry to the Property Room when necessary.
4-8
2. Department personnel shall not enter property storage areas unless

escorted by property room personnel.
a. Except for personnel assigned to the Property Room, all

Department personnel, visitors, contractors, etc. who enter
the Property Room must sign in on the visitor’s log citing
the date, duration and purpose of the visit.
3. Property or evidence can only be removed from its storage location

by the Property Room Officers or the authorized designee.
4. The doors, gates, or other closure devices to any storage area must
be secured whenever the Property Room Officers or Property
Room personnel leave or are not present.
5. Normal business hours for the Property Room are weekdays, 0800-
1600 hours, excluding holidays.
6. Telephone voicemail will receive all incoming calls whenever the

Property Room is unattended or when Property Room personnel
are unavailable.
B. Key Control
1. All keys to the Property Room and other secured storage

areas are to remain under the control of the Property Room
Officers and the Investigations Unit Supervisor.
2. The duplication or unauthorized possession of keys to

secured property storage areas is strictly prohibited.
3. The Investigations Unit Supervisor shall maintain a complete

set of keys, safe combination, alarm code, etc. as a backup
for Property Room personnel.
4. Property Room personnel are strictly prohibited from

relinquishing Property Room keys, combinations or alarm
codes to anyone other than authorized personnel.
5. When Property Room personnel or the Investigations

Unit Supervisor change assignments or leave the
Department, the Deputy Chief (Captain) shall ensure that all
locks, combinations and codes are changed.
4-9
6. New locks shall be installed in the event that a key is lost

or security is otherwise compromised.
7. It is Department policy that only personnel assigned to the

Property Room and the Investigations Unit Supervisor will
possess keys, combinations and alarm codes.
4-10
CHAPTER 5
I. PROPERTY & EVIDENCE RELEASE GUIDELINES
A. Authorized Persons
1. The following persons may authorize the release of property that has
been placed in the Property Room under the provisions of this
manual.
a. The investigating officer, assigned investigator, or the

investigator’s supervisor.
b. The Property Room Officer or his/her assistant
c. Any person authorized by the Chief of Police
d. A magistrate
e. The Commonwealth Attorney Office
f. The presiding Judge of the case
2. No property shall be release from the property room though without

going through a Property Room Officer.
B. Release Authority
1. Property seized pursuant to a search warrant shall only be

released/disposed or by the investigating officer, investigator, or
under the authority of a court order
2. All evidence or property collected in homicide cases will be stored

until the death of the defendant(s) or 99 years from the date of
incident. Property/evidence may be released; however, if the
following conditions are met:
a. All court action involving all suspects must be final and the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office must approve the release.
3. In felony cases where there are no suspects or leads evidence will

be maintained for a period no less than the statute of limitations.
5-1
4. In misdemeanor cases where there are no suspects or leads,

evidence will be maintained for a period no less than one year. If
after one year, there are no suspects or leads, the evidence may be
disposed.
5. Any felony or misdemeanor case involving property whereby the

Commonwealth Attorney approves disposal/release of evidence in
the interest of justice prior to the expiration of the statute of
limitations.
a. Any property/evidence that has been retained or has been

requested to be retained for civil litigation shall not be
released or destroyed without prior approval of the
Investigations Unit Supervisor. In cases where the Town of
South Boston is one of the involved parties in the civil
litigation, the Town Attorney will be contacted prior to the
release or destruction of that property.
6. Disposal procedures shall be supervised by a Property Room

Officer and done via destruction order approved by a judge.
5-2
CHAPTER 6
I. ANNUAL AUDITS
A. Inventories, Audits and Annual Reports

1. The Investigations Unit Supervisor or his/her designee shall monitor
and ensure that officers adhere to proper procedures at all times.
2. The Investigations Unit Supervisor or his/her designee shall conduct a

quarterly inspection to ensure that adherence to procedures are used
for the control of all evidence and records.
3. The Investigations Unit Supervisor or his/her designee shall ensure

that quarterly, semi-annual, and annual inventories are conducted on
all stored evidence, unit equipment, supplies and facilities. The results
of each inventory shall be kept on file with the Investigations Unit
Supervisor and a copy of the annual inventory shall also be kept on
file.
4. The annual inventory and/or audit of all evidence facilities and

equipment shall be conducted by another supervisor who is not
assigned to Investigations Unit and who shall be designated by the
Chief of Police.
5. Whenever the Investigations Unit Supervisor leaves his/her appointed

assignment, e.g. transfer, retirement, etc., the Chief of Police shall
designate and appoint a member of the Department to assist in a joint
inventory and inspection of all stored evidence, forensic facilities,
supplies and equipment.
6. Unannounced inspections of the evidence storage area are conducted

biannually as directed by the Chief of Police.
6-1
201.OPR Amends/Supersedes
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS / EQUIPMENT & SOCIAL MEDIA
I. POLICY
Electronic systems and equipment allows the South Boston Police Department enhanced
communication abilities for both routine and emergency situations. This enhancement can be
communication and notifications during unusual occurrences, hostage/barricade incidents and
Department mobilizations, and allows for efficient and effective information relays between the
various components of the Department.
It is the policy of the Department that employees use its electronic systems and equipment for business
activities of the South Boston Police Department as a means to further the Department’s mission by
providing services that are efficient, complete, accurate and timely.
The Department reserves the right to monitor any of its electronic systems, including E-mail messages
and any other known messages, documents, spreadsheets, or files, as well as access employee E-mail.
It is also policy of the Department that members shall not read messages received by another
employee when there is no business reason for doing so, nor shall any member send any electronic
message under another employee’s name or change any portion of a previously sent electronic
message without proper authorization.
The Department’s electronic systems and equipment shall not be used to promote discrimination on
the basis of race, color, national origin, age, marital status, sex, political affiliation, religion, disability
or sexual preference; to promote sexual harassment; or to promote personal, political or religious
business or beliefs.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this directive is twofold. First, to establish the guidelines for the proper use of the
electronic system and equipment utilized by the Department and second, to establish the proper us of
internet and intranet technology using software and hardware provided by the Town of South Boston
to its employees for the purpose of performing job functions that include communication, information
exchange, and research.
III. DEFINITIONS
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS – all hardware, software, and tools owned by the Town of South Boston
available for official use by the Town employees including but not limited to electronic mail, voice
mail, calendaring and systems such as internet, etc.
INTERNET SYSTEM – A global information system of interconnected computers and computer

networks used to receive and transmit information and electronic messages.
INTRANET SYSTEM – A local information system used to receive and transmit information and
electronic documents among authorized users.
IV. PROCEDURE
201.OPR 1
A. The Administrative Officer and Records Supervisor are responsible for the continued operation,
security and integrity of the computer information system.
1. No program may be installed on any computer or computer system except with the permission
of the Administrative Officer.
2. No hardware my be altered, or installed except with the approval of the Administrative

Officer.
B. Electronic Mail (E-mail) Usage:
1. Electronic mail is a Department resource and is provided as a business tool. It shall be used
to augment other types of communication already in the workplace, such as the telephone, fax
machine, voice mail, written memorandum, etc. One of the useful characteristics of E-mail is
that it helps reduce “telephone tag” and the inherent work caused by sending a paper memo
(sending copies for mailing and personal files, addressing envelopes and delivery time for each
recipient).
2. E-mail messages shall be treated like paper memos, faxes, etc, with regard to privacy. When a
paper memo, fax, or e-mail has left the sender, he relinquishes the domain over it and the
recipient may do with it as he wishes.
NOTE: Confidential/Privacy – All departmental electronic systems are of public record and
subject to inspection and disclosure. Employees have no expectation of privacy in their
use of electronic mail.
3. Marking a message “private” in the E-mail system does not prevent the Department from
having access to an employee’s mailbox nor will it inhibit the viewing of all contents, even
messages that are marked as “private”.
4. E-mail users shall exercise caution in logging in and out of the electronic system to prevent
someone else from utilizing their password to send messages.
5. Inappropriate Uses:
Personnel will not transmit by any electronic device:
a. Pornographic images or text (except as needed for investigative or intelligence gathering

purposes – and only previously authorized by the Chief of Police or the supervisor of the
affected unit);
b. Images or text that are harassing, intimidating, hostile, offensive, retaliatory or otherwise
discriminatory based upon race, gender, color, national origin, ethnicity, sexual orientation
or disability;
c. Solicitations;
d. Political endorsements or messages; or,
e. Unethical, illegal, unprofessional, or disruptive activities.
C. Internet and Intranet Systems:
Internet and Intranet systems are provided by the Town of South Boston for the purpose of
conducting Town business. Allowable use includes the following:
201.OPR 2
1. To facilitate performance of job functions;
2. To conduct research in accordance with an employee’s job duties and functions; and,
3. To communicate with other outside organizations as required in order to perform job

functions.
D. Department Issued Cellular Phones:
1. The Department issues cellular phones on an as-needed basis as determined by the Chief of
Police. Limited personal use is permitted. The Department reserves the right to bill
employees who have exceeded allotted minutes of their plan, personal roaming charges, or
other charges incurred without authorization.
2. Personnel utilizing cell phones while operating Departmental vehicles shall utilize hands free
devices if available. If one is not available personnel will pull off the roadway to a safe
location when utilizing their cellular phone.
3. Personnel are not to text while operating Department vehicles.
E. Responsibility for Cellular Phones:
1. The Chief of Police shall designate an employee to be responsible for ensuring that the
cellular phones are assigned throughout the Department according to current operational
needs and requirements.
2. The designee responsible for cell phones shall record and maintain a listing of all Department
issued cellular phone numbers and to whom they were assigned (except those used in
undercover assignments). This listing shall be regarded as confidential. These numbers and
assignments shall not be provided to anyone outside of the Department without proper
authorization. However, an individual member may provide his or her issued cellular phone
number to family members or others for limited personal use.
3. The Captain or his designee shall be responsible for monitoring the monthly billing charge to
help ensure proper use and billing.
4. It is the responsibility of Department members who are assigned Department issued

equipment to ensure that it is secure at all times, and users of cellular phones are also
responsible for ensuring authorized use.
NOTE: Members who lose or damage Department issued equipment through misuse,
negligence, or abuse may be required to reimburse the Department for any replacement
or repair costs.
F. Cellular Phone Billing Statement
1. Any cellular phone billing statement shall be subject to disclosure in accordance with the
Freedom of Information Act.
2. Whenever possible, the Department member shall use the police radio or a nearby available
private or public telephone to communicate. A cellular phone should only be used for those
situations where its use arises out of operational necessity. Cellular phone users may be
required to reimburse the Department for any calls made that cause their minute usage to
exceed the allowable amount.
201.OPR 3
3. If a Department member experiences any technical problems with the operation of his/her
cellular phone, the member shall contact the designee responsible for cell phones and pagers
as soon as possible.
NOTE: Cellular phone calls can be monitored by various type of electronic equipment
available to the general public. Cellular phone conversations may also be picked up
inadvertently on other communication devices. All police personnel are encouraged
to exercise caution when discussing sensitive and confidential information when using
a cellular phone.
G. Social Media (internet community sites, dating sites, chat sites, etc.)
1. The Department will monitor officers’ postings / entries on social media sites as an officers’
postings on these sites can be seen as a direct reflection of the agency.
2. Inappropriate postings / entries may be punishable in accordance with Department policy.
3. Officers shall not post pictures of themselves in uniform, of any Department equipment, or
of themselves representing the Department in any manner on dating websites or on any
website in a way that is inappropriate or is a negative representation of the Department in
any way.
4. Officers shall not at anytime post anything on internet sites or by any other electronic
means in reference to any calls for service, cases they are working, or any activity
performed in the performance of their duties as an employee with this agency and the
Town of South Boston unless specifically authorized by the Chief of Police or their
designee.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
CHIEF OF POLICE
201.OPR 4
NUMBER June 10, 2022
May 15, 2017
SUBJECT: OPERATION OF POLICE VEHICLES / VEHICLE PURSUITS
I. Policy:
All personnel operating Department vehicles shall exercise due regard for the safety of all
persons. Members of the Department who operate Department vehicles will strictly adhere to
existing state and local statutes and this policy. Particular attention will be focused on
responding to calls for service and engaging in vehicle pursuits. Officers engaged in
emergency vehicle operations shall utilize both the audible (siren) and visual (emergency
lights) emergency warning equipment while engaged in vehicle pursuits, overtaking a vehicle
and in response to emergency calls for service in accordance with 46.2-920 of the Code of
Virginia. When using a department vehicle in emergency operations and pursuits, officers and
supervisors must justify their actions and, once they have decided to pursue, continue to
evaluate the safety of their actions.
II. Purpose:
To establish guidelines governing the operation of police vehicles, with special attention to
emergency responses and pursuits.
III. Definitions:
A. Emergency Response - the rapid response to a call for service by officer(s) in which there
is the belief by officer(s) that an immediate response will save lives, prevent injury to
people, prevent the destruction of property, is needed for the apprehension of an offender,
or when immediate assistance is requested by an officer or other law enforcement agency.
B. Boxing In - a deliberate tactic by two or more pursuit vehicles to force a pursued vehicle
in a specified direction, to reduce the vehicle speed, or to stop the intended vehicle by
maneuvering the pursuing vehicles in front of, behind, or beside the pursued vehicle and
slowing to a stop.
C. Roadblock – any method, restriction, or obstruction used to or intended to prevent free

passage of vehicles on a roadway or any other area in order to stop a suspect.
D. Tire Deflation Device – A device designed to puncture the tires of the pursued vehicle
(e.g., Stop Sticks).
E. Vehicle Pursuit – a pursuit is considered to have begun when an officer makes an attempt
to apprehend the occupant(s) of a motor vehicle after the driver has been requested or
signaled to stop and is resisting apprehension by maintaining or increasing the vehicle’s
speed, or otherwise maneuvering his/her vehicle in a manner to elude the officer. Under
this definition, it is the violator who initiates the pursuit and the officer must then make a
series of decisions as to whether the pursuit shall continue or be terminated.
202.OPR 1
F. Termination – The end of the pursuit, whether it is from the suspect vehicle coming to a
stop, or the officer(s) involved discontinuing the pursuit of the suspect vehicle.
IV. Procedure:
A. Non- Emergency and Emergency Response to Calls for Service
1. Police officers shall respond to non-emergency assignments or incidents in a

safe, expeditious manner. The highly visible nature of marked police vehicles
makes it imperative that officers always operate them in a safe, courteous
manner while obeying traffic laws and ordinances unless they are properly
using emergency lights and sirens in accordance with Virginia Code section
46.2-920.
2. While operating a police vehicle in an emergency situation, officers may

disregard certain traffic regulations as authorized by 46.2-920, in the Code of
Virginia. Nothing shall be construed to release the operator of such vehicle
from civil liability for failure to use reasonable care in such operation. The
safety of the public is of paramount concern during any emergency or pursuit
response and all officers shall exercise due regard for the safety of the general
public as well as themselves, other officers, or any suspects.
3. Any department personnel operating the department’s crime scene van shall
fully comply with all traffic regulations at all times and will not engage in
pursuit or emergency response driving.
4. All personnel who operate department vehicles and passengers of Department

vehicles shall use the safety restraining devices in the vehicles unless they
meet the exemptions stated in Virginia Code section 46.2-1094. Safety
restraining devices will always be worn when operating departmental vehicles
at high speeds in emergency response conditions.
5. When operating any law enforcement motor vehicle, to include their

department issued motor vehicle, personnel should refrain from using a cell
phone or similar wireless communication device while driving unless the
device is hands free, or it can be done safely while engaged in the
performance of their official duties. Prohibited actions include but are not
limited to text messaging, surfing the internet, receiving or responding to e-
mail, checking phone messages, or any other purpose not related to the
performance of their official duties. These actions should only be performed
when the vehicle is pulled off the road in a safe location.
6. All personnel who operate any Town vehicle, to include their department
issued vehicle, are prohibited from smoking or vaping within the interior of
said vehicle.
B. Response Procedures to Emergency Calls
1. When operating in an emergency response situation, both the emergency

lights and siren must be operational and continuously activated. This applies
to both marked and unmarked vehicles. Alternately flashing headlights, as
described in 46.2-1029.1 in the Code of Virginia, may also be used during
emergency response except when the use of headlights is required.
202.OPR 2
Department vehicles not equipped with emergency lights and a siren shall not
be used for an emergency response.
2. All units responding to an in-progress call (e.g., robbery, burglary, etc.)

should consider discontinuing the use of emergency lights and siren and fully
comply with all traffic laws just prior to the time that they would come within
hearing distance and sight of the call.
3. Police vehicles should yield to all ambulances and fire fighting equipment
operating under emergency conditions.
4. Police vehicles shall yield to school buses stopping or stopped with its lights
flashing for the purpose of loading or discharging students. The officer shall
remain stopped until such time as the driver of the school bus has assured
him/her that it is safe to proceed and the driver of the bus has turned off the
flashing red lights of the bus. The officer will check to make sure that no
students are about to cross or are in a position that would endanger them
should the officer proceed.
5. The police department van (i.e., Crime Scene van), shall not be used in an
emergency response situation, nor as a vehicle involved in any pursuit.
6. The Police Department’s Emergency Response Truck may be operated in an

emergency response situation as long as personnel adhere to all applicable
state laws as well as this policy, and have been properly trained in its
operation.
7. An emergency response will be terminated as soon as information known to

the officer indicates that the emergency no longer exists.
C. Considerations for engaging in a pursuit
1. Pursuits should be limited to cases in which an officer has reasonable

suspicion to believe;
a). A suspect has committed, or is about to commit, a crime and the necessity to
apprehend the suspect outweighs the danger created by the pursuit.
b). That a traffic infraction has been committed and the necessity to
apprehend the suspect outweighs the danger of the pursuit.
2. The initial decision to engage in or to abandon a pursuit shall lie within the
individual officer, after considering the restrictions imposed by this policy, as
well as a wide variety of mitigating factors. These factors shall include, but
are not limited to;
a). The danger to the public created by the actions of the suspect driver
b). The seriousness of the original offense
c). The time, day, and location of the pursuit
d). Weather and roadway conditions
e). Vehicular traffic and pedestrian presence
202.OPR 3
f). Familiarity with roadway
g). Capability and quality of operational police equipment, including

communications
h). Other available means of apprehension, such as obtaining a warrant for

identified violators.
3. The officer’s decision to continue a pursuit may be overridden by a supervisor

at any time. No officer shall be disciplined for his/her decision to terminate a
pursuit.
D. Vehicle Pursuit Regulations
1. Officers shall not operate a vehicle at a rate of speed or in such a manner that
is likely to cause loss of control.
2. When beginning a pursuit and throughout the duration of a pursuit, a police

officer shall weigh the need to apprehend a fleeing criminal suspect and or the
potential hazard to the public being created by the actions of the suspect driver
against the hazards presented by the pursuit. If the need to apprehend or stop
the dangerous actions of the suspect driver outweighs the hazard of the
pursuit, it is the duty of the officer to pursue the suspect. If, however, the
hazard created by the pursuit outweighs the need to apprehend the suspect the
pursuit should be terminated.
3. Vehicles not equipped with emergency lights and sirens, in accordance with
46.2-920 in the Code of Virginia, will not engage in vehicle pursuits. Also,
any department vehicle engaged in a pursuit shall maintain radio
communications with the EOC. (Emergency Operations Center, i.e., Dispatch)
4. Sworn personnel who have not been trained in defensive driving techniques
through a Virginia State Approved Training Academy will not engage in
pursuits or emergency response driving.
5. An officer who has any passenger in his/her department vehicle, other than
sworn employees of the department or other sworn law enforcement officers,
will consider the safety of the passenger(s) before engaging in a pursuit. No
passengers other than sworn law enforcement officers shall be in a department
vehicle during a pursuit. If an officer has a non-sworn passenger in his/her
vehicle, they will safely and responsibly remove them from the vehicle in an
area that is not an inherent threat to the passenger’s safety before engaging in
a pursuit.
6. All department personnel operating vehicles in an enforcement capacity shall

be thoroughly familiar with all of the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia
concerning the use of emergency vehicles and equipment, as well as
applicable department procedures.
7. Generally, a pursuit will be limited to a primary unit and secondary unit. A

supervisor may authorize additional units to be engaged in a pursuit if he/she
deems it necessary. If the primary unit is an unmarked vehicle, the primary
unit shall yield and allow a marked unit to become primary when practical and
safe to do so.
202.OPR 4
8. The Police Department’s Emergency Response Truck shall not be used as a
pursuit vehicle. Only personnel who have been properly trained in its use
shall operate this vehicle.
9. Any intervention tactic, depending upon the conditions and circumstances

under which it is used may present dangers to the officers, the public, or
anyone in the vehicle being pursued. Forcing a vehicle to stop, or attempting
to force a vehicle to stop, by the use of an intervention tactic, or deadly force,
is a use of force and are subject to policies guiding such use. Officers shall
consider these facts and requirements prior to deciding how, when, where, and
if an intervention tactic should be employed. A Use of Force form should be
submitted along with an IBR if an intervention technique is used.
10. There shall be no bumping or ramming of a pursued vehicle unless there is an

immediate foreseeable serious threat to the public. Bumping or ramming a
fleeing vehicle should be done only after other reasonable tactical means at
the officer’s disposal have been exhausted or would not be effective, and
immediate control is necessary. Bumping or ramming should be reserved for
situations where there does not appear to be another reasonable alternative
method. Bumping and ramming is NOT authorized if there does not
reasonably appear to be a present or immediate foreseeable serious threat to
the public. The following factors should be present when considering
bumping or ramming the pursued vehicle:
a.) The suspect is an actual or suspected felon, who reasonably appears to

presents a serious threat to the public if not apprehended.
b.) The suspect is driving with willful or wanton disregard for the safety of
other persons, or is driving in a reckless and life-endangering manner, or
using the vehicle as a weapon.
11. Boxing in the pursued vehicle for the purpose of limiting travel paths and
ending the pursuit is allowed only in cases where allowing the suspect to
continue unabated will likely result in a person suffering death or serious
bodily injury.
12. All units involved in a pursuit shall space themselves at a distance that will
allow proper braking and reaction time in the event the vehicle in front stops,
slows, or turns.
13. With the exception of a marked unit overtaking the primary position from an
unmarked unit or SUV, there shall be no attempt by other officers to pass
other police vehicles unless the passing officer receives specific permission
from the primary unit or the shift supervisor.
14. Officers shall not pursue suspects the “wrong way” on any roadway or
duplicate the suspects dangerous driving maneuvers unless the failure to
immediately apprehend the violator will result in another person suffering
death or serious bodily injury, and the officer’s maneuvers do not endanger
non-involved persons or unreasonably endanger the officer(s) involved.
15. The shift supervisor monitoring the pursuit should consider the use of and
deployment of Stop Sticks (or other approved tire deflation device) whenever
practical, as a means of limiting or terminating the pursuit. The deployment
of Stop Sticks requires the authority of the shift supervisor.
202.OPR 5
16. Officers, while engaged in a pursuit, shall not discharge a firearm at or from a
moving vehicle unless the use of deadly force is justified to protect the
officer’s life, the lives of other officers, or the life of a citizen.
17. Stationary roadblocks are prohibited unless the risk posed by allowing the
pursuit to continue presents an immediate threat to the life and safety of
others. Roadblocks should be considered only as a measure of last resort to
terminate a pursuit and must be authorized by a supervisor. If a roadblock is
established, officers must:
a). Allow the suspect a reasonable stopping distance
b). Not place themselves in the roadblock in the line of the oncoming suspect
vehicle
c). Reasonably ensure the safety of non-involved pedestrians and motorists
d). Comply with any applicable laws on roadblocks, including considerations

contained in 46.2-920 of the Code of Virginia
e). Notify all units involved in the pursuit and EOC personnel of the exact
location of the roadblock.
18. During a pursuit, emergency lights and sirens must be activated when officers
proceed through a stop sign, red light, or other highway control device to stop
traffic.
19. At the end of the pursuit, officers shall conduct a felony stop when possible.
E. Use of Stop Sticks
1. Only officers who have attended a department approved training on Stop

Sticks may deploy the Stop Sticks with the approval of the shift supervisor.
2. Officers involved in the deployment and use of Stop Sticks shall consider the
following before using the device:
a.) The most effective location for the placement of the tire deflation device.
b.) The deployment location should have reasonably good sight distance to
enable the officer deploying the device to observe the pursuit and other
traffic as it approaches.
c.) Officers are to deploy Stop Sticks in an area where they are able to find
adequate cover from the pursued vehicle such as a tree or guard rail.
These barriers assist in concealing the officer from the suspect’s view,
limiting the suspect’s ability to avoid the Stop Sticks, and allow the
deployment of the Stop Stick so that the officer is in a relatively safe
position. Officers should not use a patrol car for cover.
d.) Limit or isolate traffic from the pursuit and area of deployment.
e.) Officers are to use caution using Stop Sticks in pursuits with excessive
speed, or when fleeing suspects appear to be under the effects of drugs or
202.OPR 6
alcohol.
f.) Deployment will not occur on:
(i) Curves
(ii) Bridges
(iii) Wet surfaces
(iv) Gravel or loose pavement
(v) In areas where there are pedestrians or excessive traffic present
(vi) Any location which should be avoided due to current existing
circumstances. (Traffic construction, special events, and/or
activities that may create situations where the use of the device
would be inappropriate. Position and vulnerability of the public,
private property, and other assisting units and equipment should
be considered when deploying the device.)
3. Stop Sticks shall not be deployed to stop the following vehicles unless
continued movement of the suspect vehicle would result in an increased
hazard to others.
a.) Any vehicle transporting hazardous materials.
b.) Any passenger bus transporting passengers.
c.) Any school bus transporting students.
d.) Any vehicle that would pose an unusually great hazard to citizens beyond
the hazards normally involved in pursuits.
e.) Any vehicle with 3 wheels or less.
4. To ensure the safe and effective use of the devices, the shift supervisor
overseeing the pursuit shall coordinate with the pursuing officers and the
officer(s) deploying the Stop Sticks.
5. The officer(s) deploying the Stop Sticks shall be in position at a

predetermined location in sufficient time for proper deployment. The
coordinating supervisor and all pursuing officers should be notified when the
Stop Sticks are in place.
6. The Stop Sticks will be deployed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and training guidelines.
7. After deployment of the Stop Sticks, everyone at the scene of the device
should seek a safe location (barriers that would protect them from the pursued
vehicle). It is not recommended to use a vehicle as cover.
8. Officers who deploy Stop Sticks are responsible for securing them
immediately after their use. This shall include searching the immediate area
where the Stop Sticks were used and collecting any spikes or points which
may have become detached, and properly maintaining, preparing and storing
the Stop Sticks for reuse.
202.OPR 7
9. If another law enforcement agency is requesting assistance for the use of Stop
Sticks during a pursuit, the deployment must be approved by the shift
supervisor.
10. The use of Stop Sticks constitutes a use of force. Officers deploying Stop
Sticks must complete a Use of Force form.
F. Pursuit Termination
1. The decision to terminate a pursuit should be based on reasonable analysis of

the risk created by the pursuit compared to the risks of letting the offender
escape or continue to operate the vehicle in a manner that creates a public
safety hazard. The officer or supervisor’s decision to terminate a pursuit shall
be respected. The due regard for the safety of others should include
consideration of the risks created by the violator’s driving as well as that of
the officer. The supervisor in charge has the authority to terminate the pursuit
at any time, as does the primary officer. No officer or supervisor shall be
disciplined for his/her decision to terminate a pursuit.
2. Factors to consider in terminating a pursuit
a) Situations in which the offender is identified and the failure to

apprehend the offender immediately poses no immediate threat of death
or serious injury to another person.
b) If in the opinion of the pursuing officer or supervisor in charge there is

a clear and reasonable danger created by the pursuit to the officer and
others that outweighs the necessity for immediate apprehension.
c) Excessive speeds with respect to environmental and traffic conditions.

In such a situation when the pursuit is the primary motivation for the
dangerous actions of the suspect driver the risk may have become too
great when compared to the potential benefit of immediate
apprehension.
d) Situations in which there is a malfunction or damage to police

equipment or the police vehicle (e.g., blue light(s) are inoperable, brake
problems, etc.)
e) The distance between the pursuing officer and the violator is so great
that further pursuit is futile or the officer loses visual contact with the
violator for an extended period of time.
f) When communications between the primary officer and the EOC have
become severely limited or non-existent.
G. Primary Unit Responsibilities
1. The primary unit shall notify the communication center that a pursuit has
been initiated and will be responsible for broadcasting radio communications
until a secondary unit is given the responsibility for radio communications.
These communications shall include but are not limited to:
a) Location and direction of travel;
202.OPR 8
b) Speed;
c) Type of offense/reason for the stop;
d) Vehicle description, including license number, if known;
e) Number of occupants;
f) Driving behavior of the pursued vehicle;
g) Road, traffic, and weather conditions
h) Description of the driver and actions inside the vehicle, if available
2. Failure to provide the above information may be cause for the supervisor to
order termination of the pursuit.
3. The authority of the primary unit pertains to the immediate field operation
and is, at all times, subordinate to the command of the shift supervisor.
4. The primary officer may maintain pursuit as long as it is safe to do so, until
directed to terminate the pursuit by the supervisor, or the suspect is stopped.
H. Secondary Unit Responsibilities
1. The secondary officer in the pursuit will be designated as the secondary

pursuit vehicle and is responsible for:
a) Immediately notifying the dispatcher of his/her entry into the pursuit.
b) Remaining at a safe distance behind the primary pursuit vehicle unless

directed to assume the role of primary pursuit vehicle.
c) The secondary officer shall take over radio traffic, allowing the primary
officer to concentrate on driving and apprehending the fleeing suspect.
d) The secondary officer shall relay over the radio the location, direction
of travel, speed of the pursuit, road and traffic conditions, description
of the suspect vehicle’s actions, and any other information that may be
relevant in determining whether the pursuit should be terminated or
continue.
e) Identifying the need for additional resources or equipment.
f) Serving as backup to the primary pursuing officer once the suspect has
been stopped.
g) If the primary unit becomes disabled, the secondary officer will become
the primary unit. The shift supervisor will assign another unit to join
the pursuit and that unit will be designated as the secondary unit.
h) The secondary officer will only drive at speeds and conditions where
they are not at risk to themselves or others. If the secondary officer is
unable to participate safely in the pursuit, they should notify the shift
supervisor for another unit to take over the secondary unit position.
202.OPR 9
2. The active pursuit will normally involve not more than two officers: the
primary and secondary units. If more assistance is specifically requested, the
response will be determined by:
a) Nature of the offense;
b) Number of suspects;
c) Whether the participating units have more than one officer;
d) Other clear and articulated facts that would warrant an additional

officer(s).
I. Shift Supervisor Responsibilities
1. Upon being notified that a pursuit is in progress, the shift supervisor shall:
a) Monitor the pursuit and shall coordinate the involvement of officers in

the pursuit.
b) Ensure that no more than the required or necessary officers are

involved in the pursuit.
c) Ensure that Command Staff and adjoining agencies are being notified.
d) Continuously consider all available information to determine whether

the pursuit should be terminated or may continue.
e) Direct that the pursuit be terminated if, in his/her judgement, it is not

justified to continue the pursuit under the guidelines of this policy.
f) Notify the command staff of any property damage, injuries, and

fatalities involved in the pursuit. Property damage and non-fatal
injuries resulting from the pursuit that occur in the town limits will be
investigated by the South Boston Police Department provided that the
damage or injury was not caused by law enforcement vehicles. The
Virginia State Police will investigate any property damage or injuries
involving police vehicles in the town limits and in Halifax County. If a
fatality occurs during the pursuit while in the Town of South Boston, or
in the County of Halifax, it will be investigated by the Virginia State
Police. Property damage, injuries, and fatalities occurring outside the
County of Halifax will be investigated by a law enforcement agency
having authority in that jurisdiction.
g) Ensures the notification and/or coordination of outside agencies if the

pursuit either leaves or is likely to leave the jurisdiction of this
department.
h) Preparing a post-pursuit review and compiling documentation of the

pursuit by all officers involved.
2. The shift supervisor will continue to control the involvement in a pursuit until
it is terminated. In the absence of adequate information, or if the supervisor
202.OPR 10
determines that the pursuit is creating more of a hazard than what already
exists, the supervisor shall order the termination of the pursuit.
3. The shift supervisor will coordinate with any available officers not directly
involved in the pursuit for clearing any pedestrian and vehicular traffic that
may be anticipated to be in the path of the pursuit.
4. The shift supervisor will determine if pursuit intervention techniques are

needed in an attempt to stop the suspect’s ability to flee in a vehicle. The
pursuit intervention techniques may be through the tactical application of
technology, tire deflation devices (e.g., Stop Sticks), boxing-in, ramming, or
roadblock procedures. Supervisors should balance the risk of allowing a
pursuit to continue with the potential hazards arising from the use of each
intervention technique to the safety of the public and the officers involved.
5. In the event that initial pursuing officers relinquish control of the pursuit to
another agency, the initial officer may, with the permission of a supervisor,
trail the pursuit to the termination point in order to provide information and
assistance for the arrest of the suspect and reporting the incident.
J. Dispatcher Responsibilities
1. Upon being notified of the initiation of a vehicle pursuit, EOC personnel shall:
a) Determine which unit(s) is involved in the pursuit; location of the

pursuit and the direction of travel.
b) Request license plate number, description of the vehicle, number of

occupants, and reason for the stop if not already conveyed by the
officer.
c) Dispatch a secondary unit to assist the primary unit.
d) Notify other working units, including the supervisor, of the pursuit.
e) Have all units with non-emergency traffic clear that radio channel.
f) Generate a call for service using “pursuit” as the call type. Any units
involved in the pursuit should be listed in the call.
g) As soon as possible, the dispatcher shall query the vehicle for owner
information, registered address, any warrants on file for the registered
owner, and if the vehicle has been reported stolen.
h) Monitor radio traffic to keep track of the direction of travel, vehicle

actions, speeds, and any other pertinent information.
i) Notify and coordinate with other involved or affected agencies as

practical (i.e., Halifax County Sheriff’s Office, Virginia State Police).
j) Notify adjacent jurisdictions if the pursuit appears that it may leave this
jurisdiction and enter an adjacent jurisdiction.
2. Pursuits entering this jurisdiction from another jurisdiction, EOC personnel

Shall:
202.OPR 11
a) Notify all officers by radio;
b) Dispatch units according to the request of the shift supervisor;
c) Relay information and update responding units.
K. Medical Assistance
In the event any person is injured during the course of a pursuit, the involved officer(s)
shall immediately provide, or make arrangements for providing, medical care. The care
for human life will exceed the need to capture a fleeing suspect in the vast majority of
situations. If the pursuit must be continued to prevent additional deaths or injuries, the
pursuing officer(s) must make arrangements via radio to provide the victim(s) care.
L. Pursuits Entering the Jurisdiction of the Town
1. When other agencies pursue vehicles into the jurisdiction of this department:
a) Officers from this department should not join a pursuit unless

specifically requested to do so by the pursuing agency and with
approval from a supervisor. This will not preclude an officer from
responding to a location within this department’s jurisdiction if a
pursuit terminates for the purpose of assisting another agency in
apprehending the suspect(s) involved in the pursuit.
b) Officers will not assist in an active pursuit where there are already two
vehicles from another agency already engaged in an active pursuit
unless requested by the pursuing agency and with approval from the
on-duty supervisor.
c) The on-duty supervisor may terminate this Department’s involvement

in an active pursuit at such a time that the pursuing agency’s primary
officer receives sufficient back up from their own or another agency.
d) Officers shall adhere to this policy in determining whether their

involvement in a pursuit should be terminated or continue. The on-
duty supervisor may also terminate this department’s involvement in a
pursuit at any time the risk of the pursuit outweighs the safety of the
community.
e) The shift supervisor will coordinate with any available officers not
directly involved in the pursuit for clearing any pedestrian and
vehicular traffic that may be anticipated to be in the path of the pursuit.
f) Assistance to a pursuing agency by officers of this department will

conclude at the town limits, provided that the pursuing agency has
sufficient assistance from other agencies. Ongoing participation from
this department may continue only until sufficient assistance is present
and approved by the on-duty supervisor.
g) In the event that the termination point of a pursuit from another agency
is within this jurisdiction, officers shall provide appropriate assistance
202.OPR 12
including, but not limited to, scene control, coordination and
completion of supplemental reports, and any other assistance requested
or needed.
M. Pursuits Leaving the Jurisdiction of the Town
1. When an officer engaged in a pursuit leaves this jurisdiction and enters other
jurisdictions, the following will apply:
a) The primary officer will advise dispatch and the on-duty supervisor that
the pursuit is leaving the jurisdiction.
b) The supervisor handling the pursuit will evaluate the entire incident and
make the decision to let the pursuit continue or terminate when leaving
this jurisdiction.
c) The dispatch center will notify the other jurisdictions that will be
affected by the pursuit.
d) The primary pursuing officer or supervisor, taking into consideration

the distance traveled, unfamiliarity with the area, and other pertinent
facts, should determine whether to request another agency with
jurisdiction to take over the pursuit.
e) The South Boston officer will relinquish control of the pursuit when
another agency with jurisdiction has assumed control of the pursuit,
unless the continued assistance is requested by the agency assuming
control. Upon relinquishing control of the pursuit, the involved officers
may proceed, with supervisory approval, to the termination point of the
pursuit to assist in the investigation and obtain necessary information
for any reports.
f) All policies and procedures of this Department will continue to be

followed.
g) If a pursuit ends in the apprehension of a suspect outside the

jurisdiction of Halifax County, the arresting officer shall bring the
accused before the proper official in the jurisdiction where the arrest is
made, and procure a warrant charging the accused with the offenses
committed in the town of South Boston.
N. Administrative Review of a Pursuit
1. The Chief of Police and the Patrol Lieutenant shall be notified by the on-duty
supervisor of all pursuits involving officers of this department whether
initiated from this department or another agency.
2. The on-duty supervisor will submit a report to the Chief of Police and the
Patrol Lieutenant containing the following:
a) Officers involved in the pursuit.
b) Date and time of the pursuit.
c) Initial reason and circumstances surrounding the pursuit.
202.OPR 13
d) Length of the pursuit in distance and time, including the starting and
termination points.
e) Alleged offense(s).
f) Whether a suspect was apprehended as well as the means and methods

used. This shall include any use of force used.
g) Arrestee information.
h) Any injuries and/or medical treatment.
i) Any property and equipment damage.
j) Name of supervisor at the scene who handled the incident.
3. Following termination of any pursuit that involved Department members, they

shall cooperate fully in all post incident evaluations, critiques or
investigations.
4. The shift supervisor shall review each pursuit with the officer(s) as soon as is
practical following the incident. An Incident Based Report (IBR) will be filed
in all vehicle pursuits, as well as a Use of Force report for any intervention
techniques that were used.
5. The Patrol Lieutenant will do an Administrative Review of the pursuit to

determine if the pursuit appears to be in compliance with this policy or that
additional review, follow up, or action is warranted. The Chief of Police may
assign a Use of Force Committee to review these reports as well to determine
the need for training and policy changes.
6. The IBR report including any supplemental reports from other officers, any
Use of Force reports, pictures taken, any recordings of car camera videos,
body camera videos, radio traffic from the dispatch center, and any other
pertinent information will be used in an administrative review of the pursuit.
7. The Patrol Lieutenant will notify the Chief of Police about the results of the
Administrative Review.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
202.OPR 14
202.OPR 15
NUMBER March 23, 2023
May 15, 2017
SUBJECT: TRAFFIC ENFORCEMENT
I. POLICY:
Traffic law enforcement involves all activities or operations which relate to observing, detecting, and preventing
traffic law violations and taking appropriate action under the circumstances. Enforcement not only involves
arrests and citations, but includes warnings to drivers and pedestrians which help prevent them from committing
minor violations. Traffic enforcement may react to observed violations, at accidents, or in response to
community concerns, or may be proactive to prevent traffic violations. However, overzealous enforcement
without considering whether the violator is familiar with the legal requirements or without regard for the
circumstances surrounding the violation causes disrespect for the law and poor relations between the department
and the community. The emphasis of an officer's traffic enforcement is placed on violations that contribute to
accidents and that prevent hazards to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. Traffic enforcement shall be conducted in
accordance with state laws and town ordinances.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to prescribe procedures for traffic law enforcement, preventive patrol,
proactive enforcement, and relationships with motorists, pedestrians, and the courts.
III. PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Normal traffic enforcement involves patrol by officers who observe and handle traffic violations during the
performance of their normal duties.
1. Area patrol involves traffic enforcement within the officer's assigned area of responsibility.
2. Line patrol involves traffic enforcement with concentration on a particular section of roadway.
3. Directed patrol instructions can specify enforcement in an area, on a line patrol, or at a specific
location, depending on the nature of the hazard/violation.
4. Stationary observation, either covert or overt, may be used as a technique to make observations about
the flow of traffic at a particular location. Officers are encouraged, when completing reports or doing
other activities which will keep them out of service for a short while, to park their patrol vehicles in a
conspicuous location where the mere presence of the vehicle will serve to remind other drivers of the
need for compliance with traffic laws.
B. Objectives of Traffic Stops:
There are two major objectives of a traffic stop. The attainment of these two objectives depends upon the
officer's ability to evaluate the violator's mental and physical condition, and facts concerning the violation.
This requires a thorough understanding of human relations and demands flexibility on the part of the
officer. Enforcement procedures should minimize conflict which may develop between the officer and
violator and assist in achieving the two major objectives, which are:
203.OPR
1. To take proper and appropriate enforcement action.
2. To favorably alter the violator's future driving behavior.
C. Traffic Violator/Officer Relations:
1. Followed in all traffic stops:
a. Be alert at all times for the unexpected.
b. Be absolutely certain the observations of the traffic violation were accurate.
c. Present a professional image in dress, grooming, language, bearing, and emotional stability.
d. Be prepared for the contact by having the necessary equipment and forms, if they are to be used,
immediately available.
e. Decide on the appropriate enforcement action based upon the violator's driving behavior, not
attitude. In most cases, decide on the formal enforcement action before contacting the violator.
Exceptions include stopping an out-of-state driver committing a violation that would not be a
violation in his jurisdiction, such as noise complaint violation. The officer may then decide to
issue a warning rather than a citation.
2. Before making a vehicle stop:
a. Maintain a reasonable distance between the vehicle and the police unit.
b. Locate a safe spot to stop the vehicle.
c. Activate the emergency blue lights and siren (if needed) to signal the vehicle to stop.
d. Advise the dispatcher of the intention to stop the particular vehicle, giving:
i. Badge number
ii. Location of the stop - (Including street name as well as a cross reference which may
be either the nearest street or an address or a landmark.)
iii. Vehicle's license tag number and state of issuance, make of vehicle, and color of
vehicle.
iv. Number of occupants.
e. The officer should position the police vehicle approximately one half to one car length behind the
violator's vehicle. The police vehicle shall be positioned so that it will offer the officer some
protection from oncoming traffic.
3. When stopping a vehicle in which the occupant(s) is deemed to present a hazard to the officer's safety,
in addition to the above (See section F.) :
a. Request a backup unit and calculate the stop so that the backup unit is in the immediate area
before the actual stop.
b. Train the unit's auxiliary lights (spotlight / take down lights) on the occupant(s) of the vehicle or,
when necessary, on the driver’s inside rear view mirror.
203.OPR
c. When necessary, use the unit's public address system to give the occupant(s) of the vehicle
instructions.
4. Hazards
a. On multi-lane roadways, the officer should ensure the safety of the violator during the lane
changes by gradually changing from lane to lane with the violator until the right side of the
roadway is reached.
b. Should the violator stop abruptly in the wrong lane or in another undesirable location, the officer
shall direct him or her to move to a safer location. Officers may use the public address system to
instruct violators to move to a safer location. If the officer's oral directions and gestures are
misunderstood, the officer shall quickly leave the patrol vehicle and instruct the violator.
D. Approaching the Violator
The following steps in stopping and approaching a traffic violator are intended to provide maximum safety
for the officer, the violator, and other users of the roadway. Varying conditions regarding the engineering of
the particular traffic way, the urgency to stop the violator (drunk driver), and the existing volume of traffic
may require adjusting or altering the recommended procedure. Under ideal conditions, follow these
procedures if possible:
1. The officer shall leave the patrol vehicle and be continuously alert for any suspicious movement or
actions on the part of the violator or other occupants in the violator's vehicle.
2. The officer shall approach from the rear of the violator's car. The officer should press firmly, finger tips
down, on the vehicle’s trunk lid, while looking into the vehicles rear seat, then stop behind the trailing
edge of the left or right front door. This position shall be maintained if there are only occupants in the
front seat of the vehicle. From this position, the officer can communicate with the violator, keeping
him in a slightly awkward position and at the same time keeping all occupants of the vehicle in view.
3. In cases where the violator's car has occupants in both the front and rear seats, the officer should
approach to the rear left corner of the vehicle and press firmly, finger tips down, on the vehicle’s trunk
lid, while observing the occupants in the rear seats, being alert for any unusual actions on the part of
the occupants. The officer should assess the situation before further approaching the trailing edge of
the left or right front door. If the officer observes any unusual actions, he / she should immediately call
for a back-up unit and wait until one arrives before any further approach. If necessary, the officer may
choose to order the driver out of the vehicle and to the rear of the violator's car, keeping alert of the
actions of the occupants left in the vehicle.
4. In traffic stops made by two-man patrol vehicles, the passenger officer shall help handle radio
communications, write all notes and messages relayed from the communications center, and during the
traffic stop shall leave the vehicle and approach the rear right corner of the vehicle and act as an
observer and cover for his fellow officer.
5. At night, officers shall exercise caution in selecting an appropriate place for the traffic stop, when to
signal the violator to stop, and positioning the police vehicle at the stop. At the stop, the head lights
shall be on low beam for the safety of oncoming traffic and the spotlight should be properly aimed to
illuminate the suspect vehicle. Emergency lights on the patrol vehicle will remain in use during the
stop to identify the patrol vehicle and alert traffic of the stop.
6. When a vehicle is stopped for a traffic violation and a summons is to be issued, it is recommended that
the violator remain in his/her own vehicle while the summons is being written. This will avoid danger
from confrontation with the violator, protect the violator from injury in the event the police vehicle is
struck from the rear, and minimize the opportunity for false accusations against the officer.
203.OPR
E. Communicating with the Violator
In transacting his / her business with the violator, the officer shall (not necessarily in this order):
1. Greet the violator courteously, with the officer identifying himself / herself by rank/title, name, and the
name of the department.
2. Inform the violator what traffic law he has violated.
3. Ask for the violator's driver license, vehicle registration, and proof of insurance, if needed. If the
driver offers money or any form bribery, the officer shall refuse and advise the driver of the illegality
of the offer.
4. If the driver has no driver's license, ask for another form of identification. If the driver has no valid
form of identification, the officer shall obtain the driver’s name and date of birth, driver’s license
number (if known), or social security number if they are a licensed in Virginia.
5. Officers should allow the driver to discuss the violation if it can be done safely and not impede the
officer with the traffic stop. Do not argue, berate, belittle, or otherwise orally abuse the violator.
6. Complete the forms required for the enforcement action taken, or exercise an oral warning if
appropriate.
7. Explain the summons to the violator and what steps need to be followed; such as the prepayment
option (if available) and how to contact the court.
8. If the enforcement action requires a court appearance, make sure the violator knows where and when
to appear. Explain any alternatives to the violator, but do not predict the actions of the court.
9. Be alert to any emotional stress exhibited by the driver. If stress is present, the instructions may have to
be repeated or the violator may need to calm down before resuming driving.
10. Release the defendant after all steps are complete:
a. reviewing the summons with him/her,
b. answering any questions applicable about the summons,
c. he / she signs the summons or check that the violator refused to sign the summons, and
d. return the violator's driver's license, registration, and copy of the summons.
11. Assist the violator in safely re-entering the traffic flow. Do not follow the violator.
F. Stopping a Known or Suspected Felon:
Special procedures shall be used in vehicle stops when the occupants are known to be armed and
dangerous. When a vehicle driven by a known or suspected felon is located by an officer, he / she will:
1. Notify the dispatcher immediately of his / her location;
2. Give a thorough description of the vehicle and its occupants;
3. Keep the vehicle in view;
203.OPR
4. Request sufficient assistance in making the stop;
5. Keep support units informed of the location and direction of travel to aid their approach with minimal
use of emergency equipment. (The suspect vehicle will not be stopped unless absolutely necessary
until adequate support is available and in position.)
Circumstances may, however, dictate a one-officer felony vehicle stop. The following procedures will
be used in effecting the stop:
a. The officer will plan to stop the suspect vehicle in a location which presents minimal danger to
other citizens.
b. The officer should wait for other backup units if available. When conditions are appropriate the
officer will move his/her vehicle into position to the rear of the suspect vehicle to initiate the stop.
c. The officer will signal the violator to stop, using all emergency equipment to warn other traffic.
d. The violator should be stopped on the extreme right side of the road.
e. If the violator is known to be armed and dangerous, the officer will have his weapon accessible
and ready for immediate use.
f. When the suspect vehicle begins to stop, the officer will turn off the siren and turn on the public
address system.
g. The officer will park the police vehicle so that it provides maximum protection and cover.
h. At night, the officer shall focus all lights on the interior of the suspect vehicle.
i. The officer will leave the police vehicle quickly but remain behind the door and accessible to the
public address system microphone.
j. The officer making the stop is in command and will use the public address system to address the
driver and each occupant of the vehicle. Once suspects are stopped, the officer shall:
i. Order the driver to shut off the motor and drop the keys on the ground outside his door.
ii. Next, the officer shall order the driver to place his hands, palms up, on the front window of
the vehicle.
iii. The officer shall then order the occupants to place their hands, palms up, on the ceiling of the
vehicle.
iv. The officer shall then order occupants, one at a time, to exit the vehicle where officers have a
clear line of sight.
v. Occupants will then be ordered to walk backwards toward the arresting officer and then to lie
face down on the ground. Prior to laying on the ground, officers may order the occupants to
lift up clothing around the waist or open jackets which may conceal weapons.
vi. If a public address system is not available, the officer will give voice commands if they can be
heard; if this fails, the officer may cautiously approach the vehicle, keeping all occupants in
view, to a point where he can be heard.
vii. To reduce confusion, the officer will instruct support officers, as appropriate, and will be the
only officer to direct the suspects.
203.OPR
viii. The support officers will cover the arresting officer on the curb side of the vehicle until all
occupants are in the search position.
ix. Officers will exercise extreme caution not to get within each other's line of fire.
x. When all occupants have been removed from the vehicle, the support officers shall move to
cover the arresting officer while the persons are searched.
xi. Arrestee's will be searched and handcuffed before transportation.
G. Handling Special Categories of Violators:
1. Non-residents:
A nonresident over the age of sixteen years and three months who has been duly licensed as a driver
under a law requiring the licensing of drivers in his/her home state or country and who has in his/her
immediate possession a driver's license issued to him in his home state or country shall be permitted,
without a Virginia license, to drive a motor vehicle on the highways of the Commonwealth (VA Code
46.2-307). A resident of another state shall be issued a summons in the same manner as a resident of
the Commonwealth of Virginia if the officer decides to issue a citation. A custodial arrest is
authorized for violations where a person is required to be brought before a magistrate.
2. Juveniles:
Juvenile traffic offenders are prosecuted in Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court and that should be
so noted on the summons. Officers issuing a traffic summons to a juvenile offender should advise them
as to their options regarding prepayment or court appearance and that a parent or guardian must
accompany them when they appear before the court.
3. Foreign Diplomats/Families/Servants, and Other Consular Officials:
a. Officers shall refer to General Order 110.ADM “Rights of Foreign Nationals” when coming into
contact with foreign government officials, their families, and their employees. Officials from
foreign governments may be afforded immunity from local process of laws of the Commonwealth
of Virginia and localities which include traffic summonses. Officers shall verify the immunity
status of a foreign national who identifies that he/she has immunity.
b. If a person is immune by diplomatic status and his/her actions would normally require an arrest
(such as in the case of D.U.I.), the person may be detained for his/her own safety and the safety of
others until arrangements can be made to release the diplomat to a responsible custodian or ensure
safe return to his/her residence.
4. Military personnel:
a. Members of the military and certain individuals may request an extension of their Virginia driver’s
license (not CDL). This includes active-duty members of the U.S. military who are deployed
outside of Virginia and plan to return, along with their spouses and dependents. An extension may
be granted and will be valid for six years. A driver whose license is extended will be given an
extension card to carry with the expired license. The card will indicate that the extension is valid
for up to six years, or for 180 days after the driver returns to Virginia, whichever occurs first.
b. A person on active duty with the armed services of the United States or a spouse or a dependent
child not less than sixteen years of age of a person on active duty with the armed services of the
United States who has been licensed as a driver under a law requiring the licensing of drivers in
203.OPR
his/her home state or country and who has in his/her immediate possession a valid driver's license
issued to him/her in his/her home state or country shall be permitted without examination or
license under this chapter to drive a motor vehicle on the highways in the Commonwealth (VA
Code 46.2-306).
c. Every person in the armed services of the United States, when furnished with a driver's license,
and when operating an official motor vehicle in such service, shall be exempt from licensure in the
Commonwealth (VA Code 46.2-305).
5. Legislators:
a. During the session of the General Assembly, and for five days before and after the session,
members of the General Assembly, the clerks thereof and the clerks' full-time assistants, and the
sergeants-at-arms of the Senate and House shall be privileged from being taken into custody or
imprisoned under any process except as provided in § 30-7; nor shall such persons for such
periods of time be subject to process as a witness in any case, civil or criminal. The provisions of
this section shall be applicable to the Lieutenant Governor during his attendance at sessions of the
General Assembly and while going to and from such sessions.
b. Except for treason, felony, or breach of the peace, members of the United States Congress are
privileged from being detained during any session of Congress and in traveling to and returning
from the same (Article S6.C1.2).
c. As such privilege pertains to traffic enforcement, an officer encountering any of the legislators
mentioned in this section, during the time period specified in this general order, who has
committed a traffic violation that may warrant more than a warning, shall notify a shift supervisor
of the incident and confer with the Commonwealth Attorney for a decision to prosecute.
d. Legislators who are suspected of driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs shall not be
allowed to continue the operation of the vehicle. The officer shall notify the shift supervisor
immediately and make contact with the Commonwealth Attorney for guidance.
H. Types of Enforcement Actions:
1. Warnings (oral and written):
Officers may issue warnings to a violator when a minor traffic infraction is committed, or when the act
may be due to ignorance of a local ordinance of which the driver may not be aware.
2. Virginia Uniform Summons (VUS):
a. A VUS should be issued to a violator who jeopardizes the safe and efficient flow of vehicular and
pedestrian traffic, including hazardous moving violations or operating unsafe and improperly
equipped vehicles. A VUS should normally be issued at reportable traffic accidents when the
officer can determine the person that caused the accident.
b. Information to be provided on the traffic summons:
The Virginia Uniform Summons will be completed whenever a motorist is to be charged with a
motor vehicle violation. Officers shall include the following information and answer any questions
that are related to the summons that the violator may have.
i. The specific charge, including the state code and town code when applicable.
ii. Date, time, address, and name of the court the violator is required to appear in.
203.OPR
iii. Explain the implications of signing the summons.
iv. Advise the violator if the court appearance is mandatory or whether the violator may
prepay the fine by mail or in person at the clerk’s office. Officers should check the box on the
VUS when the offense is prepayable. The officer shall not quote the cost of the fine for any
violation of law. Officers may provide the violator with a pre-payment sheet that is provided
by the Virginia State Supreme Court.
v. Officers should verify with the violator that the information, such as the name and address
provided are current and correct. (Do not use Post Office Box Numbers)
vi. Driver’s license number, Commercial driver’s license number, or social security number (if
not licensed) and the state where the license was issued.
vii. Physical descriptors of the violator, including date of birth, hair color or bald, eye color,
weight, race, and sex.
viii. Description of the vehicle used in the violation including the year, make, type, license
number, year of registration, state of registration, direction of travel, and if the violation
resulted in an accident.
ix. The jurisdiction of offense, date of offense, day, time, weather, and location of the offense.
x. The date and location of arrest.
xi. The name of the officer and his/her badge number.
c. Distribution of Copies of The Virginia Uniform Summons:
i. Page 1 - to the respective court

ii. Page 2 - defendant copy
iii. Page 3 – Agency (department) copy
iv. Page 4 – Officer copy
d. Voiding Summonses:
A summons which has not been issued to a violator may be voided by taking the following steps:
i. The officer shall print “VOID” across the top copy of the summons and an explanation of
why the summons was voided.
ii. All copies of the voided summons are to be turned in to the Office Manager at the department
to be maintained in a file.
A summons that has been issued to a violator cannot be voided. The officer must request that the
court dismiss the charge or have it “nolle prose”.
3. Physical Arrest:
Officers will make a physical arrests of traffic law violators in compliance with VA Code 46.2-940 and
the following:
a. Violations of traffic laws pertaining to driving under the influence of alcohol or other intoxicants.
b. Whenever a felony has been committed involving a vehicle.
203.OPR
e. When the officer has reason to believe that the person will disregard the issued Virginia Uniform
Summons. (A person has a right to refuse to sign a summons.)
J. Violations:
The following guidelines for routine traffic law enforcement are provided to help assist officers when
trying to decide whether or not a traffic summons shall be issued.
1. DUI Violations - (see related general order 207.OPR)
DUI and DUID are serious life endangering offenses. Officers are expected to thoroughly investigate
these cases and file the appropriate charges. The enforcement of these violations is a priority of this
Department and all officers are encouraged to strictly enforce these laws.
2. Persons Charged with Revoked/Suspended Operator's License:
a. The Virginia Uniform Summons (VUS) should be issued when an officer has stopped a vehicle
and identified the driver as driving with a revoked or suspended operator's license (Virginia Code
46.2-301) depending on how the driver was notified of the suspension/revocation.
b. An officer who sees a person driving, and has verified that his/her driver’s privilege is under
suspension or revocation at that time, may swear out a warrant if not able to stop the violator.
c. Officers shall take possession of a Virginia driver’s license that is suspended or revoked. Officers
shall also issue a DMV Notice of Suspension/Revocation/Disqualification Form to the violator.
Officers shall turn in suspended or revoked Virginia driver’s licenses to the Records Manager,
along with designated copies of the Notice of Suspension/Revocation/Disqualification Form to be
sent to DMV.
3. Speed Violations - Pacing / Radar (see related general order 212.OPR)
Speeding violations range from barely exceeding the posted speed limit to violations where the speed
is dangerous to the motoring public who are safely utilizing the roadways of the community. Officers
should follow the training guidelines for speed tolerance. Additionally, officers should consider the
following when taking enforcement action:
a. Posted speed limit
b. Traffic conditions and weather
c. Speed related accidents in the area
d. Frequency of speed related neighborhood complaints
e. Utilizing departmental statistical data that may provide times and peak hours of violations.
4. Other Hazardous Violations
There is a broad range of hazardous violations that an officer is likely to encounter. These violations
range from passing and turning violations to signal light violations. Officers should consider the
degree of hazards, previous accident history at that location, and current directed patrol emphasis.
5. Off-road vehicle violations
a. Any officer observing an unlicensed, recreational, off-road vehicle, being unlawfully operated on
203.OPR
the highway, shall order the vehicle to be removed and take appropriate enforcement action.
b. Enforcement actions may be in the form of state laws, local ordinances, or rules and
regulations concerning the operation of off-road vehicle on public-owned trails, parks, or property.
c. Accidents involving off-road vehicles that do not occur on a public highway do not require that a
state accident report be filed, but a department incident report should be filed to record the
accidental injury.
b. Farm equipment, construction, and other similar type vehicles, which are not subject to the state
inspection and licensing laws, must be operated on the highway in a safe manner. These types of
vehicles are required to be marked with a slow emblem marker that is attached to the rear of the
vehicle per Virginia Code Section 46.2-1081.
6. Equipment Violations
Defective or improper motor vehicle equipment, which are considered secondary violations, can
present a significant safety hazard. Although the state has an annual motor vehicle inspection program,
officers, in the interest of safety, may check motor vehicles for state code equipment violations during
a traffic stop for a primary violation such as speeding.
7. Public Carrier/Commercial Vehicle Violations
There is an increased risk to public safety that has been created by the greater size and/or cargo
capacity of many commercial vehicles, which include public service carriers such as buses. Traffic
violations committed by the operators of these vehicles pose a greater risk to all users of the highway
system. Traffic accidents involving public carriers and commercial vehicles are considered to present
more of a risk per accident in injury, death and/or property damage. Officers should consider the
aforementioned factors when deciding on the type of enforcement action they will take.
8. Other Non-Hazardous Violations
Officers should take into consideration whether non-hazardous violations are repetitive or flagrant in
nature when deciding on the type of enforcement action to take. Traffic violation investigations should
be based on a case-by-case basis.
9. Multiple Violations
When an officer observes multiple violations by the driver of a motor vehicle, he/she may cite the
driver for any of the violations they observe or for all violations observed. In the case where the
officer decides not to enforce all of the violations, he/she shall issue a warning, either verbal or written,
to the violator on the less serious infractions.
10. Violations of Newly Enacted Laws and/or Regulations:
Unless public safety is jeopardized, members of the department should allow a grace period before
taking enforcement action on newly enacted legislation or ordinances. Additionally, the same
consideration should be given to motorists in areas of the town where speed limits have changed.
11. Traffic Accident Violations - (see related general order 204.OPR)
When a traffic violation(s) results in or is a contributing factor to a traffic crash, the investigating
officer should summons or arrest, as appropriate, for that violation(s).
12. Pedestrian and Bicycle violations
203.OPR
As we move into an era of alternate modes of community transportation, members of the department
should be aware of traffic law violations committed by both pedestrians and bicyclists. Officers should
appropriately cite or warn pedestrians or bicyclists for observed traffic violations.
13. Seat Belt and Child Safety Seat Enforcement
The wearing of restraint devices whether it is seat belts or child safety seats is proven to be imperative
to the safety of all passengers in a vehicle. The enforcement of traffic laws regarding the wearing of
these safety devices is a priority of this department and all officers are encouraged to strictly enforce
these laws.
K. Special Traffic Problems Procedures:
1. Identification and referral of driver recommended for reexamination to the Division of Motor Vehicles:
During routine traffic law enforcement activities, officers may encounter persons operating a motor
vehicle whom they suspect of being physically, mentally, or visually impaired (not D.U.I. or
D.U.I.D.). In such cases, in addition to whatever enforcement actions the officer may take, the officer
will notify the Virginia Division of Motor Vehicles of these findings or suspicions, giving the violator's
full name, date of birth, operator license number, and a brief description of the disability noted. The
DMV Medical Review Request Form (MED 3 (07/01/2020) should be used for this purpose). The
DMV Medical Review Request Form shall be turned in to the Records Office at the department to be
forwarded to the Department of Motor Vehicles.
2. Pedestrian and Bicycle Safety:
The Chief of Police will review the traffic accident records at least annually to determine what
enforcement actions are needed to provide a proactive pedestrian/bicycle safety enforcement program.
The chief may recommend to officers enforcement measures including steps to:
a. Reduce or eliminate human or environmental factors leading to accidents.
b. Reduce or eliminate the behavior, decisions and events that lead to the accidents.
c. Enforce traffic-way crossing rules and regulations.
AUTHORIZATION:
_______________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
203.OPR
NUMBER June 1, 2012
May 3, 2007
SUBJECT: PROCESSING VEHICLE ACCIDENT SCENES
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of this Department that officers will investigate and accurately report any traffic accident that
occurs within the Town of South Boston. The only exceptions are those accidents that involve State owned
vehicles, which are investigated by the Virginia State Police.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the proper handling of traffic accidents and for the
collection and use of data that will reduce automobile accidents resulting in property damage, injury or death.
III. PROCEDURES: - General
A. Accident report and investigation, general:
1. A police officer shall respond to and prepare a report of accidents, on public or private property,
involving but not limited to any of the following:
a. Death or injury
b. Property damage
c. Hit and run
d. Impairment of an operator due to alcohol and drugs
e. Hazardous materials
f. Any accident involving town property, vehicles, equipment or facilities
g. Disturbances between parties/principals involved
h. Major traffic congestion as a result of an accident
i. Vehicles damaged to the extent that towing is required
(Police officers may be assigned to any other accident, not listed above, to assist persons involved
with information exchange. Time permitting, officers will investigate and report such accidents
for departmental use.)
204.OPR 1
B. Primary responsibility for traffic accident investigation:
1. The South Boston Police Department will have primary responsibility for the investigation of all
accidents within the Town of South Boston.
2. Commercial motor vehicle accidents may require the assistance of a trained Motor Carrier Safety
Inspector with the Virginia State Police to determine what safety problems may have contributed to the
accident.
3. As a courtesy to outside jurisdictions, the investigating officer for all accidents involving non-Town of
South Boston government vehicles shall complete a FR-300.
4. Any incident involving a Town owned or operated vehicle shall be treated as a reportable incident and
an FR-300 shall be completed regarding the incident. The incident shall be investigated by a police
officer who shall, by designation, be in charge of the incident. The accident report shall be forwarded
to the Chief of Police.
C. Responsibilities of officers at the scene of a traffic accident:
1. Administering emergency medical care (basic life support measures) pending arrival of rescue squad.
2. The first arriving officer at the scene of a traffic accident will immediately determine if any person(s)
are injured and request the necessary rescue personnel and equipment if needed. The officer should
attempt to provide first aid as needed within the scope of his/her training.
3. The first arriving officer at the scene of a traffic accident will determine if there are any fire hazards or
hazardous material threats. The officer will notify the Emergency Operations Center regarding any
fire, rescue, or HAZMAT equipment needed and any attempt to extinguish small fires with the issued
fire extinguisher. If hazardous materials are present, the officer will follow the procedures set forth in
the Emergency Response Guidebook for hazardous materials.
4. Other responsibilities of the first officer on scene include:
a. Primary investigating officer unless relieved of that duty by shift supervisor.
b. Requesting assistance from any other officer (to help with other on scene tasks such as traffic
control).
c. Locating witnesses and recording key accident information (license numbers, observation of
damage before vehicles are moved, etc.
d. Expediting removal from roadway of vehicles, persons, and debris (in property damage only
accidents, where possible, get vehicles off roadway immediately to get traffic moving).
5. Other responsibilities of all officers on scene include:
a. Protecting the accident scene.
b. Preserving short-lived evidence (broken parts, skid marks, etc.).
c. Establishing a safe traffic pattern around the scene.
204.OPR 2
D. Determining what reports are required – Reportable or Non-Reportable
1. All accidents will require an exchange of information form to be competed (whether it is the
Department form used in non-reportable accidents or the forms from the accident investigation
field notebook used for reportable accidents). Likewise, all reportable accidents will require the
completion of a FR-300 form and some non-reportable accidents shall require a completed FR-300
form.
2. Reportable and Non-Reportable accidents defined
a. Reportable accidents – are accidents that occur on a public highway and are reported to the
Division of Motor Vehicles (DMV) on form FR-300. The following accidents occurring on public
highways will require the FR-300 to be filled out:
1.) Death or injury to a person,
2.) Total property damage that results in $1,000 or more,
3.) Accidents involving hazardous materials
Note: Section 46.2-373 of the Code of Virginia requires that a law enforcement officer who in the
course of his/her duties investigates a motor vehicle accident resulting in injury or death to a person
or total property damage of $1,500 or more will file an accident report within twenty four (24)
hours of the completion of the investigation.
b. Non-Reportable Accidents – are accidents that occur on all private property whether there is public
access or no public access (e.g. parking lots, driveways, etc.); and vehicle accidents occurring on
public highways that result in property damage of less than $1,500 and no injury. Non reportable
accidents do not require a FR-300 report to be sent to the Department of Motor Vehicles.
1.) Types of reports to be completed for non-reportable accidents:
a.) For accidents that occur on private property where there is a report of injury and/or for hit
and run accidents occurring on private property where the amount of damage is over $1,500
officers are to complete an FR-300. On that FR-300 in the “Location” box after officers
enter in the location of the accident they shall annotate “PRIVATE PROPERTY”. The
completed FR-300 is to be given to the records department.
b.) In cases of accidents that occur on private property where there is property damage only
and for accidents that occur on the highway where there is no injury and the total amount of
damage is estimated by the officer to be under $1,500, non-reportable accident form
(Form 204.OPR (01)) needs to be filled out. A copy of “Form 204.OPR (01)” is to be filled
out and a copy provided to each driver so that each driver has a copy of the other driver’s
information. The original of “Form 204.OPR (01)” is to be given to the Records
Department.
3. It is essential to have accurate location information for the evaluation of accident data.
4. Officers may file charges for offenses found while investigating an accident on reportable and non-
reportable accidents.
204.OPR 3
E. In case of extremely inclement weather where an accident involves only property damage, the dispatcher or
officer may, with the supervisor's approval obtain information over the phone to complete the accident
report (FR 300) and request that the involved parties come to the department and file a report in person
within 48 hours of the incident.
The employee taking the telephonic report shall record the name, address, operator license number, and
telephone number of all involved drivers and shall forward them to the Chief of Police (or his designee)
who will confirm the filing of the required reports.
F. Accident scene information collection:
At the scene of the accident, the investigating officer must gather information concerning the accident for
subsequent use in completing necessary report forms. Information to be collected at the scene may include,
but is not limited to:
1. Interviewing principals and witnesses and securing necessary identity/address information.
2. Examining/recording vehicle damage.
3. Examining/recording effects of the accident on the roadway or off the roadway on other
property/structures, etc.
4. Taking measurements as appropriate.
5. Taking photographs as appropriate.
6. Collecting/processing evidence.
7. Exchanging information among principals.
G. Accident investigation follow-up activities:
1. Follow-up activities which may be necessary include:
a. Collecting of scene data.
b. Obtaining/recording formal statements from witnesses.
c. Reconstructing accidents.
d. Submitting evidentiary materials for laboratory examination.
e. Preparing accident or offense reports to support criminal charges arising from the accident.
2. In a particularly serious accident involving severe injuries, fatalities, multiple vehicles, etc., it may be
necessary to summon expert or technical assistance from photographers, surveyors, mechanics,
physicians, accident crash team specialists, or other specialists. Such expert assistance shall be
requested through the Chief of Police or his designee.
a. At the scene of the accident, the officer may take immediate enforcement action and issue a
Virginia Uniform Summons.
b. At the scene of the accident, the officer may immediately issue a Subpoena for Witness. (Ref:
46.2-939)
204.OPR 4
c. If officer at scene concludes DUI and defendant is still there, DUI arrest should be made before
transport.
d. If the driver is transported to the hospital before the arrival of an officer, and the officer later
concludes DUI, an arrest warrant should be obtained.
e. In other traffic-related investigations, when the officer leaves the scene of the offense and follows
up and later identifies an offender or offense, arrest warrants shall be obtained.
H. Accident scene procedures:
1. Upon the receipt of a report of a motor vehicle accident that requires the services of a police officer,
the officer assigned shall proceed in an appropriate manner depending on injuries.
2. The police vehicle shall not be parked at the scene in a manner that will:
a. endanger other pedestrians,
b. endanger motorists, or citizens, or
c. prevent rescue or fire personnel and equipment from getting to the injured or vehicle involved to
perform there job in the best manner.
The officer should consider using the police vehicle as a shield to protect the scene as well as himself.
3. The officer shall leave his vehicle emergency lights on.
4. The officer shall put on a reflector safety vest before leaving his/her vehicle. Flares are available in
each police vehicle for use in creating an illuminated warning pattern to alert others.
5. In case of danger of fire from leaking or ruptured gas tanks or where there is any major crash of two or
more vehicles where there is any sign of hazardous materials having been transported, the Fire
Department shall be called out.
6. All police vehicles are equipped with a copy of the current emergency response guidebook, which
permits both rapid identification of DOT vehicles, and contains placards for hazardous materials and
gives information concerning the nature of the hazard, emergency procedures, and evacuation
disasters. Any police officer arriving at the scene of such an accident and seeing hazardous materials
placards shall immediately request the Fire Department. The fire chief will assume control of any
scene involving hazardous materials and all officers will provide support as required. Any investigation
of the accident will occur after approval by the fire chief.
7. Virginia Code Section 18.2-324 requires any person removing a wrecked or damaged vehicle from a
highway to remove any glass or other injurious substance dropped upon the highway. Where the
quantity of accident debris is too great for the wrecker operator to do this, the town public works
services shall be requested. The Fire Department will assist in washing down combustible substances.
I. Accidents Involving Police Department Vehicles
1. Members of the Department who are involved in a vehicle accident while operating a Department
vehicle or who have custody of a Department vehicle that is involved in an accident shall be
responsible for immediately notifying a shift supervisor and advising them of the accident location and
nature.
204.OPR 5
2. The notified shift supervisor shall respond to the accident location to evaluate the seriousness of the
accident and determine the length of the accident investigation required.
a. A shift supervisor will complete minor Department vehicle involved accident investigations, but
may request the Virginia State Police to conduct an accident investigation that is believed to
require an extended investigation or if the total property damage exceeds $5,000 and/or a personal
injury is involved.
b. It shall be the responsibility of the investigating supervisor to complete the following forms:
1.) FR-300
2.) Supervisor’s Incident Report
3.) Workman’s Compensation Forms (when applicable)
3. Employees who are involved in a motor vehicle accident while operating a departmental vehicle
outside the Town of South Boston shall request that the investigating agency complete an FR-300. The
employee shall immediately notify a shift supervisor of the incident.
J. Protecting Personal Property of Accident Victims:
1. The officer assigned to investigate an accident will have responsibility to secure and protect the
property of accident victims at the scene of an accident.
2. Generally, accident victim’s personal property will be secured or handled in the following ways:
a. If the victim is conscious and capable of controlling his/her property, such items shall be given to the
victim(s) or turned over to rescue squad personnel in the presence of the victim to accompany the
victim to the hospital.
b. If the victim is unconscious or incapable of controlling his/her property, the investigating officer
shall take custody of the property and turn it in to the Records Department until it can be released to
the victim or his/her designee.
c. Larger items, such as firearms, cameras, electronic equipment, clothing or items likely to be stolen or
damaged if left with the vehicle when towed will be stored in the same section as evidence.
d. If the victim is deceased the officer shall take custody of his/her personal property and store it as if it
were evidence after the scene has been processed. All items of personal property that are on the
deceased (e.g. wallets, large sums of money, expensive jewelry, etc.) will be left in place when the
body is transported to the local hospital emergency room or sent by helicopter to another hospital.
The family member’s information will be annotated on the death scene checklist and the IBR, as
well as, all of the property that was on the deceased. The officer will be responsible for placing any
property seized into evidence storage.
e. The victim’s vehicle and any remaining contents shall be towed and stored in accordance with the
department’s tow policy. Once the towing company takes custody of the vehicle, the vehicle and its
contents become the responsibility of the towing company.
f. When a commercial vehicle wrecks and its cargo is released or becomes unsecured, the investigating
officer shall notify the on-duty shift supervisor who will arrange to secure the scene until the
company who owns the vehicle or their agents can secure and/or retrieve the property.
204.OPR 6
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
204.OPR 7
NUMBER May 3, 2007
May 15, 2004
SUBJECT: TRAFFIC DIRECTION AND CONTROL
I. POLICY:
Officers shall perform traffic direction and control in a uniform manner in accordance to the Code of Virginia
46.2-834, 46.2-1309, and 46.2-1310 and in compliance with this directive.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish uniform procedures for traffic direction and control.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Uniform hand and whistle signals
1. Pursuant to Section 46.2-1309 of the Code of Virginia, officers shall use the following hand signals:
a. To stop traffic by hand, the officer shall stand with shoulders parallel to moving traffic. Raise the
arm(s) to forty-five degrees above the shoulder(s) with the hand(s) extended, palm(s) towards the
moving traffic to be stopped.
b. To move traffic by hand, the officer shall stand with the shoulders parallel to the traffic to be
moved, extend his/her right arm and hand full length at the height of the shoulders towards such
traffic, fingers extended and joined, palm down. The officer shall then bring the hand sharply in
the direction the traffic is to move. Repeat the movement with the left arm and hand to start traffic
from the opposite direction.
1. If the whistle is used, pursuant to Section 46.2-1309 of the Code of Virginia, it shall be used as follows:
a. To stop traffic, the officer shall sound one blast (one long blast).
b. To start traffic, the officer shall sound two blasts (two short blasts).
c. Emergency stop of all traffic, the officer shall sound three or more short blasts. This is a signal for
all traffic to clear the intersection and stop.
B. Special Circumstances
1. At the scene of accidents the primary considerations of traffic direction and control are:
a. Protecting lives and property at the scene.
b. Preventing additional accidents at or near the scene.
c. Protecting evidence at the scene.
205.OPR 1
d. Keeping avenues of approach and exit open for emergency vehicles.
e. Restore the safe flow of traffic as soon as possible.
2. At the scene of a fire, officers are reminded that the senior fire official is in charge of the scene. An
officer dispatched to the scene of a fire should contact fire officials at the scene to determine if there is
any special traffic control considerations. Generally, officers directing traffic at a fire scene shall:
a. Keep vehicular and pedestrian traffic at a safe distance from the fire scene and away from the fire
and rescue apparatus.
b. Keep vehicular traffic from driving over unprotected fire hoses.
c. Reroute traffic, if necessary.
3. During adverse road conditions, it may require several officers and the use of flares, traffic cones,
temporary barriers and/or a variable message sign to reroute traffic. The Department of Public Works
(Town Shop) should be contacted to provide assistance, if necessary, to provide signage and barricade
equipment when adverse road conditions are encountered.
4. During adverse weather conditions, it may present significant problems regarding traffic direction and
control.
a. Adverse weather may affect many roads and streets over large areas. Additional law enforcement
personnel may be required. Sources of additional manpower for traffic control are:
1.) Town of South Boston Police Officers
2.) Animal Control Officer
3.) Town of South Boston Firefighters
4.) Law enforcement personnel from surrounding jurisdictions
5.) Virginia State Police
5. An on-duty shift supervisor shall assess manpower needs during adverse weather conditions and shall
summons the necessary manpower to direct and control traffic where lives and property are in
jeopardy.
6. Officers shall attempt to provide for a safe flow of traffic during adverse weather conditions giving
priority to primary roads.
7. When circumstances warrant manual operation of traffic control devices, officers should notify the
Emergency Operations Center to contact the signal technician and notify them to come out to open the
control boxes and operate the signal. In the event of a malfunctioning signal, the officer will notify the
Emergency Operations Center to contact the signal technician.
C. Use of flares, cones, and other equipment available to place on the roadway
1. Use of temporary control devices
a. Flares should be used during the hours of darkness and during inclement weather when visibility is
poor. Flares may be used during daylight hours, however, they may be less visible than traffic
cones in bright sunlight. Flares shall not be used at any incident where flammable or explosive
liquids or vapors may be leaking, nor shall they be placed near any combustible or explosive
205.OPR 2
material.
b. Traffic cones may be used during daylight hours and whenever there is a fire or explosion hazard.
c. The Department of Public Works (Town Shop) has temporary barricades, cones, lighted and non-
lighted signs, directional signs, and variable message signs that can be used to control and divert
traffic. Assistance should be requested when traffic control will extend over long periods of time
or involve multiple locations, such as special events, adverse weather conditions, disasters, or
major accidents on primary roads.
D. Uniform items / personal equipment to be utilized while directing traffic
1. Uniform – except under emergency conditions, officers shall be in uniform and wear their issued
Departmental hat when directing traffic.
2. Reflective Traffic Vest – officer safety through high visibility requires the wearing of a reflective
traffic vest while performing manual traffic direction and control. If, after arrival, the initial evaluation
of the situation and handling of all immediate emergencies, the officer determines that traffic control is
necessary, he/she will wear the reflective traffic vest to enhance officer safety. The orange reflective
rain coat may be substituted for the vest.
3. Whistle – the whistle may be used if an auditory signal is effective under existing circumstances.
4. Flashlight – when used for traffic direction and control, the illumination cone may be placed on the
issued flashlight. The flashlight shall be used during the hours of darkness and during inclement
weather when visibility is limited.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
205.OPR 3
May 3, 2007
SUBJECT: ESCORTS
I. POLICY:
Escorts of any type are by their nature dangerous especially when the escort involves going through traffic
lights, stop signs, etc.
Extreme caution should be exercised when making escorts of any type. In all escorts the officer should make
sure that all traffic is stopped before entering intersections or making turns into other lanes of traffic.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to provide guidelines for Department members when responding to requests for
motor vehicle escorts.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Funeral Escorts:
The Department may provide escorts for funerals. Requests for funeral escorts should be directed to the
on-duty shift supervisor. Conducting escorts for the family from a residence to the funeral home, church,
or location where initial funeral ceremony is to take place will normally not be conducted except in special
circumstances that must be approved by the on-duty shift supervisor. Funeral escorts as defined in this
general order are those of a funeral procession from the funeral home / church / location of initial funeral
ceremony to the location of burial. Procedures for conducting an escort for a funeral procession include:
1. A marked patrol car will lead the funeral procession with emergency lights activated.
2. When the hearse approaches an officer who is on foot at an intersection, if practical due to traffic and
weather conditions, he / she will come to attention and remove their hat, holding it over his / her heart
until the entire procession has passed.
3. When a funeral is leaving the town, the escorting officer will pull over at the town line or the nearest
spot thereto.
The shift supervisor shall determine if he/she has enough officers to provide a safe escort through the town.
The shift supervisor may call for other sworn personnel to assist with an escort, or may cancel or modify an
escort if there are not enough officers to provide safe coverage. Shift supervisors should make every effort
to assist with these escorts when possible.
B. Escorts of civilian vehicles in medical emergencies:
Officers shall not escort civilian vehicles in medical emergencies. Civilian medical escorts create an
extremely dangerous situation to all persons involved. Officers, when requested to provide such an escort,
206.OPR 1
should notify the Emergency Operations Center to have a rescue unit respond to provide the proper medical
transport.
C. Business / Bank escorts:
Officers may provide business / bank escorts to a location within the town limits as call volume and man
power allow. The shift supervisor will determine the importance of the business / bank escort versus other
non-emergency calls for service at that time. Business / bank escorts may need to wait until other calls for
service are handled and officers are clear from previous assigned tasks. Business / bank escorts will obey
all traffic control devices and drive with the normal flow of traffic. Emergency lights should not be used
during the escort.
D. Escorts for Special Circumstances:
Circumstances will arise that demand a police escort for the safe passage over the highway of oversize
loads, public officials, dignitaries, parades, special events, and hazardous or unusual cargo. In such cases,
the Patrol Lieutenant, or designee, will be notified and provide adequate personnel and resources as may be
necessary to safely escort the vehicle(s) while in the department’s jurisdiction. These types of escorts
should be planned in advance with consideration being given to traveling during non-rush hours and along
routes that will safely handle the vehicle(s) being escorted.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
206.OPR 2
NUMBER May 15, 2017
May 3, 2007
SUBJECT: DRIVING UNDER THE INFLUENCE

ENFORCEMENT PROCEDURES
I. POLICY:
It is unlawful for any person to drive or operate any motor vehicle, engine or train, while under the influence of
alcohol, or while under the influence of any narcotic drug or any self-administered intoxicant or drug of any
nature. The term motor vehicle shall include pedal bicycles with helper motors (Mopeds), while operated on the
public highways of this state (Virginia State Code 18.2-266).
II. PURPOSE:
Various courts have interpreted driving under the influence to mean that the ability to operate a motor vehicle is
reduced or impaired by the consumption of alcoholic beverages or other drugs. It does not imply that the
operator of a motor vehicle is in a state of alcoholic or drug induced stupor or be entirely incapable of
exercising physical control of his vehicle. Driving under the influence of intoxicants is an offense generally
associated with leisure time activity. Consequently, most arrests are made during the evening hours or in the
early morning hours after taverns close or social gatherings end. Although the intoxicated driver may be
observed any day of the week, weekends and holidays reflect an increase of offenses and arrests. The purpose of
this general order is to explain procedures used when encountering a driver suspected of driving under the
influence.
III. PROCEDURES:
Each officer will be alert for suspected DUI offenders, both on patrol and in selective enforcement areas.
He/she will use standardized roadside sobriety tests. In addition, the alco-sensor, if available, will be offered to
each suspected driver. DUI and DUID are serious life endangering offenses. Officers are expected to make
enforcement of these offenses a priority and strictly enforce these laws. Thorough documentation is required
when documenting the investigative process of DUI arrests. To assist with this documentation, officers may use
the DUI Checklist (Form 207.OPR 01).
A. Initial Contact With a Driver Suspected of Being DUI
1. Interview and observe the driver
a. Note any unusual odor, behavior, speech, etc.
b. The driver should be asked if he has any medical problems (physical or mental), is taking insulin
or any other medication that might effect the drivers’ ability to operate a motor vehicle.
B. Sobriety Tests:
1. Officers should administer a minimum of three field sobriety tests if possible from the following list.
Listed below are the most commonly administered tests.
207.OPR
a. Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus (only if properly trained)
b. Nine step walk and turn
c. One leg stand
d. Reciting of alphabet
e. Finger to nose
f. Finger dexterity
Officers may employ additional tests, but they should be performed in the same order and manner
every time. The Horizontal Gaze Nystagmus, Nine Step Walk and Turn, and One Leg Stand should be
given after other commonly used tests and not before.
Officers should keep written documentation of the tests they administer not only on an individual case
basis but also an overall list they can refer to in order to be able to identify how they know a person is
intoxicated based off the results from each test. For each individual arrest officers should use the DUI
Checklist (Form 207.OPR 01) to turn in with prosecution report. As for documentation of specific
tests an officer may use during investigations of DUI offenses officers may use the DUI SFST Log
(Form 207.OPR 02) to log the tests they use for each arrest and keep the form for their own records.
This form should not be turned in as documentation with each arrest.
2. In conjunction with the roadside tests, an alco-sensor will be requested and offered to the operator, if
available (State Code 18.2-267). The operator may refuse the alco-sensor test, and must be advised of
his/her right to refuse.
3. At the officer's discretion or if the operator fails the alco-sensor test, he/she will be arrested for driving
under the influence and taken for a breath test, then before the magistrate.
4. If an officer suspects that the vehicle operator was driving under the influence of both alcohol or drugs,
or drugs alone, he/she may ask for consent from the operator to have a blood test performed after the
breath test. If suspect refuses then an officer should request a search warrant for the blood from the
magistrate. Blood samples will be analyzed by the Virginia Department of Forensic Science for
evidence of alcohol and for various illegal, prescription, and over-the-counter drugs.
5. The officer will make a full written report of the circumstances of the DUI arrest, formation of
probable cause, and witnesses' observations. In addition to the required IBR pages this information
may be documented via the DUI Checklist (Form 207.OPR 01) as mentioned earlier and this checklist
may be submitted to the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office instead of a prosecution report.
B. Arrest:
The arresting officer shall:
1. Advise the arrestee that any person, whether or not licensed by Virginia, who operates a motor vehicle
in this state gives implied consent to have a sample of his/her breath taken for a chemical test to
determine the alcoholic content of his / her blood or for the presence of drugs if such person is arrested
for violation of 18.2-266 within three (3) hours of the alleged offense.
2. If the arrest occurs as a result of operation of a motor vehicle that occurred on private property or the
operation of a moped anywhere, the Implied Consent Law (18.2-268.2) does not apply. This shall not
preclude the arresting officer from attempting to obtain consent from the arrested person to submit to a
chemical analysis of his blood or breath. Officers requesting blood or breath samples under these
conditions are conducting a custodial interrogation. Therefore, the arrested subject shall be advised of
207.OPR
his Miranda warnings before consent is requested.
3. The officer shall make all reasonable attempts to obtain a blood or breath sample. Miranda is not
required before the driver takes sobriety tests.
4. Advise the arrestee that he/she may elect to have a breath sample taken, when available, but not a
blood sample, unless the officer suspects the presence of drugs. It is not a matter of defense that either
test is not available.
5. If the arrestee refuses a breath test, advise him that unreasonable refusal of the test constitutes grounds
for the revocation of the privilege of operating a motor vehicle in Virginia, and that a separate charge
(18.2-268.3) will be placed for which he will have to answer to in General District Court.
6. If he still refuses, the arrestee will be taken before the magistrate who will further advised the arrestee
of the Implied Consent Statute and penalties for refusal. If the arrestee refuses to sign a declaration of
refusal (DGS-24-0l3), which shall be presented to the arrestee at this point, then the magistrate may
sign the form certifying the refusal.
C. Breath Analysis
1. An analysis of a person's breath will be performed by anyone possessing a valid Intoxilyzer license of
the type currently utilized by the Department, issued by the Virginia State Division of Consolidated
Laboratory Services. This may include the arresting officer or anyone participating in the arrest.
2. The type of equipment and the methods used to perform breath analysis will be in accordance with the
regulations of the Virginia State Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services.
3. The testing officer will issue a Certificate of Breath Alcohol analysis (DGS-24-0l5) which will indicate
that the test was conducted in accordance with the manufacturers specifications, the equipment on
which the test was conducted has been tested in the last six (6) months and was found to be accurate,
the name of the accused, the date, the time the sample was taken from the accused, the alcohol content
of the sample, and by whom the sample was examined.
4. The certificate of breath alcohol analysis (DGS-24-0l5) is a three copy form. The forms will be
handled as follows:
a. White copy, original, will be given to the magistrate to be forwarded to the General District Court
along with the VUS and warrant.
b. The second or green copy will be given to the arrested person.
c. The third or yellow copy is for department use and is to be filed with the Records Department.
D. Blood Test Procedure:
1. Obtain consent from the arrested person. In the event the arrested person does not give consent then a
search warrant should be obtained.
2. Take the arrested person to the emergency room at the Halifax Regional Hospital or any other
physician, registered professional nurse, graduate laboratory technician or other technician designated
by order of the Circuit Court acting upon recommendation of a licensed physician, who will withdraw
blood for the purpose of determining its alcoholic content and drugs.
3. The arresting officer will also witness the doctor or technician taking the blood sample and ensure that
an alcohol solvent is not used to cleanse the withdrawal location. The officer will initial the vial labels
(on two vials) before the doctor or technician seals the vials in their containers. The initial will be
207.OPR
placed on the label where it will not interfere with the date written by the doctor or technician who
took the blood sample.
4. The medical person taking the sample will place the name of the medical person taking the sample and
the name of the accused on the label of each vial with the date and time the blood was taken.
5. The arresting officer will take possession of the two vials and seal them in two containers designed to
hold them. The officer shall forthwith mail both vials to the Virginia Department of Forensic Science.
If the Post Office is not open the officer shall keep the blood vials secured until postal services are
available.
E. DUI Accident Investigation:
Officers shall also undertake:
1. Identification of a witness who saw the suspect operating a motor vehicle.
2. Questioning the witness as to the suspect's condition, actions, and statements immediately after the
accident.
3. Establishing a time lapse from the time of the accident to the time of arrest.
4. Questioning the witnesses and the suspect as to what, if anything, the suspect ingested between the
time of the accident and the officer's arrival.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
207.OPR
NUMBER May 3, 2007
N/A
SUBJECT: MOTORIST / STRANDED PERSON ASSIST GUIDELINES
I. POLICY:
Officers of the South Boston Police Department shall stop and render assistance to stranded motorists and other
persons found to be in need of assistance on the streets, roads, and other public areas in the Town of South
Boston.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to establish guidelines for members of the Department to use when aiding and/or
assisting motorists or other persons found to be stranded or in need of assistance.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Emergency Assistance
1. Officers responding to a request for emergency roadway assistance shall summons the appropriate
response to the scene when necessary. Officers should assist with the emergency problem within the
scope of their training and competence, and if necessary may extinguish small fires with their issued
fire extinguisher.
B. General Assistance
1. Officers observing a motorist or others who appear to be in need of assistance or in distress shall stop
and determine what assistance is needed. If the officer is in the process of responding to an assigned
request for police assistance, which makes stopping to render assistance ill-advised, the officer shall
contact the Emergency Operations Center and ask that another unit be dispatched to initiate the
roadway assistance.
2. The Department has tools to assist with the unlocking of car doors but they are to be utilized only in
emergency situations (e.g. child locked inside vehicle, animal locked inside vehicle, or exigent
circumstances at scene). In routine situations where a motorist has locked their keys in their vehicle the
officer may offer to contact a business which can help but an officer may not unlock the door.
3. Officers shall not push or pull any vehicle with a police vehicle.
C. Mechanical Assistance and Towing Service
1. Officers shall not “jump start” any vehicle as it may cause damage to the Department vehicle, e.g. the
electrical and/or radio systems.
2. It shall be the responsibility of the officer to summons whatever assistance the motorist needs, rather
than personally providing that specific service (e.g. changing a flat tire, unlocking vehicle door, etc.).
The officer shall ask the motorist whom they want to be contacted to provide the needed assistance. If
208.OPR 1
there is no preference, the officer shall contact the Emergency Operations Center with the specific
requested assistance, advising that the owner has no preference.
3. Officers shall be aware of the potential danger to motorists who are stranded in hazardous locations on
the highways or streets. If the officer must leave before additional assistance arrives, the officer shall
take steps to reduce the motorists’ risks while in that situation (e.g. setting out roadway flares).
D. Protection for stranded persons
1. Officers who encounter motorists or other travelers who are stranded for various reasons shall render
the appropriate assistance by attempting to contact relatives, friends or when necessary, an appropriate
service agency.
a. Locally there is a voucher program which is sponsored by several local churches. There are several
basic needs (hotel room to spend one night, bus ticket to specific nearby city, one meal, and/or gas
for vehicle) that can be met through the use of these vouchers. If an officer believes that a person is
in need of one or more of these vouchers the officer is to come back to the police department and
look in the voucher log book to see if the person has received any vouchers within the past year
(generally anyone who has used this program within the past year will not be allowed to utilize it
again within a year but a special request may be made). The officer must then verify that the
stranded person does not have any outstanding warrants. The officer should then contact one of the
pastors listed in the log book and apprise him/her of the nature of the person’s problem and what
vouchers he or she needs. Upon approval from the pastor the officer may log the person’s name in
the log book along with what voucher(s) he or she is to receive, which pastor approved the request
and the officer’s name. The officer then needs to remove the appropriate voucher(s) from the log
book and fill them out completely before giving them to the stranded person. If needed the officer
may transport the stranded person to the Days Inn Motel or the local bus station. The voucher
program involves giving a stranded person a voucher for any of the following (it is generally
recommended that no more than two vouchers be given at a time):
1.) One night stay at Days Inn Motel
2.) Bus ticket to Richmond, Roanoke, Norfolk, or Greensboro (NC)
3.) Meal from McDonald’s
4.) Up to $20.00 in gas from Bridgeview Exxon in Town of South Boston
E. Providing direction and information
1. Officers are expected to be knowledgeable about the roadways and points of interest within the Town
of South Boston and should become familiar with the general area of Halifax County. The officer’s
knowledge and familiarity will enable members of the Department to provide both direction and
information to travelers and tourists. While town maps can assist members of the Department in
providing specific directions to any location in the Town; officers should be able to provide general
information regarding major highways and points of interest throughout the area, when the situation
permits.
F. Reporting highway hazards
1. Officers, in an effort to assist persons that travel on the sidewalks, streets and highways of the Town of
South Boston, shall report any hazardous conditions observed to the Emergency Operations Center and
request that such information be forwarded to the town’s Public Works Department, or the appropriate
agency for corrective action.
2. Officers shall investigate road hazards (e.g. missing or damaged roadway traffic signs, debris in the
208.OPR 2
roadway, collapsing pavement, traffic signal light malfunction, etc.) that have been reported by
citizens. The officer shall request that the Emergency Operations Center notify the town’s Public
Works Department, or the appropriate agency of any hazardous condition found.
3. Officers finding a highway hazard that presents a danger to life and/or property shall take the necessary
steps to protect motorists from the hazards by use of:
a. Flares or traffic cones
b. The positioning of a police vehicle
c. Removing debris from the roadway
d. Directing traffic around the hazard
e. Request the Town’s Public Works Department to setup an on site detour
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
208.OPR 3
May 3, 2007
SUBJECT: TOWED, SEIZED & IMPOUNDED VEHICLES /

VEHICLE INVENTORY
I. POLICY:
Members of the Department shall request a motor vehicle’s tow, impound or seizure in accordance with all
applicable statutes of the Code of Virginia, ordinance of the Town of South Boston and provisions of this
directive.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures for the towing and/or storage of unattended, abandoned, impounded or seized vehicles,
and to define the use of proper Department forms to document the police ordered action.
III. DEFINITIONS:
Unattended Vehicles: Any motor vehicle, trailer or semi-trailer that is left unattended on or adjacent to any
roadway and in the unattended condition constitutes a hazard in the use of the roadway.
Abandoned Vehicles: Any motor vehicle, trailer or semi-trailer, or a part thereof that is inoperative and is left
unattended on public property for more than 96 hours or has remained illegally on a public right of way for a
period of more than 96 hours.
Impounded Vehicles: A vehicle, which has been taken into custody by a law enforcement officer for:
evidentiary purpose as the “fruit” or instrumentality of a crime; or when the vehicle is to be held temporarily as
required by statute in cases where persons are arrested for driving after their operator’s license has been
suspended or revoked due to alcohol related violations (Code Section 46.2-301.1).
Seized Vehicle: A vehicle that has been taken into custody by a law enforcement officer, pending forfeiture or
confiscation proceedings and pursuant to various statutes of the Code of Virginia.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. Police Initiated Vehicle Towing (except abandoned or impounded vehicles)
1. The vehicle is:
a. Disabled or unattended and stopped or partially stopped in a traffic lane thus creating a hazard, or
b. Is parked on a public roadway or street blocking egress or ingress to any road, street entrance way
or driveway, or
c. Within 15 feet of a fire hydrant, or
209.OPR 1
d. Obstructing access to garbage or refuse dumpster with the appropriate signage, or
e. Parked in a “no parking”, “no standing”, “no stopping” zone marked with a sign stating towing
enforced, or
f. Parked at any place where official signs prohibit parking, or
g. Illegally parked in a handicapped parking space, or
h. On a public parking lot more than 48 hours with signs posted giving public notice.
2. The vehicle is a recovered stolen vehicle and the owner is unavailable to take possession and after
crime scene processing of the vehicle is completed unless other circumstances dictate otherwise.
3. The driver of the vehicle has been arrested and there is not a licensed operator readily available and
authorized by the operator/owner to remove the vehicle from the scene.
4. The vehicle must be removed from an accident scene, which has occurred on a street, roadway or
adjacent thereto, and the owner/driver or person with security interest in the vehicle is unavailable to
indicate where or by whom the vehicle should be towed. Reporting of this type must appear on the
Accident Report (FR-300).
NOTE: A “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form must be completed in each of the

foregoing instances. The specific purpose for the tow will be listed on the form along
with the conditions for release. Once completed officers are to turn the form into the
Records Department.
B. Unattended Vehicles
1. A motor vehicle, trailer, semi-trailer, or any part or combination thereof that constitutes a hazard by
being left unattended on or adjacent to a roadway may be immediately towed as a hazardous
unattended vehicle. In this instance an officer must complete a “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound”
form and turn it into the Records Department.
2. The property owner or agent may remove abandoned or unattended vehicles illegally parked on private
property. Officers shall not remove or cause such vehicles to be removed from private property, but
at the request of the property owner provide such information as may be needed for the removal.
3. Unattended motorcycles are to be treated as motor vehicles and will be removed and stored by towing
companies.
4. Mini-bikes and mopeds shall be treated as motor vehicles and will be removed and stored by towing
companies.. If found or abandoned, they shall be classified as found property and an IBR completed.
C. Abandoned Vehicles
1. A motor vehicle, trailer, semi-trailer, motorcycle, or moped which has been parked on the side of a
public highway or other public area and does not constitute a hazard but has not been moved in 96
hours may be towed if the officer is unable to locate the owner or after contacting the owner, the owner
refuses to move the vehicle.
a. Virginia Code (46.2-1202) requires that any locality taking custody of an abandoned motor vehicle
will, within 15 days, notify the owner of record and all persons of record having security interests
in the vehicle that the vehicle has been taken into custody. Such notification will be by registered
mail, return receipt requested and shall include the following:
209.OPR 2
1.) Year, make, model, and VIN of the vehicle
2.) Location of the facility where the vehicle is being held.
3.) Inform the owner and person having security interests of their right to reclaim the vehicle
within 15 days of the receipt of the notice, after paying all towing, preservations, and storage
charges.
4.) Inform the owner and persons having security interests that failure to reclaim the vehicle in the
time provided shall constitute a waiver of all rights, title and interest in the vehicle, and
consent to the sale of the vehicle at public auction.
D. Vehicles involved in accidents
1. If a vehicle involved in an accident needs to be towed the officer should see if the operator has a
preference. If the subject does not or is unable to respond due to injuries received the officer should
advise the Emergency Operations Center to contact the next available wrecker on the wrecker list if
there are not exigent circumstances (i.e. vehicle is blocking the roadway and creating an extreme risk of
another accident). If the officer does advise the Emergency Operations Center of a different request
(i.e. wrecker closest to scene) the officer should advise the Emergency Operations Center why he or
she is not using the wrecker list.
E. Impounded vehicles
1. Vehicles may be impounded as evidence in a crime. Vehicles impounded as evidence shall require a
“Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form and the impoundment will be noted on the form. Once
completed the officer will provide a copy of the form to the Emergency Operations Center and give the
original to the Records Department.
a. Whenever possible, vehicles involved directly in the commission of any crime will be processed at
the scene. Severe weather conditions, lack of proper lighting, unruly crowds, etc. may however
prohibit such activity on scene. No vehicle will be towed for evidentiary purposes without the
approval of a supervisor.
b. A vehicle impounded for safekeeping purposes only and no additional forensic work is anticipated,
should be impounded at the storage lot of the wrecker service that towed the vehicle.
c. A vehicle impounded as evidence, which requires forensic work to be performed or to which

access must be restricted, will be secured in the Department’s impound lot. The supervisor on duty
may select another secure location for storage, if circumstances dictate.
d. In the event an officer impounds a vehicle for evidentiary purposes and exposure to weather might
destroy evidence or access must be restricted due to the nature of the case, the vehicle may be
temporarily placed in the contract wrecker service garage.
e. The officer will serve notice of the impoundment to the arrested subject and forward the original
copy to the Records Department. The officer shall also forward the original towing bill to the
Records Department who will see to it that the bill is paid. Any officer releasing a vehicle from
the Department’s impound lot shall ensure that the tow bill is paid back to the town prior to the
release of the vehicle.
f. An officer initiating a vehicle impoundment and storage to the Department’s impound lot will
ensure that the stored vehicle is made secure at the time it is stored in the impound lot.
g. The keys to the vehicles stored at the impound lot will be given to an Evidence Room Technician
209.OPR 3
along with a copy of the tow bill and a copy of the “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form. Any
officer assigned this duty by the Chief of Police will also perform routine checks on the vehicles in
the impound lot to ensure that the vehicles are secure and still in like condition compared to when
they were impounded.
2. Administrative impound of a vehicle is required (Code 46.2-301.1) when an officers arrests or issues a
Virginia Uniform Summons to the driver of the vehicle whose operator’s license, learner’s permit or
privilege to drive has been revoked or suspended for:
a. Driving while intoxicated (Code Section 18.2-266 or Section 46.2-341.24) or a substantially

similar ordinance or law in any other jurisdiction, or
b. Driving after adjudication as a habitual offender, where such adjudication was based in whole or
part on an alcohol related offense, or
c. Administrative suspension under the provisions of Code Section 46.2-391.2.
d. When said owner of the vehicle is not the unlicensed driver of the vehicle, said owner may be
referred to petition the court for release of the impounded vehicle.
3. A rental vehicle that is operated by any person arrested for a violation cited in paragraph 2 (a, b, c) shall
not be impounded. The rental vehicle exception will require the vehicle’s rental company to be notified
to pick the vehicle up at either the stop location or the wrecker service that towed the vehicle.
4. Administratively impounded vehicles shall be held for 30 days (unless reduced by court direction) at
the towing company’s storage facility (Note: when requesting a wrecker for a administrative
impoundment officers shall request a wrecker service with storage capabilities as it will be the
responsibility of the wrecker service to handle storage of the vehicle).
5. Vehicles which are administratively impounded pursuant to Code Section 46.2-301.1, Administrative
Impoundment of Motor Vehicles for Certain Driving While Licenses Suspended or Revoked Offenses
will require a “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form be completed and turned into the Records
Department.
F. Seized Vehicles
Vehicles may be seized, pending forfeiture or confiscation proceedings, pursuant to Virginia Code statutes
as follows:
1. 4.1-339 Provides for the seizure of vehicles used to transport illegally acquired or illegally transported
alcoholic beverages in excess of one quart or one liter.
2. 18.2-110 Provides for the seizure of any vehicle used to transport stolen goods when the value is $200
or more, or to transport any stolen property taken in a robbery. This section also provides for the
seizure of vehicles used in connection with prostitution and pandering offenses, as defined in code
sections 18.2-349, 18.2-355 and 15.2-357.
3. 18.2-249 Provides for the seizure of vehicles used in connection with illegal manufacture, sale, or
distribution of controlled substances (18.2-248), or marijuana (18.2-248.1).
4. 18.2-336 Provides for the seizure of personal property (including motor vehicles) used in illegal
gambling enterprise or activity.
5. 29.1-624 Provides for the seizure of motor vehicles and weapons used in the killing of deer during the
hours of darkness, or used in transporting a deer carcass that was killed during the hours or darkness.
209.OPR 4
6. 46.2-867 Provides for the seizure of vehicles used in any prearranged and organized race on a highway.
7. 46.1-1087 Provides for the seizure of motor vehicles equipped with smoke devices.
NOTE: Vehicles seized pursuant to the above-sited statutes shall be stored in the
Department’s impound lot. A “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form will be
completed and a copy of the form provided to the Emergency Operations
Center while the original is given to the Records Department. In addition the
officer will notify the Asset Forfeiture Coordinator of the seizure and provide
any needed information.
G. Vehicle Inventories
1. An inventory of a vehicle that is being towed is required in the following instances:
a. The vehicle is being stored / impounded as the result of police initiated enforcement activity.
b. No persons are readily available with security interests in the vehicle or the owner / operator is
being taken into custody and does not have another driver readily available.
c. If a vehicle is unattended or abandoned and is locked officers are not required to inventory the
vehicle.
2. The officer ordering, directing or supervising the removal of a motor vehicle shall ensure that an
inventory of the contents of the vehicle is completed, which will be listed on the “Vehicle
Immobilization/Impound” form in the narrative section. If additional space is needed for the inventory
officers may attach a completed list on a standard piece of paper, ensuring that this completed list is
turned into the Records Department along with the form.
3. At the completion of the inventory the officer shall:
a. Determine if discovered valuable articles need to be secured at the police department for
safekeeping.
b. Seize any contraband or evidence of a crime (including “fruits” of the crime and contraband) found
during a vehicle seizure or inventory and secure it appropriately at the police department; and
document the seizure on the “Vehicle Immobilization/Impound” form and on the incident report.
c. Have a supervisor review the completed inventory list.
H. Records
1. The Records Department Supervisor will maintain all records on motor vehicles that have been
removed, stored, or towed, when a member of the Department initiated the action.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
209.OPR 5
CHIEF OF POLICE
209.OPR 6
NUMBER April 30, 2021
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: VIDEO AND AUDIO RECORDING EQUIPMENT
I. POLICY:
It is Department policy to provide the best evidence possible in not only prosecution of cases but in the
documentation of officers’ actions and what officers encounter on a daily basis. The recording of officers’
contacts with citizens and handling of calls for service serves to provide an accurate documentation of events.
To this end the Department provides a wide range of recording devices to include in-house Department
recording system, body worn cameras (BWC), audio recorders, and mobile video recorders (MVR or in-car
cameras).
II. PURPOSE:
To establish policy and procedures for the utilization of video and audio recording equipment by individual
officers, various police units, and in police vehicles.
III. PROCEDURE:
Use of Department recording equipment (general)
A. Department issued recording equipment shall be used only in conjunction with official law enforcement
duties. Department issued recording equipment shall not generally be used to record:
1. Communications with other police personnel without the permission of the Chief of Police
2. Encounters with undercover officers
3. When on break or otherwise engaged in personal activities
4. In any location where individuals have a reasonable expectation of privacy, such as a restroom or
locker room
B. All video and audio recorded with Department issued equipment are property of the South Boston Police
Department. Only personnel designated by the Chief of Police are to have administrative access to the data
for the purposes of deleting or making copies. The Administration Officer(s) shall handle the data created
from MVR’s and BWC’s. Personnel from the Investigations Division shall handle data created from the in-
house cameras.
C. All video and audio data recorded with Department issued equipment will be stored on Department
computers in the manner officers are shown during training on the issued device(s). Whenever possible
officers should make sure that all data from their issued devices is downloaded to the designated computer
by the end of their shift.
D. Use of Recordings for Training Purposes
1. Periodically, Department recording equipment record events that may prove useful as training aids.
210.OPR 1
Therefore, when these cameras record unusual, exceptional or felony incidents and the incidents
recorded are perceived to be of value as a training aid, the following procedures should apply:
a. Members are encouraged to bring to the attention of their supervisor any recordings they feel may
be useful as a training aid.
b. Supervisors should arrange a time to view the recorded incident with the member responsible for
generating the recording.
c. Upon viewing the recorded segment and upon reaching the conclusion that it is of value as a
training aid, the supervisor will request a duplicate recording be made of the incident.
E. Duplication of video and audio recordings from Department issued equipment
1. An officer/Officers assigned by the Chief of Police to oversee the stored digital media generated by
Department issued devices or his designee may duplicate media as requested in accordance with this
policy or as specifically approved by the Chief of Police. If a duplicate is needed, the following steps
shall be followed.
a. Any request made by members of this Department shall be made on a Department form (“Request
Video Recording (Form 210.OPR 01)”
b. Requests from other law enforcement agencies should be made on their official departmental
letterhead and signed by their Department head.
c. Requests from the media or other non-law enforcement agencies or individuals must be forwarded
to the Chief of Police who will direct designated personnel in the matter. All such requests must
be in writing and from persons entitled to view such recordings.
Use of Mobile Video Recording Equipment (MVR or in-car cameras)
A. Operation of Mobile Video Recording Equipment
At the beginning of each shift, the officer shall power up the MVR equipment and determine whether the
equipment is functioning satisfactorily and that the time and date are correct. Any problems with the
equipment initially, or at any time shall immediately be brought to the attention of the on-duty supervisor.
The supervisor shall ensure that the Administration Officer is notified of the malfunction. The shift
supervisor shall periodically inspect the MVR equipment in each of his or her assigned member’s vehicles
to ensure compliance of this general order.
B. Use of the camera system
1. The MVR system shall be activated at the beginning of an officer’s shift and shall remain on until the
officer goes off duty. The system shall remain in stand-by mode and ready for recording until:
a. Emergency lights are activated, at which time the system begins recording automatically
b. Manually activated by the officer
2. Officers using the MVR systems should also activate the wireless microphone every time the
system is in the record mode in order to provide narration with the recording. Officers may utilize
their body warn cameras as an alternative to the wireless microphone.
3. Officers should ensure that the video camera is positioned and adjusted properly to maximize the
scene and the area to be recorded.
210.OPR 2
4. The officer will ensure that the MVR equipment is operating correctly and recording all the time of:
a. Emergency responses (light or lights/siren);
b. Traffic stops – beginning at point of an officer initiating a traffic stop and continuing for the
duration of the stop. Recording will be concluded as the violator drives away;
c. Vehicle pursuits;
d. Vehicle searches;
e. Suspect DUI – beginning, if possible at the point when the officer first observes erratic driving and
concluding when the police action is finished. If field sobriety tests are administered, where safety
permits, the performance of the sobriety test shall be within view of the camera, and;
f. Other enforcement actions.
5. Once the system is recording, it shall continue to record until the completion of the incident. The
officer will manually stop the recording at the completion of each incident.
6. Officers shall not cease the video/audio recording of an incident unless one of the following conditions
exist:
a. The officer receives an order from a supervisor to stop recording;
b. The officer is directing traffic or assisting in some other type of traffic control;
c. The officer is parked behind a disabled vehicle or waiting for a wrecker following an accident
investigation;
d. The officer is providing funeral escort;
e. The officer initiated the recording (when lights not activated) and the incident has concluded.
NOTE: Whenever recording equipment is deactivated, officers shall be prepared to articulate

the reasons for this action.
7. In addition to the above, whenever possible, officers should utilize their MVR equipment to record;
a. Acts of hostility or violence when feasible;
b. A confrontation with a citizen or any violator contact;
c. The circumstances at a crime scene, accident scenes, or other events, such as the confiscation and
documentation of evidence or contraband;
d. During the transportation of prisoners, the in-car microphone should be activated along with the
MVR’s rear facing camera.
8. Officers are prohibited from tampering with or opening the recording deck.
9. Officers are further prohibited from attempting to erase or alter the video recordings.
10. Unauthorized use of MVR equipment or digital media may result in disciplinary
action.
210.OPR 3
C. Care of video equipment
1. The Chief of Police, or designee(s), shall have overall responsibility for the MVR systems. The
assigned officer(s) shall also be responsible for replacing MVR components as needed, inspections of
the MVRs, and scheduled training.
2. Maintenance and repair of the video equipment will be the responsibility of the Chief of Police, or
designee(s).
3. Officers will report all malfunctions of the video equipment to their shift supervisor. The supervisor
will then forward the report of the malfunction to the Chief of Police, or designee(s) who will see to it
that the system is repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
4. Officers will be trained on the usage of the systems during their time in the Field Training Officer
Program or when new equipment is issued.
D. Storage and retrieval of video
1. Patrol vehicles that utilize a MVR store all videos on a card located in the system that is in the
vehicle. Officers are not to access this card. Any maintenance on this card is to be completed by the
Chief of Police, or designee.
2. Each time an officer pulls their car up to the Police Department, if they have any information stored on
the card in the MVR, the information will automatically begin to download to a computer located in the
“Mobile Vision Video Room” of the Police Department. If an officer notices problems with
downloading videos, they need to notify their supervisor as soon as possible.
3. If an officer needs a recording from the system for evidence they shall notify the Chief of Police, or
designee(s) of the request for the recording via a “Request Video Recording (Form 210.OPR 01)”. The
Chief of Police, or designee(s), will make a copy of the requested video, providing it to the requesting
officer and other agencies (ex. Commonwealth Attorney’s Office) when needed. Officers should
annotate on their reports to the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office whenever they have video available
for a criminal case from their assigned Department recording devices or other officers’ Department
recording devices.
4. Due to a limited amount of digital storage space, recorded data from MVR’s will be stored for a
specific period of no less than 3 months. Any recordings deemed evidentiary will be duplicated and
stored as long as required by the Code of Virginia.
Use of body worn cameras (BWC)
A. Each officer shall have a BWC assigned to him or her specifically by serial number. All BWC’s shall be
operated according to manufacturer’s recommendations and Department regulations. Officers shall be
trained in the operation of issued BWC prior to first using it. Additional training may be required at
different intervals to ensure effective use and operation of the equipment.
B. Police personnel shall use only BWC’s issued by this Department. The BWC equipment and all data,
images, video, and metadata captured, recorded, or otherwise produced by the equipment is the sole
property of the department.
C. Officers should inspect and test the BWC prior to each shift in order to verify proper functioning and shall
notify their supervisor of any problems.
D. Officers shall activate the BWC to record traffic stops and accident investigations, foot pursuits, terry stops
210.OPR 4
and pat downs, all vehicle and subject searches (including vehicle inventories) and all law enforcement
related interactions where criminal activity is being investigated.
E. Officers may inform individuals that they are being recorded. Officers have no obligation to stop recording
in response to a citizen’s request if recording is pursuant to an investigation, lawful arrest, lawful search, or
the circumstances clearly dictate that continued recording is necessary. However, if a citizen makes a
request not to be recorded, when appropriate, the officer may honor the citizen’s request if the action(s) the
officer is involved in is not one listed previously. If an officer does turn the BWC off upon citizens request
the officer should verbally document in the recording why they are turning it off prior to deactivation.
F. Officers shall not edit, alter, erase, duplicate, copy, share, or otherwise distribute in any manner BWC
recordings without proper authorization of the Chief of Police or his designee.
G. Storage and retrieval of video
1. BWC’s record video to internal storage in the device.
2. Officers are not able to see any recordings made via a BWC until the data is loaded to a computer in
the “Mobile Vision Video Room”. In order to upload their recordings to that computer, officers must
plug their BWC into designated charging cradles in the Police Department that are connected to that
computer. When possible, this should be done once each shift, if there is video on the BWC. The
“Mobile Vision Video Room” is to be kept locked at all times when not being used by the employee
who is the custodian of all BWC videos and images. If an officer notices problems with downloading
videos they should notify their supervisor as soon as possible.
3. If an officer needs a recording from the system for evidence they shall notify the Chief of Police, or
designee(s), of the request for the recording via a “Request Video Recording (Form 210.OPR 01)”.
The Chief of Police, or designee(s), will make a copy of the requested video, providing it to the
requesting officer and other agencies (ex. Commonwealth Attorney’s Office) when needed. Officers
should annotate on their reports to the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office whenever they have video
available for a criminal case from their assigned Department recording devices or other officers’
Department recording devices.
4. Due to a limited amount of digital storage space, recorded data from BWC’s will be stored for a
specific period of no less than 3 months. Any recordings deemed evidentiary will be duplicated and
stored as long as required by the Code of Virginia.
In house recording equipment
A. The Department has cameras at different location inside the building that are recording at all times. This
in-house system is maintained by the Investigations Division. Most cameras in the building only record
video, however the camera in the interview room does record audio also. Recordings from in-house
cameras are maintained on a digital video recorder (DVR) in the Police Department. These recordings
typically are stored for two months or less due to the amount of storage space needed. If an officer needs a
copy of a recording they should complete the “Request Video Recording (Form 210.OPR 01)” and submit
to the Chief of Police, or designee(s). That request should be turned in as soon as possible since the
recordings on that system are maintained for such a short period of time.
Additional Department issued video and audio recording devices
A. The Department has additional equipment capable of recording video and/or audio that may be assigned to
various officers in the Department to aid in documentation of contacts and incidents. This equipment
includes, but is not limited to, digital video recorders and digital audio recorders. These devices should
only be utilized to record for official law enforcement duties and are typically used by members of the
Investigations Division. Any such equipment used by Department Investigators with the Regional Narcotic
Enforcement Task Force may be subject to the policies and procedures of that Task Force that regulate the
210.OPR 5
use of such equipment.
B. The making of duplicates of data recorded using these additional Department recording devices are to be
done by the officers that are utilizing the equipment.
C. Any data recorded using these additional Department recording devices are subject to Department policies
and regulations on the handling of evidence.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
210.OPR 6
NUMBER October 3, 2022
May 3, 2007
SUBJECT: USE OF RESTRAINTS AND PRISONER TRANSPORTS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department authorizes the use of restraint devices in certain situations where a person
is detained, during times of arrest, and during transportation of prisoners. All arrested or detained persons will
be transported in a safe manner. It will be the responsibility of the transporting officer to transport the prisoner
or detainee in a manner that reasonably protects the safety of the general public, other police officers, the
prisoner or detainee, and the transporting officer. In addition, the transporting officer should minimize the
opportunity for escape.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to provide guidelines for when to use restraint devices, and for the safe transport of
arrested or detained persons.
III. PROCEDURE:
Only members of the department who have been properly trained on the use of restraint devices will be
authorized to use them. Restraint devices shall not be used to punish or inflict pain on a detained person or
prisoner.
A. Types of approved restraints:
1. Handcuffs
a. Generally, handcuffs shall be used when taking a person into custody or transporting a prisoner.
Officers may also use handcuffs on a person that is briefly detained for the investigation of a
serious crime or a possible flight risk. The use of restraints on a detained person should continue
only for as long as is reasonably necessary to ensure the safety of officers and others.
b. Prisoners should normally be handcuffed with both hands behind their back. In situations where
one pair of handcuffs does not appear sufficient to restrain the person or may cause unreasonable
discomfort due to the person’s size, officers should consider alternatives, such as using an
additional set of handcuffs or multiple flex cuffs.
c. Under no circumstances shall a prisoner be handcuffed to a part of the transport vehicle itself (i.e.
protective cage, door post, etc.).
d. Officers shall use the double locking device incorporated in the handcuffs. Double locking reduces
the chance of the prisoner picking the bracelet lock and lessens the opportunity for the bracelet
to accidentally tighten and thereby reduce blood circulation and/or cause nerve damage.
e. Officers may use their discretion on electing to handcuff a prisoner’s hands in front of or to the rear
of their body based upon:
211.OPR
1.) The seriousness and circumstances of the crime that the subject has been arrested for.
2.) The availability of protective cages in the transporting vehicle.
3.) The subject’s state of mind and degree of cooperation.
4.) Physical resistance exerted by the subject.
5.) The condition of the person; such as age, physical size, pregnancy, medical issues, or a
disability.
6.) The subject’s criminal history.
2. Leg Restraints
a. Leg restraints (a.k.a.: leg irons or shackles) may be used for, but not limited to:
1.) Violent prisoners;
2.) Prisoners that an officer reasonably believes are an escape risk;
3.) Transport of prisoners or mental patients over a considerable distance
b. Each marked police car is equipped with a set of leg restraints.
3. Body Belt Restraint
a. The body belt restraint allows the officer to handcuff the prisoner in front yet restricts the
movement of the prisoner’s arms and hands. Normally, this device will be used when transporting
a prisoner a considerable distance.
b. The body belt restraints are stored at the department and available to officers when needed.
4. Flex Cuffs
a. Flex cuffs may be used as an expedient method of restraining multiple prisoners or to place
multiple restraints on violent or combative prisoners. Flex cuffs are a “one-time-use” item and
must be cut off with trauma shears. Officers must leave enough room when applying the flex
cuffs in order to be cut off with trauma shears and to prevent discomfort or injury to the hands or
wrists.
b. Each marked patrol car shall be equipped with flex cuffs and each officer will be issued a pair of
trauma shears.
5. Special Situations
a. Restraint of Pregnant Persons
Persons taken into custody who are known to be pregnant should be restrained in the least
restrictive manner that is effective for officer safety. Leg irons, waist/body belts, or handcuffs
behind the back should not be used unless the officer has a reasonable suspicion that the person
may resist, attempt to escape, injure herself or others, or damage property.
211.OPR
b. Restraint of Juveniles
A juvenile taken into custody under the age of 14 years old should not be restrained unless he/she
is suspected of a dangerous felony or when the officer has a reasonable suspicion that the juvenile
may resist, attempt escape, injure him/herself, injure the officer, or damage property.
c. Restraint of Handicap Persons
The application of restraint devices on a handicapped person taken into custody is governed by the
subject’s physical capabilities, seriousness of the charge, and threat level of the prisoner. When a
handicap person presents no danger of injury to the officer, him/herself, or of escape, then the use
of restraining devices may be inappropriate.
6. Spit Hoods
Spit hoods are temporary protective devices designed to prevent the wearer from biting and/or
transmitting fluids (saliva and mucous) to others. Spit hoods are generally used during the application
of physical restraint and/or during transport when the officer reasonably believes that the person in
custody will attempt to bite or spit.
Officers utilizing spit hoods should ensure that the spit hood is fastened properly to allow for adequate
ventilation and that the restrained person can breathe normally. Officers should provide assistance
during the movement of a restrained person due to the potential for impairing or distorting that
person’s vision.
Spit hoods should not be used in situations where the restrained person is bleeding profusely from the
area around the mouth or nose, or if there are indications that the person has a medical condition, such
as difficulty breathing or vomiting. In such cases, prompt medical care should be obtained. If the
person vomits while wearing a spit hood, the spit hood should be promptly removed and discarded.
Persons who have been sprayed with oleoresin capsicum (OC) spray should be thoroughly
decontaminated prior to the application of a spit hood.
Those who have been placed in a spit hood should be continually monitored and shall not be left
unattended until the spit hood is removed. Spit hoods shall be discarded after each use.
B. Transporting Prisoners and Detainees
The transporting officer is responsible for the safety and custody of the prisoner/detainee. Prior to
transport, each prisoner/detainee shall be searched for weapons, contraband, and tools for escape by, or in
the presence of, the transporting officer. Whenever possible, the protective search should be conducted by
an officer of the same sex as the prisoner.
1. All officers who transport prisoners/detainees will check their police vehicle at the beginning of their
shift to ensure that no contraband or weapons have been left in the vehicle. An Incident Based
Reporting (IBR) report will be filled out for any contraband or weapons found in the vehicle.
2. Police vehicles will be searched for weapons and contraband before and after any prisoner/detainee
transport. An IBR will be filled out for any contraband or weapons found in the vehicle.
3. Police vehicles used for transporting prisoners/detainees shall be inspected at the beginning of the shift
to make sure outer door latches are in working order, and the rear seat door handles and window
controls are deactivated.
4.. Arrested or detained individuals shall be searched for weapons and contraband prior to being placed in
any police vehicle and when being transferred from one police vehicle to another. Never assume that a
previous officer has performed a thorough search.
211.OPR
5. A subject taken into custody should be transported in the back seat of a police vehicle that is
equipped with a protective cage, when available, whether they have offered resistance or not.
Transporting in a vehicle without a cage will be discussed in Section C.
6. The dispatch center will be notified of the starting point of a transport, the number of prisoners being
transported, the time the transport starts, the destination of the transport, and the time the transport
arrives at the destination. Officers will also give the starting and ending mileage for transports of adult
prisoners of the opposite sex, and for any juvenile. The dispatcher will enter the information under the
incident number for documentation along with the radio traffic being recorded.
C. Positioning of prisoners in a transport vehicle
1. When conducting prisoner transports officers should transport subjects with a department vehicle that
is equipped with a protective cage, sitting the prisoner in the back seat on the passenger side. If two
prisoners are to be transported in a vehicle with a full protective cage, officers should consider the
type of offense(s) the subjects are charged with, the subjects’ demeanor, and the ramifications of the
suspects communicating with one another. No more than two prisoners will be transported in a
department vehicle with a protective cage.
2. If a department vehicle not equipped with a protective cage is utilized to transport a prisoner, because
a vehicle with a protective cage is not available, the following positions should be utilized. Officers
shall consider the nature of the offense, the subject’s attitude and demeanor, and the subject’s physical
capabilities.
a. If only one transport officer, the prisoner shall be seated in the front passenger seat. One transport
officer shall not attempt to transport more than one prisoner in a vehicle without a protective cage.
b. When there are two officers to transport one prisoner, the prisoner will be seated either:
1.) In the front passenger seat with the second officer seated in the rear seat behind the prisoner;
or
2.) In the right rear seat with the second officer seated in the left rear seat behind the driver.
c. Two officers shall be required when two prisoners are transported in a department vehicle not
equipped with a protective cage. The assisting officer shall sit to the rear of the operator and have
the prisoners to his right.
3. When an officer is transporting an abusive, combative, physically resistive subject, or multiple

Subjects, the officer shall utilize a department vehicle that is equipped with a cage.
a. At no time will co-conspirators, who must be kept separate for interrogation purposes, be
transported in the same police vehicle.
b. Males and females and multiple combative subjects will be transported separately.
D. Control of prisoners while transporting
1. When transporting a prisoner, the transporting officer will keep visual contact, as much as feasible
under the circumstances.
2. The use of lavatory facilities should not normally be required between the point of arrest and the
booking/detention facility. In some instances, such as mental health transports or extraditions from
other locations, the officer may have to stop at a facility to accommodate the prisoner. The prisoner
211.OPR
should not be allowed in the facility with another person. The officer should ensure that there are no
escape routes within the facility and that there are no potential weapons available to the prisoner. If the
prisoner is of the opposite sex, the officer should first inspect the facility to make sure there are no
weapons, contraband, or obvious means of escape. The officer should also place leg restraints on the
prisoner to prevent escape.
3. When an officer is transporting a prisoner from another jurisdiction to South Boston and the officer
finds it necessary to stop for a meal, he/she should place the prisoner in leg restraints and shall utilize
extreme caution as to prevent a prisoner escape.
4. Generally, the transporting officer should not allow prisoners to communicate with other people while
in transit unless the situation is such that verbal exchange is necessary. The officer should utilize good
judgment when permitting conversation to take place between the prisoner and another.
E. Procedures at receiving facilities (i.e. jail, mental health facilities, etc.)
1. Officers transporting prisoners to a facility (i.e., jail, mental health facility, etc.) shall follow the rules
at the receiving facility in regards to storage of weapons, ammunition, and the receiving of prisoners.
2. An officer who has a subject in custody shall remove and secure his/her firearm in a lockbox while
processing (fingerprinting) a prisoner at the department.
3. Restraining devices will be removed from a prisoner only when directed to do so by a person in
authority at a receiving facility, and when the officer is sure that the prisoner is properly controlled and
secure.
3. The transporting officer shall advise the receiving agency personnel of any potential medical or
security hazards with the prisoner.
5. The proper paperwork (i.e. jail committal form, emergency custody order (ECO), temporary detention
order (TDO)) will be submitted to the proper person at the receiving facility and when procedure
requires, the officer shall ensure that proper signatures are obtained on the paperwork to be returned to
the Police Department.
F. Transporting juveniles / prisoners of the opposite sex
1. No child under the age of eighteen will be transported in the same vehicle with an adult who is
suspected or charged with a criminal act.
2. Juveniles, under 13 years of age, will not be transported in the front passenger seat of a police
vehicle that is equipped with a passenger side air bag under any circumstance.
3. Whenever an officer transports a subject of the opposite sex or any juvenile subject, the transporting
officer shall first notify the dispatcher of the subject being transported and provide:
a.) Beginning mileage and time;
b.) The starting point and ending destinations; and
c.) The mileage and time when arriving at the destination.
4. Male and female prisoners will be transported separately.
G. Mentally ill prisoner / patient transport
1. A patrol vehicle with a rear protective cage should be used to transport a mentally ill prisoner or
211.OPR
patient.
2. Mental patients will be handcuffed while being transported to the Sentara Halifax Regional Hospital
when the officer reasonably believes the use of restraint is necessary for the safety of the officer,
the mental patient or another person. When a mental patient / prisoner is being transported to facilities
outside of the town limits, mental patients / prisoners will be handcuffed at all times along with the use
of additional restraints (i.e. body belt restraint and leg restraints).
H. Handicapped prisoner transport
1. When transporting a handicapped prisoner, the transporting officer shall, if needed, request
additional assistance in order to ensure that the transport will be completed in a manner that is safe
for both the officer and prisoner. Depending on the type of handicap and what the situation dictates,
the officer should notify a shift supervisor to determine other options for handicap transport.
2. When the handicap person presents no danger of escape or injury to the officer, the use of
restraining devices may be inappropriate. The officer shall determine what, if any, restraint device will
be used at the time of the transport from the subject’s physical capabilities, the seriousness of the
charge, and the threat level of the prisoner.
I. Sick, injured, or communicable disease prisoner
1. If an officer observes that a person is injured or ill prior to an arrest, the officer will immediately obtain
medical attention for the person. If there are no exigent circumstances that require immediate custody,
the officer should review the circumstances with a supervisor and the magistrate for the appropriate
action. The officer should document the illness/injury and whether the person accepts or refuses
medical treatment in an IBR report. Pictures should be taken by the officer of any reported injuries and
included in the IBR report.
2. If a prisoner becomes sick or is injured after an arrest, the arresting/transporting officer will
immediately obtain medical attention for the prisoner. The arresting officer will notify their supervisor
and be required to make documentation in an IBR report. The incident will include the circumstances
around the incident and if the person accepts or refuses medical attention. Pictures should be taken by
the officer of any reported injuries and included in the IBR report.
3. Any time an officer arrests or takes into custody a subject who is injured or who complains of an
injury at any time during the arrest, the officer will notify their supervisor. If force had to be used
at any time during the arrest/detention then the reported injury will be listed on the use of force
report in addition to the IBR report. Pictures should be taken by the officer of any reported injuries
and included in the IBR report.
4. Whenever a prisoner/detainee/patient is suspected of having or carrying a communicable disease or

presents an obvious health risk to an officer, the arresting, assisting and/or transporting officer will take
the necessary precautions as set forth in the communicable diseases general order (311.PER). Any
department personnel who may have had contact/exposure with a subject who has a possible or known
communicable disease, should report the incident to the shift supervisor and document the events in an
IBR report, a supervisor’s incident report, and, if needed, a worker’s compensation report.
5. When bodily fluids are spilled in Department vehicles immediate disinfection procedures are required.
Employees shall notify their supervisor of the spill and arrange for a thorough cleaning of the vehicle
as soon as possible.
a. All police vehicles will be cleaned with disinfectant as part of a routine, scheduled washing and
maintenance check.
b. Clean up of blood and body fluids is recommended with regular household bleach diluted in 1 part
211.OPR
bleach to 10 parts water.
J. Medical Facility Prisoner Transport
1. An officer who transports a subject in-custody to a medical facility for examination or treatment shall
notify his immediate supervisor of such transport. The transporting officer shall request any additional
assistance that may be needed to control the prisoner and thereby reasonably protect the safety of the
persons at the medical facility, transporting officer, and the prisoner.
2. The officer in charge of the prisoner shall cooperate with the treatment facility personnel and provide
such information as necessary for the proper treatment of the prisoner.
3. A prisoner will remain in a restraint device while at the treatment facility. The restraint may be
removed if deemed necessary and the officer in charge determines the prisoner is not a security risk at
the time.
4. If a prisoner has to be admitted to a hospital or other treatment facility, the officer should discuss the
matter with their supervisor and notify the magistrate and/or Commonwealth’s Attorney to determine
whether the prisoner can be released from custody pending discharge from the medical facility.
a. If a prisoner cannot be released from custody pending discharge from the medical facility, then
notifications must be made through the chain of command to arrange for the prisoner to be
guarded.
b. If a committal order was issued prior to the transport to the medical facility, the Halifax Blue
Ridge Regional Jail will be notified to have a corrections officer take custody of the prisoner from
the officer at the medical facility.
K. Lengthy transports / Extradition
1. If a prisoner is to be transported over a long distance which may require being restrained for an
extended period of time, the transporting officer should utilize alternate available restraint devices in
order to make the prisoner as comfortable as possible, but at the same time not lessen the officer’s
control over the subject (i.e. handcuffs using a body belt restraint and leg restraints). The officer shall
consider the criminal history of the prisoner, nature of the offense, and perceived threats to the safety
of the officer and public.
2. Extradition involving commercial airlines
Some commercial airlines restrict the use of handcuffs or other prisoner restraint devices on board
their commercial aircraft. Therefore, nothing in this policy shall be interpreted to be in conflict with
F.A.A. or carrier airline procedures. Escort officers shall comply with all F.A.A. regulations and the
carrier airlines rules concerning the transport of prisoners aboard commercial airlines.
L. Escape of a prisoner
1. If an escape occurs within the Town of South Boston, the transport officer will immediately notify the
Emergency Operations Center (EOC) and a shift supervisor. The shift supervisor shall assume
command efforts to recapture the escapee and notify the chain of command.
c. The transporting officer will notify the EOC of the incident, the location, a physical description,
direction of travel, and request any assistance needed.
d. The transporting officer shall authorize the EOC to give out a BOL describing the escapee,
location of escape, direction of travel, and offense(s) in which the escapee is charged.
211.OPR
2. If an escape occurs outside the Town of South Boston, the transport officer(s) shall:
a. Immediately notify the law enforcement agency for that jurisdiction and request their assistance.
b. Notify the Halifax EOC and the South Boston Police Department shift supervisor.
c. If in close pursuit and has radio contact with the EOC, the officer may pursue and arrest an
escaped prisoner anywhere in the Commonwealth of Virginia (19.2-77, Code of Virginia).
e. Assist officers from the jurisdiction of the escape in the initial recapture efforts and any reports
that need to be filed.
3. Any officer(s) from whom a prisoner escapes shall submit an IBR report explaining the circumstances
of the escape prior to going off duty.
AUTHORIZATION:
_____________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
211.OPR
NUMBER February 24, 2023
May 15, 2017
SUBJECT: TRAFFIC SPEED ENFORCEMENT
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of this agency that each radar operator follows the operational guidelines set forth by the Code of
Virginia and the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures and guidelines for the operation of speed measuring devices
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Speed Enforcement:
1. Radar:
a. Radar shall be operated by officers who have successfully completed a Department of Criminal
Justice Services and departmentally approved police radar operators training course.
b. The radar unit must be properly installed in the vehicle and connected to the appropriate power
supply.
c. Radar, when used in moving mode or stationary mode, will be checked for accuracy by the
operator, with the tuning forks provided, before and after each shift (checking after each traffic
stop
is encouraged). When checking the radar, the operator will also check the following:
1.) Internal circuit test
2.) Light segment test
3.) 35-MPH tuning fork in the stationary mode
4.) 65-MPH tuning fork in the stationary mode
5.) Both tuning forks in the moving mode
6.) A speed verification test with their radar unit utilizing their vehicles speedometer prior to any
speed enforcement action.
If the radar fails to pass the test for accuracy or if it fails to perform satisfactorily, it shall be
removed from service and written notification will be made to the appropriate supervisor
containing the unit identification number, assigned police vehicle number, and a description of the
problem.
212.OPR
d. The radar unit should be operated while the officer is on patrol except during adverse weather
conditions ( heavy rain or snow), unsafe conditions, or at a supervisor's direction.
e. To ensure accuracy, tuning forks used to calibrate radar units will be calibrated every six months.
Vehicle calibrations are conducted every six months on department issued vehicles used for speed
enforcement not equipped with a radar unit. The chief of police, or his designee, shall be
responsible for maintaining certificates of accuracy and maintenance records on all equipment.
The Certificate of Tuning Fork Accuracy and a Certificate of Speedometer Calibration Sheet, shall
be kept by the General District Court, Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court, Circuit Court and
by the department.
f. The antenna (RF head assembly) of the radar, when used in stationary mode, will be placed so that
the path of the radar beam is unobstructed over the effective range of the instrument. The antenna
shall be positioned so that consistent and stable readings will be displayed when vehicles pass
through the area covered by the beam.
g. The automatic lock, manual lock, and highest speed lock features on the radar until will not be
used when the speed of a violator is displayed or while the radar is being used for enforcement
purposes.
h. Positive identification of a target vehicle and visual confirmation of the speed displayed by the
radar is imperative. Whenever a doubt arises concerning the correct speed or identification of a
vehicle that is checked by radar, the case should be handled as any other case where the evidence
is insufficient to warrant an arrest.
i. Care should be exercised when handling and transporting the radar devices. Display units will be
left on the dash of each patrol vehicle and antennas will be secured in dry locations.
j. Any summons issued for speeding should reflect the exact speed indicated by the radar. If a
summons is issued as the result of a speed checked by radar, it should reflect whether the radar
was in stationary mode or moving mode (Ex. Speeding 42 mph in 25 mph zone (S radar);
Speeding 42 mph in 25 mph zone (M radar)). Officers should follow the training guidelines for
speed tolerance.
k. In court, officers must establish the following elements of radar speed enforcement actions:
(1) The time, place, and location of the vehicle, the identity of the operator, the speed of the
vehicle, the visual and radar speed check.
(2) Officer qualifications and training in use of radar.
(3) Proper operation of radar unit.
(4) The unit was tested for accuracy before use and after use by an approved method.
(5) Identification of the vehicle.
(6) Speed limit in the zone in which the officer was operating and where the signs were posted.
(7) The chief of police, or his designee, is responsible for the proper care and upkeep,
maintenance, and calibration of radar units, calibration of speedometers, maintenance of
records, and ensuring appropriate certificates are filed with the clerks of general district,
juvenile, and circuit courts. Calibrations shall be documented on the “Certificate of Accuracy
Speedometer Calibration” (Form 212.OPR (01)).
B. Vehicle Pace Method of Speed Enforcement
212.OPR
1. Officers who take enforcement action in the moving mode without the assistance of radar shall
observe the excessive speed infraction, pace the speeding vehicle and make an independent
estimate of the vehicle’s speed that is displayed on the police vehicle’s calibrated speedometer.
2. The officer, keeping pace with the speeding vehicle, shall compare his independent visual speed
estimate with the speed that is displayed on the police vehicle’s calibrated speedometer.
3. The officer may initiate enforcement action when the calibrated speedometer reading confirms
the officer’s independent visual estimate of the speeding violation.
4. Officers shall not take enforcement action when their patrol vehicle is not equipped with a
calibrated speedometer.
C. Radar Detectors
1. Virginia Code Section 46.2-1079 makes it unlawful for any person to operate a motor vehicle on
the highways of the Commonwealth of Virginia when the vehicle is equipped with a radar
detector.
2. An Attorney General’s Opinion rendered June 13, 1978, identifies the minimum action that
should be taken by the police officer that observes a radar detection device in a motor vehicle
being operated on the highway in order to prove his or her case. These actions include the
following:
a. Determine if the radar detection device has a power source at the time of the offense (i.e.,
adapted cigarette lighter or other electrical connection).
b. Determine that the radar detection device was readily accessible for use by the driver or any
passenger in the vehicle (not disabled operationally or locked in a trunk or elsewhere
unavailable for use).
c. Plug the detector into the power source and determine that it is activated.
d. Test the device in front of radar at the scene to determine that the radar activates the detector
device (NOTE: The officer should also record the make of the radar detector and the serial
number prior to returning it to the vehicle operator).
e. Present the foregoing proof along with any other pertinent facts necessary to establish that
the accused operated a motor vehicle equipped with a device to detect police radar that is
used for measuring the speed of motor vehicles.
All officers should follow the above radar detector procedure when enforcement action is taken
for violation of Virginia Code Section 46.2-1079.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
212.OPR
May 15, 2004
SUBJECT: USE OF INTERVIEW / INTERROGATION ROOM
I. POLICY:
Interviews and interrogations are an important process in the handling of investigations. A room in the police
department facilities is designated specifically for this purpose. This room is equipped with video and audio
surveillance for the purpose of documenting interviews and interrogations at the discretion of the officer.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to provide guidelines for the use of the Interview/Interrogation Room.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Security of the Interview/Interrogation Room:
1. To address the protection of Department personnel and the safety of arrestees, suspects, or prisoners
the Interview/Interrogation Room shall be searched before and after use. In addition, the
arrestee/suspect/prisoner being interviewed or interrogated shall be searched before being brought into
the room. The search or preparation of the room should include a survey of the items available in the
room which would enable the suspect to lock himself/herself in the room when left alone. Officers
should also check the adjoining restroom.
2. Under no circumstances will the Interview/Interrogation Room be used as a holding room.
3. Juveniles that are being detained for any reason shall be kept under constant observation, even if the
detention period is brief and they are simply going to be released to their parents after the interview.
4. An arrestee/prisoner/suspect’s handcuffs and/or shackles may be removed during the interview or

interrogation, however when a subject is left alone there must be a constant monitoring of the room
and subject at all times through visual and/or video technology. Also, while in the
Interview/Interrogation Room an arrestee/prisoner may be handcuffed to the bar attached to the desk in
the interest of officer safety.
a. When an interview/interrogation subject is left alone in the room, Department personnel must
remain in close proximity of the room and be readily available to intervene immediately on behalf
of the subject or the agency.
5. The only weapons allowed in the room are duty weapons worn by the officers conducting the
interview/interrogation.
6. Only authorized persons who have been properly trained in the contents of this general order are
permitted to use the Interview/Interrogation Room.
213.OPR 1
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
213.OPR 2
May 28, 2009
SUBJECT: SCHOOL RESOURCE OFFICER PROGRAM
I. POLICY:
The School Resource Officer (SRO) is, first of all, a sworn law-enforcement officer. The officer’s central
mission is to keep order on campus with the legal authority to arrest, if necessary. Order is necessary for
learning to occur. When necessary, the School Resource Officer has the ability to intervene as a law-
enforcement officer. Once order is restored, however, the SRO’s other roles as a teacher, liaison, and positive
role model are the more typical roles on a day to day basis.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to establish guidelines for the selection of School Resource Officers and to
define the SRO role.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. School Resource Officer – SROs use a community-policing approach within the school environment, the
school becomes the officer’s beat – the “community” in which he/she works. The SRO is not only familiar
with the school’s physical layout, but is also knowledgeable about its social environment – where there are
potential conflicts, who belongs on campus and who doesn’t – and is able to anticipate and intervene early
in potential incidents.
In addition SRO’s recognized law enforcement role, the SRO shall be able to explain the law enforcement
role in society, as a resource with respect to delinquency prevention, provide guidance on ethical issues in a
classroom setting, and provide individual counseling to students.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. Selection of School Resource Officers
1. The selection of the officer is the most critical aspect of the SRO Program. The Captain and Patrol
Lieutenant shall recommend officers, for the approval of the Chief of Police, who have demonstrated
the ability, interest, and skills necessary to work with youth, school staff and the public. The following
criteria should be considered when selecting officers for the SRO program:
a. Police Officer with at least one year of law enforcement experience.
b. Ability to work with diverse groups.
c. Knowledge of Department’s resources.
d. Creative problem solving skills.
214.OPR 1
e. Conflict resolution skills.
f. Knowledge of Juvenile Code and Juvenile Court procedures.
g. Supervisory recommendations from their shift supervisors.
2. The assignment of the SRO shall be at the discretion of the Chief of Police. The supervision of the
SRO Unit shall be under the patrol Lieutenant.
B. School Resource Officer Training
The SRO shall receive appropriate training to accomplish the community – policing role within the school
environment. The training should include, but not be limited to:
1. DCJS coordinated School Resource Officer Course
2. Class Action Training Program
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
214.OPR 2
March 27, 2014
SUBJECT: INVESTIGATIONS – PRELIMINARY AND FOLLOW-UP
I. POLICY:
The primary purpose of an investigation is to determine if a crime has occurred and if a crime has been
substantiated to collect facts leading to the identification, arrest and conviction of an offender and to organize
and present the facts for a successful prosecution. The single most important criterion, which determines a
successful investigation, is correctly obtaining and handling information supplied by a victim or a witness after
the crime. The Department expects officers to treat investigations as a skill developed through training and
experience, a skill that demands intelligence, logic, and discipline.
Patrol officers should seek to improve their investigative skills and to develop techniques of interviewing and
obtaining evidence since they will conduct most misdemeanor investigations almost exclusively.
In felony cases, the patrol officer can perform many time consuming tasks. This would allow an
investigator/supervisor more time to concentrate on the more specialized phases of the investigation.
Often times, the information that the patrol officer obtains as well as the evidence he/she discovers and protects
are instrumental in directing the investigator/supervisor to a successful conclusion of the case.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for the general conduct of preliminary and follow-up investigations.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. General
Preliminary investigation begins when the first officer arrives on the scene of a crime (or a citizen’s request
for help) and continues until a specialized investigator intervenes or the patrol officer conducts the follow-
up investigation.
In cases where a shift supervisor determines that an investigator is needed at the crime scene the shift
supervisor will make contact with the investigator that is on call. Should no investigator be listed with
dispatch for being on call or the on call investigator is unavailable the shift supervisor shall make contact
with the Investigations Unit supervisor.
B. Preliminary Investigation
Officers who first arrive at a possible crime scene must use caution and take care not to enter hastily. The
crime scene may pose a threat to the officer: an armed suspect may still be at the scene; toxic chemicals or
infectious materials may be present; or evidence may be destroyed if the officer enters. When practicable,
officers shall first note the total environment of the scene including for example, whether doors and
windows are open or closed, lights on or off, presence of odors, and the condition and circumstances of the
victim.
215.OPR
1. After forming an impression of the entire scene and ensuring that no threats exist, the officers shall
proceed with the preliminary investigation which consists of, but is not limited to, the following
activities:
a. Providing aid to the injured.
b. Relaying all immediate and necessary information to dispatch.
c. Defining the boundaries of and protecting the crime scene to ensure that evidence is not lost or
contaminated. Erect barricade tape, rope, or cordon off the immediate crime scene.
d. Initiate the documentation of crime scene activities with a crime scene log. The log shall record
the name, time and reason that any person enters or leaves the crime scene, time and person
making a request(s) for special assistance, the arrival and departure of the requested special
assistance, etc.
e. Noting any alterations to the original crime scene because of emergency first aid assistance, the
immediate necessity to handle evidence, or the actions of witnesses, victims, or suspects at the
scene.
f. Determining if an offense has actually been committed and, if so, the exact nature of the offense.
g. Determining the identity of the suspect(s) and making an arrest if it can be accomplished either at
the scene or through immediate pursuit.
h. Furnishing other officers with descriptions, method, and direction of flight of suspect(s), and
other relevant information concerning wanted suspects or vehicles.
i. Canvassing the immediate and neighboring areas to identify and interview victims, witnesses or
suspects and to locate other crime scene related information.
j. Interviewing victims, witnesses, and, when appropriate, suspects.
k. Collecting evidence: unless exigent circumstances exist or a supervisory officer so orders,

officers conducting a preliminary investigation shall not collect evidence at major crime scenes.
When appropriate, officers shall gather and document evidence, taking care to maintain the chain
of custody.
l. Recording statements from the victim, witnesses, and suspects.
m. Arranging for follow-up surveillance of the crime scene, if appropriate.
n. Documenting pertinent conditions, events, and remarks in field notes. Accurately and completely
recording all pertinent information on the prescribed report forms.
o. Provide victims and witnesses with victim-witness coordinator information.
2. Witnesses:
a. After restoring order at the scene of a crime, the police officer should separate all witnesses
immediately and instruct them not to discuss the case with anyone. This will prevent witnesses
from being influenced by different versions of what took place.
215.OPR
b. The officer shall record the names and addresses of all persons present at the scene when he/she
arrives as well as those of all persons known to have been there but who have departed. It is best
to obtain brief general statements from a couple of witnesses, and then the correct names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of others. In order to properly identify all witnesses in the
officer's notes and reports, the following should be adhered to:
1.) Name must be correctly spelled.
2.) Telephone numbers and addresses must be accurate.
3.) Business telephone number, if witness is employed.
4.) Apartment number, floor, the location (front or rear) should be obtained if the witness lives in
a large multi-family dwelling.
5.) Verify all names and addresses by comparing them with some type of identification paper or
card.
c. The Supreme Court has addressed the issue of eyewitness identifications in numerous cases and
set forth guidelines to be followed when eyewitness identifications are solicited by officers.
d. One-on-one identifications have been held constitutional so long as the period of time between the
offense and the identification is brief. Less than three hours would be a reasonable amount of time.
3. Other information that needs to be recorded is as follows:
a. Time of arrival at the scene.
b. Weather conditions.
c. Approximate time of the crime.
d. Approximate time the crime was discovered.
e. Correct identity of other officers present.
f. Any spontaneous or chance remarks relevant to the case.
4. Protection and collection of evidence:
a. Ensure that the scene has been processed and evidence collected if needed.
b. If the scene needs to be preserved for off-duty personnel such as an investigator, Chief of Police,
or arson investigator who are responding to the scene, make sure that it remains secure and no
evidence disturbed.
c. Note all conditions, events, and remarks which had not previously been recorded.
d. Record data about physical evidence found at the scene.
e. Rough sketch of crime scene.
C. Continued Investigation (prior to completion of preliminary)
215.OPR
1. Patrol officers shall conduct the initial stages of all preliminary investigations, unless a supervisor
requests an investigator or the case originates in the Investigations Unit. In certain serious crimes
investigators shall assume responsibility for completion of the investigation.
2. Photo line-ups:
When conducting photo line-ups, Department policy shall be followed as outlined in the agency’s
eyewitness identification policy.
3. Line-ups:
When conducting line-ups, Department policy shall be followed as outlined in the agency’s
eyewitness identification policy.
4. Supervisory responsibilities
The on-duty supervisor shall ensure that an adequate and complete preliminary investigation has been
made and shall review, screen, and approve the officer’s preliminary report. Screening shall include a
review of the facts to ensure that all essential information is included, along with legibility, clarity, and
completeness. Supervisors shall review, approve, and sign IBR’s.
a. Supervisors shall limit access to crime scenes to those persons immediately and directly connected
with the investigation. This rule applies to other officers of the Department, other agencies, or
members of the community, regardless of rank or position.
b. The supervisor may authorize an officer’s request to call-out an investigator and/or a certified
forensic technician, if appropriate. Requests for a forensic technician shall be approved
through the appropriate Investigations Unit supervisor.
c. The supervisor may enlarge the preliminary scene if necessary by assigning officers to canvass the
area for possible witnesses or suspects.
D. Citizen Complaints for the Magistrate on Felony Offenses
There are cases when citizens decide to attempt to gain a felony warrant(s) by contacting the
magistrate directly prior to reporting the criminal offense to law enforcement. As a result, the
magistrate is required per Code of Virginia 19.2-71 and 19.2-72 to have a law enforcement officer or
Commonwealth Attorney give written permission before the felony warrant(s) can be issued. In cases
of this nature, the officer should conduct a thorough investigation of the offense as they would in any
other type of reported incidents.
E. Follow-Up Investigations
1. There are certain serious offenses for which follow-up investigations shall be conducted by an
investigator unless the Investigations Unit supervisor and the on-duty patrol supervisor direct an
officer to conduct the follow-up investigation. Those offenses include:
a. Homicide
b. Major sex offenses:
1.) Forcible rape
2.) Forcible sodomy
215.OPR
3.) Child sexual assault requiring immediate medical treatment or placement
c. Child abuse requiring immediate medical treatment or placement
d. Kidnapping/abduction
e. Missing person
1.) Under age 12
2.) Any age where foul play is suspected
f. Robbery involving aggravating factors
g. Felonious assault with extenuating circumstances
2. Officers who conduct preliminary investigations of the above offenses shall notify their supervisor
and contact the Investigations Unit supervisor for the appropriate personnel assignment.
3. Occasionally, additional investigation will be required at the end of the tour of duty of the assigned
officer. In these cases, the on-duty supervisor shall determine whether the investigation shall be
discontinued until the assigned officer’s next tour of duty, the assigned officer shall remain over to
continue the investigation, or assigned to the next available officer or an investigator.
4. Except where the investigation may be jeopardized by its temporary discontinuance, the original
assigned officer shall handle the case.
5. A supplemental report must be prepared by each officer who works on the case, but not necessarily for
each occasion that he or she works on it. The investigator shall maintain a file to include supplemental
reports.
6. A follow-up investigation consists of, but is not limited to, the following activities:
a. Non-criminal cases
1.) Interviewing complainants and witnesses
2.) Locating missing persons
3.) Determining if information or suspicious activity relates to criminal activity
4.) Distributing information to the proper persons or agencies
5.) Locating lost property and returning same to the owner
6.) Investigating deaths, overdoses, suicides, and injuries to determine if a crime was committed
7.) Making necessary notifications or conducting necessary inspections
8.) Recording information in field notes and if necessary doing supplemental report for IBR
a. Criminal cases
215.OPR
1.) Reviewing and analyzing of reports of preliminary investigations
2.) Recording information in IBR format when applicable, preparing prosecution report(s)
3.) Survey crime scene to identify, preserve and collect additional crime scene evidence and/or
assist forensic technicians
4.) Reviewing Departmental records for investigative leads
5.) Seeking additional information (from other officers, informants, contacts in community, other
investigators/agencies)
6.) Interviewing victims and witnesses
7.) Interrogating suspects
8.) Arranging for dissemination of information as appropriate
9.) Reviewing results from laboratory examinations
10.) Identifying and apprehending suspects or the offender
11.) Checking the suspect’s criminal history
12.) Determining if the suspect has committed other crimes
13.) Consulting with the Commonwealth Attorney in preparing cases for court presentation and
assisting in the prosecution of the case
14.) Notifying victims and witnesses when their presence is required in court unless the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office takes responsibility
15.) Testifying in court
16.) Arranging for polygraph examination, if necessary
2. In cases where warrants or indictments are obtained and an extradition order is required, an officer
shall consult with a member of the Investigations Unit and if approved submit an “Extradition Request
(Form 215.OPR (01)” to the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office. It is the decision of the
Commonwealth Attorney whether to approve an extradition and what terms to apply. If an extradition
is approved the officer shall take the form to the communications center so the information can be
entered into VCIN / NCIC and shall also provide a copy of the form to the Records Unit.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
215.OPR
August 18, 2000
SUBJECT: CASE SCREENING AND FILE MANAGEMENT
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to assign follow-up investigations, when appropriate, to
all criminal offenses that occur within its jurisdiction.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to provide guidelines for the supervisory review and assignment of incident
reports and follow-up investigations. An established protocol of solvability factors used by the patrol supervisor
will help them determine the priority of each case and whether the follow-up investigation should remain with
the patrolman or be conducted by the Investigations Unit. Case screening will enhance the case distribution and
assignments; improve the quality of the investigative effort; and aid in the effective use of personnel resources.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Case Screening System:
1. The South Boston Police Department uses a case screening system. This system corresponds with the
status of each case and determines whether an investigation is continued or should be suspended.
2. Each case upon initial report will be assigned a case number generated by the Computer Aided
Dispatch (CAD System). The case number becomes the identifying number for all documents that are
placed in the case file.
3. Once an investigation is started, the investigating officer immediately assigns and documents, in the
incident report, why one of the following internal incident status was chosen. The status determination
is based on whether evidence is obtained, whether there are witnesses to the crime, suspects have been
named, or there is traceability of property (Note: All cases and complaints will be given one of the
following statuses).
a. Unfounded,
b. Cleared by arrest,
c. Pending,
d. Inactive, or
e. Exceptionally cleared.
4. The status of a case can be changed at any time by the investigating officer or his / her supervisor
depending upon:
a. whether the crime was found to have actually occurred,
216.OPR 1
b. if there was an arrest made,
c. the discovery of new evidence,
d. the provability of solving the case, or
e. the suspect being known, but there will be no prosecution due to:
(1) death of the offender,
(2) Commonwealth refused to prosecute,
(3) extradition declined,
(4) complainant refused to cooperate, or
(5) the offender is a juvenile and is deferred to the Juvenile Probation Office.
5. When all the information and evidence is obtained, the investigating officer prepares the necessary
investigative reports needed to make up a case file and presents the file to the Commonwealth
Attorney, keeping himself/herself a copy.
6. The investigating officer is his / her own case coordinator for cases in which he / she works.
E. Reports/Case Files:
1. The officer will file an IBR (incident based report) with the Records Department for all incidents that
are reportable. Prior to filing the IBR the officer will have his/her supervisor review the report.
2. The Records Department files the IBR’s in a secure file cabinet and they are filed by the date of the
Report; the information shall also be entered and stored digitally in the Department’s records
management system.
3. IBR’s are purged in accordance with law and may be moved to different secure storage areas.
4. The officer will make a case file for all felony arrest.
5. The officer will maintain security and control of the case file while in his / her possession.
6. The officer will make a copy of the case file and forward it to the Commonwealth Attorney's office and
the investigating officer will assist the Commonwealth Attorney in the prosecution of the case.
7. All case files should be placed in a case file folder and will contain the following when applicable:
a. Copy of the offense report/arrest report.
c. Copy of any follow-up or investigative reports.
d. Copy of all written statements.
e. Copy of legal rights forms.
f. Copy of arrest warrant.
216.OPR 2
g. Copy of search warrant.
h. Copy of a consent to search form.
i. Copy of affidavit.
j. Copy of line up forms.
k. Copy of lab reports.
l. Copy of medical examiners reports.
m. Copy of vehicle seizure reports.
n. Copy of evidence vouchers.
o. Copy of photographs.
p. Copy of subpoena of witness form.
q. Copy of any other miscellaneous forms or reports that are applicable to the case.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
216.OPR 3
August 29, 2000
SUBJECT: USE OF INFORMANTS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department will maintain files on all informants used by the members of the
Department to gather information concerning criminal activities. The Department will also provide guidelines
concerning management of informants. Management of informants will be in compliance with applicable
Department policy, state and federal laws, and related court decisions.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to establish guidelines for the documentation, management, and compensation
of confidential informants by all members of the Department (except Department members who are assigned to
a Task Force and are guided by the policies of that Task Force).
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Witness/Source – A person who supplies information to law enforcement without the expectation of
any consideration and who may or may not wish to remain anonymous. Witnesses/Sources will be
exempt from the identification and documentation requirements set forth in this general order.
B. Informants – An individual who provides information to the police with the anticipation of receiving some
consideration.
1. Non-confidential informants provide information without any expectation of anonymity and may
be called upon to testify in court proceedings.
2. Confidential informants provide information based on assurance that their identity will be
protected. Although considered confidential informants according to the above, confidential
informants may be required to give testimony in court.
3. Crime stopper callers will be exempt from the identification and documentation requirements that
follow in this general order. They will be governed instead by applicable Crime Stopper policy
and operating procedures.
4. Citizen sources who receive no more that two (2) payment rewards per year of less than $250 per
payment will be exempt from the process but are required to sign a receipt witnessed by two (2)
police officers. The informant has the option to sign a code name instead of their real name.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. Type of Informants
1. Paid informants are those individuals who expect monetary consideration for cooperation with the
police.
217.OPR 1
2. Defendant charged individuals expect consideration for cooperation with the police in the form of:
a. Not being charged with a violation of law.
b. Being charged with a lesser crime.
c. Recommendation(s) being made toward sentencing upon conviction for a crime.
3. Juveniles are restricted use informants.
B. Use of Informants
1. A folder shall be started with each informant. This folder should include the Department Confidential
Reliable Informant Packet (can receive a copy from the local Task Force) which is initially filled out
with each new informant. This packet must be filled out prior to working an informant. Information to
be listed with this packed should include (but not limited to) documentation showing the informants
address, phone numbers, relatives, associates/friends, statement(s) given of previous drug
dealing/using to include names of associates, and charges shown on criminal history.
2. An informant will sign a conduct agreement form which is part of the Department Confidential
Reliable Informant Packet.
3. Paid Informants
a. No promise of a payment amount will be made to the informant and no payment will be made until
the informant has provided assistance to the police, value of the assistance has been evaluated, and
the officer or investigator handling the informant has discussed the payment amount with their
supervisor.
b. Payment will be made from the Investigations Unit funds and, therefore, will be reviewed for
policy compliance by the Investigations Unit supervisor.
d. The payment amount will be based upon the amount of the information provided by the informant,
the quality of the information, and the type of investigation(s) the informant is related to. The
informant’s willingness to testify in any court proceeding will also be considered.
a. The Investigations Unit and Patrol Unit Supervisors, or their designee, are authorized to
approve informant payments up to $500.
b. The Captain or his/her designee is authorized to approve informant payments up to $1,500.
c. All single payment in excess of $1,500 will me made with the approval of the Chief of Police
or his/her designee.
d. All payments to informants will be witnessed by at least one officer or investigator other than
the officer or investigator who is making the payment. A signed receipt for the disbursal of
the funds is mandatory.
4. Defendant/Charged Informants
a. The Commonwealth Attorney’s Office will make no prior agreement or promise as to the outcome
of any court proceedings.
217.OPR 2
b. The Commonwealth Attorney’s Office will be notified of a defendant/charged informant
requesting to work prior to the informant starting work.
c. Defendant/charged informants will be required to take regular urine screenings at the direction of
the officer or investigator handling the informant throughout the duration of time the informant is
working.
d. The Commonwealth Attorney’s Office will be notified of all assistance provided by the informant
throughout the course of an investigation.
e. For any informants who are going to or may testify in court a report will be provided to the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office, prior to the informant’s first time testifying in court,
detailing an informant’s work history as an informant to include urine screenings, any
monetary payments provided to an informant, and a detailed account of any problems that an
informant may have had while working as an informant. Officers/Investigators need to
remember that this information may be exculpatory and this report should be provided to the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office as quickly as possible so it may then be provided to the
appropriate defense attorney in a timely manner.
5. Restricted Use of Juveniles
a. A notification and agreement shall be made to and received from a living parent and/or guardian
having legal custody of the juvenile.
b. If a parent or guardian cannot be located for a notification then the concurrence of a Juvenile and
Domestic Relations Court Judge shall be required.
c. The officer or investigator’s supervisor shall be in agreement in the decision to use the juvenile
informant.
C. General Considerations
1. Documentation
a. In addition to the Department Confidential Reliable Informant Packet, subsequent transactions

with the informant will be documented.
b. Documented transactions will include (at a minimum):
1.) A summary of all significant information provided by an informant (including information

which is thought or proven to be inaccurate).
2.) Any operation conducted to establish the informant’s reliability.
3.) The results of all urine screenings given to an informant.
4.) The results of attempts to verify the information provided by the informant.
5.) Any investigative actions initiated as a result of the information provided by the informant.
6.) Any operation in which the informant participates while under police supervision or control.
7.) All agreements made with the informant concerning consideration, the name of the
supervisory officer(s) who approved the agreement, and when appropriate, the name of the
217.OPR 3
Commonwealth Attorney who approved the agreement.
8.) All payments made to an informant or other considerations given.
c. All documentation concerning informant’s activities will be forwarded to the Investigations Unit
supervisor.
2. Informant Identity
a. All actions involving the use of confidential informants will be handled in such a manner as to
protect the identity of the informant.
b. Informant confidentiality will be thoroughly discussed with the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office
prior to any court proceeding and all alternatives to releasing informant identity will be
considered.
c. At no time will an informant be promised confidentiality; he or she may be informed that all
lawful means to protect his/her identity shall be employed.
3. No officer or investigator will meet with an informant of the opposite sex outside any police facility
without having a second officer present to witness the meeting.
4. Department members are reminded that an officer or investigator other than the officer or investigator
making a payment to an informant will witness the payment, and a signed receipt is mandatory along
with the transaction being appropriately documented.
5. All informants are considered to be controlled by the South Boston Police Department. After
consultation with the original “controlling officer”, informants, if they are willing to do so, may be
transferred to work with another officer or investigator in the Department. In such cases, a statement
identifying the new “controlling officer’ shall be placed in the informant’ s file.
6. All contacts with informants will be strictly professional in nature; socializing, romantic relationships,
etc. with informants are strictly prohibited.
D. Informant Information Management
1. A secure file on every confidential informant will be kept in the office of the Investigations Unit
supervisor and shall include:
a. The informant’s code number assigned (the “controlling officer” shall assign a number (typically a
four digit number) to the informant that the informant will be referred to as on certain paperwork).
b. Information provided by the informant.
c. The date of entry.
d. The amount(s) the informant was paid.
e. Any comments made by the officer or investigator working the informant.
f. The badge number of the officer or detective that worked with the informant.
2. The supervisor of the Investigations Unit shall be responsible for the administration, direct control, and
integrity of the Department’s informant management information record keeping system.
217.OPR 4
a. The supervisor of the Investigation’s Unit or their designee shall maintain a log book showing
each informant’s assigned code number, current status as an informant, number of buys done
along with type, money spent, and monetary payments (if applicable) made to the informant. This
log book shall be kept secured at all times when not in use.
1.) The log book shall be reviewed periodically by the Captain and may be subject to inspection
by the Chief of Police, particular as to payments.
b. If a patrol officer is handling an informant all required documentation will be forwarded in a

confidential manner to the supervisor of the Investigation’s Unit who shall properly file this
paperwork.
3. Select file information will be available to all Department members on an “as needed” basis.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
217.OPR 5
August 30, 2000
SUBJECT: ORGANIZED CRIME, DRUG, AND VICE COMPLAINTS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department recognizes the need to enforce the law and protect the community from
the evils of illegal drugs, organized crime, and vice. The Department is committed to receiving, processing, and
investigating vice, drug, and organized crime complaints.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to set forth the guidelines and procedures for officers to follow in handling
criminal activity involving vice, drug, and organized crime investigations. Officers assigned to a task force are
to handle investigations involving vice, drug, and organized crime investigations in a manner consistent with the
policies and procedures set forth by that task force and thus are not bound to the policies listed below. If the
policies of that task force are in direct contradiction with the policy set forth below the officers are to
immediately bring them to the attention of the Investigations Unit supervisor.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Handling Complaints / Forwarding Information
1. The Investigations Unit has primary responsibility, within the Department, for conducting
investigations into vice, drug, and organized crime complaints. Officers assigned as narcotics
investigators handle the majority of drug incidents. Drug information is forwarded to members of the
Investigations Unit from all levels of the Department. The Investigations Unit supervisor or his/her
designee is responsible for oversight of the intelligence gathering, investigations, and prosecution of
drug offenders. The Investigations Unit supervisor is also responsible for meeting with the Chief of
Police or his designee and other agencies to keep them abreast of narcotic related problems and
investigations.
2. When a complaint reference vice, drug, or organized crime offenses initially comes in the patrol shift
supervisor will determine who is to handle the preliminary investigation and how; and as soon as
possible, report all details known to the Investigations Unit supervisor or their designee.
3. Once the patrol shift supervisor and the Investigations Unit supervisor or their designee have discussed
the incident a determination will be made as to who will perform the investigation, other resources
which need to be utilized, and how the investigation is to be handled.
4. Any officer conducting the preliminary investigation shall prepare an incident report, when necessary,
and submit it to his/her supervisor. The incident report shall include the following information:
a. Type of illegal/suspected activity, location, names and addresses of suspects involved, and
information concerning the activities.
b. Name, address, and telephone number of complainant.
The supervisor shall ensure that a copy of this report is provided to the Investigations Unit supervisor
218.OPR 1
or their designee.
For any reports that pertain to drug activity or to known drug users or dealers, the investigating officer
will forward a second copy of the report to the narcotics investigators.
5. Although the primary responsibility for the investigation of organized crime, vice, and narcotics belong
to the Investigations Unit it will be the responsibility of every Department member to support the
enforcement of laws against these illegal activities.
6. When any member of the Department receives information concerning organized or vice activities that
are non-drug related, the officer shall prepare a field information card, which is provided by the
Department, and forward it to the Investigations Unit supervisor or their designee. If the information
involves drug activity the officer shall also provide a copy of the card to the narcotics investigators. An
investigator shall ensure that the complaint is recorded and investigated to the fullest extent possible. If
necessary the Investigations Unit supervisor or their designee shall:
a. Confer with and advise the Chief of Police or his designee of vice, narcotic, and organized crime
activities.
b. Confer with the appropriate local, state, or federal law enforcement agency of jurisdiction over the
activity.
c. Assign an investigator or coordinate with patrol for follow-up and/or investigation.
B. Records and Reports:
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Investigations Unit supervisor or their designee to ensure that all
records/reports of drug buys or undercover operations conducted by the Investigations Unit are kept in
a secured filing cabinet. The records/reports will not be entered into the incident recording system
until such time it is deemed appropriate.
G. Surveillance and undercover equipment:
1. The South Boston Police Department owns surveillance / undercover equipment that is primarily used
during operations (surveillance, undercover buys, etc.) conducted by the Department’s narcotics
investigators. The security and inventory of this equipment is the responsibility of the Investigations
Unit supervisor or their designee. Should a patrol officer need this equipment he or she shall request
the use of the equipment via written memorandum thru their shift supervisor who, upon his or her
approval, shall forward the request to the Investigations Unit supervisor. If the Investigations Unit
supervisor agrees with the request, the equipment will be provided to the shift supervisor who will be
responsible for the equipment until it is returned to the Investigations Unit.
H. Surveillance, undercover, decoy and raid operations:
1. Any officer(s) who are going to assist or be utilized in a surveillance, undercover, decoy, or raid
operation will be briefed, in a pre-operational meeting by the officer in charge of the operation, before
such officer is allowed to participate in any such operation.
2. Pre-operational Meeting:
Due to the many differences between the types of operations which can be encountered, a pre-
operational meeting will take place before each operation is started. The officer in charge of the
operation will schedule a pre-operational meeting with all officers involved. The pre-operational
meeting will be used to issue equipment, as well as to familiarize and instruct officers with all the
aspects of the operation. The following will be used as a checklist/guideline for all pre-operational
218.OPR 2
meetings.
a. Naming the single person who is the supervisor and coordinator for the operation or designating a
single person if one has not already been appointed.
b. The objective(s) and details of the operation, to include but not limited to:
(1) The neighborhood/location, the operation is to take place in,
(2) The target area,
(3) The target(s) and,
(4) Participating officers’ duties.
c. A review or determination of operating procedures for:
(1) observation,
(2) arrest,
(3) surveillance,
(4) high risk entries,
(5) constant radio communications and its' capabilities, and;.
(6) all contingence plans.
d. A description of:
(1) how relief will be performed in the operation,
(2) backup security for the operation,
(3) the perimeter protection for the operation,
(4) how evidence/contraband will be searched for and seized,
(5) how to request medical assistance,
(6) steps to be used to maintain overall confidentiality and cover.
e. Supplying officers with false identities, necessary credentials, and disguises.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
218.OPR 3
N/A
SUBJECT: ASSET FORFEITURE PROCEDURES
I. POLICY:
The Constitution of the State of Virginia permits law enforcement agencies to benefit directly from the seizures
made in narcotic or drug investigations. To receive financial assistance through seized assets that involve other
types of investigations the department will proceed through the federal forfeiture process. The South Boston
Police Department intends to aggressively enforce narcotics and dangerous drug laws, and where departmental
personnel make a substantial seizure of property according to state law, the department will begin forfeiture
proceedings. Whatever assets the Department recovers through the forfeiture process, whether money or
property, will be applied to legitimate enforcement needs, primarily to carry out other drug enforcement
strategies. Under no circumstances will Department personnel select enforcement targets because of the
expected financial gain accruing to the Department. The Chief of Police or his / her designee will complete all
State and Federal paperwork accurately and in a timely manner.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to outline the department's participation in asset forfeitures from drug
enforcement cases to state responsibilities of the asset forfeiture coordinator.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Assignment of Asset Forfeiture Coordinator
The Chief of Police shall designate an officer to be Asset Forfeiture Coordinator (AFC). This coordinator
shall have oversight and responsibility for all seizures where a forfeiture action is requested. Duties of the
asset forfeiture coordinator include but are not limited to:
1. Ensures that all seizures for forfeitures are reported to the Virginia Department of Criminal Justice
Services (DCJS) if required. Monitor proceeds from the forfeiture assets and ensure compliance
with
all state and federal guidelines for asset forfeiture.
2. Reports to the Chief of Police all matters pertaining to forfeiture proceedings.
3. Chooses and coordinates with vendors hired to manage seized property.
4. Apply to DCJS for return of in-kind property for legitimate law enforcement use.
5. Coordinate with the Commonwealth’s Attorney, or other officials as necessary to obtain a commercial
sale of property in appropriate cases.
6. Coordinate with other agencies that are entered into a sharing agreement with the Department and/or
Town of South Boston in regards to the disbursal of funds resulting from a forfeiture action.
a. Where agencies seize property pursuant to membership in a regional task force, the AFC will
forward to DCJS a copy of the interagency agreement or contract that authorizes the task
219.OPR 1
force.
b. The coordinator will assist inter-jurisdictional coordination to ensure that localities maintain
separate forfeitures, accounts, and auditing procedures. Similarly the coordinator will track cases
in which the Department is involved but is not the primary seizing agency.
9. Ensure that the locality’s certification (that the proceeds will be used for law enforcement purposes
only and will not supplant existing resources) by ensuring completion of annual certification
report and
its submission to DCJS on an annual basis.
10. Establish a working relationship with other municipal offices such as the Commonwealth Attorney and
Department of Motor Vehicles; and refer to as well as comply with requirements from resources such
as the Department of Criminal Justice Services Asset Sharing Manual, State Code Sections 19.2-386.1
through 22, and Federal codes and guidelines.
B. Forfeiture action procedures
1. A patrol officer or investigator making a seizure will complete an “Asset Forfeiture Seizure
Information Form (Form 219.OPR (01))” and forward it along with all other reports (IBR, prosecution
report, etc.) to the Forfeiture Coordinator.
2. The coordinator will complete a DCJS 998 form if necessary and get the required signatures and
submit that form to DCJS. The coordinator will also start a forfeiture file on the incident and ensure
that a record of the forfeiture is kept. The coordinator shall submit the appropriate paperwork to the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office and review the case with their representative to ensure acceptance
of the case, all contacts with the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office reference a forfeiture action will be
documented.
3. The coordinator shall notify the seizing officer of the decision of the Commonwealth Attorney’s
Office reference the status of the forfeiture action. It is the responsibility of the seizing officer to
ensure that all items seized are stored in concurrence with Department policies on evidence seizure and
storage.
4. If the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office approves the seizure and the amount of the seizure is such
that DCJS has an interest in the forfeiture then the coordinator is responsible for notifying DCJS, via
the 998 form, of the seizure and documenting all contacts with DCJS reference any forfeiture action.
C. Disbursal of funds
1. Upon receipt of a court order in a forfeiture action the coordinator will ensure that the disposition
given in the court order will be carried out properly and documented. If funds are forfeited and are of
a value that DCJS has an interest the coordinator will ensure that DCJS along with any agencies
entered into a sharing agreement with the Department or Town of South Boston receive their
appropriate share of the funds.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
219.OPR 2
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
219.OPR 3
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: JUVENILE MATTERS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department recognizes that juveniles who are in need of protection, who are in
violation of status offenses, and who are charged with criminal offenses present a significant challenge to this
Department, the rest of the criminal justice system and the community as a whole.
This Department is committed to the development and perpetuation of programs, which are designed to prevent
and control juvenile delinquency. It is the policy of this Department to task the entire organization with the
responsibility to address this Department’s efforts to reduce and control juvenile delinquency.
A police officer's authority and responsibility do not change when dealing with a juvenile. The police officer's
basic function is still to protect the life, property, and well-being of all citizens. What is affected when you are
confronted with a juvenile offender is your method of handling.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to set forth the guidelines and procedures for officers to follow in handling
juveniles who are in need of protection, who are in violation of status offenses, or who have committed
delinquent or criminal acts.
III. DEFINITIONS
Child/juvenile – A person who is less than eighteen years of age.
Child in need of services (CHINS/Services) – a child whose behavior, conduct, or condition presents or results
in a serious threat to the well-being and physical safety to the child.
Child in need of Supervision (CHINS/Supervision)
1. A child who, while subject to compulsory school attendance, is habitually absent from school without
justification despite intervention by the school system; or
2. A child who remains away from his family or lawful custodian or residential care placement without
reasonable cause, where such conduct presents a clear and substantial danger to the child’s life or
health.
Delinquent acts – Acts designated as a violation of law of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or an ordinance of
any city, county, town or federal law, but do not include status offenses.
Status offender – A juvenile who commits an act that is unlawful only if committed by a juvenile, such as:
1. Possession of tobacco
2. Curfew violation
3. Runaway
220.OPR
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. General Provisions
1. The focus of the juvenile justice system in the Commonwealth of Virginia is upon public safety,
protection of the rights of victims and the welfare of the child. The Juvenile Justice System seeks to
protect the child and to correct delinquent behavior while trying to avoid stigmatizing the child.
Toward achieving that goal, law enforcement officers are key participants. They recognize that
juveniles, whether offenders or victims, must be treated differently from their adult counterparts. The
police officer is often the first person from the justice system that a juvenile encounters. First
impressions are lasting impressions. Firmness, fairness, and respect are key words in describing how
officers should deal with juvenile offenders.
2. Members of the Department when dealing with juveniles shall determine the most appropriate means
and intervention, which should be based on either the juvenile’s non-criminal misbehavior (status
offenses) or criminal acts (juvenile delinquency). Officers, after considering the facts available, shall
take such action that is consistent with preserving public safety, order, the safety and welfare of the
juvenile and individual liberty. Officers dealing with juvenile offenders should use the least coercive
means among reasonable alternatives.
a. A continuum of actions available to the officer is as follows:
1.) Release the offender with no action other than a warning.
2.) Recommendations of corrective actions to be taken by agreeing parents or guardians on a

voluntary basis.
3.) Voluntary treatment at social service agencies based on informal referral by the officer.
4.) Referral to the juvenile court system.
b. The following factors should be considered in determining what action to take:
1.) The nature and seriousness of the offense.
2.) The injury to the victim or the victim’s property.
3.) The age and circumstances of the juvenile.
4.) The juvenile’s record, if known to the officer.
5.) The sensitivity and attitude of the complainant or victim.
6.) The availability of local social service programs.
Note: The nature and seriousness of the offense, particularly when the offense involves violence,
may leave an officer with virtually no discretion regarding what action to take.
B. Taking a juvenile into custody
Custody is the legal or physical control of a person. In juvenile matters, custody occurs whenever an
officer takes an action other than immediately releasing a child with a warning, even if the action is no
more than taking the child home to his parents. Generally, a child may be taken into custody when the
child has committed a delinquent act, or when such custody is in the interest of the child’s health, safety or
welfare.
220.OPR
1. When an officer takes a juvenile into custody, the officer needs to keep in mind the following
provisions:
a. Whether the juvenile is alleged to have engaged in non-criminal misbehavior (a status offense) or a
criminal act(s).
b. Whether the juvenile is alleged to have been harmed or to be in danger of harm.
c. Ensuring that the constitutional rights of the juvenile are protected.
2. Section 16.1-246 of the Code of Virginia, provides that a child may be taken into immediate custody:
a. With a detention order issued by the judge, intake officer or the clerk, when authorized by the
judge of the family court, or with a warrant issued by a magistrate.
b. When a child is alleged to be in need of services or supervision and there is a clear and substantial
danger to the child’s life or health, or the assumption of custody is necessary to ensure the child’s
appearance before the court.
c. When in the presence of the officer who makes the arrest, a child has committed an act designated
a crime under the law of this Commonwealth, or an ordinance of any city, county, town or service
district, or under federal law and the officer believes that such is necessary for the protection of
the public interest.
d. When a child has committed a misdemeanor offense involving shoplifting in violation of Section
18.2-103, Code of Virginia, assault and battery, or carrying a weapon on school property in
violation of Section 18.2-308.1 and although the offense was not committed in the presence of the
officer who makes the arrest, the arrest is based upon probable cause on reasonable complaint of a
person who observed the alleged offense.
e. When there is probable cause to believe that a child has committed an offense, which if committed
by an adult would be a felony.
f. When a law enforcement officer has probable cause to believe that a person committed to the
Department of Juvenile Justice as a child has run away or the child has escaped from a jail or
detention home.
g. When a law enforcement officer has probable cause to believe a child has run away from a
residence, child-caring facility or home in which the child had been placed by the court, the local
department of public welfare or social services or a licensed child welfare agency.
h. When a law enforcement officer has probable cause to believe that a child has run away from
home, or is without adult supervision at such hours of the night and under such circumstances that
the law enforcement officer reasonably concludes that there is clear and substantial danger to the
child’s welfare.
i. When a child is believed to be in need of inpatient treatment for mental illness as provided in
Section 16.1-340, Code of Virginia.
3. Guidelines for taking juvenile into custody:
a. Release a child to a parent, guardian, legal custodian, or other person standing in loco parentis
after a warning is issued, or a promise to bring the child before the court is received by the
officer upon request; or
220.OPR
b. Take the juvenile before the Juvenile Intake Officer or contact the on-call Juvenile Intake Officer
when it is believed that the child needs to be placed into a facility, or detained anywhere for an
extended period of time. The decision to incarcerate rests solely on the Juvenile Intake Officer.
The following are questions to be considered by the officer which may be asked by the Juvenile
Intake Officer when contacted:
(1) Are the parents capable of coping with the situation?
(2) What is the nature of the offense?
(3) Will the parents be able to produce the child for court?
(4) Are the parents cooperative and concerned?
(5) Do the parents feel an obligation to obey the law and act properly in this matter?
(6) Is there a good child-parent relationship?
(7) Do the parents and the child understand their obligations and responsibilities?
c. If an escapee, release the child to the facility from which the child escaped. The officer assuming
custody of the child shall comply with the respective paragraph of Section 16.1-247, dependant
upon the circumstances of such custody.
d. Notification of parents or guardians is required in every case that a juvenile is taken into custody,
to inform them of the circumstances and/or to pick up the juvenile.
4. Nothing in Section 16.1-247 shall prevent a child from being held or detained for the purpose of
administering a blood or breath test to determine the alcoholic content of the child’s blood where the
child has been taken into custody pursuant to Section 18.2-266.
C. Detention of Intoxicated or Injured Juveniles
1. If a child is under the influence of alcohol or drugs to the extent that he or she cannot control bodily or
mental functions, the child shall be taken to a hospital for treatment, or other appropriate medical
attention shall be obtained for the child prior to placing the child in a detention facility.
2. If the child is injured or in need of emergency medical care, the officer must first seek medical
attention for the child before taking the child to an intake or detention facility.
D. Summons
In most instances, a child will enter the formal intake and/or court proceedings through the issuance of a
petition as provided in Section 16.1-260 and Section 16.1.263, Code of Virginia. However, in the following
instances, an officer may issue a Uniform Summons in lieu of obtaining a petition and release the child, in
some instances release to his/her parent(s) is recommended:
1. Violations of traffic laws;
2. Offenses involving bicycles, hitchhiking, and other pedestrian offenses;
3. Violations of fish and game laws;
4. Violation of town curfew ordinance;
5. Violation of town animal control ordinance;
220.OPR
6. Violation involving a vehicle accident in which the juvenile was involved in;
7. Violation of any alcohol and tobacco related offense;
8. Class 3 and 4 misdemeanors, such as curse and abuse.
9. Violation of 18.2-266 (DUI and DUID) Code of Va and violation of 18.2-250.1, possess marijuana
charges. In both of these instances an officer must either release on summons or take the juvenile
before a juvenile intake officer. There is additional paperwork that must be issued in both of these
instances if an officer chooses to release on summons.
a. In both instances if the juvenile is released to the parent or guardian the officer must issue a
summons to the parent or legal guardian listing “16.1-260” in the offense section and
“Requirement to bring juvenile to court” in the description section. If the juvenile is released to
someone other than the parent or legal guardian (ex. aunt, uncle, grandparent, etc.) then the officer
will not issue this summons to that person or to the parent(s) at a later date.
b. When charging a juvenile with possession of marijuana (18.1-250.1) and releasing them on
summons along with the above an officer must provide the juvenile and the adult the juvenile is
released to a “Notice of right to Consideration of Diversion” form which is provided by the local
juvenile and domestic court. One copy of this form must be provided to the juvenile and the adult
and another turned in to the records unit. The purpose of this form is to notify the parent(s) or
legal guardian that he or she may go into juvenile and domestic court not later than 10 days prior
to the trial date to seek having the juvenile put into detention diversion.
E. Missing Children / Runaways
Department policy on missing children / runaways is covered in the Department policy on “missing person
search and rescue procedures”.
F. Child in need of services or supervision
When an officer finds that a child is in need of services or supervision and there is a clear and substantial
danger to the child’s life or health, the officer may take the child into immediate custody and then shall
contact the Social Services Department and request that the child be placed in shelter care.
G. Notification of parent or guardian when a child is taken into custody
Whenever a child is taken into custody, the officer shall notify the parent or guardian that the child is in
custody as soon as possible, except that no such notification shall be necessary when a child is briefly
taken into custody to return the child to a parent, guardian, or school and the transport occurs soon after
initial detention.
H. Custodial Interrogation
1. When possible, the parent or guardian should be present during the interrogation of the child. The
investigating officer shall permit the request from a parent or guardian, who is present at the child’s
interrogation, to confer in private with their child. In addition, the investigating officer will honor a
child’s request to confer privately with a parent or guardian who is present at the interrogation.
2. The duration of the interrogation shall be reasonable and police personnel present should be limited to
those assigned to the case and/or whose technical expertise is required.
3. A child shall be advised of his or her constitutional rights prior to a custodial interrogation. The waiver
220.OPR
of rights form should be executed prior to interrogation to document that the rights advisory was given.
4. If special circumstances exist where an officer identifies a compelling reason(s) for a custodial
interrogation without contacting the child’s parent the officer should seek the approval of the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office prior to questioning.
5. The officer conducting the interrogation explains the agencies and juvenile justice system procedures.
I. Juvenile Records
Juvenile records, including fingerprints and photographs, require special security and privacy precautions in
accordance with Section 16.1 – 299 through Section 16.1-309.1 of the Code of Virginia. All members shall
adhere to the provisions of the aforementioned statutes when obtaining, processing, recording, filing or
otherwise storing any juvenile records, photographs, or fingerprints of a juvenile charged with any
delinquent or criminal acts.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
220.OPR
221. OPR Amends/Supersedes

August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: ANIMAL CONTROL CALLS
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of this Department to assist the citizens of the Town of South Boston in any law enforcement
matters and to assist in other means to increase public safety. To these ends this agency provides an Animal
Control Officer to respond to animal control calls. When this officer is unavailable other officers within the
Department will handle these calls.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to provide a procedure for response to calls for service to enforce animal control
laws.
III. PROCEDURES
A. Animal Control Officer (ACO) – On duty
The ACO will handle calls for service related to animals and enforce state and local laws, which regulate
animals within the Town of South Boston.
B. Recall of Animal Control Officer – After Hours, Days off and Holidays
1. The ACO may be called out by an officer (if possible after notifying the shift supervisor) for the
following reasons:
a. Vicious animal which are a direct threat to public health and safety
b. Animals in custody that are injured or sick
c. Any emergency requiring the assistance of the Animal Control Officer
2. If the Animal Control Officer is not available for call out, on duty police officers will answer any calls
for the ACO (in certain cases such as dangerous animals, animal bites, and abuse of animals the
officer shall contact the Halifax County Animal Control Officers for assistance) including:
a. Vicious animals which are a direct threat to public health and safety
b. Animal bites (Incident Based Report must be completed); owner of the animal will be required
under state law, to confine the animal for a ten (10) day period, this may be done via the local
animal shelter or a licensed veterinarian, all at the expense of the owner. The owner may choose to
confine the animal at their residence if there is no contact with other animals or people. All animal
bites must be reported to the Health Department within 24 hours. All reports and a copy of the
animal’s shots records (if obtainable) will be left for the Animal Control Officer to review.
c. Barking dogs
221.OPR 1
d. Animals in custody that are dangerous, sick, or injured. All other animal in custody calls will be
held until the next regular workday for the ACO. Callers with animals in custody will be advised
they should take the animal to the local animal shelter, keep the animal detained (keeping it fed,
watered, and in appropriate shelter) until the ACO next scheduled workday, or release the animal.
e. In those instances where a police officer is required to take an animal into custody (dangerous,
sick, injured, or in dangerous environment) the following procedures will be followed:
1. The ACO vehicle will be picked up and used to take the animal to the local animal shelter (if
they are open the officer shall turn the animal over to the Halifax County Animal Control
Officer on duty at the shelter, if the shelter is closed the officer will contact a Halifax County
Animal Control Officer for assistance with placing the animal in the shelter.
C. Paperwork utilized specifically for handling animal control calls
1. When placing a Department owned animal trap on a property the ACO or other officer will have the
owner or person in control of the property sign an “Animal Trap Permission Form (Form 223.OPR
01)” agreeing to all conditions listed on the form. The ACO or other officer will release all animals
caught in a Department trap but will not release animals caught in personal / private owned animal
traps of citizens.
2. When the ACO or other officer is picking up a domestic animal from a residence / other privately
owned property they will have the owner or person in control of the property sign an “Animal
Surrender Form (Form 223.OPR 02)” agreeing to all conditions on the form.
3. The ACO shall document all animal control calls on an animal complaint form which shall be turned in
to the Records Unit.
D. Process of designation of a canine as dangerous or vicious dog
1. When a canine has been deemed to be a dangerous dog by a judge of a Halifax County court there are
numerous requirements by code 3.2-6540 (code of Virginia) and corresponding Town codes 18.81 –
18.90 that must be met by the person(s) owning the dangerous dog in order to keep the dog. For
anyone living within the Town limits of South Boston going through the process of trying to keep a
dangerous dog it is the responsibility of the South Boston Police Department to issue them a permit for
a dangerous dog as long as they have met all requirements, the determination of their compliance with
all requirements is the responsibility of the ACO. The owner of the dangerous dog must renew this
permit with the agency each year, showing proof each time to the ACO that they are still meeting all
requirements. When requesting a dangerous dog permit or renewing an already issued permit the
owner of the dangerous dog much complete a “Request for Dangerous Dog Permit (Form 221.OPR
03)”. This form describes in detail the process that must be completed and requirements that must be
met in order for a person to be issued a permit.
2. The ACO must handle a vicious canine in compliance with code 3.2-6540.1 code of Virginia.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
221.OPR 2
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
221.OPR 3
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: UNIFORM REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
I. POLICY:
Police officers are to project a professional image in their appearance. To this end the Department issues certain
equipment to officers and dictates what officers may and may not wear while on duty and at what times during
the year and/or during what particular events certain uniforms may be worn.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to set specifications and regulations governing the wearing of uniforms and
department equipment by Department personnel.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. General
1. Uniforms and equipment shall be issued to appropriate employees in accordance with criteria
established by the Chief of Police.
2. It shall be the duty of the Administrative Officer to issue necessary equipment to all officers at the
direction of the Chief of Police. The Administrative Officer shall maintain records of all Department
issued equipment.
3. General requirements for police officers:
a. To promote public confidence and a positive, professional Department image, officers will
maintain a proper appearance.
b. All officers will maintain a uniform in ready condition.
c. Uniforms will be kept neat, clean, well pressed and in good repair at all times.
1.) Nylon web gear worn with the uniform will be kept clean and in good repair.
2.) Shoes or boots worn with the uniform will be clean and polished. Boots are to be worn
during periods of inclement weather or when approved by the on duty supervisor only.
3.) Officers will not carry items in uniform pockets as to cause them to bulge excessively.
4.) Uniform pants should be worn so as to break slightly at the instep.
d. No ornaments, equipment, etc. will be worn on any part of the uniform unless issued by the
Department or specifically authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee.
e. Off-duty officers will not wear the uniform unless:
222.0PR
1.) appearing in court;
2.) representing the Department at special ceremonies or events;
3.) working Department approved off-duty jobs;
4.) traveling to and from work.
f. Items of the uniform will not be worn in combination with civilian clothing , with the following
exceptions:
1.) Badge and department Identification;
2.) Issued handgun and ammunition;
3.) Issued handcuffs;
4.) Any other equipment that may be authorized by the Chief of Police or his designee.
g. Officers and other employees shall wear only uniforms specified for their particular rank and
assignment.
h. All articles of uniform, insignia, and equipment worn or carried by Department personnel shall
conform to the specifications as set forth in this order.
i. Civilian clothing shall not be worn with any distinguishable part of the uniform when in public
view, whether during or after duty hours.
j. The wearing of non-regulation articles of clothing at any time while on duty is prohibited unless
authorized by the Chief of Police of his/her designee.
k. Rings; wedding rings, precious or semi-precious stone rings may be worn. No costume jewelry
will be worn while in uniform. No more than one ring on each hand, except wedding/engagement
ring set, will be worn while in uniform.
l. Earrings; Female personnel may wear a small single post. No other ear ornament will be
allowed.
B. The following items shall constitute the basic uniform for officers of the Department, and are issued by the
Department.
1. Hat (campaign), baseball cap

2. Shirt, long sleeve (black or navy blue)
3. Shirt, short sleeve (black or navy blue)
4. Jacket, uniform
5. Trousers or slacks
6. Bullet resistance vest
7. Tie (black or navy blue)
8. Badge and id card
9. Duty weapon, holster/handcuffs and case/magazine
10. Service stripes (hash marks)
11. Prescribed insignia
12. Belt (nylon)
13. Portable radios
222.0PR
14. Dress shoes and boots
15. Rain gear
16. BDU uniforms (black or navy blue)
17. ASP baton
The following items are also considered to be part of the basic uniform, but are provided by the individual
officer:
1. Socks
2. White t-shirt
3. Gloves
4. Serviceable watch
5. Tie bar or tie tac
6. Sunglasses (no mirror type)
C. Uniform Classifications and Seasonal Transition
1. The transitional dates for the seasonal change of uniforms are set as April 15 as being mandatory
change to short sleeve uniform and November 15 as being mandatory change to long sleeve uniform.
From April 1 to April 14, at the discretion of the shift supervisor, officers may wear the short sleeve
uniform. From November 1 to November 14, at the discretion of the shift supervisor, officers may
wear the long sleeve uniform.
2. Class A uniform (short sleeve – optional April 1 to April 14 at the direction of the shift supervisor and
then mandatory from April 15 through October 31):
a. Uniform trousers
b. Uniform short sleeve shirt with badge, name plate, and collar insignia (POII and above) and with
white t-shirt on underneath.
c. Appropriate footwear (hi-gloss dress shoes mandatory for day shift; night shift may wear either hi-
gloss dress shoes or boots to be determined by the shift supervisor (all officers on shift must wear
same type of footwear)).
d. Issued jacket with rank insignia and service stripes on sleeve(s) (may be worn if needed).
e. Campaign hat
1.) The wearing of the campaign hat is mandatory in the following situation(s):
a.) When an officer is conducting traffic control for funeral processions
2.) The wearing of the campaign hat is optional in all other situations an officer may encounter,
to include but not limited to traffic stops, calls for service, working security, etc.
3. Class A uniform (long sleeve – optional November 1 to November 14 at the direction of the shift
supervisor and then mandatory from November 15 through April 1):
a. Uniform trousers
b. Uniform long sleeve shirt with badge, name plate, service stripe(s), rank chevrons on sleeves and
collar insignia (POII and above)
d. Appropriate footwear (hi-gloss dress shoes mandatory for day shift; night shift may wear either hi-
gloss dress shoes or boots to be determined by the shift supervisor (all officers on shift must wear
same type of footwear)).
d. Issued jacket with rank insignia and service stripes on sleeve(s) (may be worn if needed).
e. Campaign hat (policy same as in Class A uniform (short sleeve))
222.0PR
4. Class B uniform (BDU uniform – worn when directed to do so by supervisor):
a. BDU trousers and top
b. Boots
c. Dark navy blue or black t-shirt
d. Dark navy blue or black baseball cap with “Police” inscription.
e. Issued utility belt with weapon, etc., worn over top of BDU top.
f. NOTE: The BDU top may be worn with sleeves rolled up or down at the officer’s discretion but if
the sleeves are rolled up they shall be folded up and cuffed in a military manner only.
5. Class B tactical uniform (TDU uniform – worn by members of the Tactical Unit at the direction of a
supervisor.)
Every item listed above with the Class B Uniform (section 4) along with:
a. Kevlar helmet with goggles

b. Web belt with holster for assigned weapon
c. Protective vest
d. Black leather gloves
e. If applicable, duty issued long gun (shotgun or rifle)
6. Class C ceremonial uniform (issued to the ranks or Sergeant and above. Worn at the direction of the
Chief of Police or his/her designee).
a. Uniform blouse with badge and nameplate

1.) For the rank of Sergeant the chevrons showing rank are on the sleeve
2.) For the rank of Lieutenant and above the rank insignias are on the collar.
b. Uniform long sleeve shirt and tie
c. Hi-gloss leather gear with holster, handcuff case, and magazine pouch only.
f. Uniform trousers
g. Campaign hat
h. Hi-gloss dress shoes
7. Additional uniforms
a. The rules and regulations for the Animal Control Officer uniforms match those of the class A
(short sleeve and long sleeve) uniforms. The only difference is the color of the Animal
Control Officers uniforms is a light brown or green uniform shirt and dark green uniform trousers.
b. Additional uniforms, such as bicycle patrol uniforms, may be approved and issued by the
Department. The manner and style of dress will be determined by the Chief of Police or his/her
designee.
D. Uniform and equipment specifications
1. Collar ornaments placed on the right and left collar. Ranking officers shall wear appropriate ornaments
according to their rank. Example: Sergeant, silver or subdued chevrons
2. Nylon belt, 2 ½ to 3 inches wide with black finish
4. Tie bar or tie tac must be conservative and in good taste
5. Socks shall be black or navy blue in color. White socks will be allowed with boots.
6. Shoes will be standard military type low cut black or hi-gloss. Boots will be black.
7. Badges will be worn on the left breast at all times when in uniform. Personnel not in uniform may
222.0PR
carry a badge in a wallet type holder with the ID card or on a belt clip.
8. Optional leather gloves will be black of a plain design, wrist length without buttons or fancy stitching
may be worn when appropriate.
9. Raincoat will be high visibility black/orange reversible, of good quality plastic.
10. Campaign hat will be worn when in uniform and out in public view.
11. A name plate with years of service will be worn on the right shirt pocket flap.
12. Shoulder patches will be worn on both sleeves of the long and short sleeve shirts. Other shoulder
patches may be worn on the right sleeve at the discretion of the Chief of Police.
13. Hash marks shall be worn on the left sleeve 4 inches above the wrist. One hash mark is equal to 4
years of service.
E. Body armor
1. All sworn personnel within the Department shall be issued a personal ballistic vest; the vest
configuration shall be of a design to be comfortably worn underneath the uniform shirt for personal
ballistic protection.
2. Any sworn member, while conducting any field activities and/or assignments, and when wearing the
uniform of the agency, shall be required to wear a ballistic vest at all times while on duty. Thus,
uniformed officers are required to wear vests while they are on patrol.
3. Investigators, while working in plain clothes, will maintain their ballistic vest at a location where it is
accessible at all times should circumstances arise requiring the vest for personal protection. If an
investigator wears a uniform, for any field purpose, they will comply with this general order.
4. Sworn management and administrative personnel, with primary office assignments, who wear the
uniform are exempt from this general order. However, each sworn member of Command Staff will
maintain their ballistic vest in a location where it is readily available at all times should an emergency
arise.
5. Nothing in this general order prohibits a sworn member from wearing their ballistic vest at any time
they may choose to do so.
6. Failure to wear the vest as required when in uniform may result in disciplinary action.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
222.0PR
NUMBER May 28, 2009

N/A
SUBJECT: BOMB THREATS / BOMB INCIDENTS
I. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the South Boston Police department to respond to all bomb threats, bomb incidents, or
suspected explosive devices.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to provide guidelines for investigating a reported bomb threat, bombing
incident, or suspected explosive device.
III. PROCEDURES
A. Bomb Threats
1. Bomb Threats by Mail – If a written message of a bomb threat is received by mail, it shall be given the
same priority and protocol as one received over the phone. Once a written message is determined to be
a possible bomb threat, the document should be handled by the fewest number of people possible to
preserve the evidential value of the item. In addition, all materials that were received with the
document (e.g. envelope, stamp tape, etc.) shall be saved and preserved as evidence.
2. Bomb Threats Over the Phone – All South Boston Police Department personnel will be aware of the
procedures of this directive in receiving a bomb threat call.
B. Phone Call Procedure
1. It should be kept in mind that the person who received the threat call is the key to the Department’s
plan of action. It is most important that the person receiving the call be interviewed as the initial step
in any investigative procedure.
2. The police or dispatchers should ask the person making the bomb threat call, or the citizen who relayed
the bomb threat call, the following questions:
a. When is the bomb going to explode?
b. Where is the bomb?
c. What does it look like?
d. What kind of bomb is it?
e. What will cause the bomb to explode?
f. Did you place the bomb?
223.OPR 1
g. Why did you place the bomb?
h. Where are you calling from?
i. What is the reason for the bomb?
j. What is your name?
C. Initial Response
1. Any member of the Department receiving information regarding a bomb threat will notify the
Emergency Operations Center (EOC) immediately.
a. The Emergency Operations Center will handle the call in accordance with their policy by
assigning an officer to the scene, gathering as much information as possible from the caller about
the threat and relay this to responding units, if the call comes in over an administrative line
attempting to identify the location the call was made from, if the call comes in over the 911
telephone system relaying all pertinent information to officers about the call and having officers
respond to the location the call was made from also.
2. Officers assigned to a bomb threat call, will respond to the location with limited use of emergency
lights and siren, ensuring that emergency response equipment is turned off within two blocks (300 feet)
of the location.
3. All designated police personnel responding to the scene of the bomb threat will turn off all portable
and vehicle radios at least two (2) blocks or 300 feet before reaching the target area.
a. Upon arriving at the location, they will make an assessment of the conditions in the immediate
vicinity of the location.
b. Officers at the scene will communicate with the EOC and other emergency service personnel who
are not at the location via a telephone line that is not connected to the immediate area of the
suspected explosive device.
c. Communications between officers and support services at the scene will be conducted either in
person or by a portable public address system.
NOTE: Members’ of the Department shall assure that two way radios and cellular phones are not
used at the scene of any suspected explosive device as their use may cause detonation.
D. First Officer At Scene
1. The first officer arriving at the scene will be the officer-in-charge of the investigation and will remain
the officer-in-charge until relieved by a supervisor or an investigator.
2. The first officer on the scene shall attempt to locate the person who received the bomb threat and the
individual who called for assistance. They will be interviewed in an effort to help determine the
appropriate plan of action.
3. The first officer on the scene will contact the person in charge of the premises and advise that person of
the following:
a. The Police Department received information concerning a bomb threat at their location.
b. The Department’s policy concerning bomb threats is as follows:
223.OPR 2
(1) That any decision made to search, evacuate, etc., is to be made by the property owner,
manager, principal, or proprietor if the location of the explosive device is unknown. If an
explosive device is known, the police will in all cases order immediate evacuation.
(2) If a decision is made by the person in charge of the premises to evacuate, then the police will
assist in any reasonable manner.
(3) Once a business official/property owner has determined whether or not to evacuate and/or
desires that a search be conducted, the police supervisor in charge will make all decisions
regarding evacuation and search considerations, whether additional personnel and equipment
are needed, and when to terminate police involvement.
E. Supervisor’s Responsibility
1. Upon notification of a bomb threat, a supervisor will immediately respond to the target location. When
arriving at the scene, the supervisor will make an assessment of the situation and take control as the
officer-in-charge. The supervisor, when prudent, will establish a command post. All communication
between officers at the scene and the EOC shall be conducted by landline telephone or by using a
police radio that has been moved at least 300 feet from the scene. The supervisor in charge shall
decide whether to notify a higher ranking authority and other outside agencies, such as the fire
department, the Virginia State Police, etc.
2. The supervisor will verify that the person who is responsible for the control of the premises is either at
the scene or is in the process of responding. Once located, all activity will be coordinated with the
person responsible for the control of the premise.
3. As soon as contact is made with the person responsible for the premises and the initial assessment of
the situation is completed, the supervisor will request a decision from the person in charge of the
premises as to whether or not to evacuate the building and/or begin the commencement of police
search procedures.
4. The use of portable and vehicle radios within the suspected area is prohibited until such time as any
bomb device has been located and it has been determined that the detonator can not be activated by
radio communications or if the call is cleared.
F. Evacuation Procedures
1. If the evacuation order is to be given, it should be remembered that activation of any electrical device
could set off a bomb. Therefore, any order to evacuate should be given verbally or by a portable public
address system.
2. Prior to an evacuation order, all primary and secondary routes shall be searched to clear passage and
explosive devices.
3. Occupants of the premises should be instructed to leave their office spaces open, unlock all desks,
lockers and file cabinets. They should also be instructed to remove all personal belongings, such as,
purses, lunch boxes, packages, attaché cases, etc.
4. The doors and windows in the suspected area of the device should be left unlocked and open. All
persons shall be evacuated from above, below, and on the immediate sides of the suspected location of
the device. Elevators should not be used.
5. Police personnel shall be stationed in such a manner to prevent anyone from entering the area.
6. Select evacuation “holding areas” where occupants of the premise may assemble pending completion
of the search. The areas shall be far enough away from the building as to protect those assembled from
223.OPR 3
debris and other hazards in the event of an explosion. When possible, the selected areas should offer
protection from the weather. Whenever possible, a representative form the evacuated building should
be requested to assist in conducting a “head count” of personnel.
7. In some cases of evacuation, it may become necessary to shut off gas, fuel, and electrical lines to
reduce the chances of additional explosive hazards.
8. The supervisor will organize a communication system for coordinating the evacuation, search, security,
and re-entry of the building.
9. The supervisor shall control entry into the building during the search and permit re-entry into the
building following the search in which no device was found.
G. Search Procedures
1. When practical, personnel who work in the threatened building should assist in the search of the
premise. However, the decision as to whether these employees should be exposed to any risk rests
with the person responsible for the premises.
2. If the police personnel have been requested to perform a search, the supervisor shall organize search
teams and the search areas. The search will vary depending on police personnel available and the
circumstances. Officers searching the premise should have a flashlight available. If needed the
Virginia State police can be requested to provide K-9 teams to assist in the detection of explosives.
3. The searching operation will start at the exterior of the building and work to the interior of the
building. The exterior area to be searched should be searched thoroughly, because it is the most
accessible area. Exterior searching should begin at ground level, systematically checking shrubbery,
entrances, trash can, window wells and crawl spaces. The exterior search of the building should extend
between 25 to 50 feet from the suspected area. Particular attention should be given to window ledges,
signs, fire escapes and other accessible areas. If the roof area is accessible for the exterior, it also
should be searched.
4. In searching the interior of the building, the search teams will start the search in areas that are most
accessible to the public. The team should start in the lobbies and continue to waiting rooms, halls,
restrooms, empty rooms, staircases/elevators, etc. The search should begin on the ground level of the
premise and work upward toward the top level as quickly and thoroughly as possible. The searching
individuals should coordinate their efforts so that everyone is aware of what areas have been searched.
Maintenance and custodian personnel can assist the search teams as they are familiar with the facility
and have keys to all the doors.
5. Nothing shall be done to change the environment of the area searched, such as cutting on lights, or
adjusting thermostats until the area has been searched thoroughly using existing lighting if sufficient,
or flashlights. Radio equipment will not be used in the area and no smoking will be allowed.
6. Never tell management personnel that everything is all clear. If the search was fruitless, the on-scene
supervisor will inform the management personnel of that fact, but the decision to re-occupy the
building or area must be made by the management of the building or area.
H. Techniques for Searching in Areas of Special Concern
1. School Searches
a. When a school receives a bomb threat it is the decision of the school administration whether the
school is to be evacuated or not while acting in accordance with policies and procedures of the
Halifax County public school system. If evacuation of the school is initiated the following should
be followed:
223.OPR 4
(1) The officer-in-charge should coordinate with school officials to establish an assembly point
for students that is at a safe distance from the building(s).
(2) School officials from the evacuated building will conduct a “head count” of students and
related school personnel.
b. If possible, school authorities should open all lockers.
c. Science laboratories should be treated with caution. If possible try to have the appropriate school
employee assist in the search of the labs, classrooms and chemical storage areas.
2. Unattended and Attended Vehicles
a. All designated police personnel who respond or are at the scene of a vehicle that is suspected of
having an explosive device will turn off all police radios before reaching an area that is at least
300 feet from the scene. The use of radios will be prohibited until such time that it has either been
determined that the detonator cannot be activated by radio communications or the call for service
is cleared.
b. Officers will not search an unattended vehicle that is suspected of containing an explosive device.
c. The officer-in-charge shall evaluate the situation and if needed request the assistance of the
Virginia State Police.
d. If the Virginia State Police is requested, the supervisor shall secure the scene pending the
arrival of the requested assistance.
e. If a vehicle is occupied special attention should be given to the following investigative concern:
1. Do we know whether the occupants are victims or suspects?
2. Does the occupant know of the threat?
3. Can the occupants be removed (having the safety of the occupants and the public in mind)?
4. Keep in mind that a device may have a “fail safe” and/or “anti” tampering mechanism that may
trigger the detonation of the explosive device.
I. Suspicious or Actual Explosive Device Found
1. The first officer on the scene will be the officer-in-charge of the incident and will remain as the officer-
in-charge until relieved by a supervisor or investigator.
2. The officer-in-charge shall:
a. Attend to the evacuation of the premise.
b. Determine who discovered the device and ensure they are interviewed.
c. Contact the person in charge of the building or area.
d. Coordinate the implementation of a crime scene log. Entries into the log will continue until the
investigation of the incident has been terminated at the scene.
3. A supervisor will immediately respond to the scene to evaluate the severity of the situation and take
223.OPR 5
control as the officer-in-charge.
4. Secure the immediate area of the suspected device, but do not touch or move the device.
5. Do not use any type of radio communications within a 300 feet radius of the scene. The only
acceptable communications that will be made are verbal, telephone communications, and/or portable
public address system until such time that the use of radio communication is safe to resume.
6. The supervisor will notify the Emergency Operations Center to request the Virginia State Police for
assistance.
7. If the State Police bomb technicians are not available, a contact shall be made to the United States
Army Explosive Ordinance Disposal; VA Military personnel should be notified in incidents where
hand grenades, artillery shells or other obvious military items are found.
8. The supervisor at the scene may also request the assistance of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and
Firearms, or the Federal Bureau of Investigation Hazardous Device Unit.
9. The supervisor will ensure the following are observed by police personnel and advise the person in
charge of the facility of the following:
a. Secure and evacuate the immediate area of the suspected device, but do not touch or remove the
device.
b. Carefully open the doors and windows in the area of the suspected explosive device.
c. Evacuate all personnel from the general area including civilians, police officers and other
personnel not needed in the general area of the device, but ensure that enough personnel are
available to protect the suspected device from disturbance and to provide a secure environment.
d. Evacuate a minimum of 300 feet surrounding a suspicious device. A suspected vehicle bomb may
require a much greater evacuation radius of 1,000 feet or more.
e. Notify the occupants of any buildings in the adjacent areas of the suspected explosive device to
begin immediate evacuation of their premises.
J. Post-Explosion Notifications
1. Assigned units will respond to the scene quickly yet safely.
2. The first officer on the scene will be the officer-in-charge of the incident and will remain the officer-in-
charge until relieved by a supervisor, investigator or another agency.
3. The supervisor will respond immediately to the scene, take control as officer-in-charge and will contact
an investigator.
4. The officer-in-charge will:
a. Coordinate the implementation of a crime scene log. Entries into the log will continue until the
investigation of the incident has been terminated at the scene.
b. Ensure that the Emergency Operations Center notifies the fire and rescue departments to respond
to the bomb scene.
c. If needed have the local hospital contacted to notify them of the circumstances so they can initiate
their plan of action.
223.OPR 6
d. Instruct the Emergency Operations Center to contact the Virginia State Police and the Bureau of
Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms.
e. Seal off both the internal and external explosion area(s) to avoid possible personal injury and
minimize contamination of the crime scene evidence.
f. Coordinate any authorized entry into the crime scene on a “need to be present basis”.
5. Extreme caution should be taken for the possibility of other unexploded devices that could be
detonated.
6. The South Boston Police Department will be responsible for the initial security and protection of the
crime scene at an explosion. Crime scene processing and evidence collection may be the responsibility
of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms or another Federal agency based upon the magnitude
of the situation.
7. Evidence collected at the crime scene will be processed and analyzed by the Bureau of Alcohol,
Tobacco and Firearms, unless otherwise specified by the Commonwealth Attorney or the Chief of
Police. Copies of the laboratory analysis reports will be provided for the South Boston Police
Department, fire marshal’s office and/or the State Police.
7. Investigation of an actual bombing incident will be coordinated with outside Federal and State
agencies. This investigation in most cases will be conducted in conjunction with personnel from the
Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, other Federal agencies, the Virginia State Police and/or the
local fire marshal’s office.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
223.OPR 7

N/A
SUBJECT: HOSTAGE / BARRICADE SITUATIONS
I. POLICY:
In hostage/barricaded subject situations it shall be the policy of the South Boston Police Department to
consider the lives of the hostages, civilians and officers involved to be of the utmost importance; whenever
possible, to enhance the prospects of peacefully resolving the incident through communication with the
suspect; whenever possible, to develop and maintain the ability to use alternative approaches to resolve the
incident should communications fail (tactical options); and in hostage situations, to make every reasonable
effort to affect the safe release of the hostages.
II. PURPOSE:
It is the purpose of this policy to provide general guidelines for handling hostage/barricaded subject situations,
both stationary and mobile.
III. PROCEDURES FOR STATIONARY SITUATION
A. The first 10 -20 minutes of a hostage/barricade situation are the most emotionally charged and present the
greatest danger. Stress is high both among the officers and the citizens involved. Normally there is no
need to rush to a solution: time may reduce stress and allow communication to begin. Additionally, time is
needed to assess the situation and to secure the surrounding area.
B. First Departmental Personnel on the scene shall not initiate tactical actions other than those necessary to
protect the lives and safety of themselves or others consistent with the South Boston Police Department's
use of force policy. Officers shall then:
1. Notify a supervisory officer of the incident and circumstances.
2. Contain and isolate the incident scene, establishing an inner containment perimeter to provide a
reasonable degree of safety while maintaining contact with the incident scene and - as time and
resources permit - establish an outer containment perimeter to control pedestrian and vehicular traffic
into the area.
3. Evacuate occupants of affected residences and businesses to a point beyond the perimeter.
C. The Incident Command will be assumed by the first officer on the scene until specifically relieved by a
superior. The Incident Commander shall:
1. Inform the on-duty shift supervisor about the nature and circumstances surrounding the incident;
requesting the activation of tactical unit and negotiator (the Department has personnel trained in
negotiations; if a Department tactical unit is unavailable then the Virginia State Police or Halifax
County Sheriff’s Office Tactical Unit may be requested);
2. Ensure establishment of an inner and outer perimeter, command post, tactical operations area,
negotiations area, press area and a staging area for officers and others arriving for assignment;
3. Assign a liaison officer to maintain contact with outside agencies that may provide assistance to the
operation;
221.OPR 1
4. Ensure that responsibility for traffic and crowd control is established, and that routes for emergency
vehicles have been designated;
5. Make provisions for recording personnel assignments and developing a chronological record of events
at the command center and tactical operations center;
6. Ensure that necessary equipment from the Fire Department and Rescue Squad is made available at the
staging area together with any other units such as canine.
D. The shift supervisor shall respond to the scene, if not already on scene, and take over the duties and
responsibilities of the incident commander, unless otherwise relieved by a superior officer.
1. The shift supervisor shall notify a member of the administration of all available information of the
incident and if not already activated, request activation of a tactical unit, negotiator, investigator, and
officer to handle the media.
2. A member of the administration shall respond to the scene and take over duties and responsibilities of
incident commander.
3. Should the situation become protracted and personnel become fatigued or additional personnel or
equipment is needed; the incident commander may request assistance through mutual aid with other
area agencies or the State Police through the Chief of Police
E. De-escalation: Once the hostage/barricaded situation has been neutralized the following procedure should
be followed:
1. The suspect should be removed from the scene and transported to the Police Department (or
appropriate medical facility if medical or mental health is needed.
2. Hostages should be removed from the scene and interviewed along with given any medical treatment
needed. When hostages are coming out of scene all officers should be notified, by radio if necessary,
that the hostages are coming out. Hostages should be reunited with loved ones as soon as possible.
3. The crime scene will be secured by patrol officers and remain that way until processed by members of
the investigations unit, who will determine when the scene is no longer a crime scene.
4. Incident Based Reports should be completed.
IV. PROCEDURES FOR MOBILE SITUATION
A. All hostage situations are not confined to a fixed structure and can begin as mobile or become mobile.
With this in mind it must be noted that a fixed situation may be allowed to go mobile, if such action gives
the advantage to the police where the previous option gave the advantage to the hostage taker.
B. When an already mobile situation is responded to the first officer responding shall:
1. Maintain a visual contact with the hostage vehicle making no attempt to stop the vehicle, contact
dispatch and advise of location, direction of travel, descriptors of vehicle and occupants.
2. Contact shift supervisor and advise of situation and request additional units to include unmarked unit if
possible; a felony stop shall be done when suspect vehicle is stopped.
3. Officers shall take whatever means possible to bring the situation to a safe resolution utilizing all tools
available.
221.OPR 2
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
221.OPR 3

N/A
SUBJECT: ALARMS AND ROBBERY INCIDENTS
I. POLICY:
Alarms are a means of notifying the local law enforcement agency that a robbery or burglary is in
progress when the use of a telephone is impractical or impossible. Officers will exercise sound
judgement and proceed with extreme caution when answering any type of alarm call. Despite the
large number of false alarms, the Department cannot afford that an alarm turn out to be real when
it was at first thought to be false.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish a plan of action to be taken in response to activated alarms systems.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Activated alarms - general
1. When an alarm notification is received, two units should respond if possible, to

the alarm location. Other available units will proceed to the area if needed, and
remain available, maintaining radio silence, unless another call is received of
higher priority.
2. Units dispatched to an alarm a considerable distance away shall use good

judgment in determining their response mode. All variables shall be considered
including vehicle/pedestrian traffic congestion, weather, road conditions, and
type of business and time of day/week in deciding upon the use of emergency
equipment. If a decision is made to use emergency response equipment, officers
shall remember that their first responsibility is to arrive at their destination
safely. When within hearing or sight distance of the alarm location, all
emergency lights and audible warning devices shall be discontinued, and the
officer shall operate their vehicle accordingly.
3. When the first responding officer nears the business he or she shall have
communications attempt to establish telephone contact with the business or
residence to determine if the alarm is false and all is secure. If after hours, an
officer shall have communications contact a key holder for the property.
B. Bank Alarms
1. Before arrival, responding units shall determine which unit will cover the front
and which will cover the rear of the building.
2. Units should attempt to arrive simultaneously if possible, and position

themselves at opposite corners of the building, but not in front of entrances or
windows, if such can be accomplished without sacrificing observational
225.OPR 1
advantage. Suspects exiting the building should not be able to readily observe
police vehicles.
3. Officers should approach entrances with caution, using available cover to their
best advantage, but should not enter the building.
4. A bank official should appear outside with proper identification. Officers shall
not approach the bank official, but rather the bank official shall approach the
police officers.
5. If no bank official approaches in a reasonable time, then officers should consider

the alarm to be a robbery in progress. In this event, the officers are to maintain a
safe position and notify communications. In this event, the supervisor shall
determine the course of action to be taken, based on the circumstances of the
situation.
6. If it is determined that the alarm appears to be false; it is recommended that only

one officer shall enter the bank, and the back-up officer will stand by
maintaining radio contact with the communications and other officer.
7. The officer entering the bank will be satisfied that no robbery is taking place.
Officers shall not rely solely on the teller or bank official stating that the alarm
was false, but determine that fact for themselves.
D. Business and Residential Alarms
1. All possible exits should be monitored.
2. During non-business hours, the person on the business / home contact list (key
holder) should be notified immediately.
3. A business, showing no visible signs of break-in or unauthorized entry, shall be

entered only after the arrival of the owner or authorized agent. Officers shall
conduct a complete and thorough search of the premises to ensure building
security and apprehension of suspects.
4. Officers at the scene knowing that a break-in has occurred shall take the
appropriate action to ensure the apprehension of suspect(s) and the recovery
of stolen property.
5. Officers shall attempt to contact the owners of a residence or a designated key-

holder before entering the premises unless circumstances dictate otherwise.
6. Officers shall be observant for suspicious persons or vehicles in the area.
7. Unescorted entry of a residence shall be made only if it appears that entry has
been gained, and done so by two officers if possible, advising communications
of the entry prior to entering the premises.
E. Robbery/Burglary
1. If a robbery or burglary has taken place and communications has the victim or
reportee on the telephone, the communications should obtain any available
information about the suspect(s) description, mode and direction of travel, and
any other pertinent information concerning the crime (to include any weapons
225.OPR 2
used) and should advise the victim/complainant to keep everyone out except
police personnel (in accordance with the Communications Center policy).
2. Officers shall proceed with caution in the event the suspects are in the area, and
shall be observant of all persons in the area.
3. Officers shall secure the crime scene and proceed to conduct a preliminary
investigation, summoning additional personnel as appropriate.
F. False alarms
1. Officers shall respond to all alarms. If communications advises the officer that a
person from the alarm site has called stating that all is well and the alarm was
set off accidentally, the officer cannot take this for granted and shall continue to
respond at the appropriate response level.
2. If responding officers determine the situation to be a false alarm, they will so

advise communications and other responding units as soon as possible.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
225.OPR 3
NUMBER May 15, 2017

August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: MISSING PERSON SEARCH AND RESCUE PROCEDURES
I. POLICY
The South Boston Police Department considers any lost person complaint high priority. Once the
complaint has been confirmed, the Department will deploy all possible resources to locate the lost person.
Of special concern are children, the elderly, and persons of diminished capacity and persons missing under
unusual circumstances. All missing persons shall be considered “at risk” until sufficient information to the
contrary is confirmed.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this directive is to set fourth the guidelines and procedures for officers to follow in handling
a report of a lost person and the implementation of a search and rescue operation.
III. DEFINITIONS
A. Abducted child - A child (i) whose whereabouts are unknown, (ii) who is believed to have been abducted,
(iii) who is 17 years of age or younger or is currently enrolled in a secondary school in the Commonwealth,
regardless of age, and (iv) whose disappearance poses a credible threat as determined by law enforcement to
the safety and health of the child and under such other circumstances as deemed appropriate by the Virginia
State Police.
B. Critically missing adult - Any missing adult 21 years of age or older whose disappearance indicates a
credible threat to the health and safety of the adult as determined by a law enforcement agency and under
such other circumstances as deemed appropriate after consideration of all known circumstances.
C. Missing child - Any person who is under the age of 21 years, whose temporary or permanent residence is in
Virginia, or is believed to be in Virginia, whose whereabouts are unknown to any parent, guardian, legal
custodian, or other person standing in loco parentis of the child, and who has been reported as missing to a
law enforcement agency within the Commonwealth.
D. Missing senior adult - An adult whose whereabouts are unknown and who is over 60 years of age and
suffers a cognitive impairment to the extent that he is unable to provide care to himself without assistance
from a caregiver, including a diagnosis of Alzheimer's Disease or dementia, and whose disappearance poses
a credible threat as determined by a law enforcement agency to the health and safety of the adult and under
such other circumstances as deemed appropriate by the Virginia State Police.
IV. PROCEDURE
A. Missing Persons Generally
1. There is no waiting period for taking a missing persons report.
2. A person may be declared missing when his/her whereabouts are unknown and unexplainable for
a period of time that is regarded by knowledgeable parties as highly unusual or suspicious in
consideration of the subject's known behavior patterns, plans, or routines.
3. A missing person may be considered "at risk" if any of the following circumstances are met. The
individual:
a. Is an abducted child;
b. Is a critically missing adult;
226.OPR 1
c. Is a missing child under the age of 21 years old;
d. Is a missing senior;
e. Has diminished mental capacity;
f. Suffers from medical or behavioral health condition(s) that are potentially life-
threatening if left untreated; or
g. Is at risk of suicide.
4. The determination that a missing person is "at risk" will be based on the criticalness of the
situation (e.g. age, health and physical condition of the victim, the existing or impending weather
conditions, known abduction etc.). A request for search and rescue and other external support shall
be made in the early hours of the investigation if the missing person is determined to be "at risk".
B. Initial Report and Response (to aid officers in handling these calls for service the Department has
developed the “Missing Person Search and Rescue Checklist (Form 226.OPR (01))” which briefly
covers the steps that follow):
1. When a report of a missing person has been received, the officer responding to the call shall
activate the patrol-vehicle mounted video camera and body worn camera when approaching the
scene to record vehicles, people, or anything else of note for later investigative review.
2. The officer receiving the complaint shall take notes and record all important information
pertaining to the circumstances of the missing person episode and determine if the missing person
is considered "at risk".
3. The officer shall obtain the following information (completing the Missing Persons Search and
Rescue Questionnaire (Form 226.OPR (02)):
a. The physical description of the subject (age, height, weight, race, etc.);
b. The last known clothing worn by the subject;
c. The last known location of the subject (obtain time and date);
d. Possible destination of the subject;
e. Name of person who last saw the subject;
f. Description of person or suspect whom the subject was last seen with;
g. Whether the subject has been missing on prior occasions and the degree to which the
absence departs from established behavior patterns, habits or plans;
h. Whether the individual has been involved recently in domestic incidents; suffered an
emotional trauma or life crises; demonstrated unusual, uncharacteristic, or bizarre
behavior; is dependent on drugs or alcohol;
i. All addresses and phone numbers of any relatives or friends; and
j. Any other pertinent information that
4. A town/county wide alert shall be issued to all patrol units and all neighboring law enforcement
agencies.
5. The shift supervisor shall contact a member of the Department administration and the Halifax
County Emergency Service Coordinator (who will take command of search operations should
multiple jurisdictions be needed to conduct).
6. All available officers shall be dispatched to the area surrounding the last known location of the
missing subject. Officers shall focus on secluded places where an offender might have quickly
taken a victim or areas in which an individual may be trapped, injured, or lost.
7. The shift supervisor will instruct all available units to begin a search of the area by vehicle and
request a tracking dog if appropriate. The last known location of the lost person will be protected
to allow for a clean starting point for the tracking dog.
226.OPR 2
8. If additional agencies begin to come in or if needed for Department resources the shift supervisor
shall establish a command post and staging area.
9. If the missing subject was abducted and there are witnesses, the officer shall obtain a description
of the abductors, the mode and direction of travel, vehicle description, and any related
information.
10. If there is evidence of foul play or a known abduction the officer shall secure the area as a crime
scene until it can be searched and examined for evidence.
11. If foul play or suspicious circumstances exist or are suspected, a statewide alert to all law
enforcement agencies shall be issued. Additionally, vehicle checkpoints should be set up to
prevent transportation of the missing subject from the area.
12. Obtain a recent photograph of the missing subject. The photograph should reflect the subject's
day-to-day appearance. Create a flyer with the missing subject's picture and identifying
information.
13. Determine if the criteria for an AMBER or a SENIOR Alert has been met and request the alert as
applicable.
14. An officer shall complete the Missing Adult Clearinghouse Report (State Form SP-67) and notify
the Virginia Missing Person Information Clearinghouse.
C. Missing Children
1. If the missing person is a child, the officer shall obtain the name, telephone number, and address
of the current guardian. Additionally the officer shall determine if the child:
a. Is or may be with any adult who could cause him/her harm;
b. May have been the subject of a parental abduction; or
c. Has previously run away from home, has threatened to do so, or has a history of
explainable or unexplainable absences for extended periods of time.
2. Reports of missing children who have voluntarily left home (i.e., “runaways”) should be classified
as such only after the completion of a thorough investigation. A child who repeatedly runs away
should be interviewed at length to identify any persons who may be criminally responsible,
whether the child is a victim o sexual exploitation, or whether an abusive or negligent home
environment contributed to the child's disappearance.
3. The officer shall conduct a thorough search of the immediate area where the missing child was last
seen. Officers shall target areas where a child may hide or become trapped. With the consent of
the parent(s), the officer shall conduct a thorough search of the child's residence, including all
child-size areas within the home and any other structures or vehicles on the property. A thorough
search of the home shall be conducted regardless of whether the child went missing from the
home.
4. The officer shall request that one person with whom the missing child is familiar remain at the
place the child was last seen in the event he or she returns to the location. This individual may also
serve as a point of contact for the officer.
5. The officer shall complete the Missing Child Clearinghouse Report (State Form SP-183) and
notify the Virginia Missing Children Information Clearinghouse of the missing child report and
the National Center for Missing & Exploited Children (NCMEC) of the missing child report.
(NCMEC has developed software designed to manage and prioritize leads associated with missing
child investigations. It is available at no cost by calling 1-800-THE-LOST.)
226.OPR 3
D. VCIN/NCIC Initial Entries
1. Upon completing a missing persons report, the officer shall complete the NCIC form for entry
into VCIN/NCIC by dispatch if any of the following criteria are met:
a. The missing person has a diagnosed or documented physical, intellectual, or behavioral
health disability and may subject himself or others to danger;
b. The missing person is in the company of another under circumstances that indicate
danger;
c. The missing person may have disappeared involuntarily under circumstances that suggest
abduction or kidnapping;
d. The missing person is an un-emancipated juvenile; or
e. The person has gone missing subsequent to a disaster.
2. A missing person report (electronic or hard copy) shall be on file to support a missing person
entry.
3. A record for a missing person who is under the age of 21 should be entered into VCIN and NCIC
using one of the appropriate categories (Disability, Endangered, Involuntary, Juvenile or
Catastrophe Victim) within two (2) hours of receipt of the minimum data required to enter an
NCIC record.
4. A missing person report filed with the department is sufficient documentation for entering a
juvenile in the NCIC Missing Person File.
E. Logistics
1. Establish an Incident Command Center.
2. Establish and advertise a dedicated telephone line for receipt of tips and leads. Ensure there is
sufficient staff to respond to incoming calls.
3. Assign experienced investigators to lead the investigation and to determine and monitor the
investigative direction of the case. The lead investigator shall determine the following:
a. If search and rescue resources should be alerted and placed on notice or if a request for
immediate assistance is require.
b. If the news media should be contacted and what information should be made public.
c. If the use of social media is appropriate.
4. Obtain DNA samples from the missing subject's possessions (e.g. hairbrush, hats, toothbrush, and
bed linens etc.).
5. Contact all local hospitals, urgent care facilities, and the Medical Examiner's office for injured or
deceased persons fitting the description of the missing subject.
6. Determine if recording devices such as traffic, red light, bus cameras, or license plate readers are
used in the area or in logical travel routes to and from the area.
7. Contact local government and commercial trash companies to request delaying trash collection in
the vicinity of the last known location of the missing subject or place of abduction.
a. Determine if it is appropriate to request the trash from the missing subject's neighborhood
be segregated.
b. Obtain information regarding trash collection schedules, transfer stations, landfill
locations, and specific dump sites in the event subsequent information determines that a
search of these locations is necessary.
F. Investigation
226.OPR 4
1. Establish a preliminary timeline documenting the activities and locations of the missing subject,
associated events, and individuals pertinent to the investigation.
2. Canvass the neighborhood/area and conduct a roadblock canvas at streets and intersections
surrounding the missing subjects last known location on the day following the missing subject's
disappearance. Canvassing identifies individuals who routinely travel through the area who may
have information pertinent to the investigation.
a. Missing person fliers shall be distributed during the canvases.
b. If the missing subject has still not been located a second roadblock canvas shall be
repeated the same day of the week and time of the incident the following week.
3. Request assistance and coordinate with the Halifax County Emergency Services Coordinator as
applicable.
4. Obtain permission to search homes, businesses, and parked vehicles surrounding the missing
subjects last known location.
5. Separate witnesses and conduct comprehensive interviews immediately using a standardized set of
questions with pertinent witnesses including children. Standardized questions ensure completeness
and uniformity of the information collected. Witnesses' statements shall be compared with known
information and discrepancies in statements shall be clarified and/or investigated.
6. Conduct interviews using a standardized set of questions with family members, friends, and co-
workers. If the missing subject is a child, interviews shall also be conducted with school officials
and classmates.
7. Conduct comprehensive interviews with suspect(s).
8. Identify any desktop or laptop computers tablets, cellular telephones, gaming systems, and other
computing devices the missing subject or other family members had access to as well as email
addresses, social media accounts, passwords, and online identities.
a. Issue a preservation order on all accounts.
b. Obtain consent or a search warrant and review recent emails, chats, and other online
communications for any information pertinent to the investigation. (The Virginia State
Police (VSP) High Tech Crime Division (HTCD) can be contacted for assistance at 804-
674-2767. After normal business hours contact the local VSP division dispatch center to
request assistance of HTCD agent.)
9. Initiate credit card and bank inquiries to determine if and where purchases have been made since
the missing subject was last seen, as applicable.
10. Obtain and view copies of security videos from all businesses, residences, and any structures in
the vicinity and along travel routes that may have been used by the missing subject or an offender
entering or leaving the area. Contact the managers of area businesses directly (employees may not
be aware of security cameras) and seize recordings as soon as possible to minimize the risk of
crucial footage being recorded over or deleted.
11. Identify and interview known and registered sex offenders residing or working in or adjacent to
the missing subject's last known location.
12. Obtain and execute search warrants.
13. Review and revise the missing subject's timeline based on information obtained from the
investigation.
226.OPR 5
14. Prioritize and pursue all leads.
15. Continue to communicate the most current and accurate information to patrol officers and
neighboring law enforcement departments and make updates to alerts (e.g. Amber and Senior) as
applicable. Supervisors shall ensure comprehensive case information is provided and investigative
leads are either completed or re-assigned during shift changes.
V. Location of Missing Person and Case Closure
1. When missing subject (adult) has been located, officers shall:
a. Verify the identity of the individual;
b. Advise the individual they are the subject of a missing person investigation;
c. Obtain medical care as appropriate;
d. Question the subject about the circumstances of his/her disappearance and determine if
there is a criminal act that requires further investigation; and
e. Determine if the individual wishes his or her family or the reporting party to be informed
of his/her whereabouts. Officers shall inform the family or the reporting party the
individual has been located but may not provide the missing subject's location unless
authorized.
2. If the missing subject is a child, the officer shall:

a. Determine whether an abuse or neglectful home environment contributed to the child's
disappearance;
b. Obtain a complete medical exam to identify and treat injuries;
c. Notify the parents/guardians and arrange for the child to be picked up or contact social
services in the case of abuse and neglect; and
d. Notify the Virginia Missing Children Information Clearinghouse the child has been
located.
3. All agencies and information systems previously contacted for assistance shall be notified as soon
as possible when a missing subject is located.
4. The subject's information shall be removed from VCIN/NCIC systems.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
226.OPR 6

N/A
SUBJECT: PATROL RESPONSE TO ACTIVE SHOOTER IN PUBLIC SCHOOLS

OR BUILDINGS
I. POLICY:
It is not unusual for a tactical team to arrive at the scene of a barricaded incident and find that patrol
personnel have contained the suspect within a secure perimeter. There is generally time for the tactical
team to deploy their personnel without serious concern of suspect escape. Once the incident has been
isolated, time enables patrol and/or tactical personnel to formulate a structured and deliberate plan.
But there are scenarios that require immediate deployment and rapid intervention of patrol personnel prior
to the arrival of the tactical team. In these cases delayed deployment could have catastrophic
consequences. These scenarios often involve an ongoing “shots-fired” or “downed officer/citizen rescue.”
It may also necessitate the immediate and rapid deployment of law enforcement officers to contain and
prevent the escape of an armed and dangerous person.
II. DEFINITIONS:
Immediate Deployment/Rapid Intervention – The swift and immediate deployment of law enforcement
resources to an on-going, life threatening situation where delayed deployment could otherwise result in
death or serious bodily injury to innocent persons. Immediate deployment/rapid intervention tactics are not
a substitute for conventional response to a barricaded gunman/hostage situation.
Active Shooter – One or more subjects who participate in a random or systematic shooting spree,
demonstrating their intent to continuously harm others. The overriding objective of an active shooter
appears to be that of mass murder, rather than other criminal conduct, such as robbery, hostage taking, etc.
For the purpose of this policy, the term “active shooter” will also include anyone who uses any other deadly
weapon to systematically or randomly inflict death or serious bodily injury on others over a period of time.
Incident Command System - This is the model tool for command, control, communication and coordination
to a response. It provides a means to coordinate the efforts of individual officers and agencies as they work
toward the common goal of stabilizing the incident and protecting life, property, and the environment
during an active shooter incident.
Contact Team - A team that is usually comprised of four (4) to five (5) police officers with the purpose of
locating the active shooter(s) and preventing further violence.
Search and Rescue Team - A team that is usually comprised of four (4) or more police officers with the
purpose of locating and providing safe passage to a secure area for injured and non-injured victims.
Gender – the word “he” or any other word importing the masculine gender shall extend and be applied to
females as well as males.
III. PROCEDURE – WHEN TO DEPLOY:
A. To confront and neutralize aggressive deadly behavior:
227.OPR 1
1. This event is ongoing and the suspect(s) is actively engaged in causing death or serious bodily
injury. This may be the result of:
a. an “active shooter”
b. an attack with edged weapons
c. placing and/or detonating explosive devices
2. The incident location, by its very nature, is believed to contain multiple victims:
a. Schools (including day care facilities)
b. Crowded parks and open areas
c. Playgrounds
d. Sporting events
e. High rise structures, etc.
B. To affect a citizen/officer rescue:
1. A citizen or law enforcement officer is gravely wounded and delayed recovery could result in their
demise.
2. The suspect may or may not be actively involved in an assault, however, an assault is imminent
and immediate recovery of a wounded citizen/officer is crucial.
3. Although possibly uninjured, due to the location of the victim(s), citizen(s), or officer(s), an
immediate recovery may be necessary to prevent death or serious bodily injury.
III. PROCEDURE - INITIAL RESPONDERS:
A. The initial responder is most likely to be a patrol officer. The actions of the initial responders are
critical and certain guidelines should be followed, if practical:
1. Assess the situation
a. Establish an Incident Commander (IC) and put into place an Incident Command System
(ICS). Typically, the first arriving officer will assume the role of IC until relieved by
supervisory personnel.
b. The ICS will incorporate police, fire, rescue and other essential personnel to establish a
unified command system to effectively manage this crisis.
c. Gather information as rapidly as possible. This can be achieved through various means,
including, but not limited to:
(1) Dispatcher obtained information

(2) Reports from fleeing citizens
(3) Sounds of gunfire/explosions
(4) Officer’s own observations.
(5) Any source of credible information/intelligence
2. Broadcast situation to responding units:
a. Location (as precise as possible) and number of suspects (if known)

b. Type of weapons involved
c. State if immediate deployment/rapid intervention tactics are appropriate and necessary.
d. Safe approach route to staging area for arriving officers.
227.OPR 2
3. If immediate deployment / rapid intervention tactics are deemed necessary, the initial IC will:
a. Assemble a Contact or Rescue Team. The first responding officers, up to five, shall form
a contact team and immediately begin to move towards any known suspects, using all
immediately available protective equipment to aid in their entry. The most experienced
officer who arrives should be the initial contact team leader. The conduct of a contact
team should be to:
(1) Stop deadly behavior

(2) Limit suspect’s movement
(3) Continue past victims to confront any active suspects
(4) Continue past unexploded devices
(5) Communicate progress to responders (location of victims/explosives, etc.)
(6) Confront any suspect(s) through control and arrest, containment, or deadly force.
b. Subsequently arriving officers and/supervisory personnel will:
(1) Assemble additional contact teams and/or rescue teams with the following goals:
(a) Enter and/or approach the location to locate victims

(b) Extract victims to a safe area
(c) Notify medical personnel
(d) If encountered, act as a contact team and engage any suspect(s) through control
and arrest, containment, or deadly force.
c. If areas within the affected location are deemed to be relatively safe for responders,
subsequent rescue teams may provide tactical cover for rescue personnel to enter the
scene for rapid access to critically injured victims.
IV. PROCEDURE - WHAT TO EXPECT UPON ENTRY:
A. The dynamic environment of an active shooter scenario will bring with it a host of problems. These
problems may include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Noise from alarms, people screaming, etc., negatively affecting communications.

2. Confusion. Victims hiding and frightened-not responding to law enforcement directions.
3. Carnage and multiple traumatic injuries.
4. Fire suppression systems and sprinkler systems.
5. Explosive devices, if encountered:
a. Visually inspect device for potential detonation (timing device, trip wire, lit fuse, etc).
b. Identify and, if possible, verbally report location(s) of device(s).
c. DO NOT move or touch them.
d. Move past device when part of a contact/rescue team.
V. PROCEDURE - MUTUAL AID SUPPORT:
A. Immediately following the initial notification of an active shooter at any location within the Town of South
Boston, resources from surrounding jurisdictions will undoubtedly begin to arrive to offer assistance. The
incident commander will have the responsibility of allocating these resources. They may include:
1) Halifax County Sheriff’s Office

2) Halifax Police Department
3) Virginia State Police
227.OPR 3
4) Federal Law Enforcement Agencies to include FBI, ATF, etc
5) Off-duty officers residing within the area or in the area on unrelated matters
6) Law enforcement agencies from adjoining counties
7) Fire and Rescue resources. However, only marked emergency vehicles should be allowed
access to the incident.
8) State agencies that offer relief assistance.
9) Federal agencies that offer relief assistance.
10) Private corporations and citizens offering relief assistance.
B. If a responding officer, as listed above, arrives to provide assistance and is able to do so, on-scene officers
will decide the best manner in which assistance can be rendered. These officers may also be required to act
as members in the initial contact team.
Additional mutual aid support will be handled in accordance with established mutual aid agreements and
through the Incident Command System.
VI. PROCEDURE - USE OF FORCE:
When the suspect(s) actions present an immediate threat of death or serious bodily injury, it may become
necessary to use deadly force to stop that behavior. All applicable guidelines concerning the use of force by a
law enforcement officer will apply.
VII. PROCEDURE - WHEN TACTICAL UNITS ARRIVE:
A. When tactical teams arrive, they are generally better-equipped and trained to resolve crisis scenarios.
However, due to the possible size and scopes of an active shooter scenario, continued assistance by first
responders is critical. As soon as practical, the incident commander will instruct responding personnel to:
1. Coordinate and relinquish contact team responsibility, unless continued operations by patrol units
are deemed necessary by tactical team personnel.
2. Assist with containment responsibilities.
3. Assist with rescue teams if necessary.
4. Act as a “pathfinder” for tactical units:
a. Remain at furthest point of insertion until relieved by tactical unit.

b. Direct tactical officers to last known suspect(s) location.
c. Report location(s) of explosives.
d. Provide any pertinent information such as known suspect description, weapons, etc.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
227.OPR 4
N/A
SUBJECT: HAZARDOUS MATERIALS INCIDENTS
I. POLICY:
Hazardous materials are transported through the Town of South Boston, either by truck or rail. Therefore, the
potential for an accident involving hazardous substances is always present. The extent of damage from an
accident involving toxic or otherwise dangerous substances depends largely on the response of emergency
personnel and their ability to correctly identify and properly administer corrective action to rectify such a
situation. The Department expects officers to be competent in basic skills and abilities necessary to identify the
presence of hazardous materials and perform first responder services. The Department does not expect officers
to exercise duties or responsibilities beyond first-responder stage.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures for the initial response and investigation of accidents involving vehicles carrying
hazardous materials.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. General
Because of the hazard which might exist or may develop through an accident, especially a derailment or
overturned vehicle transporting hazardous materials, officers must exercise extreme caution. Therefore,
officers shall take the following actions:
1. Any evidence of leaking liquid or vapor will be sufficient that officers shall assume that exposure has
occurred with possible contamination of people and facilities and shall seal off the area until positive
identification can be made by the fire department, which shall be immediately called. The fire
department will assume authority and responsibility for emergency procedures.
a. Officers shall advise the Emergency Operations Center as soon as possible of the exact location of
the hazardous materials incident and safe approach routes for emergency vehicles.
b. Officers shall rescue injured persons at the hazardous materials site only if they are properly
equipped. Officers shall not unduly risk contamination.
a. Officers shall summon back-up units to establish a perimeter, setting up roadblocks or barricades
as appropriate.
b. Officers shall evacuate the area.
(1) If the nature of the hazardous materials does not permit approaching the scene, keep at least
228.OPR 1
300 feet away and keep bystanders at least 1,500 feet away.
(2) If the hazardous materials incident involves radiological materials, keep at least 200 feet
away.
3. Identification of hazardous materials may be accomplished by:
a. Placards:
Placards are displayed at the front, rear, and on both sides of all vehicles (including rail cars)
hauling hazardous materials; however, experience has shown that placards are sometimes either
not displayed or misidentified placards are made of paper so if the vehicle is on fire, placards may
have burned before the officer's arrival. Each police vehicle shall have an Emergency Response
Guidebook identifying placards in use.
b. Driver:
When the accident involves a truck, the driver of the truck may be able to supply information
about the load transported; however, the driver is not required to know a great deal about cargo or
emergency measures for handling it except for explosives. In case of explosives, the driver is
required to have in possession and be familiar with documents containing procedures to be
followed in the event of accident or delay.
c. Shipping papers:
(1) Where the hazardous material is transported by truck, the driver is required to have a copy of
the shipping papers which show the name of the materials, classification, and quantity. By
using these papers and the Emergency Response Guide, the officer can identify the hazard
associated with the material and ways of handling it.
(2) Where the hazardous material is transported by rail, the shipping papers will be located in the
caboose and will have attached to them instructions for handling all hazardous materials on
the train. Additionally, a manifest is located in the engine listing each car on the train in order
from the engine back to the caboose and the contents of each car. If the conductor is not at the
caboose when emergency personnel arrive, officers shall try to find them because he will have
these papers in his possession.
d. Chem-cards:
To supplement the placarding system, many shippers of chemicals provide the drivers with
Chem-cards which provide emergency information. Although Chem-cards are subject only to
voluntary use, the officer shall ask the driver for them.
4. If responding to an accident scene involving hazardous materials approach the accident scene up wind
if possible. If radiological materials are involved, do not approach; await fire department personnel or
HAZMAT teams who have special monitoring equipment.
5. The on-duty supervisor shall respond and ensure appropriate notifications are made.
6. Normal accident investigation procedures will be suspended until such time as appropriate clearance
has been received, whereupon the accident will be investigated and reported.
228.OPR 2
B. Evacuation
1. When the possibility of an evacuation of all residents/inhabitants or part or all of the town exists, the
Chief of Police shall consider:
a. Manpower requirements.
b. Method of notifying persons to be evacuated (i.e., door to door, PA system, use of local radio
stations, etc.).
c. Size of area and number of people living in the area to be evacuated. (Area maps)
d. Use of mass transportation to move evacuated persons.
e. Housing of evacuated persons, where possible, in local/county schools.
f. Danger or hazard to people in adjacent jurisdictions and notification of appropriate authorities in

that jurisdiction.
g. Security of evacuated areas to prevent looting, vandalism, premature return (the fire chief will
make the decision when it is appropriate for people to return home).
2. The on-duty supervisor shall consult with the fire chief and the HAZMAT coordinator on any decision
to evacuate an area. The supervisor shall effect the evacuation upon order of the fire chief. In the
event of evacuation the supervisor shall establish a command post, ensuring that the following tasks
are undertaken:
a. Establish emergency communications link with appropriate authorities.
b. Evaluate the size of the area and number of people to be evacuated.
c. Assign personnel to notify people through the use of a PA system or door-to-door contact.
d. Notify the news media.
e. Arrange for mass transportation, if necessary.
f. Arrange for temporary housing of evacuees.
g. Arrange for security of evacuated areas.
C. Key Contact Agency Information Requirements:
The key contact agencies and persons are available for evaluation and assistance in the handling of
hazardous material incidents and evacuation. Every effort must be made to obtain the following
information before contacting these agencies:
1. Location of the accident.
228.OPR 3
2. Hazardous materials involved and shipper, if known.
3. The color and number on any labels on the carrier or cargo.
4. Type of environment (residential, rural, business, etc.).
5. Size of the container and amount of product leaking.
6. If rail, location of hazardous material car from the head of the train, car number and description of car
(i.e., tank car, box car, etc.).
7. If aircraft, initial and number.
D. Key Agencies:
Depending on the hazardous materials involved, one or more of the following agencies will be contacted:
1. Chemical Transportation Emergency Center (CHEMTREC), (800) 424-9300 (toll free);
2. Environmental Protection Agency’s National Response Center, (800) 424-8802;
3. Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (804) 786-2373.
4. Virginia Department of Emergency Management, (304) 674-2400, Richmond. (Use this number for
radiological emergencies, toxic substances.)
5. Hazardous Chemicals – Department of Emergency Management, Richmond, (804) 897-6500.
6. Radioactive Materials - Department of Health, (804) 786-5932, off duty, (804) 323-2300; ask for
Radiological Health Specialist support.
7. Etiological (disease causing agents) Agents - Department of Health, (804) 786-0000.
8. Oil or polluting substances in water - Water Control Board, (804) 257-0080.
9. Hazardous Chemicals - Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services, (804) 786-7900.
10. Virginia State Department of Emergency Management / HAZMAT Team: (304) 674-2400 or 1-800-
468-8892, if additional state or federal HAZMAT teams are needed.
11. State Emergency Operations Center / Richmond, VA / Phone: (804) 323-2300
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
228.OPR 4
CHIEF OF POLICE
228.OPR 5
N/A
SUBJECT: EYEWITNESS IDENTIFICATION
I. POLICY:
Over time eyewitness identification procedures have been changed to incorporate psychological studies of
eyewitness memory and behavior. The procedures detailed in this policy incorporate recommendations from
multiple reports on eyewitness identifications. This policy details the manner(s) in which to obtain
identification through a lineup which is composed in a manner that will minimize the risk of misidentification
and have stronger evidentiary value. Specifically, use of these procedures should maximize that reliability of
identifications, minimize unjust accusations of innocent persons and establish evidence that is reliable and
conforms to established legal procedure.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish policy for preparation and presentation of photographic and in-person lineups.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Lineup
Any procedure in which a victim or witness to a crime or other incident is asked to identify a suspect from
among a group of persons in order to determine or confirm the identity of the suspect. Such procedures
involve either actually viewing of persons (in live line-ups or show-ups) or viewing of photographs (in a
photo lineup).
B. Photo Lineup
An identification procedure in which an array of photographs, including a photograph of the suspected
perpetrator of an offense and additional photographs of other persons not suspected of the offense, is
displayed to an eyewitness either in hard copy form or via computer for the purpose of determining whether
the eyewitness identifies the suspect as the perpetrator.
C. Sequential Lineup
A method of administration where photographs are shown to the victim/witness one at a time, with an
independent decision on each, before the next photo is shown.
D. Blind Administrator
The person administering the line-up has no knowledge of which person in the photo/live line-up is the
subject.
E. Blinded Administration
This is a lineup procedure in which the administrator may know the identity of the suspect, but by virtue
of the use of procedures and/or technology to accomplish this purpose, does not know which lineup
member is being viewed by the eyewitness.
229.OPR 1
F. Confidence Statements
A statement in the victim/witness’ own words, articulating their level of confidence in the identification
taken at the time the identification is made.
G. Fillers
Non-suspect photographs or line-up members
H. Folder Shuffle Method

A method requiring the lineup administrator to place a photograph of the suspect and filler photographs
into blank folders with one photograph per folder. The folders are then “shuffled” before being presented
individually to the witness.
I. Show-up
A show-up procedure is an identification procedure in which an eyewitness is presented with a single
suspect for the purpose of determining whether the eyewitness identifies this individual as the perpetrator.
IV. PROCEDURES - General responsibilities
A. Department personnel shall strictly adhere to established procedures for conducting suspect lineups in
order to avoid the possibility of error or of undue suggestiveness to witnesses.
B. The identification procedure should be conducted in a manner that promotes the accuracy, reliability,
fairness and objectivity of the witness’ identification. These steps are designed to ensure the accuracy
of identification or non-identification decisions.
C. Department personnel shall be trained and receive refresher training in lineup procedures to establish
uniformity and consistency of such procedures and to establish a high level of competence in carrying
out this important aspect of a criminal investigation.
D. Department personnel shall report any known errors, flaws or non-conformance with established
procedures in the conduct of a suspect lineup that they may observe or become aware of, to their
supervisor in order that corrective actions may be taken and safeguards established to protect the
innocent.
E. The Department will confer with the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office in establishing and maintaining
lineup procedures in order to assure the best use of this type of evidence and to assure that procedures
established are compatible with the prosecution of criminal cases. Likewise, instructions given to
witnesses during a lineup procedure will be those established and approved in consultation with the
Commonwealth Attorney.
V. PROCEDURES
Prior to a photo or live lineup, the investigating officer should record as complete a description as possible
of the perpetrator provided by the eyewitness and in the eyewitness’ own words. This statement should also
include information regarding conditions under which the eyewitness observed the perpetrator including
location, time, distance, obstructions, lighting, weather conditions and other impairments, including, but not
limited to alcohol, drugs, stress, the presence of a weapon and any other relevant conditions. The
eyewitness should also be asked if they need glasses or contact lenses and whether they were wearing them
at the time of the offense.
229.OPR 2
SHOW-UP IDENTIFICATIONS (single suspect identification on scene)
A. Show-ups should only be performed using a live suspect and only in exigent circumstances that require
the immediate display of a suspect to an eyewitness.
B. Officers should not conduct a show-up with a single photograph; if officers want to determine if an
eyewitness can make an identification using a photo, a photo lineup should be employed.
C. The eyewitness should be transported to a neutral, non-law enforcement location where the suspect is
being detained for the purposes of a show-up.
D. Prior to being shown the suspect the eyewitness should be provided with the following instructions and
Department form “Eyewitness Instructions (Form 229.OPR 01)” be completed:
1. The perpetrator may or may not be the person being presented;

2. The eyewitness should not feel compelled to make an identification;
3. The investigation will continue regardless of whether an identification is made;
4. The procedure requires the investigator to ask the eyewitness to state, in his or her own words,
how certain they are of the identification they have made (do not use a number scale or
percentage); and
5. The eyewitness should not discuss the identification procedure with other eyewitnesses
involved in the case and should not speak to the media.
E. If there are multiple eyewitnesses, only one eyewitness at a time should participate in the show-up
procedure, independent of the others. If a positive identification is made, and an arrest is justified,
additional eyewitnesses should be shown live or photo lineups.
F. If identification is made, the officer should seek and document a clear statement from the eyewitness,
at the time of the identification and in the eyewitness’ own words, as to the eyewitness’ confidence
level that the person identified is the perpetrator (do not use a number scale or percentage).
G. Officers should photograph a suspect at the time and place of the show-up to preserve a record of his or
her appearance at the time of the show-up.
H. When possible officers should video record the show-up procedure especially the instructions given to
the eyewitness and the moment when the eyewitness sees the suspect and their remarks along with the
officer’s interview of the eyewitness after seeing the suspect.
PHOTO LINEUP IDENTIFICATIONS
Folder Shuffle Method (photo lineup shown by investigating officer) – creating and organizing
The “Folder System” was devised to address concerns surrounding limited personnel resources while
allowing for blind administration. If the investigating officer of a particular case is going to conduct a
photo lineup, the following instructions are recommended:
- Obtain one (1) suspect photograph that resembles the description of the perpetrator provided
by the witness.
- Obtain five (5) filler photographs that match the description of the perpetrator, but do not
cause the suspect photograph to unduly stand out.
- Obtain ten (10) file folders. [four of the folders will not contain any photos and will serve as
‘dummy’ folders].
A. Affix one filler photo to the inside of the first folder and label it number “1”.
229.OPR 3
B. Affix the suspect photograph to the inside of the next folder but do not number that folder yet.
C. Affix four (4) filler photographs (one each) into the next empty folders but do not number these
folders yet either.
D. Shuffle the folders (with the exception of folder #1) so that the administrator is unaware of which
folder the suspect is in.
E. Label the shuffled folders # 2 through #6.
F. The remaining folders will not contain photos and should be labeled #7 through #10. These
folders will only contain a page with the following text: “THIS FOLDER INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK”. (This is done so that the witness does not know when he or she has seen the last
photo. If you use more than 5 filler photos you must increase the number of these blank folders by
a margin of 1 new blank folder for every 1 filler photo added to the required 5.)
G. Place all folders in numerical order (#1 through #10) for presentation of the lineup. Record the
order in which the pictures are to be shown; preserve all photos in their original condition.
Blind Administrator Method (photo lineup shown by officer with no knowledge of suspect) –
organizing and creating
A. The officer investigating an incident should select another officer to serve as the blind administrator.
The blind administrator must not know which member of the lineup is the “true” suspect in order to
avoid inadvertent signs or body language that may lead or cause a witness to make an incorrect
identification. The blind administrator should be thoroughly familiar with these Department
procedures. [Alternatively a ‘blinded’ administrator may be used, namely an officer who knows the
suspect’s identity but is not in a position to see which members of the line-up are being viewed by the
eyewitness. This can be accomplished, for instance, through the use of the folder shuffle method or via
laptop technology.]
B. A photo lineup should be composed so the fillers (photos of persons who resemble the suspect)
generally resemble the eyewitness’s description of the perpetrator, while ensuring that the lineup is
comprised in such a manner that the suspect does not unduly stand out from the fillers. However,
complete uniformity of features is not required. Avoid reusing filler photos if the eyewitness has
previously viewed a photo lineup in connection with the identification of another person suspected of
involvement in the offense, the fillers in the lineup should be different from the fillers used in prior
lineups conducted during the course of the investigation of the incident.
C. When there are multiple suspects, each identification procedure should include only one suspect.
D. Avoid mixing color with black and white photos. Photos should be either all black and white or all
color.
E. Cover any portions of mugshots or other photographs that provide identifying information. Ensure that
no writings or information concerning previous arrest(s) will be visible to the witness. If it is
necessary to block-out or cover a notation, such as a name on one photo, then similar blocking-out or
covering marks should be placed on all photos so that they will appear alike.
F. Use photos of the same size and basic composition, and never mix mugshots with other snapshots or
include more than one photo of the same suspect.
229.OPR 4
G. Select fillers (non suspects) who generally fit the witnesses’ description of the offender. When there is
a limited or inadequate description of the offender provided by the witness, or when the description of
the offender differs significantly from the appearance of the suspect, fillers should resemble the suspect
in significant features.
H. If multiple photos of the suspect are reasonably available to the officer, select a photo of the suspect
that resembles the suspect’s description or appearance at the time of the incident.
I. Ensure that the photos are reasonably contemporary.
J. Include a minimum of five fillers (non-suspects) per photo identification.
K. Create a consistent appearance between the suspect and fillers so that the photos depict individuals
who are reasonably similar in age, height, weight and general appearance, and are of the same sex and
race. However, avoid using fillers who so closely resemble the suspect that a person familiar with the
suspect might find it difficult to distinguish the suspect from the fillers.
L. If there are multiple eyewitnesses, each eyewitness should view the lineup independently and
separately and the suspect should be placed in a different position in the photo lineup for each
eyewitness.
M. Review the array, once completed, to ensure that the suspect does not unduly stand out.
N. Assign each photo in the lineup an identification number. Record the identification number on the
back of each photo along with any other pertinent information. Refer to that photo only by that
number. The nature of the identification number should be purposely complex to the witness, so that
any inadvertent glance should not significantly hinder the identification process or alert the witness as
to the identity of the actual suspect.
O. Record the presentation order of each lineup and the source(s) of all photos used; preserve all photos in
their original condition.
Conducting the photo lineup identification (procedures for presenting photo lineup to eyewitness)
A. The officer administering the lineup process should provide instructions to the witness using
Department form “Eyewitness Instructions 229.OPR (01)”. Instructions told to the witness should
include that the perpetrator may or may not be contained in the photos he or she is about to see and
that the administrator does not know which folder/photo contains the suspect.
B. Instruct the witness that if the offender is seen in the lineup, he/she might not appear exactly the same
as on the date of the incident because features such as clothing, head or facial hair can change.
Additionally, photos do not always depict the true complexion of a person, which might be lighter or
darker than shown in the photo. Be careful not to imply or lead the witness to believe that the suspect’s
appearance has actually changed in any way.
C. Provide the following additional viewing instructions to the witness:
1. Individual photos will be viewed one at a time.

2. Photos are in random order.
3. Take as much time as needed in making a decision about each photo.
4. All photos will be shown, even if identification is made prior to viewing all photos.
D. Assure that law enforcement and/or prosecutorial personnel present and involved in the case are
knowledgeable about the procedure so that they will not interfere with or influence any witness during
229.OPR 5
the process. Unnecessary personnel should be removed from the location where the process is being
conducted.
E. Confirm that the witness understands the nature of the sequential procedure.
F. Without looking at the photo in the folder (when using the folder shuffle method), the administrator is
to hand each folder to the witness individually in the predetermined order so the witness can look at
the photo inside. When using the blind administrator method the administrator is to show the witness
each picture individually in the predetermined order. The order of the photos should be preserved, in a
facedown position, in order to document the process accurately. The witness may review the lineup a
second time but the photos must be presented in the same order they were the first time.
G. Instruct the witness that the procedure – only if identification is made - requires the officer to ask the
witness to state, in his or her own words, how certain he or she is of any identification at the time that
the identification is made (do not use a number scale or percentage). Also document the identification
utilizing Department form “Eyewitness Identification Form 229.OPR (02)”.
H. Instruct the witness not to discuss the identification procedure or its results with other witnesses
involved in the case and discourage contacts with the media.
I. The administrator should then document and record the results of the procedure. This should include:
the date, time, and location of the lineup procedure; the name of the administrator; the names of all of
the individuals present during the lineup; the number of photos shown and the order in which they
were shown; copies of the photographs themselves; the order in which the folders were presented; the
sources of all of the photos that were used; a statement of confidence in the witness’ own words as to
the certainty of his or her identification taken immediately upon reaction to viewing; and any
additional information the administrator deems pertinent to the procedure.
LIVE LINEUP PROCEDURES
A. The officer investigating an incident should select another officer to serve as the blind administrator.
The blind administrator must not know which member of the lineup is the “true” suspect in order to
avoid inadvertent signs or body language that may lead or cause a witness to make an incorrect
identification. The blind administrator should be thoroughly familiar with this procedure.
B. Assure that law enforcement and/or prosecutorial personnel present and involved in the case are
knowledgeable about the procedure so that they will not interfere with or influence any witness during
the process. Unnecessary personnel should be removed from the location where the process is being
conducted.
C. A live lineup should be composed so the fillers generally resemble the eyewitness’s description of the
perpetrator, while ensuring that the lineup is comprised in such a manner that the suspect does not
unduly stand out from the fillers. However, complete uniformity of features is not required. Avoid
reusing live lineup members if the eyewitness has previously viewed a live lineup in connection with
the identification of another person suspected of involvement in the offense, the fillers in the lineup
should be different from the fillers used in prior lineups performed during the course of the
investigation into the offense.
D. When there are multiple suspects, each identification procedure should include only one suspect.
E. Select fillers (non suspects) who generally fit the witnesses’ description of the offender. When there is
a limited or inadequate description of the offender provided by the witness, or when the description of
the offender differs significantly from the appearance of the suspect, fillers should resemble the suspect
in significant features.
229.OPR 6
F. There should be a minimum of four fillers (non-suspects) per live lineup.
G. If there are multiple eyewitnesses, each eyewitness should view the lineup independently and
separately and the suspect should be placed in a different position in the live lineup for each
eyewitness.
H. Review the array, once completed, to ensure that the suspect does not unduly stand out.
I. Assign each person a lineup identification number. Refer to that person only by that number. The
nature of the identification number should be purposely complex to the witness, so that any inadvertent
glance should not significantly hinder the identification process or alert the witness as to the identity of
the actual suspect.
J. A group photo should be taken of all persons in the lineup together to illustrate size differences among
the lineup participants. This photo must not be shown to the witness, but will be included with the
completed case file.
K. There is a right to have counsel present at a live lineup, where the defendant/suspect has been charged.
L. Advise the accused that he/she may take any position in the live lineup that he or she prefers and may
change positions prior to summoning a new witness.
M. Ensure that witnesses are not permitted to see nor are they shown any photographs of the suspect
immediately prior to the live lineup.
N. Ensure that no more than one witness views each live lineup at a time and that they are not permitted to
speak with one another during live lineup proceedings.
VII. PROCEDURES - Recording Identification Results
A. When conducting an identification procedure, the officer administering the lineup/show-up procedure
shall preserve the outcome of the procedure by documenting any identification or non-identification
results obtained from the witness. A complete and accurate record of the outcome of the identification
procedure is crucial. This record can be a critical document in the investigation and any subsequent
court proceedings.
B. When documenting the identification procedure, the officer administering the lineup should record
both identification and non-identification results, including a statement of confidence, in the
eyewitness’ own words. [The results should not be ranked]
C. If the eyewitness makes an identification, the administrator shall seek and document a clear statement
from the eyewitness, at the time of the identification and in the eyewitness’ own words, as to the
eyewitness’ confidence level that the person identified in a given identification procedure (this should
not be in the form of a ranking by number or percentage).
D. If the eyewitness identifies a person as the perpetrator, the eyewitness shall not be provided any
information concerning such person before the administrator obtains the eyewitness’ confidence
statement about the selection. After the eyewitness’ confidence statement is obtained, the administrator
shall not tell the eyewitness information about how accurate they were in their identification or provide
additional information about the defendant.
229.OPR 7
E. Document in writing the lineup/show-up procedures, including identification information and sources
of all photos used, names of all persons present at the lineup, and date and time of the identification
procedure.
F. Ensure that the results are signed and dated by the witness and the person administering the lineup.
G. Ensure that no materials indicating previous identification results are visible to the witness.
H. Ensure that the witness does not write on or mark any materials that will be used in other identification
procedures.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
229.OPR 8
N/A
SUBJECT: RESPONSE TO PERSONS WITH MENTAL ILLNESS
I. POLICY:
In accordance with the mission and values of the South Boston Police Department, the Department is
committed to the compassionate treatment of the mentally ill or those suffering a mental health crisis.
Though it may be necessary, at times, to enforce the law, officers shall strive to refer mentally ill
person for treatment, in lieu of criminal charges, when and where possible and appropriate. When
necessary, officers will take the proper action to detain and/or transport mentally ill persons or persons
suffering a mental health crisis for treatment, to properly identified mental health and / or medical
facilities as required by law.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to provide guidance to officers when encountering persons with mental
illness or who may be suffering a mental health crisis, in accordance with the Code of Virginia which
governs civil mental detention procedures, and the commitment of juvenile respondents. All officers
will follow the policies set within the order when dealing with individuals that display symptoms of a
mental disability, illness, injury, or crisis.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Initial call for service:
When an officer initially receives a call for a person who is possibly suffering a mental
health crisis the emergency communications dispatcher should have already obtained as
much information as possible to include but not limited to:
1. What were the actions of the persons in question

2. Was a crime committed, and if so, what kind
3. Is/are the person(s) armed
4. Were there any acts of violence
5. Did the person(s) take any drugs and/or drink alcohol recently
6. Name, age, and/or mental condition/diagnosis of the subject(s), if known
7. History of mental illness / possible medications the subject(s) may be on
8. Relationship of the subject(s) to the caller
9. Subject(s) treating physician and / or social worker if known
The emergency communications dispatcher will code the case in CADS as a mental
health related call for service. If a CIT (crisis intervention training) certified officer is
available they should respond to the call and two officers should respond to these types of
calls if at all possible.
B. Handling calls for service:
It is important to remember that just because someone is suffering from a mental illness
230.OPR 1
does not mean that they may be violent. However, handling individuals who are known
or suspected to being mentally ill or who may be suffering a mental health crisis carries
the potential for violence. This will require an officer to make difficult judgments about
the mental state and intent of the individual, and requires special attention and
understanding to effectively and legally deal with the person so as to avoid violence or
other potential issues. For this purpose, whenever possible a CIT certified officer should
handle an individual believed to be having a mental health crisis. Any time a person is
taken into custody to receive help for a mental illness, either by a paperless or paper
Emergency Custody Order (ECO) or by a Temporary Detention Order (TDO) the officer
initially taking the person into custody shall complete an “ECO / TDO Report Form
(Form 230.OPR (01))” and turn it into the Records Department.
C. Paperless and paper Emergency Custody Order process:
Code section 37.2-808 provides police officers with the authority to take a person into non-judicial
custody for the purpose of a mental evaluation when probable cause exists. A law enforcement
officer who, based upon his or her observation or the reliable reports of others, has probable cause
to believe that a person meets the criteria for emergency custody as stated in code 37.2-808 G may
take that person into custody and transport that person to an appropriate location to assess the need
for hospitalization or treatment without prior authorization. A police officer may take a subject
into emergency custody, based upon his or her observation or through the reliable report of others,
when he or she has probable cause to believe that any person within his or her judicial district has
a mental illness and there exists a substantial likelihood that, as a result of mental illness, the
person will, in the near future, cause serious bodily harm to himself or others as evidenced by
recent behavior causing, attempting, threatening – harm and other relevant information, if any; or
suffer serious harm due to lack of capacity to protect himself from harm or to provide for his basic
human needs; or is in need of hospitalization or treatment, and is unwilling to volunteer or
incapable of volunteering for hospitalization or treatment. Officers encountering such person shall
request the assistance of available CIT certified officer(s) if available, who should then take over
the case and assist the subject. Once the person has been taken into custody an officer should
contact a member of the Southside Community Services Board (SCSB) to determine where the
individual should be transported for evaluation. The subject shall be transported to that location to
be evaluated by a member of the Southside Community Services Board immediately.
Persons requiring mental health pre-screening may be taken into custody via a judicial order
otherwise known as an Emergency Custody Order (an issued paper ECO). A magistrate may issue
a paper ECO based upon the probable cause stated above based upon the sworn petition of any
responsible person, treating physician, or upon his own motion. On the ECO the magistrate shall
designate which jurisdiction is responsible for taking the person into custody and where the
serving officer shall transport the respondent to. Once the respondent is taken into custody the
officer shall immediately contact a member of the SCSB so the person can be evaluated by a pre-
screener of the SCSB to assess the need for hospitalization or treatment.
Nothing herein shall preclude officers from obtaining emergency medical treatment or further
medical evaluation at any time for a person in his or her custody as provided in this section.
The pre-screener from the SCSB shall make the determination of what is to be done with an
individual once they have evaluated them. If a pre-screener determines that the person is to be
involuntarily committed via Temporary Detention Order that process is covered later in this policy.
Other options that a pre-screener may do are:
1. If the pre-screener chooses not to support the ECO, the officer shall either return the person to
the location in which he or she was taken into custody or release the person upon their
request. At the conclusion of the case the officer shall verify that an ECO / TDO Report Form
was completed with the findings of the pre-screener noted.
230.OPR 2
2. In the case where there is a voluntary admission based on the mental competency that means
that the pre-screener determined the person to be competent to seek voluntary admission to a
psychiatric facility or may be deemed a candidate for less restrictive follow-up mental health
care and treatment. This will include subjects initially taken into custody pursuant to a
judicial order (paper ECO) or who may be in non-judicial custody (paperless ECO). In such
cases, it will be permissible for officers to relinquish control of the subject once the pre-
screener has advised officers that they will no longer need to stand by and provided that the
officers feel comfortable doing so. It is also permissible for officers to provide a ride back to
the site from which the police officer’s intervention originated. Prior to clearing the case, the
officers need to verify that an ECO / TDO Report Form is completed to include the pre-
screener’s name and comments.
In instances where a magistrate issues and ECO and officers are unable to serve the order, the
order should be turned in to the Records Department to be returned appropriately.
D. Temporary Detention Order (TDO) process:
Code section 37.2-809 states that a magistrate shall issue, upon the sworn petition of any
responsible person, treating physician, or upon his own motion and only after an evaluation
conducted by an employee or local designee of the local community services board to determine
whether the criteria for temporary detention, a temporary detention order if it appears from all
evidence readily available, including any recommendation from a physician or clinical
psychologist treating the person, that the person:
“has mental illness, and that there exists a substantial likelihood, that as a result of mental illness,
the person will, in the near future cause physical harm to himself or others as evidence by recent
behavior causing, attempting, or threatening harm and other relevant information, if any, or suffer
serious harm due to his lack of capacity to protect himself from harm or to provide for his basic
human needs; is in need of hospitalization or treatment, and is unwilling to volunteer or incapable
of volunteering for hospitalization treatment. The magistrate shall consider the recommendations
of any treating or examining physician licensed in Virginia if available either verbally or in writing
prior to rendering a decision.”
When issuing the TDO the magistrate shall determine which agency shall serve the order and
transport the individual to the designated facility. Code section 37.2-810 provides that the
magistrate issuing the temporary detention order shall specify the law enforcement agency and
jurisdiction that shall execute the temporary detention order and provide transportation; the
jurisdiction providing such services will be the jurisdiction in which the person resides, provided
the person is currently located no more than 50 miles outside of said jurisdiction. Assigned
officers may lawfully go to or be sent beyond the territorial limits of the jurisdiction in which he or
she serves to any point in the Commonwealth for the purpose of executing any temporary
detention order pursuant to code. When officers are notified that a TDO has been issued for them
to serve, it is the responsibility of the on-duty supervisor to determine how many officers will be
needed to conduct the transport. Officers should know arrival procedures for the medical facility
they are transporting a subject to and have all necessary paperwork to release the individual into
the care of that facility. Upon completion of a transport the transporting officer(s) need to
complete the “Temporary Detention Order Transportation Logbook (Form 230.OPR (02))”.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
230.OPR 3
CHIEF OF POLICE
230.OPR 4
231.OPR
SUBJECT: MOBILE DATA TERMINAL USE
I. POLICY
South Boston Police Department members using Mobile Data Terminals (MDT) shall comply with all
appropriate federal and state rules and regulations, and shall use the MDT in a professional manner in
accordance with this policy.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the proper access, use, and application of the
Mobile Data Terminal (MDT) system in order to ensure proper access to confidential records from
local, state, and national law enforcement databases, and to ensure effective electronic
communications between department members and the Emergency Communication Center.
III. PROCEDURE
A. Privacy Expectations
1. Members of the South Boston Police Department forfeit any expectation of privacy with
regard to messages accessed, transmitted, received or reviewed on any department computer
system.
B. Restricted Access and Use
1. Members of the South Boston Police Department shall not access the MDT system if they
have not received prior authorization and the required training. Members shall immediately
report unauthorized access or use of the MDT by another member to their supervisor or the
Patrol Lieutenant.
2. Use of the MDT system to access law enforcement databases or transmit messages is
restricted to official activities, business-related tasks, or communications that are directly
related to the business, administration, or practices of the department. In the event that a
member has questions about sending a particular message or accessing a particular database,
the member should seek prior approval from his/her supervisor.
3. Sending derogatory, defamatory, obscene, disrespectful, sexually suggestive, harassing, or

any other inappropriate messages on the MDT system is prohibited and may result in
discipline.
4. It is a violation of this policy to transmit a message or access a law enforcement database

under another member’s name or use the password of another member to log into the MDT
system unless directed to do so by a supervisor. Members are required to log off the MDT or
secure the MDT when it is unattended. This added security measure will minimize the
potential for unauthorized access or misuse.
231.OPR 1
5. Security:
a. Criminal justice information, which can be accessed through the MDT system is not
public information and shall be accessed for law enforcement purposes only.
b. Information displayed on the MDT screen is confidential in nature and officers should
take appropriate measures to ensure the information is not readily in view of the public.
c. To avoid breaches of security, members shall log off the MDT system at the completion
of their tour of duty.
d. Officers assigned vehicles with MDTs shall be responsible for ensuring that unauthorized
use of the unit does not occur.
6. MDTs will be assigned to vehicles and will not be transfer from one vehicle to another.
7. Officers will receive a password from the dispatcher or on their department issued cellular
phone at the start of a shift in order to log into Shieldware on their MDT. This access to
Shieldware on the MDT will only be valid for 12 hour increments.
8. Use While Driving
a. Use of the MDT by the vehicle operator should generally be limited to times when the
vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the operator should only attempt to
read the messages that are likely to contain information that is required for immediate
enforcement, investigative, or safety needs.
b. Short transmissions, such as license plate checks, are permitted if it reasonably appears
that it can be done safely. In no case shall an operator attempt to send or review lengthy
messages while the vehicle is in motion.
C. Documentation of Activity
1. Except as otherwise directed by department supervision, or other department-established

protocols, all calls for service assigned by a dispatcher should be communicated by voice
over the police radio and electronically by the MDT unless security or confidentiality
prevents such broadcasting.
2. MDT and voice transmissions are used to document the member’s daily activity. To ensure
accuracy:
a. All contacts or activity shall be documented at the time of the contact.
b. Whenever the activity or contact is initiated by voice, it should be documented by a

dispatcher.
c. Whenever the activity or contact is not initiated by voice, the member shall document it
via the MDT.
D. Status Changes
1. All changes in status (e.g., arrival at scene, vehicle stops, in service) will be transmitted over
the police radio.
2. Members responding to in-progress calls should advise changes in status over the radio to
231.OPR 2
assist other members responding to the same incident. Other changes in status can be made
on the MDT.
E. Emergency Activation
1. If there is an emergency activation and the member does not respond to a request for
confirmation of the need for emergency assistance, or confirms the need, available resources
will be sent to assist in locating the member. If the location is known, the nearest available
officer(s) should respond.
2. Members should ensure that the shift supervisor is notified of the incident without delay.
3. Officers not responding to the emergency shall refrain from transmitting on the radio until a
no-further-assistance broadcast is made, or if they are handling a different emergency
F. Equipment considerations
1. Malfunctioning MDT
a. Whenever possible, members will not use vehicles with malfunctioning MDTs.
Whenever members must drive a vehicle in which the MDT is not working, they shall
notify the dispatch center. It shall be the responsibility of the dispatcher to document
all information that will then be transmitted verbally over the police radio.
2. Bomb Calls
a. When investigating reports of possible bombs or explosives, members should not

communicate on their MDTs when in the evacuation area of a suspected explosive
device. Radio frequency emitted by the MDT could cause some devices to detonate.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
231.OPR 3
NUMBER: June 17, 2022
232.OPR
SUBJECT: POLICE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND INSPECTIONS
I. POLICY
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to maintain the operational readiness of all
department vehicles. Personnel rely on assigned vehicles for their safety as well as providing law
enforcement services to the general public.
II. PURPOSE
The purpose of this policy is to establish guidelines for the maintenance, inspections, and repairs to
department vehicles and the equipment assigned to such vehicles.
III. PROCEDURE
A. Vehicle Usage and Maintenance
1. Both marked and unmarked vehicles will be used for general patrol use. Unmarked vehicles
will also be used by the Investigations Division and the Administrative Staff.
2. Marked and unmarked vehicles used for general patrol/traffic enforcement and emergency
responses must be equipped with:
a. A siren in operational order;
b. Emergency lights in operational order; and
c. A communication device that allows the operator the ability to maintain constant
communication (fixed or portable) with the dispatch center and other officers. The
communication device shall be in operational order.
3. Marked vehicles used for general patrol services will be conspicuously marked identifying
that they are police vehicles with the South Boston Police Department.
4. Personnel who are assigned a particular vehicle/take home vehicle are responsible for the
maintenance and cleanliness of that vehicle, the equipment installed upon or placed within,
and for any supplies needed therein. A Vehicle Standard Equipment Form (Form 232.OPR
01) will be filled out by the Administrative Lieutenant when a vehicle and vehicle equipment
is issue to an officer. The shift sergeant will perform an inventory of their assigned vehicle
and each subordinate officer’s vehicle each year by completing Vehicle Standard Equipment
Forms (Form 232.OPR 01) and submitting them to the Administrative Lieutenant for review.
The Administrative Lieutenant may do unscheduled inspections of department vehicles to
make sure inventories are accurate. The Administrative Lieutenant will also do an inventory
of a department vehicle when the vehicle is turned in by an officer that is receiving a
different assigned vehicle, or when the officer will no longer be employed by the department.
The officer may be held accountable for any unreported damage to a vehicle and any
damaged or missing equipment from the vehicle.
232.OPR 1
5. Personnel may be temporarily assigned a particular vehicle for a period of time, such as
when their take home vehicle is not in operation. Personnel will still be responsible for the
maintenance and cleanliness, the equipment installed upon or placed in, and for any supplies
needed therein of the temporarily assigned vehicle. The Fleet Vehicle Sign-out Sheet (Form
232.OPR 03) will be filled out when a vehicle is temporarily assigned to an officer.
B. Vehicle Inspections
1. All personnel utilizing a department vehicle will conduct an inspection of the vehicle and its
contents prior to its operation. (Emergency conditions may preclude this requirement.)
2. Vehicle inspections shall include:
a. A check of the exterior and interior of the vehicle for damage;
b. A visible check of tire tread and pressure;
c. An operational check of all signal, break, and headlights;
d. An operational check of emergency lights, siren, horn, and radio;
e. A weekly check of fluid levels;
f. An inspection of gauges;
g. An inspection of equipment installed or place in the vehicle;
h. A check to ensure the vehicle contains required equipment and supplies;
i. And an interior inspection for any evidence or contraband that may have been left by a
previous occupant/prisoner.
3. If vehicular inspections reveal damage, mechanical problems, equipment/supply shortages,

or malfunctions, the shift supervisor will be informed immediately and corrective action will
be initiated.
4. The shift supervisor can temporarily assign another vehicle to an officer while corrective
actions are being made to their department vehicle. The Fleet Vehicle Sign-out Sheet (Form
232.OPR 03) will be filled out when assigning a temporary vehicle.
5. Shift supervisors will inspect vehicles weekly and will record the results on the Weekly
Vehicle Inspection Form (Form 232.OPR 02). The Weekly Vehicle Inspection Form will be
submitted to the Administrative Lieutenant on a weekly basis.
6. Automated External Deliberators (AED) will be assigned to certain department vehicles.

The AED will be inspected bi-weekly by officers assigned to these department vehicles. A
Vehicle AED Inspection Form (Form 232.OPR 04) will be filled out by the officer, signed by
the shift supervisor, and turned in to the department officer assigned to maintain the AED
program. The department officer assigned to maintain the AED program will replace used or
expired pads, replenish AED supplies, and repair or replace AED’s that are damaged.
C. Repairs to Vehicles and Equipment
1. Minor mechanical repairs of department vehicles should be done through appointments with
employees at the town shop. Major mechanical repairs may require a department vehicle to
232.OPR 2
be transported to a dealership or repair facility. The Administrative Lieutenant will be
notified of any department vehicle needing major repairs and will make the needed
arrangements.
2. The Administrative Lieutenant will be notified of any malfunctioning equipment assigned to

a department vehicle in order to have the equipment repaired and/or replaced.
3. Officers will not take or remove equipment from other department vehicles unless approved
by Administrative Lieutenant.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
232.OPR 3
NUMBER April 26, 2023
October 12, 2022
SUBJECT: CANINE OPERATIONS
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department maintains a K-9 unit in an effort to provide South Boston with the best
police service possible. Because of their superior senses and physical capabilities, the trained canine will allow
the department to increase productivity, deter crime, and improve public relations with its improved search
capabilities, drug detection, and tracking. Utilization of a police service dog requires adherence to procedures
that properly control their use of force potential and that channel their specialized capabilities into legally
acceptable crime prevention and law enforcement activities.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish procedures and regulations governing the training, use, and administration of the police service
canine team employed by the South Boston Police Department. This team will be referred to throughout this
policy as the K-9 unit. This standard operating procedure shall define the authority and responsibility for their
use.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Assignment of a Police Service Dog
1. A canine shall be assigned to a specific handler, designated by the Chief of Police, which together
compose a K-9 Unit. The K-9 Unit is assigned to the patrol division under the immediate supervision
of the shift sergeant. The shift sergeant or current working supervisor shall approve when the K-9 Unit
will be deployed for tracking or drug detection outside of normal patrol operations. This includes the
coordination and assignment of the K-9 Unit in support of other agencies.
2. The Administrative Lieutenant will inspect and review all K-9 Unit training records and deployment
records every quarter of the year (Forms 233.OPR (01) through 233.OPR (04)). The Administrative
Lieutenant will also approve the ordering of all K-9 specific equipment.
3. The Patrol Lieutenant will be responsible for coordinating all community relations demonstrations of
the K-9 Unit.
B. K-9 Handler Qualifications and Responsibilities
The canine is the property of the South Boston Police Department and assigned to a specific handler. The
canine and handler shall receive training and certification for specific K-9 Unit job functions. The K-9
handler shall maintain yearly certification with the canine and have the following duties:
1. A strong desire to work with canines and a willingness to care for and train them.
2. Coordinate monthly/yearly training and certification requirements.
233.OPR
3. Maintain accurate K-9 training and deployment records (Forms 233.OPR (01) through 233.OPR
(04)). The records shall be submitted monthly to the Shift Sergeant.
4. Feed, groom, exercise, and general care of the canine.
5. Conduct in-house training with the canine for a minimum of 8 hours monthly.
6. Arrange regular and emergency medical attention for the assigned canine.
7. Maintain all issued K-9 equipment.
C. Canine Utilization
1. The K-9 handler shall determine whether a situation justifies the use of a canine and the measures
that need to be taken for the use of the canine.
2. The K-9 Unit will be available to the department for tracking suspects, locating missing persons,
or to detect the presence of illegal narcotics. The K-9 Unit will be on-call during times when the
K-9 handler is not working his/her assigned shift.
3. When the shift supervisor is made aware of a developing incident that the K-9 Unit may be
utilized, he/she will contact the K-9 Unit as soon as possible to have them on stand-by.
4. Requests to call out the K-9 Unit shall go through the working shift supervisor. If the department
K-9 Unit is unavailable, a request should be made for the closest appropriate K-9 Unit from
another agency.
5. The final decision to deploy the canine is with the K-9 handler, as only the handler truly knows the
abilities and limitations of their canine and the ability to safely and legally perform the tasks at
hand. The K-9 handler will evaluate each situation and determine if the use of a canine is
technically feasible, however a supervisor sufficiently apprised of the situation may decide not to
deploy the K-9 Unit.
6. Requests for the department’s K-9 Unit from jurisdictions outside of the town must be approved
by the working shift supervisor or the Patrol Lieutenant. A sworn officer from the requesting
agency will accompany the K-9 Unit when it is deployed in that jurisdiction.
7. Whenever the K-9 Unit is deployed, a K-9 Deployment Record (Form 233.OPR (03) or (04)) shall
be completed by the handler, submitted to the shift Sergeant, and kept on file by the
Administrative Lieutenant.
D. Tracking Canines
1. A police canine trained and certified in tracking can be utilized to track missing persons, suspects,
or to locate evidence that has been abandoned or hidden in a specific open area.
2. If an officer is pursuing a suspect and contact is lost, the officer, prior to summoning a K-9 Unit,
shall stop and pinpoint the location where the suspect was last seen. The officer shall avoid
vehicle traffic and foot traffic in that area if possible.
3. Canines used for tracking persons shall remain on a leash of sufficient length to provide a
reasonable measure of safety to the subject of the search without compromising the canine’s
tracking ability.
4. A K-9 Unit used for tracking shall have, at the minimum, one back up officer present while on the
track, unless exigent circumstances exist.
233.OPR
E. Narcotics Detection Canines
1. Department handlers equipped with certified narcotics canines shall be available to respond to
requests for narcotics detection and demonstrations.
2. The department shall use certified narcotics canines that respond with a passive alert when
narcotics/drugs are detected.
3. The K-9 Unit shall train with training aids (scented items) that do not contain actual
narcotics/drugs for the safety of the canine, the handler, and to reduce the accountability of using
actual training narcotics/drugs. The training aids will be assigned to the handler to store and use at
times that training is available or required.
F. K-9 Unit Equipment
The canine handler will be provided food for the canine and issued the following equipment:
1. A patrol vehicle with a specialized containment area for the canine. The patrol vehicle will also be
equipped with an internal temperature monitoring system for the safety of the canine. The patrol
vehicle will display markings on the outside to indicate that the vehicle is used by the K-9 Unit.
2. Leashes
3. Dog collar
4. Narcotic training aids (for certified narcotic canines)
5. Dog kennel
6. Dog house
7. Food and water bowls
8. K-9 training incentives (i.e., towel, ball, etc.)
G. Training and Maintenance
1. All canines and handlers must be certified by a recognized certifying agency. In addition to the
initial certification, canines and handlers must certify every calendar year with a recognized
certifying agency. Uncertified canines may not be used on patrol.
2. The K-9 handler shall train at least 8 hours per month with the canine. The handler will document
the training with the canine on K-9 Training Record and Log forms (Form 233.OPR (01) and
233.OPR (02)).
3. The K-9 handler will forward all records of veterinary visits and medical records for the canine to
the Administrative Lieutenant for file to show it is in compliance with state and local laws.
F. Canine Bites and Injuries
Whenever a canine bites an individual, whether or not in the line-of-duty, the handler shall:
1. Call a supervisor to the scene;
233.OPR
2. Examine the affected area to determine the seriousness of the bite or injury;
3. Obtain medical treatment for the person. Medical personnel should examine the affected area
irrespective of the perceived seriousness of the bite or injury. If the subject refuses medical
attention, the supervisor should witness the refusal;
4. Take pictures of the affected area prior to and after medical treatment;
5. Complete a Use of Force report. The report shall detail the circumstances surrounding the
incident, the identity of the individual involved, any witnesses, the extent of the injuries if known,
and measures taken in response to the incident.
6. Contact the Animal Control Officer for animal bite procedures.
G. Disposition of Police Canine

1. The canine handler, Administrative Lieutenant, and Chief of Police will discuss the canine’s
health, age, use, and effectiveness, to determine when the canine should be taken out of service
and/or retired. The Chief of Police shall make the final determination.
2. If it is determined the canine has reached the end of its service life and the current handler of the
police canine requests to keep the canine after the canine's retirement, the handler shall be granted
first opportunity to obtain the retired canine.
3. If the current handler of the police canine to be retired is not interested in keeping the canine, the
canine shall be offered (in the following order) to:
a. Other current or previous police canine handlers of the South Boston Police Department,
b. Other sworn South Boston Police Department employees,
c. Anyone else that the Chief of Police deems as capable of accepting a police canine.
4. When it is determined who will receive the retired police canine, that person will pay the South
Boston Police Department the amount of one dollar.
5. The person receiving the retired police canine shall sign a Retired Police Canine Liability Waiver
(Form 233.OPR (01)), thus releasing the South Boston Police Department of any responsibilities
involving the retired police canine.
a. The original signed waiver will be filed at the South Boston Police Department.
b. A copy of the waiver will be forwarded to the Town Manager.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
233.OPR
233.OPR
234.OPR
SUBJECT: SPECIAL PURPOSE VEHICLES
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department authorizes the use of special purpose vehicles for the performance of
specific job functions with the department. The operation of the special purpose vehicles will comply with safe
driving procedures as outlined in General Order 202.OPR. This policy will discuss the objective of the use of
each special purpose vehicle, training/requirements needed to operate and maintain the special purpose vehicle,
and equipment required for each vehicle.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to establish operational guidelines for the utilization and deployment of special
purpose vehicles with the South Boston Police Department.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Types of Special Purpose Vehicles
1. Animal Control Truck
a. The Animal Control Officer will be assigned a marked work truck referred to as the Animal
Control Truck. The Animal Control Truck shall be equipped to assist with the job duties of the
Animal Control Officer. It shall be equipped with emergency lights and sirens for use when the
Chief of Police, or designee, authorizes sworn officers to drive the vehicle. All operators of the
Animal Control Truck shall have a valid operator’s license, be familiarized with the equipment
and operation of the truck, and will comply with General Order 202.OPR. for the safe operation
of the vehicle. The Animal Control Officer will complete an Emergency Vehicle Operations
Course prior to using the Animal Control Truck as an emergency vehicle, however the animal
control officer will not use the truck under pursuit conditions. The animal control officer shall
also complete a state mandated animal control training school and comply with the Code of
Virginia for vehicle operations.
b. It is the responsibility of the Animal Control Officer to properly maintain the Animal Control
Truck by scheduling services and repairs with the town maintenance shop.
c. The Animal Control Truck will primarily be used for responding to animal complaints and
transporting animals. Animals will not be left unattended in the Animal Control Truck for long
periods of time. Special attention should be given to the animals confined in the Animal Control
Truck during periods of hot or cold weather.
d. The Animal Control Truck will be equipped with the following, but not limited to:
1.) Cage
2.) Trap
3.) Catch pole
4.) Leash
234.OPR
5.) Water and food bowl
6.) Firearm (rifle, shotgun)
7.) Fixed radio
8.) Flashlight
9.) First aid kit
10.) Fire extinguisher
2. Emergency Response Truck
a. The Emergency Response Truck is a marked vehicle that can be used to transport personnel
and equipment, along with the potential use at incident scenes as a mobile command post. The
Emergency Response Truck contains a generator and external lights that may also aide in the
processing of crime scenes. This vehicle is not a daily patrol vehicle for the department and is
stored at the Public Works building.
b. The Emergency Response Truck shall be under the supervision and maintenance of a designee
assigned by the Chief of Police. The designee will be responsible for overseeing that the truck is
operational and has a current state inspection. The designee will also schedule any routine
maintenance and repairs that may be needed.
c. The operator of the Emergency Response Truck shall have a valid operator’s license and shall
be trained in defensive driving techniques through a Virginia State Approved Training Academy
along with familiarization of the operation of the truck.
d. The Emergency Response Truck is equipped with emergency lights and a siren to respond
to emergency calls for service, but shall not be used as a pursuit vehicle.
e. The Emergency Special Response Truck will be equipped with the following, but not limited
to:
1) Radio (fixed or portable)

2) Fire extinguisher
3) First aid kit
4) Other department equipment may be stored in the Special Response Truck depending on the
operational purpose.
3. Utility Task Vehicle (UTV)
a. The department UTV is a vehicle to be used by officers for transportation at special events, to
travel on off-road terrain, and for search and recovery operations. The intended and primary use
of the UTV is for operation on trails, parking lots, and grassy or wooded areas. The operator may
cross roadways in accordance with the Code of Virginia.
b. The department UTV shall be operated in accordance with all applicable state laws, town
ordinances, department rules and regulations, and manufactures’ guidelines. The UTV is to be
operated with due regard for the safety of the officers and the public.
c. The department UTV is marked with the word POLICE on the front of the vehicle and has a blue
light on top. No equipment is required to be stored in the UTV. Officers should use portable
radios for communication with dispatch and other officers while utilizing the UTV.
d. Permission to utilize the UTV shall come from the Chief of Police, the Patrol Lieutenant, the
Administrative Lieutenant, or the Investigations Lieutenant. Officers shall go through a
familiarization training for the operation and functions of the UTV prior to its use.
e. The operator of the UTV is responsible for inspecting the vehicle prior to its operation. The
234.OPR
inspection should include, but not limited to all lights, brakes, fluid levels, tire pressure, horn/siren
(if so equipped), fuel level, and any noted damage or defects to the vehicle.
f. The UTV will be maintained by the Patrol Lieutenant or a designee. Repairs needed to the UTV
should be done through the Public Works garage staff.
g. The UTV may not be operated upon the highway, except by sworn officers of the department who
are responding to emergencies per Virginia Code 46.2-915.1. For all other times the UTV should
be transported to points of use by a trailer. The UTV should be properly secured on a trailer and
the parking brake set.
h. The UTV is not a daily patrol vehicle and is only used for special events or special needs. During
times that the UTV is not in use, it shall be stored at the Public Works building or the Police
Department.
4. Department Boat
a. The department boat is a flat bottom boat with an outboard motor used to transport officers on
ponds, rivers, lakes, and streams. The department boat may be used for special events, or to assist
in search and rescue operations. The department boat is not used for daily patrol, and is stored at
the Public Works building. The Patrol Lieutenant or a designee will be responsible for
maintaining the department boat.
b. Personnel authorized to operate and maintain the boat and its equipment will be trained before its
use to include:
1) Completing a boater safety course

2) Obtaining a boater license
3) Operating the outboard motor
4) Laws governing operation of a boat
5) Trailering a boat
c. Approval for operation of the department boat will be made through the Chief of Police, the Patrol
Lieutenant, the Administrative Lieutenant, or the Investigations Lieutenant.
d. Equipment required for the department boat include, but is not limited to:
1) Life Jackets
3) Horn or whistle
4) Paddle
5) Anchor with rope
6) First aid kit with CPR mask
e. Officers should use portable radios for communication with dispatch and other officers while
utilizing the department boat.
5. Crime Scene Van
a. The crime scene van is generally used as a vehicle for the transportation of equipment and
personnel to and from large crime scenes. The crime scene van may also be used for crime scene
presentations, and other department needs. The crime scene van is not a daily patrol vehicle and is
stored at the South Boston Police Department.
b. The crime scene van is equipped with emergency lights and a siren to respond to calls for service,
but shall not be used in pursuit driving or as an emergency response vehicle.
234.OPR
c. The crime scene van is assigned to the Investigations Division and will be maintained by the
Investigations Lieutenant or a designee.
d. Only department personnel with a valid operator’s license may operate the crime scene van.
e. Training for the Crime Scene Van will consist of familiarization with the equipment and functions
of the van.
f. The crime scene van will be equipped with the following, but not limited to:
1) Emergency lights and siren

2) Radio (fixed or portable)
4) First aid kit
5) Evidence collection supplies (determined by Investigation Lieutenant)
AUTHORIZATION:
_______________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
234.OPR
NUMBER: May 5, 2023
235.OPR
SUBJECT: AUTOMATED LICENSE PLATE READERS
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to provide direction to field personnel for the use
of Automated License Plate Reader (ALPR) devices. A fundamental element of policing is locating
stolen vehicles or vehicles involved in other criminal acts. Automated license plate recognition systems
play an increasingly important role in public safety by assisting with the location of wanted vehicles
and subjects while enhancing productivity, effectiveness, and officer safety. ALPR systems recognize,
read, and compare motor vehicle license plates against various police databases much more efficiently
than officers manually scanning and making comparisons while on patrol.
The South Boston Police Department leases access to automated license plate readers through Flock
Group Inc., (Flock). Flock and their customers are responsible for the security, storage and retention of
data collected by these systems.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this directive is to set forth guidelines to govern the use of automated license plate
readers (ALPRs) by employees of the South Boston Police Department.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Definitions:
Alert: Also known as a “Hit” - A positive indication, by visual and/or audible signal, of a
potential match between data on the “Hot List” and a license plate scanned by the ALPR
system. An alert or “Hit” is NOT conclusive confirmation that a license plate, or vehicle, is
wanted, and additional investigation is always warranted when an alert is indicated.
ALPR Coordinator – Designee of the Chief of Police who will conduct annual or more frequent
auditing and reporting of ALPR use and effectiveness to the Chief of Police. The ALPR
Coordinator will select authorized users for the ALPR system and determine their level of access.
Automated License Plate Reader (ALPR) - A device that uses cameras and computer
technology to compare digital images of license plates to lists of known plates of interest.
ALPR’s may be deployed in different configurations including fixed (permanent or semi-
permanent installation at specific location) and mobile (attached to a vehicle or trailer). Both
configurations operate in the same manner.
Fixed Location ALPR - Fixed ALPR locations use cameras that are engineered to focus on the
rear license plate of vehicles passing by the camera location. The camera images are sent by
cellular data signal to an off-site server where the images are compared with license plates from
NCIC and local hot lists. License plates that match an NCIC entry or hot list trigger an alert to the
user who is logged in to monitor the ALPR system. Although all plates are imaged, only the
1
235.OPR
NCIC entered or hot list plates trigger an alert. The images of the license plates of vehicles
passing by the camera are retained on a schedule set by the vendor.
Hot List - License plates associated with vehicles of interest from an associated database,
including, but not limited to NCIC, DMV, Local BOLOs, etc.
Mobile ALPR - Mobile ALPR systems work in the same manner as a fixed ALPR. The cameras
may be mounted on a vehicle or on a mobile trailer and can be placed in locations of investigative
interest. The camera images are captured and cross-referenced in the same manner.
Scan File - Data obtained by an ALPR of license plates within public view that were read by the
device, including potential images of the plate and vehicle on which it was displayed, and
information regarding the location of the fixed or mobile camera position at the time of the ALPR
read. Information stored includes a photo of the registration plate showing the rear of the vehicle,
a date and time stamp of when the registration plate was read by the ALPR and a GPS coordinate
to identify the location the registration plate was read by the ALPR.
B. Use of Automated License Plate Readers
1. Authorized department personnel have access to leased and privately owned ALPR camera
systems through Flock. These systems allow personnel to receive hotlist alerts if any of the
cameras in the agency’s jurisdiction captures images of a vehicle displaying a tag that is
linked to the following NCIC categories in their accounts:
a. Supervised Release
b. Protective Order
c. Protective Interest
d. Violent Person
e. Missing Person
f. Missing Child
g. Immigration Violator
h. CPIC Data Records
i. Gang or Suspected Terrorist
j. Warrants
k. Stolen License Plate
l. Stolen Vehicle
m. Sex Offender
n. Extreme Risk Protection Order
o. NCMEC Amber Alerts
2. Authorized users logged in to the ALPR system will receive alerts either through text
messages on department cell phones and/or department email accounts.
3. Enforcement actions should not be taken solely on the ALPR alert alone. Officers
receiving an alert will verify the plate number and state of origin to ensure that the alert is
accurate. They will run the plate in VCIN/NCIC or other appropriate official databases
to confirm that the plate is still active in the database for the type of alert given. The
officer will establish reasonable suspicion or probable cause before conducting stops,
making detentions, or initiating arrests. (Confirming a plate is stolen through VCIN/NCIC is
establishing probable cause to conduct a traffic stop.)
4. Officers may also access data when investigating any specific crime where the data may be
2
235.OPR
able to provide suspect information. Data can be searched and filtered based on vehicle type,
camera location and date/time. All searches of data will require a Search Reason. Officers
will use the full incident number related to the case they are working as the search reason.
5. All users shall receive instruction in the access and proper use of the system before receiving
login credentials for the ALPR system.
6. ALPR systems utilizing the NCIC’s Hot List will download the file at least once within a 24-
hour period.
C. Data Security and Access
1. Access to the Flock system is achieved through individualized login to the

Flock’s web-based server. Once logged in, officers will be able to receive hot list alerts
within the system and can view and search data. Officers will be required to enter a search
reason for auditing purposes.
2. All logins and queries will be stored and monitored including:
a. Username
b. Date
c. Time
d. Purpose of query
e. License plate and other elements used to query the system
2. Data points will be stored in the Flock system, and periodic audits will be conducted
according to the policies of each Flock customer to ensure access was made by authorized
persons for legitimate purposes.
3. ALPR data is considered a record of a criminal investigation and is confidential and not
public record. Data shall not be disclosed outside of the South Boston Police Department
except for exigent circumstances pursuant to a written or electronic request from another
requesting law enforcement agency. The request must indicate the agency’s incident number
and why the agency is requesting the ALPR data, i.e., endangered missing person/child,
dangerous wanted subject (i.e. homicide suspect), a vehicle related to a recent serious
incident (i.e. child abduction, shooting), etc. A department supervisor who has access to the
ALPR system is authorized to release the requested information after reviewing and
approving the request. The search for this information will use the requesting agency’s
incident number as the search reason. The written or electronic request, along with the
approval or denial, will then be forwarded to the ALPR Coordinator for filing.
D. Storage and Retention
1. Flock Group, Inc., the ALPR vendor, will store the data and ensure proper maintenance and
of data stored in their cloud-based system. Flock will also oversee purging data at the end of
the 30-day storage period. The department is responsible for extracting, downloading, and
archiving footage from Flock on its own storage devices for auditing, prosecutorial and
administrative purposes.
2. Any ALPR data requiring preservation past 90 days will require a preservation request or
search warrant.
3. Information gathered or collected, and records retained by the Flock Safety system on behalf
of Flock Safety Customers will not be:
3
235.OPR
a. Sold, published, exchanged, or disclosed for commercial purposes.
b. Disclosed or published without authorization.
c. Disseminated to persons not authorized to access or use the information.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
4
235.OPR
301.PER Amends/Supersedes
March 20, 2014
SUBJECT: HIRING PROCESS
I. POLICY:
It is the policy of the South Boston Police Department to obtain the best police officers possible. To that end, the
department shall practice a regimented, rigorous selection procedure while simultaneously affording equal
opportunity to everyone regardless of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, age, or disabilities through the
American with Disabilities Act of 1990. It is the policy of the Town of South Boston and the South Boston
Police Department that its selection process be efficient, effective and fair; that it results in the appointment of
individuals who possess the skills, knowledge and abilities necessary for the effective operation of the
department. All elements of the selection process will be administered, scored, evaluated and interpreted in a
uniform manner. Employment opportunity will be provided to applicants on the basis of qualifications and merit
without regard to race, color, sex, religion, national origin, political affiliation, disability or age, except where a
bona fide occupational qualification has been established.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to outline minimum hiring requirements for police officers. Civilian personnel
hired to work for the police department are hired in accordance with town policy and procedures.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. The minimum qualifications - all applicants for the position of police officer must meet the following
requirements:
1. Adhere to the requirements of 15.2-1705 of the Code of Virginia.
a. Be a citizen of the United States.
b. High school graduate or passed a high school equivalency examination approved by the Board of
Education
c. Possess a valid driver's license.
d. Must pass a physical/medical examination, subsequent to a conditional offer of employment,

conducted under the supervision of a licensed physician.
e. Be at least 21 years of age. (by academy completion date)
f. Not have been convicted of or pled guilty or no contest to a felony or any offense that would be a
felony if committed in Virginia;
g. Not have produced a positive result on a pre-employment drug screening or where the positive
result cannot be explained to the agency satisfaction.
h. Shall not have been convicted of or pled guilty or no contest to any misdemeanor involving moral
turpitude, including but not limited to petit larceny, or to any offense involving moral turpitude
that would be a misdemeanor if committed in the Commonwealth; or to any misdemeanor sex
offense in the Commonwealth, another state, or the United States, including but not limited to
sexual battery or consensual sexual intercourse with a minor 15 or older; or domestic assault or
301.PER
any offense that would be domestic assault under the laws of another state of the United States.
i. Must pass a background investigation which includes a check of school records, inquiry as to
character and reputation, health history, and a fingerprint-based criminal history records check
to both the Central Criminal Records Exchange and the Federal Bureau of Investigation
In addition, if the applicant had been employed at any time by another law-enforcement agency or
jail, the department shall request from all prior employing law-enforcement agencies or jails any
information (i) related to an arrest or prosecution of a former police officer, deputy sheriff, or jail
officer, including any expunged arrest or criminal charge known to the agency or disclosed during
the hiring process that would otherwise be prohibited from disclosure in accordance with § 19.2-
392.4; (ii) related to a civil suit regarding a former police officer's, deputy sheriff's, or jail officer's
employment or performance of his duties; (iii) obtained during the course of any internal
investigation related to a former police officer's, deputy sheriff's, or jail officer's alleged criminal
conduct, use of excessive force, or other official misconduct in violation of the state professional
standards of conduct adopted by the Criminal Justice Services Board; and (iv) related to a former
police officer, deputy sheriff, or jail officer's job performance that led to such officer's or deputy
sheriff's resignation, dismissal, demotion, suspension, or transfer. The department may request this
information subsequent to a conditional offer of employment; however, no police officer, deputy
sheriff, or jail officer may be employed in such position until the requested information is received
from all prior employing law-enforcement agencies in the Commonwealth. The department shall
request that the applicant complete a waiver or release liability authorizing the hiring agency or
jail to request such information as listed in this subsection from all prior employing law-
enforcement agencies or jails, including law-enforcement agencies or jails located outside the
Commonwealth.
2. Additional requirements:
a. Uncorrected vision of 20/40 or better in each eye, or correctable to 20/20
b. Must meet the minimum standards required to perform the essential job functions of the position.
Essential job functions are those fundamental jobs duties as defined in the position’s job
description.
c. Must pass a general aptitude test, if provided.
d. Must pass a physical ability test.
e. Must pass a psychological/mental evaluation.
f. Must not have been convicted of a misdemeanor under federal or state law of an offense of
domestic violence as described under Title 18 of the United States Code (U.S.C.)
(This deals with the use or attempted use of physical force, or the threatened use of a deadly
weapon, committed on a current or former spouse, a parent, guardian or someone whom a child
in common is shared or someone whom you are cohabiting with presently, or whom you have
cohabited with as a spouse, parent, or guardian as well as a person similarly situated to a spouse,
parent, or guardian.)
3. The following are not automatic disqualifiers for the position, however the following issues will be
examined thoroughly during a background investigation, and may be the basis for disqualification:
a. A history of credit problems.
b. Any indication of unsatisfactory military service.
c. Any indication of unsatisfactory job performance.
301.PER
d. Any serious traffic convictions or any DUI charges.
B. Elements of the selection process:
A public advertisement shall be done utilizing social media, print media, and/or internal recruitment
postings for a minimum of one week. Applicants must submit a “Department Application For
Employment (Form 301.PER 01)” to be considered for the job. Upon receiving applications, the chief
of police, or his designee, will screen for persons not meeting the minimum qualifications. If no
qualified persons apply, then the advertisement shall be done again. All elements of the selection
process will be administered, scored, evaluated, and interpreted in a fair and uniform manner. The
elements, in order, are:
1. Submitted written application to the chief of police.
2. Written Examination - The entry level officer test is administered. The test is designed to assess
reading comprehension and other performance dimensions based on police officer task data.
The average score of the test group will be the minimum satisfactory score. Tests will be graded by
the Chief of Police and/or his or her designee. The chief of police may elect to forgo this element due
to the size of the applicant pool or other factors.
3. Physical Ability Test - Applicants will be required to perform certain physical activities to determine
their ability to meet the physical requirements of the essential job functions contained and defined in
the position’s job description.
4. Review Board Appearance - Applicants reaching the interview stage will be equal in standing,
regardless of their scores. This interview is designed to evaluate the applicant’s personal attributes and
qualifications, using standardized questions and evaluation forms, and is conducted by a board chosen
by the chief of police. The board may also ask the candidate to elaborate on certain information the
applicant may have provided in their police officer application package. The board will then evaluate
each candidate, using the evaluation form. The board will rank the successful candidates using the
“Applicant Interview Grading Form (Form 301.PER (02))”.
5. Interview with Chief of Police - In this phase of the process the chief of police may offer a
conditional offer of employment to candidates.
6. Background Investigation - This phase of the process is designed to provide the police department
with information pertaining to the applicant’s education, employment, credit, and personal
character. A background investigation is conducted and completed on all applicants by a background
investigator prior to appointment to a sworn status.
7. Physical Examination - The candidate will be required to submit to a post employment offer physical
examination by a licensed doctor chosen by the chief of police. Applicants will undergo a
pre-employment drug screening and not produce a positive result where the positive result cannot be
satisfactorily explained. Examining Physician’s Report and Applicant’s Medical History Forms must
be completed.
8. Psychological Evaluations - The selected candidate shall report to a licensed psychologist chosen by
the Chief of Police to be evaluated by the psychologist. If the test results are unsatisfactory, the
individual will be notified in writing within 30 days of non-selection.
C. Testing, examinations, interviews and investigations:
All testing, examinations, interviews and investigations on all applicants done during the selection
process will be conducted by personnel trained in these functions and who possess training in the use and
interpretation of the screening process.
D. The officer assigned to investigate the applicant shall:
301.PER
1. Obtain the applicant's driving record from DMV.
2. Have applicant sign appropriate release forms.
3. If applicant has recently lived outside of Halifax County, request records checks through agencies in
applicant's previous communities.
4. Obtain references from applicant's current and past employers.
5. Obtain NCIC/VCIN records check.
6. Conduct interviews of neighbors near applicant's residences over the past three years.
7. Provide a complete background investigation file to the chief of police.
E. Notification:
Applicants will receive notification of the application disposition as soon as possible, after each element of
the selection process is completed. This is a courtesy but also helps the agency better plan and coordinate
its selection process. The applicant will be advised either:
1. He/she are no longer in consideration at this time for the position available and that their test results
will remain on file for three years, as well as their right to reapply after 1 year if a vacancy exists.
2. He/she should report for further:
a. evaluation,
b. testing or
c. interview
F. The chief of police shall:
1. Interview all applicants recommended by the board and make the final selection.
2. Ensure that the applicant fully understands the selection process and the conditions and procedures for
re-application.
3. Make no appointment to the position of police officer until the background investigation has been
completed.
4. Ensure that the appointee understands job benefits, health plans, administrative matters concerning
overtime and off-duty employment plus conditions of employment, pension, and disability.
G. Re-application
Unsuccessful applicants may re-apply after 1 year from the date of the last application if a vacancy exists.
H. Lateral entry
An already-commissioned police officer in another Virginia agency must still meet the criteria set forth
above except for the written examination.
I. Testing results records:
All records of an applicant's test results will be maintained and stored in a secure area, with restricted
access to persons only entitled to review them, for a period of three years. These records will be stored in a
301.PER
locked file cabinet maintained by the South Boston Police Department.
J. Validity of selection procedures.
1. The department must be able to validate any selection criteria by showing proof that the process either
will predict job performance or detect aspects of a candidates' work behavior as related to the position
of a police officer. Validity can be determined through one or more of the following ways:
a. Validity related to criteria: The selection procedure correlates written test scores with
predetermined criteria. A high correlation of the two demonstrates that the test scores predict job
performance.
b. Validity related to construct: The selection procedure measures the degree to which the candidate
has certain required traits or characteristics important in police work.
c. Validity related to content: The selection process is validated by showing that it represents actual
job behavior.
2. Selection processes must also demonstrate utility. Utility refers to the practical value of a component of
the selection process based on validity, selection ratio, number of candidates to be selected, and the
nature of the job.
3. The chief of police, in consultation with the town manager, may review selection procedures for their
validity and utility at least every two years.
K. Adverse Impact
1. Adverse impact refers to a selection procedure that works to the disadvantage of a racial or ethnic
group, or of a sex.
a. Adverse impact, if any, in the selection process is measured by comparing the selection rate for
each race, sex, or ethnicity with the highest selection rate obtained.
b. The department shall reduce adverse impact as much as possible.
c. Any records or data used to monitor adverse impact must be maintained on file.
L. Probation
All employees appointed shall be considered on probation for one (1) year from date of employment. The
same probationary period applies to officers hired through lateral entry.
1. If the officer begins work before an academy, he or she shall perform non-police duties only, and will
accompany experienced officers as an observer.
2. The work performance of each probationary employee will be evaluated using valid, non-
discriminatory procedures.
3. Probationary employees who wish to protest their ratings have no grievance rights except to request an
interview with the chief of police.
M. Records:
1. The department maintains, for each employee, a personnel record which includes all forms
completed during the hiring process, commendation, and assignments.
a. The chief of police maintains and controls all personnel records.
301.PER
b. Employees may review their records at any reasonable time upon request. The chief of police
may release a record from file upon obtaining a signed receipt from the authorized person with a
need to review it.
c. All personnel records are considered sensitive information available for review to supervisory
or investigative personnel who have a need, as determined by the chief of police.
2. Personnel records are permanent property of the department.
N. Recruiting Policy
1. General:
a. The Town of South Boston and the police department will maintain an active recruitment
campaign in order to have qualified candidates available to fill actual or forecasted department
vacancies for the position of police officer.
b. All department personnel are encouraged to help identify potential police applicants who may
then be actively recruited.
c. The town participates in a cooperative arrangement with the Virginia Employment

Commission to aid in the recruitment of applicants.
2. Community Outreach:
a. Department representatives, as selected by the chief of police, will participate in all available
job fairs / career days, etc., in an effort to recruit within our community service area.
b. All personnel requested to speak before public groups / events, particularly those involving
young groups, shall, when appropriate, as part of their programs, discuss career opportunities
within the police department.
c. Assistance will be sought from community organizations, key leaders, state personnel services,
colleges, universities, and other law enforcement agencies.
3. Affirmative Action / Equal Employment Opportunity:
a. The department will make every effort to maintain a ratio of minority group employees in
approximate proportion to the makeup of the department’s law enforcement service
community. To further this effort, the police department may advertise through the print
media larger metropolitan areas with larger minority populations. Notices may be mailed to
local community groups and organizations with high minority memberships advertising of job
vacancies.
4. Announcements and Publicity:
a. Announcements concerning police position openings will include a description of duties and
responsibilities, job prerequisites including those mandated by state, and physical
requirements.
b. As needed, the police department will advertise in local papers or other appropriate news
media, police officer application procedures and filing deadlines. The chief of police may
request media cooperation in publishing stories, news items, and public service announcements
in an effort to attract qualified police applicants.
c. All advertisements will indicate that the Town of South Boston is an equal opportunity
employer.
301.PER
d. If necessary, recruiting will be done outside this jurisdiction. Advertisements may be placed in
news media, opportunity announcements sent to colleges and universities with law enforcement
curricula, and recruiters sent to job fairs / career days within a reasonable distance.
AUTHORIZATION:
______________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
301.PER
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: SALARY AND OVERTIME PROGRAM
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department salary program is governed by the Town of South Boston Pay Plan, which
can be changed and updated every year with the approval of the town council. This is done because of the cost
of living increases. The pay plan consists of twenty-five (25) separate pay grades.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this General Order is to describe the South Boston Police Department's salary program.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Pay Grades:
Each job title inside of the South Boston Police Department is assigned a pay grade by the approval of the
town council. These job titles are listed below. The pay grades are available to Department personnel upon
request. Typically each member of the Department will see what their pay grade is yearly as part of their
evaluation. Pay grades changes with pay increases, if a member of the Department wants to know their pay
grade they need to request the information through the Chief of Police or his/her designee.
1. Office Manager
2. Records Management Specialist
3. Special Enforcement Officer/Animal Control
4. Police Officer I
5. Police Officer II
6. Police Corporal
7. Police Sergeant / Police First Sergeant
8. Police Lieutenant
9. Police Captain
10. Police Chief
B. Salary Differential:
Different salaries exist between ranks and within ranks because of two reasons:
1. The Town of South Boston Pay Plan with different pay grades for each rank/job title
2. Each officer being in a different step in grade due to the difference in the number of step merit pay
increases (for good evaluations) the officer has received, because of the different length of time the
officer has been in the same grade with the department. This also accounts for the salary differential
within the ranks.
302.PER 1
C. Salary Level for those with special skills:
The South Boston Police Department maintains a position for a Special Enforcement Officer. The Special
Enforcement Officer is assigned duties that pertain to the enforcement of animal control. The Special
Enforcement Officer advances in pay, the same as described in this policy of this general order.
D. Academic Bonuses:
1. Associate Degree - $600.00 per year, after 3 years $800.00
2. Bachelor Degree - $800.00 per year, after 3 years $1,200.00, after 5 years $1600.00, after 7 years
$2000.00
3. Master Degree - $2,000.00, 10 years $2,200.00
E. Compensatory Time:
Compensatory time may be accumulated in the South Boston Police Department for any time that is
worked over 160 hours in a 28 day schedule. Compensatory time will be put in for by using the form
"EXTRA DUTY / OVERTIME FORM (FORM 302.PER (01))". The officer will indicate “Compensatory
Time” and give a copy to his or her supervisor. The form is then turned into that supervisor’s direct
supervisor in the administration for final approval. Compensatory time is not automatically approved; an
officer must receive permission from their direct supervisor and a member of the administration in order to
utilize any worked overtime as compensatory time. If compensatory time is approved it should be used in
the same work cycle that it is accumulated. In event the officer cannot use the time in the same work cycle
that it is accumulated the time shall be turned in as paid overtime.
F. Overtime:
Overtime may be accumulated in the South Boston Police Department for any time that is worked over 160
hours in a 28 day pay periods. Overtime will be paid back at a rate of 1.5 times the officer's salary unless
the following applies:
1. The officer has taken vacation time during that 28 day period.
2. The officer has taken sick time during that 28 day period
3. The officer has taken holiday time during that 28 day period.
In the above instances the officer’s overtime rate will be their normal hourly rate for the hours equal to the
vacation, sick, or holiday hours they have taken during that 28 day period. Overtime will be put in for by
using the form "EXTRA DUTY / OVERTIME FORM (FORM 302.PER 01)” in all instances except when
an officer attends court when an officer must submit overtime on the “COURT HOURS RECORD
(FORM 302.PER 02)”. The overtime form will be turned into the officer’s shift/unit supervisor for
approval who will then turn it into their administration supervisor while the court hours record will be
turned in directly to the Records Department.
G. On call:
Department members with specialized, technical, investigative or command responsibilities may be placed
in an on-call status, as directed by the Chief of Police.
1. Personnel who are assigned on-call status shall be equipped with access to a 24-hour use vehicle and
302.PER 2
shall furnish their supervisor, or other designated person, with the telephone number where they can be
immediately contacted. Should it be necessary for an employee to be removed from on-call status due
to unscheduled leave, travel from the immediate area, illness, family emergency, or other reason, the
employee shall immediately notify their affected supervisor.
2. While on or off duty, on call sworn personnel are expected to make telephone contact with Dispatch or
other designated person, within 15 minutes of receiving a notification and to be en route to the
assignment within 30 minutes of notification.
a. Employees who are called out to work during an off duty period, shall be compensated with a
minimum of two hours overtime pay or actual overtime worked, whichever is greater.
b. Compensation to an employee who is called out at times other than a regularly scheduled shift
will begin at the time the unit member is notified, but not to exceed 30 minutes prior to
arriving at assignment.
3. If the on call person is not available to respond then contact will be made to other personnel on the
same shift as the one that was on call. Officers should not be called if on funeral leave, workman’s
compensation, sick, or a vacation day. On call attempts will continue to other personnel who are off
duty as necessary.
4. All applicable patrol personnel will be limited to signing up for a maximum of five on call days per
cycle which consists in a 28 day rotation. Exception is noted for those who hold investigative positions
and are required to take additional days in a rotation. Those officers who are scheduled to be on call are
expected to be available unless it is necessary for them to be removed from on-call status upon
approval by the affected supervisor. It is strongly discouraged for an officer who is on-call to work
special details during their committed on call time frame.
5. AN EMPLOYEE WILL NOT WORK OVER 16 HOURS in any consecutive 24-hour time period
without supervisor approval.
a. A 24-hour time period begins at the time an employee reports to duty after a minimum eight
consecutive hours off duty.
b. An employee will not report for duty or remain on duty after the conclusion of a 24-hour time
period without having had eight consecutive hours off duty unless approved by a supervisor.
c. Work shall include regularly scheduled work time, overtime, and extra duty time.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
302.PER 3
March 20, 2002
SUBJECT: VACATION / LEAVE PROGRAM / SHIFT EXCHANGE
I. POLICY:
Employees of the South Boston Police Department are governed by the leave procedures outlined in the Town
of South Boston, Personnel Policy Manual.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to define and explain the different types of leave.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Members of the South Boston Police Department will refer to the listed sections of the Town of South
Boston, Personnel Policy Manual Guidelines when any question concerning any type of leave arises:
1. Holiday Leave *
2. Annual Leave
3. Sick Leave
4. Military Leave
5. Court Leave
6. Leave without pay
7. Maternity Leave
8. Death Leave
8. Absence without Leave
9. Maximum Leave Accumulation
10. Administrative Emergency
Leave due to Hazardous Road
11. Family Medical Leave Act
* The allowed holidays may be taken as part of an extended vacation or individual holiday. See town
personnel policy.
Whenever any holiday shall fall on Saturday, the Friday preceding such day or whenever any of
such days shall fall on Sunday, the Monday next following such day, and any day so appointed
by the Town Council, the Governor of Virginia, or the President of the United States shall be a legal
holiday as to the transaction of all business.
If the nature of the services of a department requires that it be in full operation on certain days
listed above as holidays, personnel shall be credited for hours worked.
B. Employees of the department will not be absent from duty without first obtaining permission from their
supervisors.
303.PER 1
C. Employees of the Department will, in situations requiring emergency leave or sick leave, notify their
supervisors of the circumstances as soon as possible. An officer should make the request in writing (unless
emergency circumstances prevent a written request) on the “VACATION / LEAVE REQUEST FORM
(FORM 303.PER (01))” which is shown on the following page.
D. Employees should request vacations at least fourteen (14) days before they wish to take them. Any
requests not received at least fourteen days prior may be turned down outright. All vacation requests
should be made in writing on the “VACATION / LEAVE REQUEST FORM (FORM 303.PER 01)” which
is shown on the following page.
1. When vacation, sick, or leave time is approved, when training dates are assigned, or in any case where
an officer knows he or she will be unavailable for court on certain dates, it is his or her responsibility to
notify the courts and Commonwealth Attorney’s Office. The officer shall fill out a “COURT
UNAVAILABILITY DATES FORM (FORM 303.PER 02)”. Once completed the officer must turn this
form into the Records Department who will forward them to the courts and Commonwealth Attorney’s
Office. This form notifies Halifax General District and Halifax Juvenile and Domestic Courts, and the
Commonwealth Attorney’s Office of unavailable dates only. If an officer has pending cases and has a
scheduling conflict it is the officer’s responsibility to notify the Commonwealth Attorney’s Office and
to handle the motion for continuance procedures with the appropriate court.
E. In the event that an officer wants to exchange a shift on a specific date or dates with another officer then the
following must be completed:
1. Both officers involved must agree to the exchange of the date(s) and the request for exchange must be
completed at least 14 days prior to the date.
2. All requests must be submitted to the supervisor of the requesting officer via a “REQUEST FOR
SHIFT EXCANGE (FORM 303.PER 03)”. Both supervisors of the officers involved must approve the
exchange and then the form must be submitted to the Patrol Lieutenant for final approval.
3. The schedule posted in the general area for officers must show the change of personnel on the specific
dates.
F. Time worked and taken off, whether vacation or sick leave, on a daily basis needs to be documented and
accounted for. For patrol these hours are to be accounted for by the shift supervisor or their designee on a
“DAILY WORK HOURS REPORT (FORM 303.PER 04). This form should be turned in at the end of
each shift to the Records Department. For investigations these hours are to be accounted for by each
individual investigator completing a “WEEKLY TIME SHEET (FORM 303.PER 05)”. This form is to be
turned in weekly for the investigator to the Records Department.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
303.PER 2
303.PER 3
April 9, 2009
SUBJECT: EMPLOYEE DISCIPLINE
I. POLICY:
It is the Department’s policy to impose disciplinary action fairly and impartially and to offer adequate appeal
procedures to ensure that the rights of employees are protected. Discipline is a process of imposing formal
sanctions which will help train or develop an employee, preferably through constructive rather than punitive
measures. Discipline in the Department involves reward of employees, training, counseling, and as a last resort
punitive action. The South Boston Police Department does not use reduction of leave or transfer as a punitive
action in its disciplinary system.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish procedures concerning disciplinary practices within the Department.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Days: The term “days,” as used herein shall mean calendar days provided, however, that if the last day of
any time period mentioned herein is a Saturday, Sunday, or holiday, the time period shall be extended to the
next day.
B. Relief from duty: An administrative action by a superior, whereby a subordinate officer is temporarily
relieved from performing his or her duties.
C. Discipline: A method of training or developing an employee by proper supervision and instruction.

Discipline may be positive (awards) or negative (punishment).
IV. PROCEDURES
A. Positive discipline:
Positive discipline is oriented towards seeking voluntary compliance with established policies, procedures,
and orders. Methods of positive discipline include:
2. Recognition of excellent job performance through rewards or awards.
a. When positive feedback concerning an employee’s performance is received from people outside the
Department, the person who receives the information shall make a record of the comments which
will be passed to the employee and the employee’s supervisor.
b. Truly exceptional acts should be clearly and promptly identified to the employee’s supervisor and
possibly the Chief of Police. Such acts may be the basis for special awards or for special
recognition by citizen-community groups or media coverage.
B. Consistency in discipline:
304.PER 1
The Department abides by the philosophy that discipline must be applied consistently and uniformly.
Other Department policy describes complaint procedures against Department employees, whereas this
order provides discussion of employee recognition and penalties for various infractions.
The Department does not provide employees with lists of specifically prohibited behavior. One list of
examples of such behavior appears in this General Order, but no list can be all-inclusive. Employees are
expected to have a reasonable perception of what constitutes proper behavior, based on academy training
and the observance of the behavior of officers generally.
All records pertaining to disciplinary actions are filed by the Chief of Police separate from the employee’s
personnel folder.
C. Relief from duty:
Relief from duty shall be imposed whenever a supervisor, whether the Chief of Police, Captain, Lieutenant,
Sergeant, Corporal, or senior police officer, questions an employee’s physical or psychological fitness for
duty. An internal affairs investigation may follow.
1. The Sergeant or Corporal has authority to relieve an employee from duty, but must promptly report
such action to the Chief of Police, Captain, or Lieutenant, accompanied by a written report setting
forth details and circumstances.
2. An officer who refuses to obey a direct order in conformance with the Department’s rules, regulations,
and orders may be relieved from duty by the Sergeant or Corporal, who may recommend suspension to
the Chief of Police. The Chief, in consultation with the Town Manager, may then suspend without
pay.
3. If the necessity to relieve from duty is not immediate, the behavior of actions of the employee shall be
deemed a matter of internal affairs. In an internal affairs investigation, the Chief of Police solely may
relieve from duty an employee. Only the Chief of Police, in consultation with the Town Manager, may
suspend without pay a police officer whose continued presence on the job constitutes a substantial and
immediate threat to the welfare of the Department, the public, or to his or herself.
4. An officer relieved from duty pursuant to this section shall be afforded all rights provided by the
Virginia Law-Enforcement Officers Procedural Guarantee Act, as amended.
D. Personnel actions – Personnel actions may include:
1. Probation
2. Counseling
3. Training/Re-training
4. Close Supervision
5. Performance Evaluation (can be done in daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, or annual form)
E. Disciplinary actions – Disciplinary actions may include:
1. An oral warning – can be done by any supervisor and should be documented by that supervisor and
the information passed along to any other supervisor who is put in a position of direct leadership of the
offending supervisor should the supervisor who gave the warning feel that the behavior may be
repeated.
2. Oral reprimand (counseling and training) – while informal, requires documentation with an employee’s
acknowledgement of such record. Oral reprimands can be given by Sergeants and above or by
Corporals at the direction of a Sergeant or above. An “Oral Reprimand Form (Form 304.PER (01))”,
shall be completed and the following steps shall be observed.
304.PER 2
a. At the time of an oral reprimand, the employee receiving it shall be counseled as how to correct
behavior, and further advised that a written record shall be maintained concerning the
reprimand/counseling, and that the employee may read the record. Any comments the employee
receiving the oral reprimand wishes to make shall be included on the oral reprimand form. Once
the form is completed it shall be submitted through the chain of command and given to the Chief
of Police to be filed in the appropriate manner.
b. The oral reprimand/counseling may involve remedial training. Such training may be deemed
necessary to rectify the improper behavior. Remedial training may include attendance of basic
academy classes, in-service, or other training specifically created to accomplish the Department’s
recommended employee actions to correct or modify behavior. Remedial training may be
reasonably offered until the employee can demonstrate proficiency in the behavior to be corrected.
All training shall be documented in memorandum form and turned in to the Chief of Police to be
filed with the original reprimand.
c. Supervisors are responsible for the counseling of employees concerning job-related matters within
their capabilities. Many things can affect the job and an employee’s performance, so job-related
counseling may involve family and other individual, personal matters. Counseling may include
identification of unacceptable behaviors or actions, specifically what was done wrong, and what is
desired or acceptable performance; counseling can attempt to determine the reason for the
particular behavior, determine and recommend how to correct or improve performance or to solve
the problem. A variety of counseling resources are available within the community and may be
recommended to the employee be counseled including psychological, family, marital, and
financial counseling. Employees in need of counseling, or desiring information about available
resources, are encouraged to talk with their direct supervisor or a member of the administration.
3. Written reprimand
a. Written reprimands are issued only by the Chief of Police and they caution an employee about
poor behavior and set forth the corrective or modified behavior mandated by the Department, and
specify the penalty in case of recurrent poor behavior. Written reprimands are done in
memorandum form and are maintained separate from an employee’s personnel folder and are filed
by the Chief of Police.
4. Reduction in pay – an action that must be decided on by the Chief of Police and Town Manager. An
employee will receive written notification if this action is taken against him or her detailing the reason
the action is being taken against them and the amount of pay being reduced.
5. Demotion or suspension with or without pay
If the situation warrants, the Chief of Police, in consultation with the Town Manager, may demote an
employee or suspend without pay. If an employee is demoted their pay rate may be decreased to be
equivalent to the pay grade they are being demoted to.
a. Suspension without pay will normally apply to a period of up to 15 days, as determined by the
Chief of Police and Town Manager, but there may be extenuating circumstances which cause the
period to be longer.
b. If an employee receives a suspension and then becomes a candidate for suspension another time
within one year of the ending date of that suspension the employee may be dismissed.
c. Suspensions resulting from criminal investigations may be prolonged beyond 15 days pending
court action.
1. In no case shall an employee convicted of a felony continue to work for the Department.
304.PER 3
2. It is the decision of the Chief of Police and the Town Manager whether an employee may be
disciplined prior to court disposition for a criminal case based off the facts of the case and the
known actions of the employee.
3. If an employee is acquitted of criminal charges, the employee may yet be disciplined, at the
discretion of the Chief of Police, or reinstated with full or partial back pay.
d. Any member suspended for a period of 15 days or longer shall return all Department-owned
property to the Chief of Police or his/her designee. On any suspension, the employee must return
the Chief of Police or his/her designee badge, Department identification card, and issued firearm.
e. During a suspension, the employee shall not undertake any official duties.
f. Demotion shall be to the next lowest rank. Demotion shall not apply to the Patrol Officer I
position.
g. Grievance procedures for demotion are detailed in the Town of South Boston’s Personnel Policy
Handbook.
6. Dismissal / termination from Department
Dismissals are made in cases of extreme misfeasance, malfeasance, or nonfeasance of duty. A

complete record of the circumstances of the misbehavior shall be made in memo format by all persons
having knowledge of the misbehavior and filed by the Chief of Police.
a. Whenever dismissal or suspension is contemplated, the Department shall provide notice to the
employee in accordance with the Law Enforcement Officer’s Procedural Guarantee Act, as
amended.
1. If dismissal is decided upon a statement citing the reason for dismissal and the effective date
shall be provided.
b. Grievance procedures for dismissal / termination are detailed in the Town of South Boston’s
Personnel Policy Handbook.
7. Before any dismissal, demotion, suspension without pay or transfer for punitive reason may be
imposed an officer shall be provided with the “Investigative Rights Form (Form 304.PER (02”.
G. Reporting Arrests
Any employee arrested for, charged with, or convicted of any crime, or required to appear as a defendant in
any criminal or civil proceeding, must so inform the Chief of Police in writing as soon as possible.
Employees do not have to report parking tickets or minor traffic offenses. Employees must report citations
or arrests for reckless driving, DUI, second or more violation for speeding, or any other traffic offenses with
penalties over $25.00. Failure to notify the Department of these offenses shall be cause for disciplinary
action.
H. Infractions and Punishment
1. Except for gross breaches of discipline, supervisors should attempt to begin employee discipline with
the least punitive measures. If these do not work, then increasingly more severe measures may be
required. While this process may take some time, it is important that each employee be dealt with
justly and in a manner which clearly indicates that positive, constructive measures to change behavior
or performance preceded the imposition of more negative sanctions.
2. Unacceptable conduct is divided into three categories according to severity of misbehavior. The
304.PER 4
categories are:
a. Category I
(1.) Category I offenses are of minor severity yet require correction in the interest of maintaining
a productive and well managed Department.
(2.) Category I offenses normally result, in the first offense, in informal measures such as
counseling or perhaps oral reprimand/formal counseling.
(3.) Three Category I offenses in one year will result in a written reprimand or suspension of up
to five days. A fourth instance in one year shall provide grounds for longer suspension or
dismissal.
(4.) Examples of Category I offenses include, but are not limited to the following:
(a.) Excessive absences, tardiness
(b.) Abuse of duty time (too much time away from established duties, too much time for
personal business)
(c.) Failure to follow supervisor’s instructions, perform assigned work, or otherwise

comply with policy; (Insubordination or serious breach of discipline)
(d.) Deviation from established procedures in the disposition of summons or arrest cases
(e.) Abusive, harsh, profane or obscene/vulgar language to any member of the Department
or to the public
(f.) Incompetent, inadequate, inefficient or unsatisfactory job performance
(g.) Failure to report on an appropriate superior authority incompetence, misconduct,

inefficiency, neglect of duty, or any other form of misconduct or negligence of which
the employee has knowledge
(h.) Failure for a supervisory employee to take corrective action regarding employees under
their supervision who may be guilty of any form of neglect of duty or misconduct
where the supervisor knows or should have known to such dereliction
(i.) Refusal to work overtime
(j.) Disruptive behavior
(k.) Recommending legal counsel or bondsman to any person while on duty
(5.) Certain category I offenses may result in the officer being ineligible for promotion or lateral
move for a period not to be less than 6 months or more than 1 year. Such period shall be
determined by the Chief of Police.
b. Category II
(1.) Category II offenses include more severe acts and misbehavior.
(2.) Category II offenses normally result, on the first instance, in issuance of or written
reprimand. A subsequent infraction within two years shall result in suspension of up to ten
days or demotion or dismissal.
304.PER 5
(3.) Examples of Category II offenses include, but are not limited to the following:
(a.) Violating safety rules without a threat to life
(b.) Unauthorized time away from work assignments without permission during duty hours
(c.) Failure to report to work without proper notice to a supervisor
(d.) Unauthorized use of or misuse of Department property
(e.) Sleeping on duty
(f.) Selling, trading, or buying chances or bets, or any other gambling while on duty
(g.) Discourteous treatment of the public or any act of omission or commission of similar
nature discrediting or injuring the public service or any act jeopardizing the effective
functioning of their services
(h.) Hampering an investigation
(4.) Certain category II offenses may result in the officer being ineligible for promotion or
lateral move for a period not to be less than 6 months or more than 1 year. Such period
shall be determined by the Chief of Police.
c. Category III
(1.) Category III offenses include acts of such severity as to merit suspension or dismissal at a
single occurrence. Category III offenses may by punished by suspension for 15 days (or
longer, with approval from the Town Manager) or dismissal.
(2.) Examples of Category III offenses include, but are not limited to:
(a.) Absences in excess of three days without notice to a supervisor
(b.) Willful disobedience of a lawful command of a supervisor
(c.) Use of alcohol or unlawful possession or use of a controlled substance while on duty
(d.) Reporting to work under the influence or when ability is impaired by alcohol or the
unlawful use of controlled substances, illegal drugs or narcotics
(e.) Buying alcoholic beverages while on-duty
(f.) Falsification of any reports such as, but not limited to, vouchers, official reports, and
time records, leave records, or knowingly make any false official statement
(g.) Releasing any information to a suspect or convicted person that would enable an escape
from custody
(h.) Willfully or negligently damage or destroy town property
(i.) Theft or unauthorized removal of Departmental records or town or employee property
(j.) Acts of physical violence or fighting (except official police actions)
(k.) Violating safety rules where there is a threat to life
304.PER 6
(l.) Participating in any kind of work slowdown or sit-down or any other concerted
interference with town/county operations
(m.) Unauthorized possession or use of firearms, dangerous weapons, or explosives
(n.) Threatening or coercing employees or supervisors
(o.) Criminal convictions for acts of conduct occurring on or off the job which are plainly
related to job performance or are of such that to continue the employee in the assigned
position could constitute negligence in regard to the agency’s duties to the public
(p.) Failure to take physical or mental examination as required. (The Chief of Police may
require mental or physical examinations of a member or employee by a designated
psychiatrist, psychologist, or physician when, in the Chief’s estimation, it is in the best
interest of the employee or the Department)
(q.) Using public office for private gain
(r.) Engaging in criminal conduct on or off the job
(s.) Engaging in dishonest or immoral conduct that undermines the effectiveness of the
agency’s activities or employee performance, whether on or off the job
(t.) Disclosure of confidential information to any person except those who may be entitled
to such information
(u.) Taking any action which will impair the efficiency or reputation of the Department, its
members, or employees
(v.) Acceptance of any bribe, gift, token money, or other things of value intended as an
inducement to perform or refrain from performing any official act, or any action of
extortion or other means of obtaining money or anything of value through his or her
position
(w.) Manifesting cowardice, feigning illness or otherwise attempting to shirk official duty
(x.) Involvement in any compromise between persons accused of crime and the person or
persons who may have suffered from criminal acts with the purpose of allowing the
accused to escape punishment
(y.) Failure to answer questions specifically directed and related to official duties or job
fitness (Unless criminal prosecution is contemplated)
(z.) The use of unnecessary force during an arrest/custody procedure
(aa.) Sexual activities on duty
(6.) Nothing in this General Order limits the charges against employees because the alleged act
or omission does not specifically appear in the general order of the Department, or in the
laws or ordinances of which the Department is responsible to enforce.
(7.) Officers who are disciplined for a category III offense shall be ineligible for promotion or
lateral move for a period of 1 year.
I. Probationary Employees
304.PER 7
Probationary employees shall be dismissed, suspended, or otherwise disciplined according to the
foregoing. The only difference is that a probationary employee has no right of appeal.
J. Sexual Harassment and Other Discrimination
Employees found to have engaged in discrimination on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin,
political affiliation, handicap, age or sex (including sexual harassment) may be counseled or disciplined
with a Category I, II, or III offense, depending upon the specific facts and circumstances surrounding the
incident.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
304.PER 8
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: BENEFITS PACKAGE

(Retirement, Life Insurance, Disability, Health Insurance, Liability, &
Education Assistance Programs)
I. POLICY:
All members of the South Boston Police Department will participate in the Virginia Retirement System (VRS)
as well as having the opportunity to be covered by health insurance with the Local Choice Health and Insurance
Program group for them and their families. Department personnel should always be aware that these benefits
may change yearly and this policy does not supersede commitments made by the Town as for percentages paid
into given benefits packages or what exact benefits are provided by the Town.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to help explain programs or to make known the literature which contains
the explanation of the programs concerning retirement, disability, health insurance, liability protection and
educational assistance programs.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. Retirement, Disability and Death Benefits:
1. Members of the South Boston Police Department are enrolled in the Virginia Retirement System
(VRS) which provides its members with retirement and life insurance benefits. The explanation of the
program and its coverage are found on VRS's website (varetire.org).
2. Members retiring at the age of 50 with 25 or more years of creditable service receive unreduced
benefits. Members retiring at the age of 50 with fewer than 25 years of creditable service can retire
with a reduced benefit.
3. Training reference benefits available to an employee or their family in reference to a line of duty
incident resulting in a permanent disability or death shall be provided to every employee.
B. Health Insurance Program:
Members of the South Boston Police Department have the option of participating in group health insurance.
The Town of South Boston pays 90% of the employee share while enrolled in the Local Choice Health and
Insurance Program. Information on the program(s) offered as well as guidelines that members must follow
are found in the handbook provided by the insurance provider which may change yearly. Department
personnel may contact the Town Human Resources office at any time to request an updated handbook.
These handbooks are distributed (electronically or hard copy) to employees each year when received after
their new publication.
C. On-the-job injury:
305.PER 1
1. Employees who are injured while on duty shall, at the first opportunity, make a written report
submitted through the chain of command to the chief of police.
2. All initial reports should be completed before the end of the tour of duty, or not later than twenty-
four hours after the incident.
3. In the event that the injured employee is not able to make the report, the supervisor shall be
responsible for submitting all required reports with all available information.
4. The injured employee shall send or deliver, at the earliest time, additional medical statements or
information concerning when the employee may or will be available for reassignment to light or
regular duty.
5. The injured employee, or his/her supervisor if he/she is unable to speak for himself/herself, shall notify
the hospital, doctor, and pharmacy that all expenses related to the on-the-job injury are to be billed
to the town insurance carrier for payment under Workers' Compensation.
6. Employees are covered by Workers' Compensation for any injury sustained while properly
performing assigned duties, for as long as medically necessary (Workers’ Compensation has its own
process for determining what are valid injuries covered under the program, a process in which the
Town has no control). The Town has the right to request, at any time, a medical re-evaluation of an
employee. Injuries include those occurring while attending the police academy, Forensic Academy, or
any other department authorized school, training, or meeting.
7. Any employee or their representative shall notify the chief of police if he or she becomes permanently
disabled due to a work related injury suffered in the line of duty. Within 10 business days of such
notification the Town shall provide the employee with information about the continued health
insurance coverage provided under this act and the process for initiating a claim. The employer shall
assist in filing a claim, unless such assistance is waived by the employee or their representative.
D. Off-the-job injury/illness:
1. Whenever a member of the department sustains an injury or illness, not job related, that would
affect performing normal assignments, the time that person may take off from work will be
deducted from his or her accrued sick leave.
2. If absent for more than three consecutive work days, the employee may be required to file a
physician’s certificate stating therein the reasons for his or her absence and how long the injury or
illness may require that person to be away from his/her normal assignment.
3. As soon as possible, before his or her next tour of duty, the injured/ill employee shall inform his or
her immediate supervisor of the extent of the injury or illness and deliver or send any medical
statements certifying when he/she may be expected to return to duty.
4. If an employee is without enough sick leave to cover an absence, vacation time will be deducted,
and finally leave without pay will be charged.
E. OSHA Requirements:
Should a full-time officer or employee be killed while on duty, OSHA in Richmond must be notified
immediately. If five or more full-time officers or employees are injured in one incident, OSHA in
Richmond must be notified immediately. The town manager should be called at the very earliest
305.PER 2
time to begin the paper work and process the death notification or multiple employee injury
notification.
F. Liability Protection:
The Town of South Boston maintains liability insurance on all law enforcement officers in case of lawsuits.
The Virginia Municipal League, which the Town of South Boston participates in, covers law enforcement
officers in lawsuits up to one million dollars.
G. Employee Educational Assistance Program:
Employees are encouraged to seek additional higher education to complement career goals. The
department is supportive of officers advancing their education and will assist with scheduling when
possible. (See the Town of South Boston Personnel Policy Manual.)
H. Family Medical Leave Act
Employees are entitled to participate in the benefits of the Family and Medical Leave Act (“FMLA”).
FMLA leave is unpaid leave. The Town requires an employee to use accrued paid leave on an hour for
hour basis in conjunction with FMLA leave.
AUTHORIZATION:
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
305.PER 3
May 28, 2009
SUBJECT: RECRUIT TRAINING AND THE FIELD TRAINING PROGRAM
I. Policy:
The South Boston Police Department must utilize its present and future training programs for the
purpose of developing, maintaining, and improving the professional standards of the Police
Department. To accomplish this, the Police Department has instituted/participates in and maintains
two separate programs, a Recruit Training Program and a Field Training Evaluation Program (FTEP).
II. Purpose:
The purpose of this general order is to supply information about recruit training and to set forth the
guidelines surrounding the establishment and maintenance of the field training and evaluation
program.
III. Procedure:
A. Recruit Training
Recruit training for the South Boston Police Department is done at the Central Virginia Criminal
Justice Academy located in Lynchburg, Virginia.
1. The academy maintain an ever changing curriculum based on the most frequent assignments of
officer who have completed the recruit training.
2. The academy conforms to the standards outlined in the Criminal Justice Training Reference
Manual distributed by the Department of Criminal Justice Services (DCJS). These standards
comply with the state training mandates for police officers, and all applicable legal requirements
relevant to the performance of those duties.
3. Students are taught in blocks and evaluation techniques (testing and practical exercise) is used
to measure the competency in the required skills, knowledge and abilities of each subject matter
taught.
4. All officers recruit training, state mandated training, will be performed at the academy and the
officer trainee will conform to, participate in, and successfully complete the curriculum set form
by the training program at the academy. This will be done prior to any routine assignment in
any capacity in which the officer is allowed to enforce laws and/or in a position to make an
arrest.
B. Field Training and Evaluation Program
1. The Field Training and Evaluation Program has been instituted to bridge the gap between
academic training and police work on the street. This program will provide the
probationary/trainee officer, on-the-job training with the necessary instruction and guidance,
under filed conditions, in a structured and supervised manner, to meet the standards of the South
Boston Police Department. The program is directly supervised by the Patrol Lieutenant.
306.PER 1
2. The program will be reviewed on an annual basis to determine and improve its level of
effectiveness. This review will include the field training officers, new officers who recently
completed the program, shift supervisors, and the Patrol Lieutenant (or other supervisor as
directed by the Chief of Police).
3. Upon completion of the basic police academy new officers shall be assigned to patrol to
complete the Field Training and Evaluation Program. A qualified Field Training Officer (FTO)
will assist the trainee in going through the necessary transitions to become a well-trained
professional police officer.
4. All new officers will be required to go through a scheduled twelve week period of field training
The twelve weeks shall be broken down into three phases. It should be noted that the new
officers will progress at different levels, depending on numerous factors including past
experiences and education therefore, the length of time spent by new officers in the program
will vary in both the amount of time spent in each phase and the total amount of time spent in
the Field Training and Evaluation Program. At the beginning of the program a supervisor or
the FTO should complete a “New Officer Information Sheet (Form 306.PER (01))”.
Upon the completion of phases 1 and 2 the new officer’s Field Training Officer shall
complete an “FTO Evaluation Phase 1 & 2 Report (Form 306.PER 02)”, recommending that the
new officer either be allowed to proceed to the next phase or it shall address problems noted
noted with the new officer and actions taken to correct these problems. Upon completion of
phase 3 the Field Training Officer shall complete a “FTO Evaluation Phase 3 Report (Form
306.PER (03)” which shall recommend that the new officer be released from the Field Training
and Evaluation Program and assigned to his or her shift in the patrol unit or make
recommendations for improvement.
a. Phase 1 (Initial Recruit Training): This phase shall be the first six weeks, approximately, a
new officer spends in the program. During this phase Field Training Officers should be
evaluating closely every aspect of a new police officer focusing in areas such as the officers
ability to learn new skills, control conflict, problem solving and decision making abilities,
officer safety, and their ability to establish relationships with not only Department members
but citizens as well.
b. Phase 2 (FTO Assisted Patrol): This phase will last approximately four weeks. During this
phase new officers shall be monitored closely by their Field Training Officers to ensure
that they perform the job functions with a decrease in assistance by the Field Training
Officer throughout the timeframe. The Field Training Officer should focus on getting the
new officers to a point where they can patrol on their own.
c. Phase 3 (New Officer Patrol): This phase will last for approximately the final two weeks of
the Field Training and Evaluation Program. During this phase new officers shall patrol on
their own but shill receive daily evaluations from the Field Training Officer.
5. All officers presently certified as police officer in the Commonwealth of Virginia, that are not
required to attend all of the police academy will also be required to complete the Field
Training and Evaluation Program though the program may be shorter than twelve weeks as
determined by the assigned Field Training Officer and the Patrol Lieutenant.
6. Upon successful completion of the Field Training and Evaluation Program, the
probationary/trainee officer will be assigned to a shift designated by the Chief of Police or
his/her designee. Also, the Records Management Unit will submit required documentation to
the Department of Criminal Justice Services so that the officer will receive state certification
and will be placed in the state training tracking system. To aid in the completion of that
documentation the officer’s Field Training Officer will complete the “FTO DCJS INFO
SHEET (Form 306.PER (04))” and submit it to the Patrol Lieutenant or his/her designee. At
306.PER 2
this time the new officer will have reached a level of proficiency in which he or she can
function independently.
C. Field Training Evaluation
1. The Field Training Evaluation will be accomplished while the trainee is performing tasks of the
most frequent assignments of a patrol officer.
2. FTO’s will use the Department “FTO Daily Observation Reports (FORM 306.PER (05))”
to evaluate trainees daily. This form is designed to measure the competency in the required
skills, knowledge, and abilities of the trainee.
3. The four main areas of the Department daily observation report are:
a. Appearance
b. Knowledge / Problem Solving
c. Performance
d. Relationships
4. The “FTO Standardized Evaluation Guidelines (FORM 306.PER (06))” details each
subcategory of the four main areas and details the requirements that a trainee must show to
receive one of the three ratings of unacceptable, acceptable, or superior on the Department
daily observation report.
5. The FTO will counsel the trainee at the end of each shift and review the evaluation.
6. Both the FTO and the trainee will sign the second page of the Department daily observation
report.
7. Also to be completed on a daily basis are the “FTO Calls For Service / Incidents Handled
(FORM 306.PER (07)) and the “FTO General Orders Reviewed (FORM 301.PER (08))”.
D. Field Training Officer Selection Process
An important element in a successful Field Training and Evaluation Program is the field training
officer (FTO). The prospective FTO is required to submit a written memo to the Chief of Police,
explaining his/her interest and desire in the program. All applicants will be interviewed and
selected by the Chief of Police or his/her designee.
1. Applicants must possess a certificate of completion of basic police academy.
2. Minimum of two years of law enforcement experience with the Police Department.
3. Last evaluation was above average and is not currently under a disciplinary action.
4. Exemplary skill in conducting investigation, report writing and knowledge of the criminal
justice system.
5. Outstanding attitude and initiative.
6. Completion of a Field Training Course approved by DCJS if course is available; any officers
appointed designated as an FTO will be scheduled to attend a course. The Department will
typically put all officers of the rank of Senior Patrol Officer or POII through the Field Training
306.PER 3
Officer training program, to help them gain a better understanding of supervision, but that does
not automatically mean they will be utilized as a Field Training Officer. That selection is done
by the Chief of Police.
7. A recommendation of the applicant’s supervisor who has knowledge of the officer’s skills. This
recommendation should include:
a. Past and present performance
b. Skill and interpersonal relationships
c. Knowledge of training responsibilities
d. Knowledge of teaching techniques
e. Skill in verbal presentation
8. The FTO must be capable of teaching the trainee how to do good police work and of giving an
accurate and unbiased evaluation of the trainee.
When selecting a field training officer, three major factors shall be evaluated:
a. Does the officer have a positive attitude?
b. Is the officer capable of and willing to instruct new trainees?
c. Is the officer capable of doing an accurate and unbiased evaluation of a trainee?
E. Field Training Officer
1. The Field Training Officer will be under the supervision of the Patrol Lieutenant unless
otherwise directed by the Chief of Police. If a FTO receives a below standard evaluation
they may be removed from the program until their evaluation improves to at least a meets
standards.
2. The FTO has two primary roles to fulfill.
a. That of a patrol officer assuming full responsibility to perform his/her regularly assigned
duties, and
b. That on an instructor of trainee personnel.
3. The FTO’s regular responsibilities are clearly defined in other orders included in the policy and
procedure manual. In his/her role as a teacher they provide on-going instruction in the general
sense, utilizing innovative and practical techniques.
4. The FTO must have the requisite skills necessary to become a reliable evaluator of the trainee’s
performance. He/she is required to write a daily evaluation of this performance and submit any
additional documentation as required. He/she must realize the importance of full documentation
of all the field training a new officer receives.
5. The FTO is charge with the responsibility of recommending termination, retention, or remedial
training.
6. The FTO’s performance is also subject to evaluation, the FTO’s professional and personal
conduct must be exemplary. The FTO understands that the effectiveness, image, and future of
306.PER 4
the Police Department are substantially decided by the quality of its personnel
7. The FTO will:
a. Maintain familiarity with all departmental policy and procedures as well as the standardized
evaluation guidelines listed in this general order.
b. Complete the daily evaluation report on the trainee and submit it to the Patrol Lieutenant for
review as well as to placed in the trainee’s training folder.
c. Communicate problems to the shift supervisor as well as the Patrol Lieutenant.
d. Maintain liaison with the basic police academy staff especially when trainee problems are
recognized or questions exist involving the criteria covered in the basic academy.
e. Have the trainee perform different and progressively more difficult tasks.
f. Maintain security of the files and confidentiality of the trainee’s performance and progress.
g. Protect and promote the program.
h. Reserve criticism of the trainee to direct supervisors.
i. Act as a role model by:
1.) Maintaining a good personal appearance.
2.) Following policies and procedures.
3.) Having a positive attitude toward the Field Training and Evaluation Program, trainee,
job, and Police Department.
j. Attend all functions with the trainee i.e. court, obtaining warrants, service of criminal
warrants and summons, etc.
F. Removal of an FTO
Any FTO who does not perform his or her responsibilities in a satisfactory manner may be
removed by the Chief of Police.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
306.PER 5
September 20, 2021
SUBJECT: CAREER DEVELOPMENT (PROMOTION PROCESS & TRAINING)
I. POLICY:
The South Boston Police Department encourages employees to seek opportunities to develop their knowledge,
skills, and abilities. Although all officers must attend a basic academy and periodic in-service training, the
department nevertheless tries to arrange participation in specialized or advanced training. Further, although in a
small department promotion opportunities may be rare, the department requires a fair and equitable selection
process. The police department is committed to a policy that increases the prestige and level of performance of
its officers and encourages them to continue their professional development by providing incentives throughout
their law enforcement careers. The career development process shall focus on actual job performance, combined
with professional growth and development.
Training has often been cited as one of the most important responsibilities in any law enforcement agency.
Training serves three broad purposes.
A. Well trained officers are generally better prepared to act decisively and correctly in a broad spectrum of
situations.
B. Training results in greater productivity and effectiveness.
C. Training fosters cooperation and unity of purpose.
Furthermore, agencies are held legally accountable for the actions of their personnel and for failing to provide
initial or remedial training. The department recognizes the importance of training and is committed to providing
the best training available to all personnel.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish guidelines for career development of employees to include training and promotions.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Responsibilities of the chief of police:
1. Annually, the chief of police, or his designee, shall review each employee (typically this review will be
done as part of the employee’s yearly evaluation). This review shall occur on or about the employee’s
anniversary hire date/promotion date. The review shall include an examination of:
a. Employee's performance record.
b. A review of training programs applicable to the employee's duties.
2. The chief of police shall ensure that at least one employee reviews and maintains certification as a
firearms instructor.
3. The chief of police shall ensure that at least one employee has received advanced training in evidence
307.PER
collection techniques.
4. The chief of police shall ensure that any employee, upon receiving a promotion or a new assignment,
attend relevant training as soon as practicable.
IV. DISCRETIONARY APPOINTMENTS
A. In special circumstances such as a lateral entry of a certified police officer, the chief of police may waive
restrictions such as time in service requirements and designate the appointee a classification other than
Police Officer I. In the case of the hiring of a certified police officer, the chief of police may assign them
the rank of Police Officer II (senior patrol officer). The chief of police may also assign other new hires the
rank of Police Officer II based off of a certain number of years of experience in a police related field (i.e.,
corrections). The rank of Police Officer II shall not be effective for new hires until after their field training
is completed, unless otherwise directed by the chief of police.
B. All assignments to sworn positions above the rank of Patrol Officer II shall be made by the chief from
among the current sworn officers, except whenever the chief determines that a position requires knowledge,
skills, experience, or abilities such that a sufficient pool of qualified candidates does not exist within the
department. In these special circumstances, the chief shall submit this justification, in writing, to the town
manager.
V. PROMOTIONS:
A. Patrol Officer II (senior patrol officer)
1. An officer hired as a Patrol Officer I is eligible for promotion to the rank of Patrol Officer II two
years after completion of the field training officer program (unless otherwise directed by the chief of
police). In addition to the years of service with the agency, the officer must receive a written
recommendation from his or her direct supervisor and be recommended by an oral promotion board
that shall be arranged by the chief of police or their designee. In addition to interviewing the eligible
officer the board may review the officer’s prior evaluations, interview the officer’s supervisor(s), and
review the officer’s personnel and training records. The promotion to Police Officer II shall be at the
direction of the chief of police
B. Corporal, Sergeant, Lieutenant, and Captain
1. Officers with six consecutive month’s service with this agency at their current rank shall be eligible for
promotion to the next rank when a vacancy becomes available, unless there are disciplinary issues, low
evaluation scores, or other factors as determined by the chief of police which makes them ineligible.
Officers who are on probation or F.T.O. status are not eligible for promotion. This includes officers
completing a required six-month probationary period resulting from promotion. Also, officers who
have been subject to certain disciplinary actions during a specific timeframe (as defined in general
order on employee discipline) are not eligible for promotion. The chief of police reserves the right to
wave the six-month probationary period resulting from a promotion, or reduce the probationary period
resulting from lateral entry, should an operational need exist to benefit the department.
2. When a vacancy exists, the chief of police, or his designee, shall advertise the position for at least one
week. During that time, eligible officers shall request - in writing – to be considered for the advertised
position. Officers are encouraged to submit a resume and/or cover letter along with their request,
however these are not required to be considered.
3. Depending on the applicant pool, tenure of applicants, eligibility of applicants, or other factors, the
chief may determine which of the following promotional steps will be utilized to select the best
candidate for the advertised position. Promotional processes may include multiple steps.
307.PER
a. Written test developed and/or approved by the chief of police.
Test may include questions related to current general orders, the Code of Virginia, South Boston
town ordinances, case law, community policing, patrol techniques, supervisor and management
principles, and/or other relevant information.
b. Oral Promotion Interview Board
i. The promotion board shall consist of personnel designated by the chief.
ii. The board shall interview each applicant concerning performance, and training.
iii. The board shall be provided with interview questions and present them in a consistent and
standard manner for all applicants.
iv. The interview questions may examine general job knowledge, dependability, quantity and
quality of work, cooperation, esprit d’corps, public relations, leadership, report writing ability,
physical fitness, and additional skills acquired while a member of the department.
v. The board will score each candidate using the point system provided. Each board member will
score the candidate individually. These individual scores will then be averaged into a final
score. Final scores will be truncated to the tenth digit. The board may award a maximum of 50
points using, “Promotion Board Scoring (FORM 307.PER (02))”.
c. Practical Exercise(s)
i. Practical exercises will be relevant to the position for which the process is being conducted.
ii. When possible, practical exercises will be scored using the same scoring process as the Oral
Promotion Interview Board.
iii. Practical exercises may be designed to mirror a project or task that would be logically assigned
to the successful candidate in the actual position.
d. Interview with the Chief of Police
i. This step should be the final step in the selection process (if utilized).
ii. The chief will utilize each applicant’s scores on other previous promotional steps to determine
the number of applicants that will proceed to this step. (If applicable)
iii. Candidates will be deemed equal during this step for final selection by the chief of police.
iv. When making the final selection for the position, the chief should consider agency tenure, time
in position, organizational need, knowledge, skills, abilities, and suitability for the position.
4. The candidates not selected for the position will remain on a promotion list for six (6) months.
5. Newly Promoted Employee / Functional Reassigned Employee:
a. The newly promoted and the functional reassigned employee shall be placed on a six month
probation period.
307.PER
b. The newly promoted employee should receive skill development upon promotion which will
include
but not be limited to:
i. Training in management/supervisory techniques;
ii. General counseling techniques,
C. First Sergeant (Senior Sergeant)
A Sergeant is eligible for advancement to the rank of First Sergeant with the agency should they hold
the most senior sergeant position (either in patrol or investigations) if there is a vacancy for the First
Sergeant position, unless there have been disciplinary issues. The advancement to First Sergeant shall be at
the direction of the chief of police. The chief of police may decide to maintain or eliminate the position
depending on the needs of the agency when a vacancy exists.
VI. TRAINING:
Members of the South Boston Police Department receive training by attending the basic law enforcement
training academy as well as in-service/in-house training and by attending special schools that are held on
different job related subjects throughout the Commonwealth of Virginia or wherever necessary.
A. Training records
1. The chief of police, or his designee, shall maintain, in each training file, a training record, for all job
related training, in-house or not, which will include:
a. Date of training and hours of attendance;
b. Identification of trainers or agencies presenting the course
c. Title and Type of training received;
d. Any certificate received;
e. Performance of individual attained as measured by tests, if administered, or competency.
f. Names of all agency personnel receiving the training.
2. The chief of police, or his designee, will maintain an annual inventory of the skills, knowledge and
abilities of each employee. These records will consistently be developed and accumulated for each
employee.
B. In-Service Training:
All sworn personnel of the department will, biennially, as required by law, complete 40 hours of in-service
training as approved by the Department of Criminal Justice Services. Such training may include:
1. Legal Updates
2. Classes required at the direction of the chief of police or regional training academy, such as:
a. Supervisory and management training,
b. Policy and procedure training,
307.PER
c. Cultural diversity training,
d. Any other training as deemed necessary.
3. Firearms training and qualifications at least once every year.
4. Voluntary and required training; Supervisors shall forward training opportunities to their employees.
Should the employee need and/or want to complete a specific training, the employee should submit a
“REQUEST FOR TRAINING FORM (307.PER (03))” to their supervisor who shall submit it to the
administrative lieutenant if approved.
C. Specialized In-Service Training:
Officers performing a function which requires specialized training will be trained so that they can develop
or enhance the skills, knowledge and abilities in that particular function.
1. The following is a list of some of the departmental functions that require specialized training:
a. Supervisor,
b. Manager,
c. Administrator,
d. Investigations,
e. Field Training Officer,
f. Negotiator,
g. Bike Patrol,
h. Radar,
i. Evidential Breath Test Operator,
j. Firearms Instructor,
k. Photography,
l. Defensive Driving Instructor
m. Defensive Tactics Instructor
n. Special Response Team Training
o. K-9 Handler
D. In-house Training:
1. Firearms training will be required of all officers on an annual basis. This training will require officers
to show proficiency using their issued service weapons and off-duty weapon. The proficiency is
307.PER
documented on the “Range Qualification Form (Form 307.PER (04))”.
2. In house training will be assigned as needed for new policy review, newly enacted or revised laws,
specialized training, changes in procedures, or any other reason deemed necessary by the chief of
police.
(Information may be provided to sworn officers on newly enacted laws, legislative changes, or
revisions from the Virginia State Police website.)
3. Lesson plans are required for all DCJS training courses provided by the department. It is the
responsibility of the individual instructor, whether resident or non-resident, to provide the
administrative lieutenant with a copy of the lesson plan for approval before each class.
4. The lesson plan should include a statement of performance objectives, the content of the training,
specification of appropriate instructional techniques, references, relationships to job tasks,
responsibilities of the participants for the material taught, and plans for evaluation of the participants.
The instructional techniques used may include, but not be limited to:
a. Lecture
b. Practical
c. Discussion and Debate
d. Field Experience
e. Simulations
E. Remedial Training:
Remedial training is directed at solving or curing a particular problem or improving performance in a

particular area, within a designated time and with clearly defined, expected results. Remedial training may
be assigned as a result of discipline, counseling, or clearly defined need.
F. Training Programs:
1. Attendance:
Members of the South Boston Police Department are expected to attend any assigned training
programs. Attendance will be documented by either the instructor or, in cases where the training is at
locations other than the department, documentation will be furnished by those responsible for the
training. These trainings will be monitored/documented in the members’ training files. There are cases
where attendance at a training program may be excused such as court appearance or sickness. Any
absence must be properly excused by the administrators of the program. If required, the time lost must
be made up before any certificate of completion is issued. A copy of all certification/certificates will
be provided to the administrative lieutenant for inclusion in the employee's training file.
2. Expenses:
With the exception of clerical needs (i.e. paper, pencils, pens) all expenses incurred by department
personnel as a result of required training will be reimbursed based on actual expense (receipts must be
provided), or in the case of mileage where personnel are required to use their personal vehicles, the
reimbursement rate will be the current town mileage rate.
307.PER
3. Performance-based training:
The Department of Criminal Justice Services requires performance-based basic training. This method
of training, used for all training, requires the development of performance objectives. An employee
who develops an outline for instruction of a topic must develop objectives which:
a. Focus on the elements of the job-task analysis for which training is needed.
b. Provide clear statements of what is to be learned.
c. Provide the basis for evaluating the participants.
d. Provide the basis for evaluating the effectiveness of the training program.
The use of performance objectives acquaints the training participant with the information they are
required to know, the skills that must be demonstrated, and the circumstances under which the skills
will be used. This approach also enables the instructors to relate training directly to the job
performance that will be expected by supervisors.
4. Instructors:
a. Instructors for all department training programs shall meet the following requirements:
(1) Have a minimum of 2 years law enforcement experience
(2) Have completed an instructor's course and be certified as an instructor
(3) Possess a demonstrated skill in the instruction area
(4) Be knowledgeable of teaching theories, methods, and practices, and have some knowledge of
law enforcement practices.
(5) Instructors enlisted from outside the department will be selected by the chief. The instructor
must have demonstrated skill in his/her area of instruction and comply with requirements for
lesson plans as previously stated. Any compensation will be determined by the chief of police.
b. Before being allowed to instruct any state-mandated courses at the department, instructors will
receive, at a minimum, training in the following subjects:
(1) Lesson plan development,
(2) Development of performance objectives,
(3) Instructional techniques,
(4) Learning theory,
(5) Testing and evaluation techniques,
(6) Resources.
c. Normally, officers selected and trained as instructors in a particular subject will be expected to
teach when needed for a minimum of two years.
G. Psychological Counseling:
307.PER
1. When the chief of police learns of personnel who are in need of psychological counseling, he shall
refer
them to mental health or other counseling sources.
2. If, in the judgment of the chief of police, psychiatric treatment is required in the interests of the
employee
and the department, the chief may require an officer to receive treatment. Treatment or counseling will
be handled with the utmost confidentiality.
H. Civilian personnel:
All newly appointed civilian personnel will receive the following training from the chief of police, or his
designee:
1. Orientation to the department's role, purpose, goals, policies, and procedures.
2. Working conditions, rules, and regulations.
3. Responsibilities and rights of employees.
The following civilian positions of the department will receive initial specified training and any applicable
in-service or recertification training:
1. Office Manager
a. Incident Based Report (IBR) training
b. VCIN/NCIC Class A operator training
c. Livescan training
d. Additional training may be required depending upon the job duties of this position.
2. Police Records Specialist
a. Incident Based Report (IBR) training
b. VCIN/NCIC Class A operator training
c. Livescan training
d. Additional training may be required depending upon the job duties of this position.
3. Crossing Guard
I. Advanced education:
Employees are encouraged to seek additional higher education to complement career goals. The
department is supportive of officers advancing their education and will assist with scheduling when
possible.
AUTHORIZATION:
307.PER
________________________________
Bryan L. Young
CHIEF OF POLICE
307.PER
NUMBER September 24, 2015
August 1, 2012
SUBJECT: PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS
I. POLICY:
The Department bear an obligation to the public and its own personnel to hire and maintain the best qualified
police officers. To that end, the Department regularly and formally evaluates the performance of officers and
other employees. The evaluation system discussed herein serves both the interests of management and the
Department’s employees. The purposes of the evaluation system are to:
A. The purposes of the evaluation system are to:
1. Allow fair and impartial personnel decisions

2. Maintain and improve performance
3. Provide a basis and a medium for personnel counseling
4. Assist decisions about the tenure of probationary employees
5. Identify training needs
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this policy is to outline and describe the Departmental evaluation process.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. All Department personnel shall be evaluated by the form supplied by the Town Manager’s office and in a
manner dictated by the Town Manager’s office which is outlined in the Town “Performance Management
and Evaluation System Manual”. In addition to the Town form the Department provides a form to
document specific details of an employee’s yearly work activity, “Officer Work Activity Evaluation Sheet
(Form 308. PER (01))”.
B. Evaluations reflect observations and perceptions by rating personnel and therefore can be inherently
subjective. The Police Department attempts to minimize the amount one supervisor’s viewpoint affects an
evaluation by including multiple supervisors in the completion of each evaluation. The supervisors
participating in each evaluation are:
1. The officer / employee’s shift supervisor or Department head
2. The officer’s / employee’s administration supervisor
3. The Chief of Police
4. The Town Manager
C. Personnel shall be evaluated according to their work and factors that affect work performance and shall be
rated on a scale that reflects: “Below Standards”, “Needs Improvement”, “Meets Standards”, and
“Exceptional Performance”.
308.PER 1
D. Each employee shall be counseled at the conclusion of the evaluation period. The employee shall be
advised of:
1. The results of the performance period just completed
2. The level of performance expected
3. The goals of the new reporting period
4. Career counseling relative to such topics as advancement, specialization, or training appropriate to the
employee’s position
E. All evaluations shall be kept separated from an employee’s personnel files and shall be secured at the
direction of the Chief of Police.
F. At the direction of the Town Manager or his/her designee, each employee shall be evaluated yearly or
another annual manner. Employees who fail to receive a meets standards evaluation shall be placed on a
probation period until their next evaluation (not to exceed one year). Within that period the employee may
receive remedial training in deficient areas, shall demonstrate proficiency (or satisfactory improvement) in
deficient areas. Also during this probationary period the employee is not eligible for promotion or lateral
transfer.
G. Evaluations shall be verbally covered with personnel by their shift supervisor or Department head. If
unavailable or if the evaluation is below a meets standards the evaluation may be verbally covered with the
employee by a member of the administration.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
308.PER 2
March 4, 2002
SUBJECT: SEXUAL HARRASSMENT AND EMPLOYEE DISCRIMINATION
I. POLICY:
Per Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, sexual harassment is defined as the deliberate or repeated behavior
of a sexual nature by one employee to another that is unwelcome, unasked for or rebuked by the other
employee. The behavior can be verbal or physical. (NOTE: The Civil Rights Act also prohibits harassment
based on race.) Harassment may occur between co-workers or between a superior employee and a subordinate
one.
The Department's policy is to provide a professional, businesslike work environment free form all forms of
employee discrimination including incidents of sexual harassment. No employee shall be subjected to
unsolicited and unwelcome sexual overtures or conduct either verbal or physical. Sexual harassment will be
treated as misconduct with appropriate disciplinary sanctions.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish Department policy concerning allegations of sexual harassment, describe reporting procedures, and
define the term.
III. PROCEDURE:
A. An employee who believes he or she has been sexually harassed or discriminated against shall contact their
immediate supervisor. The employee shall submit a memorandum to the Chief of Police, through the chain
of command, detailing the circumstances.
B. Employees shall report all allegations of sexual harassment, discrimination, immediately. Such reports will
initiate a confidential internal investigation.
C. If the situation warrants, the Chief of Police shall report such allegations to the Town Manager without
delay.
1. The Chief of Police shall immediately take action to limit the concerned employees from any further
work contact.
2. The Chief of Police will conduct an immediate investigation into the allegation in accordance with
Department policy.
3. If the allegation involves the Chief of Police or similar policy making senior official, the complainant
shall present the allegation without delay to the Town Manager.
4. The complainant shall normally present an allegation accordance with Department policy.
309.PER 1
D. Examples of sexual harassment
The following are examples of sexual harassment, but not limited to, the following:
1. Sexual comments of a provocative or suggestive nature;
2. Jokes or innuendos intended for and directed to another employee;
3. Leaving sexually explicit books, magazines, photographs where employees will find them;
4. Unwelcome demeaning comments, ridicule, offensive language, propositions or other similar actions;
5. Unwanted, unwarranted, unsolicited off-duty telephone calls and contact;
6. Signed or anonymous unwelcome notes or drawings placed on or in desks, or bulletin boards in or

around the officers’ room or other common areas;
7. Deliberately singling out women in front of men co-workers (or vice versa) and subjecting them to
demeaning or derogatory remarks;
8. Creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive working environment;
9. Making acceptance of unwelcome sexual conduct or advances or requests for sexual favors of any
nature a condition of continued employment.
10. Transferring, demoting, or dismissing employees who refuse sexual advances.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
309.PER 2
April 2, 2002
SUBJECT: PERSONAL APPEARANCE, GROOMING, AND PHYSICAL FITENSS
I. POLICY:
It shall be the policy of the South Boston Police Department that the personal appearance of each employee
projects a professional image. The department expects all sworn employees to maintain a level of physical
fitness that insures satisfactory job performance and decreases the chance of injury or illness. Physical fitness
should be a personal goal of every employee of the department
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this general order is to establish employee guidelines regarding physical fitness and personal
grooming. Encouraging satisfactory levels of physical agility and endurance may reduce the incidence of injury
on the job and improve the health and quality of life of each member of the department.
III. PROCEDURES:
A. Grooming Standards
1. Uniform Officers
a. Male officers will keep hair reasonably close cut and neatly groomed.
1.) The hairstyle will be of neat and conservative style.
2.) When combed, the hair will present an even appearance and will not:
a.) reach the eyebrows;
b.) protrude over any portion of the ears;
c.) extend over the shirt collar in the back while in normal posture;
b. In no case will hairstyle interfere with the wearing of the issued head gear.
c. Facial hair standards will be as follows:
1.) Sideburns will not extend beyond the base of the ear
a.) The sideburns will be neatly trimmed, and will be no wider at any point that their natural
width at the top.
b.) The base of each sideburn will present a clean shaven horizontal line.
2.) Mustaches will be neatly trimmed and will not extend beyond the corner of the mouth.
310.PER 1
3.) Beards or goatees will not be permitted for uniform patrol except by medical certification.
f. The wearing of hairpieces while on duty will be permitted subject to the following criteria:
1.) Hairpieces will be permitted only for the purposes of covering natural baldness or
disfiguration.
2.) Hairpieces must conform to all hair standards.
g. Female uniform officers with long hair shall maintain their hair in a manner that is neat, well
groomed, and presents a professional image. Long hair shall be worn up and secured as to not
pose a safety hazard to the officer and in a manner so that it does not extend passed the uniform
collar.
h. Tattoos are permitted but if an officer gets or has a tattoo in an area that is visible while on duty in
uniform, i.e. arms or neck, the Chief of Police may require the officer to wear a long sleeve
uniform shirt year round to cover the tattoo and maintain a professional appearance
2. Investigators Attire and Personal Appearance
a. All standards listed above for the uniformed officers apply to investigators with the following
exceptions:
1.) Investigators are allowed to have goatees as long as they are kept trimmed and have a neat
appearance.
2.) Investigators’ jobs may at times require undercover work so exceptions may be granted by a
supervisor for any standard in this general order on a case by case basis.
b. An investigators will report for duty in casual business attire. All clothes worn shall be
conservative and present a professional image and should not be a source of negative comment
from the community.
c. An investigator shall maintain a neat and clean appearance. All clothing shall be kept laundered
and pressed, and shoes shall be polished at all times.
d. An investigator shall carry a department approved firearm, handcuffs, badge, and id card while
conducting official police business.
3. Civilian Personnel Attire and Personal Appearance
a. The Chief of Police or his designee will determine appropriate attire for the civilian personnel under
his command.
b. Civilian personnel will appear neat and well groomed while on duty.
B. Physical Fitness
1. Each officer is responsible for his or her own level of conditioning ensuring that he or she is always fit
for duty.
2. As part of the Department hiring/selection process, all applicants who are offered employment are
provided a medical examination and physical agility test. This establishes a base line for future health
examinations and fitness levels.
3. During basic recruit training at the local regional criminal justice training academy newly hired recruit
310.PER 2
officers participate in a physical training program. Recruit officers are encouraged to continue their
level of fitness throughout their professional law enforcement career.
4. An employee who maintains a state of poor health, considering the employees age, or appears unfit to
perform his or her job may be counseled by their immediate supervisor, in an attempt to correct the
situation. If the situation is not corrected the Chief of Police may order that the employee take a
physical examination to help determine the physical state of the employee. The examination will be
provided at no cost to the employee.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
310.PER 3
311. PER Amends/Supersedes

March 4, 2002
SUBJECT: COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
I. POLICY:
The department bears an obligation to the public and to its own personnel to increase awareness about risks,
modes of transmission, and procedures for handling communicable diseases such as hepatitis B, tuberculosis,
HIV (Human Immunodeficiency Virus) and AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome), and AIDS-related
infections. Although, of the diseases mentioned, AIDS has received the most notoriety, all present hazards to
law enforcement officers: hepatitis B and tuberculosis are more infectious than HIV, for example.
All personnel must understand that the focus of the news media on AIDS has dealt with so-called “high risk”
groups, i.e., homosexual men, intravenous drug users, and prostitutes. As a matter of practice, the department
does not recognize high-risk groups since health and legal experts maintain that the actual risk of contagion
comes from high-risk behavior. Anyone including members of the department—might conceivably behave in a
way that promotes risk of infection. Further, the long incubation periods associated with diseases such as HIV
(years) render testing difficult. Accordingly, officers shall act responsibly in minimizing the risk of infection
when dealing with any person, male or female, child or adult, or with any body fluids. A few simple
precautions, however, will avoid the risk of infection almost entirely. The appendix to this general order details
common AIDS concerns of personnel plus relevant medical information.
Officers cannot refuse to work with or handle anyone—victim, complainant, or suspect because of the officer’s
fears of possible infection. Personnel shall not refuse to arrest or otherwise refuse to handle any person in a
legitimate law-enforcement context, provided that the appropriate equipment is available. The measures
provided herein will assist officers in carrying out their duties while simultaneously minimizing health risks.
The most likely danger from contact with HIV or other communicable diseases comes from handling blood or
other body fluids as evidence or at the scene of injury or death. The department does expect officers to exercise
caution when handling evidence, to which end the following procedures are set forth. One point bears repeating,
however: officers have no way to determine with certainty if a citizen is infected with a communicable disease.
The department shall provide employees, continuously, with information and education on prevention of
communicable diseases, as well as safety equipment and procedures to minimize their risks of exposure. The
department had instituted post-exposure reporting, evaluation, and treatment for all members exposed to
communicable diseases.
Finally, the department advises all personnel that they shall not receive discriminatory treatment nor bear any
stigma if they contract a communicable disease which becomes known to the department. Legally, a
communicable disease is a handicap under federal law so discrimination against infected persons is illegal.
The department expects officers to become educators in their law-enforcement work. Officers can advise
children, drug users, or prostitutes of the risks of infection and can further distribute educational literature.
Additionally, officers may refer citizens to health agencies such as the local health department. Department
personnel, then, may set an example in demonstrating rationality and confidence in dealing with communicable
311.PER 1
diseases.
II. PURPOSE:
The purpose of this order is to establish guidelines and procedures to be followed when a member of the
Department is exposed to a communicable disease with a risk of major illness or death, and for handling of
evidence or property that may be contaminated.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Communicable disease
An infectious disease capable of being passed to another by contact with an infected person or his/her body
fluids or on an object.
B. HIV (Human Immunodeficiency Virus)
The virus that causes AIDS, HIV infects and destroys certain white blood cells, undermining the body’s
ability to combat infection. (Also named HTLV-III or LAV). Technically speaking, this general order aims
to reduce the chance of HIV transmission, the virus that causes AIDS. HIV is transmitted through very
specific body fluids, including blood, semen, vaginal fluids, and breast milk.
C. ARC (AIDS-Related Complex)
A condition caused by the aids virus (HIV) and has a specific set of symptoms. Such symptoms include
persistent fever, weight loss, skin rashes, diarrhea, and swollen lymph nodes. Although these symptoms
may be debilitating, they are generally not life threatening.
D. AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome)
A bloodborne and sexually transmitted disease that attacks and destroys the body’s immune system. It
makes people susceptible to infections, malignancies, and diseases not generally life threatening to persons
with normal immune systems. AIDS also causes disorders of the central nervous system. There is no
vaccine against the virus. Personnel are advised that AIDS is not transmitted through any of the following
(according to the Centers for Disease Control):
1. Sneezing, coughing, spitting.
2. Handshakes, hugging, or other nonsexual physical contact.
3. Toilet seats, bathtubs, or showers.
4. Various utensils, dishes, or linens used by persons with AIDS.
5. Articles worn or handled by persons with AIDS, i.e., doorknobs, pens, or cups.
6. Being near someone with AIDS frequently or over a long period of time.
7. Riding the same transportation.
311.PER 2
8. Eating in the same public place with an AIDS-infected person.
9. Working in the same office.
E. Seropositivity
Refers to a person having antibodies to HIV, meaning that infection has occurred at some time in the past. A
seropositive person can be infected with HIV for years without ever developing symptoms of AIDS.
Infected persons can transmit the virus even though they may not have symptoms of AIDS.
F. Hepatitis B (HBV)
A viral infection that can result in jaundice, cirrhosis, and, sometimes, cancer of the liver. The virus in
transmitted through exposure to blood, semen, vaginal secretions, breast milk, and possibly saliva. Two
vaccines are currently available against hepatitis B [Recombivax (synthetic) or Heptivax (serum derived)].
G. Tuberculosis
A bacterial disease that can be transmitted through saliva, urine, blood, and other body fluids by persons
infected with it. Tuberculosis is spread primarily by inhaling airborne droplets from infected coughing
people. It can enter the body through infected mucous on the skin (as from coughing or sneezing) or from
droplets that are inhaled. It is an airborne, opportunistic disease and it primarily causes lung infection.
Although no vaccine against tuberculosis exists, medications are available to treat the disease.
H. Exposure control program
A written agency plan, available to all employees, which details the steps taken to eliminate or minimize
exposure incidents, and identifies at-risk tasks and assignments.
I. Personal protective equipment (PPE)
Specialized clothing or equipment worn or used by employees for protection against infection. PPE does
not include uniforms or work clothes without special protective qualities.
J. Universal precautions
Controls or procedures advised by the Center for Disease Control (CDC) that emphasize precautions based
on the assumption that blood and body fluids are potentially infectious.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. The chief of police shall develop a written exposure control plan which provides the overall strategy for
limiting exposure to HIV and HBV viruses, and for handling exposure incidents. The plan is available to all
employees and may be reviewed upon request to their immediate supervisor.
1. The plan adheres to the principles and procedures for the prevention of HIV and HBV exposure as
detailed in the universal precautions prescribed by the CDC plus other federal agencies.
2. All employees and supervisors particularly, are responsible for the maintenance of a clean, sanitary
311.PER 3
workplace, and shall inspect workplaces daily to ensure that these conditions are met.
a. All supervisors shall develop and implement written schedules for cleaning and
decontamination of equipment and workplaces.
B. The chief of police shall ensure that adequate supplies are available for communicable disease control
within the department. Supervisors are responsible for maintaining continuously an adequate supply of
disease control supplies for all affected personnel within their purview. Further, supervisors must ensure
that:
1. Personal protective equipment (PPE) can be found in sufficient quantities at advertised locations.
2. Hypoallergenic gloves and other materials are available for employees allergic to standard-issue gear.
3. Supplies are routinely inspected, replaced, cleaned.
4. First Aid supplies and disinfectants are available always.
C. The chief of police through his or her subordinate supervisors, shall ensure that the department vehicles
will each contain the following PPE supplies at all times:
3 pairs of disposable latex gloves

1 disposable face mask
6 absorbent disposable towels
3 disposable plastic bags with contaminated material seals
1 bottle of alcohol-based cleanser
1 pair of wrap-around safety goggles
1 pair disposable shoe coverings
2 puncture-resistant, leakproof containers for
needles and other sharp objects
D. Officers using supplies in their vehicles shall replace them or arrange to have them replaced as soon as
possible. Officers shall maintain disposable gloves in their personal possession at all times.
E. The Chief of Police or his designee shall cause to be maintained at the department office the following:
3 pair coveralls (different sizes)

supply of disposable latex gloves
orange/red plastic biohazard bags and tape, or
plastic bags and sealing ties
liquid household bleach
disposable towels/towelettes
F. Personnel shall use protective equipment under all appropriate circumstances unless the officer can justify
otherwise.
1. Officers who, for whatever reason, do not use protective gear when appropriate shall document the
incident as soon as practicable for department review.
G. All personnel whose skin comes into contact with body fluids of another shall begin disinfection
procedures immediately: these procedures range from simple soap-and-water washing to the use of
alcohol or antiseptic towelettes. All open cuts and abrasions shall be covered with waterproof bandages
before personnel report for duty.
311.PER 4
V. GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
A. General
Whenever possible, officers shall wear disposable latex gloves when doing any of the following:
1. Handling persons or items with any blood or body fluid products (hypodermic needles, syringes, or
surfaces soiled with blood or body fluids, gun or knife wounds).
2. Packaging and handling such items as evidence.
3. Cleaning up blood or other secretions which appear on floors, seats, equipment, handcuffs, shoes,
clothing, pens, pencils, etc.
B. Specialized devices
1. Masks shall be worn whenever splashes, spray, spatter, or droplets of potentially infectious fluids
endanger contamination through the eyes, nose, or mouth. Masks may be worn with other protective
devices such as goggles.
2. Gowns, jackets, coats, aprons shall be worn as determined by the degree of exposure anticipated.
C. Handling people
1. Wash hands thoroughly for thirty seconds with warm water and soap after removing gloves (when
handling evidence) or after contact with the subject (if bleeding or vomiting). If water is unavailable,
use pre-moistened towelettes found in the communicable disease control kit to decontaminate skin.
2. Latex gloves shall be worn when searching persons or dealing in environments, such as accident
scenes, where sharp objects and bodily fluids may reasonably be encountered. Search techniques
shall be used that require suspects to empty their own pockets or purses and remove sharp objects
from their persons. Remember: Never put your hands where your eyes cannot see.
3. When transporting prisoners:
a. Do not put fingers in or near any person’s mouth
b. Transport persons with body fluids on their persons in separate vehicles from other persons.
A person who is bleeding or producing a fluid may have to wear a protective covering.
c. Notify other support personnel or law-enforcement officers during a transfer of custody that
the suspect has fluids on his or her person, or that the suspect has stated that he or she has a
communicable disease. Booking forms should so state.
D. Handling objects
1. Objects contaminated with body fluids shall be completely dried, double bagged, and marked to
identify possible disease contamination.
2. Contaminated items to be disposed of shall be autoclaved.
311.PER 5
a. To autoclave, items must be treated in special (biohazard) bags at a high temperature.
Local laboratories or hospitals can assist.
b. Before burning, the bags must be closed with autoclave tape, which turns purple when the
microbes are dead.
3. Officers shall use extra care when handling any sharp objects. If officers find syringes, they shall
not bend, recap, or otherwise manipulate the needle in any way, but shall place them in puncture-
resistant containers provided by the department.
E. Handling fluids
1. Clean up blood spills or other body fluids with regular household bleach diluted 1 part bleach to 10
parts water (or use undiluted bleach, if easier). Bleach dilutions should be prepared at least every 24
hours to retain effectiveness.
a. Wear latex gloves during this procedure.
b. A soiled uniform (by blood or by body fluids) should be changed as soon as possible. Wash in hot
water and detergent or dispose of after autoclaving or dispose of by burning.
2. Department vehicles within which body fluids are spilled require immediate disinfection procedures.
Employees who have the vehicles assigned to them shall notify their supervisor of the spill and arrange
for a thorough cleaning as soon as possible. Affected vehicles should bear an “Infectious Disease
Contamination” sign upon arrival at a service center and while awaiting disinfection.
a. All police vehicles will be cleaned with disinfectant as part of a routine, scheduled washing and
maintenance check.
F. Precautions when bitten
The danger of infection through bites is low. The victim cannot be infected with HIV through the blood of
the biting person unless that person has blood in his or her mouth which comes into contact with the
victim’s blood. HIV cannot be transmitted through saliva. With HBV, however, transmission takes place
through infected blood or blood derived body fluids. Infection takes place by exposure of the eyes, mouth,
or mucous membranes to the virus. Precautionary procedures to minimize the risk of infection include:
1. Encouraging the wound to bleed by applying pressure and gently “milking” the wound.
2. Washing the area thoroughly with soap and hot running water.
3. Seeking medical attention at the nearest hospital (if the skin is broken).
4. Advising your supervisor, make a report, or follow any other policy for reporting injuries, including the
filing of appropriate Worker’s Compensation forms.
G. Precautions when punctured by needles or knives
If an officer is cut or punctured by a needle or a knife or other instrument while searching a suspect or
handling contaminated evidence, follow these general guidelines:
311.PER 6
1. Allow the wound to bleed (unless severe bleeding occurs) until all flow ceases. Then cleanse the
wound with alcohol-based cleanser (or pre-moistened towelettes) and then with soap and water. Do not
rely exclusively on towelettes: wash wounds thoroughly with soap and water.
2. Seek medical attention as soon as possible after the injury. A physician will then decide the proper
treatment.
3. Advise your supervisor, make a report, or follow any other policy for reporting injuries, including the
filing of appropriate Worker’s Compensation forms.
H. Precautions at major crime scenes
At the crime scene, officers and crime scene technicians confront unusual hazards, especially when the
crime scene involves violent behavior such as homicides where large amounts of blood have been shed.
1. No person at any crime scene shall eat, drink, smoke, or apply make-up.
2. The best protection is to wear disposable latex gloves. Any person with a cut, abrasion, or any other
break in the skin on the hands should never handle blood or other body fluids without protection.
Officers shall carry latex gloves on their persons at all times.
3. Latex gloves should be changed when they become torn or heavily soiled or if an officer leaves the
crime scene (even temporarily).
4. If cotton gloves are worn when working with items having potential latent fingerprint value, wear
cotton gloves over latex gloves.
5. Hands should be washed after gloves are removed, even if the gloves appear to be intact. Officers shall
take care to avoid contact between skin and soiled gloves.
6. Always keep a plastic bag in the communicable disease control kit to be used only to collect
contaminated items (gloves, masks, etc.) until they can be disposed of properly. Clearly mark the bag
“Contaminated Material.”
7. Shoes and boots can become contaminated with blood. Wash with soap and water when leaving the
crime scene, or use protective disposable shoe coverings.
8. Wrap-around eye safety goggles and face masks should be worn when the possibility exists that dried
or liquid particles of body fluids may strike the face. Particles of dried blood, when scraped, fly in
many directions, so wear goggles and masks when removing the stain for laboratory analysis.
9. While processing the crime scene, be constantly on the alert for sharp objects, such as hypodermic
needles, razors, knives, broken glass, nails, etc. Use of mirrors may be appropriate while looking under
car seats, beds, etc.
10. Use tape—never metal staples—when packaging evidence.
11. If practicable, use only disposable items at a crime scene where blood or other body fluids are present.
Even those items (gloves, masks, shoe coverings, pens, pencils, etc.) must be decontaminated before
disposal. If autoclaving is not possible contaminated items must be covered with a bleach solution (one
part bleach to ten parts water, or undiluted bleach).
12. Before releasing the crime scene, advise the owner of the potential infection risk and suggest that the
311.PER 7
owner contact the local health department for advice.
13. Warning labels must be placed on all plastic evidence bags to go to the crime laboratory.
VI. VACCINATIONS
A. The department affords all employees who have occupational exposure to hepatitis B the opportunity
to take the HBV vaccination series at no cost within 10 working days of assignment to an
occupationally exposed duty. The vaccination shall be provided only after the employee has received
departmental training in communicable diseases, is medically fit for the vaccinations, and has not
previously received them.
VII. OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE TO COMMUNICABLE DISEASES
A. Notification
1. As soon as practicable, all employees shall document possible exposure to infectious fluids or
materials. In any case, employees shall immediately notify their supervisor of possible exposure.
Virginia Code § 32.1-45.2 requires public safety employees to immediately notify their agencies of
any “possible exposure prone incident.”
2. Examples of such exposure include:
a. Direct contact with body fluids on chapped or open areas (cuts, scratches) on the skin or
on mucous membranes (i.e., eyes, mouth).
b. Direct mouth-to-mouth resuscitation (CPR) without use of a one-way valve.
c. Receiving a cut or puncture wound as a result of searching or arresting a suspect or

handling contaminated evidence.
B. Testing
If a member of the department is exposed to the body fluids of a person who has or is suspected to
have a communicable disease, the member must be evaluated for evidence of infection by a
physician. By law the person may be compelled to provide a sample of their blood for testing for any
infectious diseases. If the person is to provide a sample of blood, officers shall transport the suspect
to the local hospital to have the blood draw and testing completed.
1. Personnel should understand the difficulty of transmitting HIV and Hepatitis B. If infection
control measures have been followed, the risk is very low.
C. Testing for presence of infection shall be done if indicated by a medical assessment (after an incident
involving the possible transfer of blood or other body fluids). The following information details testing
methods and their reliability.
1. AIDS/ARC/HIV
a. Blood tests can detect HIV antibodies (produced by the body’s immune system).
b. The two common tests for HIV antibodies are the ELISA (Enzyme-Linked
Immunosorbent Assay) and the Western Blot. Since the ELISA is less expensive and
easier to perform, it is usually used as a first screen for HIV. If the ELISA identifies
the person as seropositve, a second ELISA is performed. If the second test is also
311.PER 8
positive, a Western Blot is usually performed to confirm the results.
c. Since HIV antibodies may not develop for some months after a person has been
infected, an initial negative result may not mean freedom from infection. Typically,
three to six months elapse following an infection for a positive reaction to occur.
High false positive rates also occur with the use of the ELISA test.
d. One must be tested, then, immediately following the incident (for a baseline) and
then six and twelve months later.
e. The department shall ensure that the employee receives qualified counseling during
the testing period.
f. The Virginia State Public Health Department provides free confidential or

anonymous testing (both ELISA and Western Blot) in every health district. The
results are given only to the person tested. State law, under §§ 32.1-36.1, provides
confidentiality and prescribes a penalty.
2. Hepatitis B
A blood test can confirm the presence of hepatitis B virus six to eight weeks after exposure.
Note that different tests exist for hepatitis B depending on the reason for testing. See Section
VI above.
3. Tuberculosis
This disease is detected first by a skin test, then confirmed by an x-ray. The department
physician can order this test for the department employee. (Some local health departments
may do the test.)
D. Confidentiality
Confidentiality of information concerning test results in paramount. The victim has a right to privacy
in employer-maintained information about his/her health. No need exists for a supervisor routinely to
know that a person tests positive (for HIV or hepatitis B). The department views a breach of
confidentiality as a serious disciplinary problem which may result in suspension or termination of
employment.
1. Under most circumstances, medical authorities will retain confidential records unless the
employee tested requests it or state law requires it.
E. Positive test results
1. Any person who tests positive for HIV or hepatitis B shall not be summarily removed from
duty. The department shall make no restrictions simply because of diagnosis. These diseases
are not spread by casual contact (as between coworkers in the department). The department
shall alter an employee’s assignment only when he or she can no longer perform the required
duties.
a. The department shall ensure continued testing, if necessary, of members for evidence
of infection, and shall provide psychological counseling if necessary.
311.PER 9
2. Any person who test positive for tuberculosis may be restricted from working for a period of
time. The medical evaluation will determine the stage and type of disease the person has
contracted and if he/she is contagious. A tuberculosis-infected person requires medication and
shall not return to work until the doctor says he/she is non-communicable. (Tuberculosis is
easily transmitted and its incidence in Virginia has recently shown a slight increase. After
exposure to tuberculosis, a person may, after a medical evaluation, take medicine to help
prevent the disease.)
F. Job performance
1. Communicable disease: Infected employees shall continue working as long as they maintain
acceptable performance and do not pose a safety of health threat to themselves or others in the
department.
a. Where feasible, an employee who has medical complications from a communicable

disease will either be reassigned to another job or have his/her job restructured so
that he/she can remain employed. As necessary, medical documentation shall support
requests for job restructure or reassignment. All personnel shall treat such employees
in the same manner as employees who suffer from other serious diseases or
handicaps: that is, fairly, courteously, and with dignity.
b. The department may require an employee to be examined by the department

physician to determine if he/she is able to perform his/her duties without hazard to
him/herself or others.
G. Federal law
Employees infected by communicable diseases are generally protected by the Federal Rehabilitation
Act of 1973. (A medical standard that is not job-related constitutes a prohibited personnel practice.)
H. Discrimination
The department expects all personnel to continue working relationships with any fellow employee
recognized as having AIDS/AC, hepatitis B, or non-communicable tuberculosis. The department will
consider appropriate corrective or disciplinary action against an employee who threatens or refuses to
work with an infected employee or who disrupts the department’s mission.
I. Records
The agency maintains a record for each employee detailing incidents of occupational exposure,
including information on vaccination status; the results of examinations and tests; health care
professionals’ written opinion; and any other relevant information. These records are retained by the
chief in secure storage for the duration of tenure of employment plus 30 years, and shall not be
disclosed or reported without the express written consent of the employee.
VIII. TRAINING
A. Education on communicable diseases shall be continuous in the department. The training officer shall
ensure that all members of the agency with occupational exposure shall receive a course of instruction
on bloodborne diseases before their initial assignment. Further, each affected employee will receive
annual refresher training plus any additional training appropriate to the particular employee
assignment.
311.PER 10
B. The training officer shall retain complete records on instruction of employees to include dates of
training; content of sessions; names and qualifications of trainers; names and job titles of attending
employees.
C. The training officer is responsible for dissemination of updated information to all personnel and for
appropriate educational programs about communicable diseases. These programs shall include at a
minimum:
1. Written information concerning AIDS/ARC/HIV, hepatitis B, and tuberculosis in the form of

brochures, bulletins, memorandums, or fact sheets.
2. Group and/or individual presentation and discussions provided by adequately trained

personnel or experts from outside the department.
3. Local resources for further medical and law-enforcement information.
4. For more information, personnel may at any time contact:
a. National Hotline for AIDS, 1-800-342-AIDS.
b. Virginia AIDS Info Hotline, 1-800-533-4148
c. AIDS Update (Dept. of Health and Human Services),

1-202-245-6867.
d. AIDS Clearinghouse (America Responds to AIDS)

1-800-342-7514
e. National Institute of Justice AIDS Clearinghouse, 1-301-251-5500.
f. State and local public health department.
g. Local American Red Cross
h. Forensic laboratories.
i. Vendors
EXAMPLES OF VENDORS
--Gall’s (vendor for Communicable Disease Control Kit)
Gall’s, Incorporated
333 Murray Drive
Post Office Box 55268
Lexington, KY 40555-5268
1-800-524-4255
AUTHORIZATION:
311.PER 11
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
311.PER 12
APPENDIX TO GO 2-34
AIDS-RELATED CONCERNS OF PERSONNEL
ISSUE INFORMATION
Human Bites A person who bites is typically the one who gets the blood; viral
transmission through saliva is highly unlikely. If bitten by anyone,
gently milk wound to make it bleed, wash the area, and seek
medical attention.
Spitting Viral transmission through saliva is highly unlikely.
Urine/feces Virus isolated in only very low concentrations in urine; not at all
in feces; no cases of AIDS or HIV infection associated with either
urine or feces.
CPR/first aid To eliminate he already minimal risk associated with CPR, use
masks/airways; avoid blood-to-blood contact by keeping open
wounds covered and wearing gloves when in contact with
bleeding wounds.
Body removal Observe crime scene rule: do not touch anything; those who must
come into contact with blood or other body fluids should wear
gloves.
Casual contact No cases of AIDS or HIV infection attributed to casual contact.
Any contact with blood or Wash thoroughly with soap and water; clean up spills with 1: 10
bodily fluids solution of household bleach.
*Source: Adapted from: AIDS and the Law Enforcement Officer: Concerns and Policy Responses by Theodore
M. Hammett, Ph.C., National Institute of Justice, U.S. Department of Justice, June, 1987
311.PER 13
January 1, 2004
SUBJECT: OFF-DUTY EMPLOYMENT
I. POLICY:
It is the responsibility of the Chief of Police to ensure the continued efficiency and effectiveness of the
Department will simultaneously reducing or eliminating conflicts of interest. To this end, the Chief of Police
shall manage according to whatever reasonable controls he or she deems necessary to restrict or regulate the
conduct of employees. It is the policy the Department, therefore, to prohibit off-duty employment when it may
impair efficiency or conflict with employees’ duties and responsibilities.
II. PURPOSE:
To establish Department policy regulating off-duty employment.
III. DEFINITIONS:
A. Employment – Any work performed or services provided for compensation (a fee or otherwise), including
self-employment.
B. Law enforcement-related employment – Off-duty employment which may entail the use of law-
enforcement powers granted by the Commonwealth of Virginia or the Town of South Boston.
IV. PROCEDURE:
A. General
No employee shall work off-duty during their first year of employment with the Department. Employees
on medical or sick leave, temporary disability, or light duty due to injury are ineligible for off-duty
employment. An employee engaged in any off-duty employment may be call to duty in an emergency.
No employee shall work for another law enforcement agency in any capacity as part of off-duty
employment.
B. Secondary employment
Employment shall not constitute a conflict of interest. A conflict of interest, as determined by the Chief of
Police, is any activity inconsistent, incompatible, or in conflict with the duties, functions, or responsibilities
of employment.
C. Law enforcement-related off-duty employment
1. Law enforcement-related employment shall be done directly by the Police Department, no officer shall
work in any capacity for another law enforcement agency. Law enforcement-related employment shall
not exceed 16 hours per day, including on-duty time: e.g., a police officer working a 12 hour tour may
312.PER 1
work for four hours off-duty employment on the same day and an officer on a day off may work 16
hours. For the purpose of computing allowable work time, court appearances constitute on-duty time
as does sick leave.
2. Law enforcement-related employment is restricted to the town/county boundaries (unless previously

approved by the Chief of Police or their designee). Officers may perform law enforcement related
duties beyond town/county boundaries if working in conjunction with another jurisdiction’s regular
law enforcement agency and after having been duly sworn as a law enforcement officer in that
jurisdiction or after having receiving a direct request for assistance from a law enforcement agency in
that jurisdiction.
3. The minimum salary required for officers employed in a law enforcement-related capacity must be
approved by the Chief of Police.
4. Service as a recruiter and receiving compensation for procurement of law enforcement-related jobs for
other Department employees is prohibited.
5. No employee shall solicit any person or business for the purpose of gaining law enforcement-related
off-duty employment, and, while, on duty, shall not solicit any person or business for the purpose of
gaining secondary employment.
6. Except for public school security activities and other employment specifically authorized by the Chief
of Police, the following regulations apply:
a. The Department uniform shall not be worn while engaged in off-duty employment unless
authorized by the Chief of Police.
b. Town owned vehicles, radios, or other equipment shall not be used while traveling to and from or
engaging in off-duty employment, unless specifically authorized by the Chief of Police.
7. Officers, while engaged in law enforcement-related employment, shall be subject to the orders of the
on-duty law enforcement supervisor.
D. Administration
1. Employees must submit a written request, via “Request for Off-Duty Employment (Form 312.PER
(01))”, to the Chief of Police through the chain of command for an off-duty employment. Employees
shall not begin any off-duty work until approval has been granted. The request shall be filed in the
employee’s personnel file.
a. The approved request is subject to periodic review by the Chief of Police or their designee.
Officers shall communicate any changes in information contained on the form to the Chief of
Police as soon as possible.
b. The Chief of Police may revoke permission to work off duty if the officers fails to perform
Adequately on duty or receives disciplinary action. To be eligible for permission to work off duty,
officers must be in good standing with the Department. Continues permission to work off duty is
contingent upon remaining in good standing.
2. The Chief of Police shall disapprove any employment that demeans the status or dignity of the law
enforcement profession, or otherwise represents a conflict of interest. Examples of such employment
include:
312.PER 2
a. Retailers which sell pornographic materials or provide services of a sexual nature.
b. Retailers who sell, manufacture, or transport alcoholic beverages as the principal business.
c. Gambling establishments not exempted by law.
d. Any firm connected with the towing or storage of vehicles, bill collecting, bodyguards,
repossessors, private investigators, process servers, or taxi cab drivers.
e. Performance in Department uniform of any asks other than those of law enforcement.
f. Performance of any work for a business or labor group that is on strike.
g. Performance of personnel investigations for private firms, or any employment requiring the officer
to have access to police files, records, or information as a condition of employment.
h. Performance of any activity which supports case preparation for the defense in any criminal or
civil action.
3. Arrests made while engaged in off-duty law enforcement-related employment shall be limited to
felonies or criminal misdemeanors committed in the officer’s presence or a breach of the peace
jeopardizing public safety.
a. Employees shall understand that Department liability protections does not extend to willful acts
which cause injury or damage, or acts the officer knew or reasonably should have known
conflicted with Department policy or the law.
b. Off-duty arrests, when working for a private employer, shall not be made when the officer is
personally involved in the incident underlying the arrest.
c. Off-duty arrests shall not be made when the officer’s actions only further the interests of the
private employer.
E. Liability, indemnification, insurance
1. All employees who work any law enforcement-related employment shall do so through the
Department, meaning that officers will be working directly for the Department and receive pay as
overtime in their check. Officers are therefore covered by the Town as if they were on-duty. No
officer shall work any law enforcement-related employment without prior approval from the Chief of
Police or their designee. The most common types of law enforcement-related off-duty employment are
(but not limited to):
a. Security at public school events
b. Security at private events where requests have been made by the private business through the
administration
c. Security at apartment complexes within the Town limits where the Department is already agreed to
a contract at to the type of work and manner in which the business will reimburse the Town
d. Traffic control for various events
312.PER 3
2. The Department recognizes that an officer in law enforcement-related employment may undertake an
action connected with the employment that the courts may construe as a law enforcement duty, and
therefore an extension of the job. Officers are reminded that their off-duty performance must follow
the same standards required for on-duty performance.
AUTHORIZATION:
J. W. BINNER
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE
312.PER 4
312.PER 5
General Order Number 313.PER
Use of Social Media
Affective date: February 19, 2021

Amends/Supersedes: N/A
I. General Order
The South Boston Police Department respects the right to the freedom of expression of every
employee, as guaranteed by the First Amendment to the United States Constitution, and as
specifically protected by Code of Virginia § 2.2-2902.1. The Department will protect against the
misuse of seals, badges, emblems, and uniforms which are the property of the Department,
Town, and the Commonwealth. Measures will be taken to ensure a professional image is
displayed by all employees of the Department when interacting and communicating with all
persons. Violations of this general order may be handled in accordance with the Department’s
General Order 304.PER Employee Discipline.
II. Purpose
The purpose of this General Order is to provide police department staff with guidelines for the
use of Internet social media sites (i.e. weblogs, Facebook, LinkedIn, Snapchat, Twitter, etc.); as
well as guidelines for department employees when posting to other online media such as Internet
forums.
III. Definitions
Social Media - any form of online communication or publications that allow for multi-directional
interaction. Social media includes blogs, wikis, podcasts, social networks, photograph and video
hosting websites, crowdsourcing and new technologies as they evolve.
Online Social Networking - the use of dedicated websites and applications to interact with other
users, or to find people with similar interests to oneself.
IV. Procedure
A. This General Order applies to employees regardless of where the activity occurs and
includes postings made from home, on the employee’s own time, and on his/her own
Internet device.
B. This General Order supplements other General Orders that address employee conduct.
It provides guidance for employees in applying those standards to their online
activities.
C. Internet Postings and Content

1. When employees create their own blogs, comment on a blog, contribute to a
discussion forum or website, create a Facebook page or LinkedIn profile (or
similar site), or otherwise contribute to online discussions, they are impacting
their personal image and potentially affecting the Department. This is
particularly so if the employee identifies themselves as employed by the
Department.
2. Employees are free to speak on matters of public concern but shall also disclose
these matters through the appropriate chain of command. If a social media
posting by an employee is not of public concern or has not been disclosed
through the appropriate chain of command and is contrary to the Department’s
interest in maintaining the efficiency and effectiveness of the workplace, the
public reputation of the Department or its members, and/or the public
perception of the Town, a supervisor may require the employee to remove
content that violates this General Order and may recommend appropriate
disciplinary action if the employee refuses. The supervisor may also
recommend disciplinary action when the content is removed, depending upon
the nature of the offending content.
3. The following rules apply when publishing content online:
a) Employees shall not post representations of the Seal of the

Commonwealth or any Department badges or patches. See subsection
(h) for exceptions.
b) Employees shall not post confidential, sensitive, or copyrighted

information to which they have access due to employment with the
Department or Town, including data from a criminal or administrative
investigation (whether on-going, inactive, or closed) including
photographs, videos, audio recordings, photographs of suspects,
arrestees, victims, or witnesses.
c) Employees shall not boast or elaborate regarding on-duty activities, to

include use of force activity or pending prosecutions.
d) Comments insulting to groups on the basis of race, sex, color, national

origin, religion, sexual orientation, gender identity, age, political
affiliation, disability, veteran's status, or to the general public that tend
to undermine the public trust and confidence in the Department are
prohibited.
e) If an employee identifies themselves as a Department employee, the

employee must be sure to make it clear that he/she is expressing their
own views and not those of the Department or Town. Employees shall
not give the appearance they are speaking on behalf of the South
Boston Police Department.
f) Supervisors are cautioned against initiating a social networking

relationship with someone they supervise.
g) No Department employee is required to maintain a social networking

relationship on their personal social network accounts with any member
of the Department. Employees may without recourse deny or
discontinue any social networking relationship.
h) Employees are cautioned against posting photographs or other

depictions of themselves in uniform or displaying any clothing,
equipment, etc. issued by the Department which would reveal their
employment status as a police officer or Department employee.
Employees are prohibited from posting photographs or depictions of
other officers in uniform or displaying clothing, equipment, logos, etc.
issued by the Department which would reveal their employment status
as a police officer without their consent.
i) Employees are cautioned that content posted may be subpoenaed by

opposing parties in litigation, including litigation related to an
employee’s official duties and by criminal defendants in cases initiated
by the arrest of a suspect by a member of the Department and that
postings may be printed and re-distributed outside of the original
recipient group.
j) Employees should avoid establishing social media relationships with

members of the general public with whom they interact while
investigating criminal activity, such as victims of crime, witnesses, and
criminal suspects. Employees should be aware that the existence of
such relationships is a fact the Commonwealth may be obligated to
disclose to the defense in a criminal case and that they may be subject
to cross-examination about such relationships and any related online
communications.
D. Social Media Access While On Duty
1. Social Media sites such as Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and similar sites, shall
not be excessively posted to, visited or viewed while on-duty, even while using
personal equipment.
a) Employees are authorized to create, maintain, and post to such an

account for a business reason related to support the mission of the
Department as approved by the Chief.
2. The Chief may approve an exception to this general order in writing.

E. Issues of General or Public Concern
1. Employees may comment on issues of general or public concern (as opposed to

personal grievances), including local issues and criticism of local officials and
local policies, providing the comments do not meaningfully impair the
efficiency of the Department or are disruptive to the operations of the
Department.
2. The following guidelines are provided to assist in determining if a posting or

content is appropriate:
a) Employees have a statutory right to express opinions on matters of

public concern to state or local elected officials regardless of the impact
on the workplace per Code of Virginia § 2.2-2902.1
b) Examples of issues of public concern include the state and town budget,
spending priorities, any question scheduled for a public hearing, illegal
discrimination, official corruption, official impropriety, malfeasance on
the part of government officials, misuse of public funds, waste of
public funds, fraud, abuse or gross mismanagement, inefficiency in
managing and operating government agencies, violation of law, local
elections, or public safety.
c) Examples of national issues of general or public concern include

election campaigns, elected officials, legislation, national security,
budgets, foreign policy, or any topic of broad public interest or debate.
d) Examples of personal grievances include disciplinary action, work

schedule, morale, and complaints about supervisors or co-workers that
do not involve actual wrongdoing, illegal discrimination, corruption, or
waste. These comments may subject the officer to disciplinary action if
they constitute insubordination or if they otherwise violate General
Orders.
e) Employees should exercise caution to ensure that postings which they

make are factually accurate, and not to assert mere opinions as though
they were facts.
f) Although employees have the right to speak freely about matters of

public concern, they have an obligation to report up the chain of
command matters of concern directly affecting the Department.
Accusations of misconduct, malfeasance or criminal activity by any
person, when published outside of the chain of command, may create
the risk of legal action personally against the officer making such
accusations; and/or may lead to disciplinary action.
g) Employees should refrain from making postings or public comments

that insult, disparage, or embarrass any person or group of persons.
F. Official Department Use of Social Media
1. The Department may by the direction of the Chief establish an official social
media presence using a website or applications such as, but not limited to,
Facebook, Twitter, or YouTube.
2. Any social media communication or posting by the Department shall be issued

only by the Chief, other members of command staff, or approved designees.
3. While the Department does have control over utilizing officer photos/images
while on-duty and in performance of their duties, employees may request, in
writing, that their images be limited or not utilized if and when possible.
4. All information disseminated using the Department’s official social media

outlets should be accurate. Any errors discovered shall be immediately brought
to the attention of the Chief.
5. No sensitive or confidential information shall be disclosed on the Department’s

website or in any other social media.
AUTHORIZATION:
Bryan L. Young
________________________________
CHIEF OF POLICE

South Boston, VA Police General Orders

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

South Boston, VA Police General Orders

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SOUTH BOSTON POLICE DEPARTMENT

GENERAL ORDERS MANUAL

SBPD General Orders Table of Contents 1

SBPD General Orders Table of Contents 2

SBPD General Orders Table of Contents 3

SUBJECT: ORGANIZATION OF MANUAL

1. General Orders communicate a department-wide organizational structure, delegations of authority,

4. Violation of any given general order may result in administrative discipline.

6. General orders are indexed by number and general subject.

7. All general orders shall be:

b. Reviewed annually, on or before their review date;

f. Signed by the Chief of Police.

B. GENERAL ORDER COMPOSITION:

a. Each general order will begin with an agency policy statement.

b. Only the Chief of Police determines policy.

3. A procedure defines a method of performing an operation or a manner of proceeding on a course of

a. A rule is a specific prohibition or requirement governing the behavior of employees.

(1) Rules permit little if any deviation there from.

(2) Violations of rules normally result in administrative discipline.

(3) Only the Chief of Police devises rules.

(2) Only the Chief of Police devises regulations.

D. ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL:

1. Dissemination of the General Orders Manual:

2. Amendments/Changes to the Manual

4. Revisions and directives shall be disseminated as follows:

F. ANNUAL REVIEW OF GENERAL ORDERS:

SUBJECT: MISSION STATEMENT & GOALS AND OBJECTIVES

B. The values of the South Boston Police Department are as follows:

C. Police Department Overall Objectives

4. Recovery and Return of Property

D. Patrol Function Goals

1. Life and death emergencies;

2. Violent felonies in progress;

3. Violent misdemeanors in progress ;

4. Other felonies in progress;

5. Other misdemeanors in progress;

6. Non-criminal calls relating to injury, present danger or property damage;

7. Other felonies not in progress;

8. Other misdemeanors not in progress;

SUBJECT: AUTHORITY TO ESTABLISH DEPARTMENT

III. PROCEDURES: - GENERAL

A. Law enforcement authority to enforce laws:

B. Limitations on law enforcement authority:

These limitations include, but are not limited to:

3. Limitations on law enforcement authority by local courts:

a. The enforcement of certain parking ordinances.

b. The handling of juvenile offenders.

c. The issuance of summonses as opposed to arrests/incarceration.

d. Restrictions relating to animal control ordinances.

4. Limitations on police authority by Commonwealth's Attorney:

a. Prosecution of certain cases.

5. Limitations on police authority by the town manager and chief of police:

a. Town decal violations.

6. Changes in laws/interpretational limitations:

C. Constitutional Requirement: General

Compliance with constitutional requirements during criminal investigations:

a. All statements or confessions are voluntary and non-coercive.

D. The use of discretion by officers:

E. Limitations on intelligence activity:

B. Types of Search/Seizures of a Person

1. Stop and Frisk (Terry Stop)

1.) The amount of force used by police to detain the individual;

2.) The need for such force;

4.) The duration of the investigatory detention.